D

"I give the fe Books
[ for tlie f Blinding ff a College in this ColonyV

BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME
OF THB
John Elliott Fund

GNOSTIC HEEESIES

f:

^•** ••?*••'

By the same Author.

LETTEES, LECTUEES, AND EEVIEWS;
including the PHR0NTISTERI0N, or Oxford in the
Nineteenth Century. 8vo. 12s.
THE LIMITS OF EELIGIOUS THOUGHT
EXAMINED. Fifth Edition. Post 8vo. 8s. 6d.

THE

GNOSTIC HEEESIES

OF THE

EIRST AND SECOND CENTURIES

BT THB LATE

HENEY LONGUEVILLE MANSEL, D.D.
DEAN OF ST. PAUL'S
SOMETIME PROFESSOR OF ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY AT OXFORD

WITH A SKETCH OF HIS WOEK, LLFE, AND CHAEACTEE
BY THE EAEL OF CAENAEVON

EDITED
BY J. B. LIGHTFOOT, D.D.
CANON OF ST. PAUL'S

LONDON
JOHN MUEEAY, ALBEMAELE STEEET
1875
All rights reserved

LONDON : PRINTED BY
SPOTTISWOODK AND CO., NEW-STREET SQUAILE
AND PA11LIA3IENT STEEET

fi

Xri-zQ'L ¦Mil

INTEODUCTION.

At the request of some common friends, I have
endeavoured to put upon paper some few recollections
of the late Dean Mansel. I do not pretend to write
a memoir of his life ; my principal, and indeed my
only, object in this letter is to retrace the impres
sions which many years of close friendship and un
restrained intercourse have left on my mind ; and if,
indeed, I have occasionally diverged into the public
side of his character, it has been because I knew him
so well in every aspect and relation of life, that I have
found it difficult to confine myself to that with which
I feel I am and ought to be here mainly concerned.
My first acquaintance with Dean Mansel was
made twenty years ago at the University, when he
had everything to give, and I had everything to
receive. As I think of him, his likeness seems to
rise before me. In one of those picturesque and
old-world colleges, in rooms which, if I remember
rightly, on one side looked upon the collegiate quad
rangle with its sober and meditative architecture, and
on the other caught the play of light and shade cast

vi INTRODUCTION.
by trees almost as venerable on the garden grass — in
one of those rooms, whose walls were built up to the
ceiling with books, which, nevertheless, overflowed
on the floor, and were piled in masses of disorderly
order upon chairs and tables, might have been seen
sitting day after day the late Dean, then my private
tutor, and the most successful teacher of his time in
the University. Young men are no bad judges of the
capabilities of a teacher ; and those who sought the
highest honours of the University in the Class schools
thought themselves fortunate to secure instruction
such as he gave, transparently lucid, accurate, and
without stint, flowing on through the whole morning
continuously, making the most complicated questions
clear. But if, as chanced sometimes with me, they
returned later as guests in the winter evening to the
cheery and old-fashioned hospitality of the Common
Room, they might have seen the same man, the
centre of conversation, full of anecdote and humour
and wit, applying the resources of a prodigious
memory and keen intellect to the genial intercourse
of society. The life of old Oxford has nearly passed away.
New ideas are now accepted, old traditions almost
cease to have a part in the existence of the place, the
very studies have greatly changed, and — whether for
good or evil — except for the grey walls which seem
to upbraid the altered conditions of thought around
them, Oxford bids fair to represent modern Liberal
ism, rather than the Church and State doctrines of

INTRODUCTION. vii
the early part of the century. But of that earlier
creed, which was one characteristic of the University,
Dean Mansel was an eminent type. Looked up to
and trusted by his friends, he was viewed by his
opponents as worthy of their highest antagonism,
and whilst he reflected the qualities which the lovers
of an older system have delighted to honour, he
freely expressed opinions which modern reformers
select for their strongest condemnation. The lines
of that character were not traced in sand. They
were graven in the very nature of the man, part of
himself, and often influencing the mind of those with
whom he came in contact.
Such he was when I first knew him twenty years
ago — in the zenith of his teaching reputation, though
on the point of withdrawing himself from it to a
career even more worthy of his great abilities. It
was then that I formed an acquaintance which ripened
into deep and sincere friendship, which grew closer
and more valued as life went on, over which no
shadow of variation ever passed, and which was
abruptly snapped at the very time when it had become
most highly prized.
Dean Mansel's mind was one of the highest order.
Its greatness perhaps, as was truly said by Canon
Liddon, was not such as best commands immediate
popular recognition or sympathy, but it was not
on that account the less powerful. The intellect
was of such a kind that some may have failed to ap
preciate it, and to understand that they 'were close to
a mind — almost the only mind in England — to which

viii INTRODUCTION.
all the heights and all the depths of the most recent
speculation respecting the highest truth that can be
grasped by the human understanding were perfectly
familiar ; ' but now that death has intervened, a
truer estimate, as so often happens, is possible ; and
both by those who knew him personally, and by those
who can only know him in his writings, his very
great power will perhaps be more fully acknowledged.
I do not mean that his remarkable capacity was or
could be ignored. The honours that he had gained,
and the position that he had achieved, would alone
have rendered this impossible ; and at Oxford there
was no misapprehension, on this point, as to the man.
There the wide range of his mind and attainments
was correctly appreciated; but the outer world knew
him chiefly as a great metaphysical thinker, and
perhaps only a minority even of those few who
have an acquaintance with metaphysical studies rated
him at his true standard. Of his consummate gifts
in the province of metaphysics none, indeed, but
a professed metaphysician can with propriety speak ;
yet this an outsider and an old pupil may say
— that for clear thought, full knowledge, and an
unsurpassed gift of expression — qualities which give
especial value to this branch of study — he was
second to none. So singularly lucid was the
language in which difficult and involved subjects
were presented by him to the reader or hearer, that
none had the excuse that Bishop Butler modestly
suggests to those who may be perplexed with the
hardness of style which is to be found in his own

INTRODUCTION. ix
masterly works. If, indeed, from a different point of
view, Dean Mansel's writings were open to criticism,
it was that this extreme lucidity and force of
expression were such that in literary controversy he
sometimes dealt out to his opponents heavier blows
than he possibly intended. One of his antagonists,
worthy of all respect — and all the more that, like
Dean Mansel, he has passed away from the arena of
earthly controversy to a scene where those higher
questions of a future life on which he sometimes dwelt
are now all solved — has left a proof of his candour
and truthfulness in the admission that, although still
adhering to his own view of a particular subject under
dispute, he was overmatched by the Dean in the actual
dialectics of debate. It often occurred to me that his
possession of this singularly transparent style, when
dealing with the most abstract and complicated
questions, was in a great measure due to a perfect
familiarity with classical literature. He sought and
mastered it in early life, and, unlike many who are
inclined to disparage, for more modern studies, the
learning which for so many generations gave to the
world its greatest minds and its most humanising gifts,
he followed and delighted in it to the last. And,
like a grateful mistress, classical learning rewarded
his devotion with that style and skill of fence which
lent him so formidable a superiority in the literary
warfare of theological discussion.
• Nowhere was this more conspicuous than in the
now famous Bampton Lectures on the ' Limits of Re
ligious Thought,' which he preached in 1858. But

x INTRODUCTION.
for him those lectures had a yet greater importance.
They were a neAV point of departure, and, in a
somewhat wider sense, the beginning of his public
life. From the pulpit of St. Mary's he stepped at
once into the foremost rank of modern theological
writers ; and the classical tutor, the professor of
moral philosophy, however eminent locally, became
at once a power in, and even beyond, the walls of the
University. From this time he wielded an influence
which he never lost, and which, had he lived, he
would, I believe, have largely increased. But those
lectures were its origin. They passed through
several editions, they were repeatedly reviewed and
canvassed, and they became almost a text-book in
the schools of the University. They had as readers
alike those who could appreciate, and those who were
incapable of apprehending, the reasoning ; they be
came the subject both of an understanding and of
an unintelligent discussion ; until at last some one
was found who from impatience of argument, or from
love of paradox, or from jealousy of the logical limits
assigned to the liberty of human thought, declared
that he had discovered a latent heresy in a chain of
reasoning which to the great majority of men seemed
orthodox and plain enough. But the ingenuity of
a somewhat perverse reasoning was attractive, and so
others — often but little qualified to form a judgment
on such a subject — not only accepted on trust the
statement, but repeated it in every exaggerated form
of expression. It would be entirely beyond my meaning were I

INTR OD UCTION. xE
to enter in any way upon such a controversy. Yet-
I will venture to assert that, when these criticisms-
have passed away and are almost forgotten, the
lectures will remain amongst those monuments of
theological argument which it is the boast of the
University to have raised up for the guidance of her
children in defence of the truth. Certainly those who
knew the sincere piety and devoted orthodoxy of the
lecturer were aware how little there was in the
personal character of the man to lend Confirmation to
the charge.
I do not think that Dean Mansel would have
desired to be spared the free comments of those who
differed from him. His character was in this respect
so robust and fearless, and he had such well-founded
confidence in his mental powers of self-defence, that
he was the last man to shrink from the challenge of
a fair fight. But it is remarkable to observe how
before his death — through the gradual recognition of
his great powers — he had almost lived down the ad
verse, if not unfriendly, criticisms of an earlier period,
and to compare the public estimate of his fitness
for the Chair of Ecclesiastical History and for the
Deanery of St. Paul's. When, indeed, the honours and
responsibilities of this first office came to him, some
cavils and questions were suggested ; and, though no
one could venture to allege in such a man unfitness for
the office, it was hinted that political and undiscrimi-
nating favour had placed him in a sphere which was
less than congenial to his ordinary habits of study.
There was so far doubtless the semblance of fact in

xii INTR OD UCTION.
this allegation that Dean Mansel's literary work had
followed the line of abstract rather than historical
study. But his earlier if not his earliest predilections,
as those who knew him best were aware, inclined to
a theological rather than a philosophical course of
study. Philosophy was, I think, in his eyes the com
panion of theology; and, though the accidents of his
literary life gave a predominance to the philosophical
side, the theological inclination remained undisturbed.
Thus, if any there were who hoped or thought to trace
a flaw or an inequality of power in this to him com
paratively new field of labour, they were disappointed.
No really weak point in the harness could be detected ;
and I believe that it will be generally as it was then
locally admitted, that his vigour, knowledge, and
logical capacity were as eminent here as they were
elsewhere. It is perhaps an evidence of his singular
ability that whilst few men in such circumstances
as his have more frequently or fearlessly laid them
selves open to criticism, none came off more un
scathed by the attacks which those who descend
into the arena of polemical controversy must expect
to meet. But perhaps the secret of his almost un
varied success lay in this, that he never undertook
what he could not do, and thus never failed to do
what he undertook.
Dean Mansel did riot long hold the Chair of
Ecclesiastical History. He held it, indeed, barely
long enough to justify the choice made of him ; but
his lectures on the Gnostic heresies of the early
centuries, of which, fortunately, the MS. notes re-

INTRODUCTION. xiii
main and form the volume, in which it is desired
to include this short notice of him, furnish some
illustration of the power which he brought to bear
in the discharge of his task. The events of his
later life are crowded into a narrow compass. He
had been appointed by the Crown to the Professor
ship of Ecclesiastical History on the advice of Lord
Derby; he was transferred from it on the nomina
tion of Mr. Disraeli, Lord Derby's successor, to the
Deanery of St. Paul's. By this time his powers were
so fully recognised that criticism itself was silent, and
from all parties and individuals there was an acknow
ledgment that no better man could have been selected.
He addressed himself with all the vigour of his
character to the work which lay before him. The
commutation of the estates belonging to St. Paul's
Cathedral had to be carried through, and it was, I
believe, by the laborious and minute calculations into
which he entered that the bases of the present arrange
ments were laid. But whilst the best part of his day
was devoted to these public duties, all available leisure
was still given, as formerly, to the work of the student
and the scholar, in which his real nature was centered.
Time was not, indeed, allowed to enable him to give
to the world one of those great philosophical works in
defence of the principles of religious faith which his
friends expected, which perhaps he meditated, and to
which none could have done more justice than him
self ; but, during the short interval that remained, he
nearly performed the part which he had undertaken
in ' the Speaker's Bible,' and he completed within the

xiv INTRODUCTION.
last two chapters his commentary on the Gospel of St.
Matthew. But there were other public duties which his new
position entailed upon him ; and they were not alto
gether easy ; for in the Deanery of St. Paul's he
succeeded one who was as eminent in letters as he was
deservedly popular in general society. And his time
was very short. Little more than one year of life
remained ; yet in that year he made a probably lasting
mark, and he gave a great impulse to a work which
others must carry to completion.
Of all the many architectural restorations which
taste and devotional feeling have dictated to this gene
ration, none can be the subject of a heartier and more
undivided agreement than the revival of the Metro
politan Cathedral for its religious uses. The most
sensitive of critics will not easily discover an objection
to such a work ; the coldest cannot see unmoved the
crowd of men and women gathered on some Sunday
evening under that airy dome — the forest of up
turned faces directed to the preacher, who sways at
will an audience of thousands drawn together from
the busiest, wealthiest, most cultivated, and varied
capital of the world. But the spectacle, grand as it
is, is full of inequalities and contrasts. The great
Cathedral, indeed — rebuilt by Wren after the Fire of
London, and the masterpiece of his genius — bears
comparison with the stateliest churches of other
countries, but bears comparison only in its outlines
and general proportions. Without, it is a pile of
most noble parts and lofty conceptions : within, the

INTR OD UCTION. xv
bare walls, naked of the enrichment and ornament
which the architect designed, chill the rising enthu
siasm, while the fantastic cenotaphs and tasteless
monuments that are grouped along the aisles mock
the glorious span and the ascending lines of the dome.
Since Wren's death little or nothing had been done
towards the completion of his great work ; but the
desire had not been wanting. Dean Mansel's able
and cultivated predecessor had expressed himself ten
or twelve years previously in a letter, which has
been incorporated in his 'Annals of St. Paul's,' as
follows : —
' I should wish to see such decorations introduced
into St. Paul's as may give some splendour, while
they would not disturb the solemnity or the ex
quisitely harmonious simplicity of the edifice ; some
colour to enliven and gladden the eye, from foreign
or native marbles, the most permanent and safe modes
of embellishing a building exposed to the atmosphere
of London. I would see the dome, instead of brood
ing like a dead weight over the area below, expand
ing and elevating the soul towards heaven. I would
see the sullen white of the roof, the arches, the
cornices, the capitals, and the walls broken and re
lieved by gilding, as we find it by experience the
most lasting as well as the most appropriate decora
tion. I would see the adornment carried out in a
rich but harmonious (and as far as possible from
gaudy) style in unison with our simpler form of
worship;' These words, which deserve to be rescued from

xvi INTRODUCTION.
the oblivion of an appendix, and which are worthy
of the learned and accomplished man who wrote them,
seem equally to represent the feelings of Dean Mansel,
and recall to me not only the anxiety with which his
mind was set upon the task of embellishment and com
pletion, but almost the words in which he often spoke
to me of it. The great meeting which through his
means was convened at the Mansion House, and the
large contributions that at once flowed in, were an
earnest of the probable success of the undertaking,
which,, large as it undoubtedly was, had yet been
fully measured beforehand in his mind. But, unhap
pily, hostilities between France and Germany broke
out, money was needed for other purposes, and
the designs and arts of peace were swept away into
the bottomless pit of an all-absorbing war. Still, in
spite of the difficulties which a vast Continental
struggle created, the work advanced, though slowly.
A committee, consisting of men of very various
attainments, pursuits, and views, had been brought
together, and under the Dean's guidance and good
sense they had entered upon large improvements.
Differences were being smoothed, difficulties were
being overcome, when, in the midst of scheme and
purpose, in the full vigour of ripe intellect, in the
midst also of the domestic repose which a singularly
happy marriage had conferred upon him, death came
suddenly like a thief in the night, and in one moment
of time arrested for ever the active brain, and closed
the career of administrative power and promise.
Others have succeeded to him. They have taken

INTRODUCTION. xvii
up the work as it fell from his hands : it is to be
hoped that they may continue it in a manner and
spirit worthy of its commencement.
These were the public duties to which the last
few years of Dean Mansel's life were devoted with a
singleness and completeness of purpose that those
only who knew him can fairly estimate ; but there
was also a private side of his character which the
outside world perhaps hardly suspected.
His range both of reading and of observation was
very large, and it was perpetually widening under
the desire to know more. To him the words which
were once spoken of a great writer might perhaps
not unfairly be applied —
His learning such, no author old or new-
Escaped his reading that deserved his view,
And such his judgment, so exact his test
Of what was best in books, as what books best —
so readily did his mind embrace each new subject of
interest, foreign though it might be supposed to be
to his ordinary habits of life and study. As fast as
he came in contact with new information or ideas
he took them in and assimilated them in such a
manner as to have them at command. Every fact,
every illustration, was available for its purpose, every
argument was duly marshalled under its respective
principle. I cannot recall an intellect more solid,,
compact, and balanced, or where everything was, so
to speak, more in its place, and more susceptible of
immediate employment. This was doubtless due to.
a large combination of qualities; to abilities of a very

xviii INTR OD UCTION.
high order, to learning, accuracy, careful cultivation
and self-discipline, with no inconsiderable play of the
imaginative faculties, which lent a freshness to every
subject that he touched; and, lastly, to a prodigious
memory, which had the rare gift of being as discrimi
nating as it was powerful. -If he retained with abso
lute exactitude things great and small, and seemed
never to forget what he had read or heard, it was
that all those facts or statements were, in his opinion,
worth remembering. He seemed, moreover — which
is very rare with such memories — to be able to reject
the useless matter which forms so large a portion of
every subject, whilst he made absolutely his own
everything that he might hereafter need. Lord
Macaulay once told me that with a little effort he
could recall all the Latin themes and verses which he
had written since the age of twelve or thirteen, and
he implied, if he did not actually say, that there was
a burden as well as a delight in such a marvellous
power. Dean Mansel's mind, though singularly re
tentive, was not, as I have said, of this kind ; nor
was it one of those very rapid memories which are
instinctive and instantaneous in their operation : his
mind seemed rather to go through a sort of mechanical
process until the missing fragment for which he
sought was recovered, and — like the pattern of a mo
saic pavement — was recovered perfect in all its details.
But, though this complete precision of memory
was a counterpart of the exactness of his logical
faculty, it never dried up in him, as in so many
persons, the sense of humour or the springs of imagin-

INTRODUCTION. xix
ation. He had a genuine love of poetry, to which
he constantly recurred ; and, though he treated it
only as a pastime, he could on occasion show him
self a graceful writer of verse. In the ' Phrontiste-
rion,' a squib written at the time of the issue of the
University Commission — but one which few will hesi
tate to acknowledge as of the highest literary merit
which this generation has produced, and worthy to
be read by the side of Frere's Aristophanic transla
tions — there are lines not only remarkable for their
wit, but of very noble thought and expression. And
this sense of humour was a genuine characteristic
of the man. His conversation was full of it; his
private letters overflowed with it ; he had an inex
haustible reserve at command for every occasion, and,
it may be added, for every society. And yet it was
always lit up by the light of kindness ; it ceased
with an instinctive and immediate sympathy in the
presence of a friend's anxiety or sorrow ; and if ever
the edge of his wit was for the moment unduly
sharpened, as in controversy may have happened, it
arose rather from a strong sense of the wrong which
he thought he was opposing, than from any personal
antagonism to his opponent. He was, in fact, one of
the truest, steadiest, and most warm-hearted of friends,
never varying with change of circumstance or lapse
of time ; sometimes even with an amiable inconsis
tency, reconciling the mistakes or shortcomings of
those in whom he was warmly interested, to a stan
dard which his affection or regard had set up.
To this must be added — perhaps from this in a
a2

xx INTRODUCTION.
certain measure proceeded — that which constituted
one of the great charms of his character, a perfect
simplicity of feeling and taste. No amusement was
too simple, no occupation was unworthy of him, just
as he considered no person below the level of his mind.
He would come down to the dullest; and would either
learn whatever there was to be acquired, or would
pour out the abundant stores of his own knowledge,
without a thought that he was intellectually conde
scending to one less competent than himself. I
remember, during part of a summer that I spent with
him by the seaside, his characteristic determination
to understand the method of sailing a boat, and the
acuteness with which he resolved the practical
details, as he got them from an old fisherman, into
the more scientific principles by which they were
really governed. I remember, on another occasion,
the keen interest with which he learnt from a game
keeper some of the mysteries of his craft in the
rearing of birds; and though Dean Mansel would
never have become a good pilot or gamekeeper, yet
this keen interest in the occupations of others kept his
own mind singularly fresh and active. Nor was this
simplicity confined to the intellectual side of his
character. He was morally most just and single of
purpose. It would be to such a man a poor compli
ment to say that he was as entirely above the temp
tations of profit and personal interest, and as incapable
of an unworthy act, as any whom I have ever known.
I would rather say that he was one whose scrupulous
conscientiousness was hard to satisfy, and in whose

INTR OD U CTION. \ xxi
mind the conflicting pretensions of duty and interest
never held debate.
In politics he, like many others, lived too late for
his generation. He saw the decay and change of
ideas and institutions which were precious in his
eyes ; and, though he resisted it to the utmost of his
power, he watched with pain the revolution of
thought that has carried so far from her old moorings
the University which had been long his home,
and with which his earlier life, and fortunes, and
affections were all so closely intertwined. It can be
no offence to any one to say that, during the last few
years of his residence at Oxford, he was the pillar
and centre of the Conservative cause. By wisdom of
counsel, ability of speech, fertility of resource, he
vindicated it in the eyes of the outer world, and gave
it at once strength and ornament ; for of him, in
letters at least, it might be truly said that he touched
no subject that he. did not in some way embellish it.
His Liberal opponents knew it, and have left it on
record that, when he was transferred from the Chair
of Ecclesiastical History to St. Paul's, the ablest head
had been taken away from the Conservative party.
I have, indeed, heard some who knew Dean Mansel
very slightly, say or imply that in the affairs of public
life, where conciliation and the spirit of ' give and
take' are necessary, he was of a somewhat im
practicable disposition ; but such an opinion was
incorrect. His contemporaries were perhaps some
times misled by the force with which his opinions
were expressed. Nor was his intellect one naturally

xxii INTRODUCTION.
favourable to compromise. It was of too logical
and incisive a kind. But his strong common' sense
and his keen appreciation of the course of events
led him to apply the strength of his mind to any
reasonable compromise which had a chance of lasting ;
and thus, though practically averse from change, he
was, as I have often had reason to observe in my
intercourse with him, always moderate in counsel,
and anxious for expedients to reconcile his love of
the Church and University with those alterations of
public or Parliamentary opinion, to which he was not
blind, however he might seem to shrink from the
open recognition of them". His Conservatism, in
short, was not the Conservatism of prejudice, but of
individual conviction, founded on severe thought,
adorned by no common learning, and bound up
through the entire course of his hfe with the prin
ciples of his religious belief. In these days — when
fundamental principles are raised. and burning ques
tions are too often discussed with moderate know
ledge, excessive asperity, and sometimes hysterical
passion — that fine intellect, ripe learning, and even
judgment can be ill spared from the service of the
Church. And if I often have cause to lament the
loss of a private friend, there is still greater reason
to regret from the wide sphere of public usefulness,
and especially from the world of letters, the with
drawal of one whose qualities peculiarly fitted him
for the work of his time.
Carnarvon.
Septe?nier 25, 1874.

PREFACE.

The course of Lectures on the Gnostic Heresies
which is published in this volume was delivered
before the University of Oxford by Dr. Mansel, as
Regius Professor of Ecclesiastical History, in tbe
Lent Term 1868. He had been appointed to this
chair by the Crown in the preceding year, having
previously held the Waynflete Professorship of Moral
and Metaphysical Philosophy. Some regret was felt
at the time that one who had shown himself emi
nently competent as a teacher of philosophy should
be transferred to another branch of study, which did
not seem to be so peculiarly his own. These lec
tures are a complete answer to any such misgivings.
There were extensive provinces of Ecclesiastical
History — more especially of early Ecclesiastical
History — which could only be successfully occupied
by one who had a familiar acquaintance with ancient
and modern philosophy. To these provinces more
especially Professor Mansel directed his attention ;
and the present volume is one of the fruits of a very
brief but energetic professoriate.

xxiv PREFACE.
I do not think that I need offer any apology for
having recommended the publication of these lectures.
The student will be grateful for the guidance of
a singularly clear and well-trained thinker through
the mazes of this intricate subject. Since the dis
covery of the work of Hippolytus, which has added
largely to the materials for a history of Gnosticism,
English literature has furnished no connected ac
count of this important chapter in the progress of
religious thought. Indeed, with the single exception
of Lipsius' elaborate article in Ersch and Gruber,
which was written subsequently to this discovery,
all the French and German works (so far as I am
aware), which treat of the subject as a whole, labour
under the same defect. Nor again, will the subject
itself stand in need of any apology. The time is
gone by when the Gnostic theories could be regarded
as the mere ravings of religious lunatics. The pro
blems which taxed the powers of a Basilides and a
Valentinus are felt to be among the most profound
and most difficult which can occupy the human
mind. Even the Gnostic solutions of these problems
are not altogether out of date in the second half of
this nineteenth century, as the dualistic tendencies
of Mr. John Stuart Mill's posthumous Three Essays
will show. At such a time an exposition of the
subject from a distinctly Christian point of view,
written by one who apprehended with singular clear
ness the gravity of the issues involved, cannot be
regarded as otherwise than opportune. It is only
by the study of Gnostic aberrations that the true

PREFACE. xxv
import of the teaching of Catholic Christianity, in
its moral as well as its theological bearings, can be
fully appreciated.
There is some reason for believing that Dean
Mansel at one time contemplated the publication of
these lectures ; but, if so, he was prevented by
pressure of other work from fulfilling his intention.
Had he lived to carry out this design, the work
would doubtless have received considerable additions
from his hands. But it is not probable that in any
essential points he would have found it necessary to
modify his opinions. I am informed by those who
knew him best, that he never set pen to paper until
he had thoroughly worked out his subject, in all its
main points, to his own satisfaction ; and this repre
sentation is fully borne out by the appearance of his
manuscripts, which are singularly free from correc
tions. It would therefore have been in the more
finished execution, and in the fuller illustration, that
the latest hand of the author would have been dis
cerned. But this want did not seem to be a suffi
cient reason for withholding the lectures from the
public. For the reason indicated, the amount of labour
which has fallen to my share has been much less
than usually devolves on the editor of a posthumous
work. With the exception of the alteration or addi
tion of a word here and there, or the occasional
transposition of a clause for the sake of clearness, the
lectures are printed exactly as they appear in the
manuscript. Any attempt to supplement them with

xxvi PREFACE.
matter of my own would have destroyed the unity
of the work, without any countervailing advantage.
In the verification of the references I have had the
assistance of the Rev. Dr. Baker, Head Master of
Merchant Taylors' School, to whom my sincere
thanks are due for relieving me in great measure
of this laborious task ; and for the preparation of the
index I am indebted to the Rev. J. J. Scott, M.A.,
of Trinity College, Cambridge. Such labour as I
myself have bestowed on the publication of these
lectures has been cheerfully tendered as a tribute
of respect to the memory of one from whom, during
the very short period of my connection with him as
a member of the Chapter of St. Paul's, I received
nothing but kindness. J. B. LlGHTFOOT.
Trinity College, Cambridge :
Christmas 1874.

CONTENTS.

LECTURE I.
INTRODUCTION.
PAGE
Meaning of term Gnosis — Gnosticism applied in actual use only to
perversions of Christianity — Idea of Redemption foreign to Greek
philosophy — This idea the distinctive feature of Gnosticism —
Indicates its partly Christian source — Language adopted from
Christianity — Title Gnostic — Distinction between true and false
knowledge by St. Paul ; by Clement of Alexandria — Gnostic
estimate of the relation of Christianity to Gnosticism — Gnostic doc
trines of Absolute Existence and Origin of Eril — Destroy per
sonality and free-will — Hostile to Christianity — Lead to the same
conclusions as modern Materialism  1-15

LECTURE II.
SOtTRCES OF GNOSTICISM.
Absolute] Existence and Origin of Evil merged into one problem by
the Gnostics — Absolute Existence handed down to them from
Plato — Philo — The Logos — The Powers — Gnostics differ from
Philo in substituting Christianity for Judaism — Judaizing and
Anti-Jewish Gnostics — Origin of Evil, in Greek Philosophy little
more than glanced at — Reason of this — In the East, two principal
theories — Dualistic or Persian — Zoroaster — His system — Resem
blance to Mosaic narrative — Influenced by intercourse with the
Hebrews — The Persian theory compared with the Indian or Ema
nation theory — Brahmanism and Buddhism — Their doctrines —
Persianinfluence on Gnosticism in Syria. — Indian influence in Egypt
— Therapeutse — Conclusion, three principal sources of Gnosticism 16-32

xxviii CONTENTS.
LECTURE III.
SOURCES OP GNOSTICISM — CLASSIFICATION OF GNOSTIC SECTS. PAGE
Sources of Gnosticism — The Kabbala — Jewish Metaphysics — Re
sembles the philosophy of Spinoza — Its teaching — ' Sepher Yetzi-
rah,' or ' Book of Creation ' — ' Zohar,' or 'Light' — Theory of the
latter — Emanations — Adam IKadmon — Three worlds, two spi
ritual, one material — Final destiny of all — Resemblance to
Gnosticism — Chronological difficulties — Date and authorship of
the books of the Kabbala — Influenced by Persian philosophy —
Relation to Gnosticism — Simon Magus — The Marcosians — Ba-
V silides and Valentinus — Classifications of Gnostic sects — Mosheim
— Gieseler — Neander — Baur — Matter — Order adopted in these
Lectures  33-47

LECTURE IV.
NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM IN THE NEW TESTAMENT.
Simon Magus mentioned in the Acts of the Apostles — Earliest notices
of Gnostic teaching found in the Epistles of St. Paul to the
Asiatic Churches and to Corinth — Epistles to the Corinthians
— Ephesians — Colossians — Gnostic term Pleroma — Pastoral
Epistles — The Resurrection spiritually understood — Epistle to
the Hebrews — Mon occurs in these Epistles — Not used in the
Gnostic sense till later  48-63

LECTURE V.
NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM IN THE NEW TESTAMENT.
Prophecies of Gnosticism by St. Paul and St. Peter — Epistle of St.
Jude — References to the Nicalaitans — St. John, Apocalypse —
Date — Kicolaitans mentioned by name — Nicolas, one of the seven
deacons — Reference to Ophites — The Gospel written to refute
Gnosticism — Cerinthus and others who denied the Deity of our Lord
— The Epistles directed against the Docetse — In the First Epistle
references also to Cerinthus — Apostolic treatment of heresies 64-78

CONTENTS. xxix
LECTURE VI.
PRECURSORS OF GNOSTICISM — SIMON MAGUS AND MENANDER.
Simon Magus mentioned in the New Testament — His pretensions —
Hostile both to Christianity and Judaism — Adopts the titles Logos
and Power — His Ennoia — His teaching — The Great ' Announce
ment ' — The first principle, Fire or Silence — Has two natures — The
world generated by six emanations or ' Roots ' — The Perfect man
the complete manifestation of the whole — Relation to Persian theo-
sophy and Jewish Kabbala — This theory figurative — Fragment of
'the Announcement' preserved by Hippolytus — Simon a false
Christ, not merely a false prophet — Personal history — Statue at
Rome — Accounts of his death — Menander , , . . . 79-94

LECTURE VII.
THE OPHITE SECTS.
Simon Magus and Gnosticism — Ophite sects — Naassenes — Ophite
Trinity — The Serpent — Cainites — Sethites — Peratse — Ophite
heresies recognise Jesus as a Redeemer — Ophite doctrine of Re- _
demption — Sources and date of the first Ophite sects — Relation to
Pantheism — Ophite doctrine of the Fall identical with that of
Hegel — Conclusion  95-109-

LECTURE VIII.
CERINTHUS — CARPOCRATES — THE NAZARENESAND EBIONITES.
Gnostic errors in relation to the Person of Christ — Result of regarding
matter as evil and the source of evil — Docetic heresy in the Apo
stolic age — Ebionite heresy — Cerinthus — Early mention of him —
teaching borrowed from Philo — Regarded Judaism as imperfect,
but not evil — His Christology — Opposed by St. John — Baptism for
the dead — Carpocrates — Date — Teaching — Differs from Cerinthus
— Licentiousness of his teaching — His son Epiphanes — This
teaching, how reconciled with -the Gospel — Prodicus and the
Adamites — Nazarenes and Ebionites — Their doctrine — Origin of
the names — Gospel of the Ebionites — Testimony borne by heretics
to the Catholic Faith  110-128-

xxx CONTENTS.
LECTURE IX.
SYRIAN GNOSTICISM — SATURNINUS — TATIAN — BARD ESAU ES. TAGE
Jilenander the parent of Syrian and Egyptian Gnosticism — Saturninus —
His relation to Simon and Menander — His teaching — A combina
tion of Persian and Alexandrian doctrine — The moral alternative,
asceticism or licentiousness — Tatian — Life and tenets — Hydro-
parastatse — Bardesanes— A pervert from Catholic Christianity —
His Gnostic teaching — Does not separate the Supreme God from
the Creator — The Book of the Laws of Countries — His son
Harmonius — Their hymns — Syrian Gnosis — Its peculiar tenet . 129-143

LECTURE X.
EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM — BASILIDES.
Rasilides — His teaching — Non-existent Deity — Non-existent world —
The Word the seed of the world — Rejects common Gnostic ac
counts of the Origin of Evil — Influenced by Greek philosophy and
Alexandrian Judaism — Introduces a Christian element from the
Gospel of St. John — The seed of the world a threefold sonship —
Relation of this allegory to the Mosaic account of Creation — The
Great Ruler — The Ogdoad — The Hebdomad — The first Archon,
the Ruler of the Ogdoad — Abrasax — The Ruler of the Hebdo
mad — His idea of Redemption — The Gospel the means of deliver
ance — Three periods of the world — Period of the Revelation of
the Sons of God — The Illumination — The Great Ignorance —
Baslideans accepted the reality of the life and passion of Jesus —
Basilides does not adopt the Docetic heresy — Nor Persian Dual
ism — Nor Emanations — The account given by Irenaeus probably
later — His relation to Plato — Caulacau — His teaching not im
moral — His relation to Judaism — Position of his teaching as a
system of philosophy  144-165

LECTURE XI.
EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM — VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS.
Valentinus — His heresy refuted by Irenseus — Sources of his system 
Differs from that of Basilides — Primary Being, Depth, Unspeak
able—Three series of iEons — Principle of his system — Deals with

CONTENTS. xxxi
PAGE
ideal archetypes — Claims support from the Gospel of St. John —
Use of terms iEon, Pleroma — Valentinian theory of the Fall u,
desire after knowledge — The Redemption a, communication of
knowledge effected by Christ— A second Christ, Jesus or Logos —
Emanates from the thank-offerings of the JEons — The Divine
Nature represented by a plurality of distinct attributes — Relation
to the philosophical theology of St. Augustine . . . 166-183

LECTURE XII.
VALENTINUS AND THE VA1ENTINIANS.
Romance of Valentinus in three parts — The second part — Achamoth —
Her sorrows and sufferings — Her offspring, material, animal,
spiritual — The theory an attempt to explain how the Spiritual
gives existence to Matter — The third part of the romance — For
mation of the visible world — The Demiurge — His work — This
theory recognises three classes of men, material, animal, spiritual —
Valentinian theory of Redemption — Two kinds of Redemption for
the two higher classes of men — No Redemption for the material
part — Valentinian views of the nature of Christ — Tendency of this
teaching about Redemption — Followers of Valentinus — Ptolemaeus
— His letter to Flora — Marcus — Heracleon — His commentary on
St. John's Gospel — The Coptic Pistis Sophia not written by Valen
tinus — System of Valentinus in principle Pantheistic — Its relation
to the Kabbala  184-202

LECTURE XIII.
ASIATIC GNOSTICISM — MARCION.
Marcion — His position — His life — His teaching, a combination of
Rationalism and 'higher criticism' — His system critical, not
metaphysical — He began by criticising the Old Testament — His
Antitheseis — Meaning of the term ' just ' — Tertullian's answers
to Marcion — Marcion distinguishes between two Gods and two
Christs— His Christ of the Old Testament— His Christ of the
New Testament has neither "a human 'soul nor 3 seeming birth,
only a seeming death — The contest between Christ and the
Demiurge — The relation of Christ to the Supreme God unex
plained — He denies the resurrection of the body — Condemns
marriage — Marcionite baptism — Asceticism — Assumes only three
principles, but none essentially evil — His teaching the transition
of Christian speculation from philosophy to pure theology . 203-219

xxxii CONTENTS.
LECTURE XIV.
JUDAIZING REACTION — THE CLEMENTINES — THE ELKESAITES. PAGE
Comparison of earlier and later Gnosticism — Judaizing reaction — The
Clementines— Writings included under this title — Introduction to
the Homilies — Their contents — Their teaching — Leading feature,
hostility to Mareionism — External history — Most nearly akin to
the doctrines of the Elkesaites — Account of Elxai and the
Elkesaites as given by Epiphanius — Relation of the teaching of
tho Clementines to the tenets of the Elkesaites . . . 220-238

LECTURE XV.
CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, IREN.ffiUS, TERTULLIAN.
Antagonists of Gnosticism — Irenseus — ' Five Books of the Refutation
and Overthrow of Knowledge falsely so called ' — Date — Account
of Contents — Tertullian — His ' Prsescriptio adversus Hsereticos ' —
His treatise against the Valentinians — Against Marcion — Com
parison of these writers  , 239-260

y

LECTURE XVI.
CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA  HIPPOLYTUS.
The Christian School at Alexandria — Clement succeeds Pantsenus —
His estimate of Philosophy — His principal works — His doctrine
of the Logos — Account of the ' Stromateis ' — In opposition to
Gnosticism he asserts the free will of man — The true value of
the material creation — He defends marriage — He, answers the
Gnostic theories by a counter-sketch of the true Gnostic — Differ
ence between his true knowledge and the knowledge claimed by
the Gnostic heretics — Comparison of Clement with Irenseus 
Hippolytus  261-275

THE
GNOSTIC HEEESIES
OP THE
FIRST AND SECOND CENTURIES.
LECTURE I.
INTRODUCTION.
THE meaning of the term Gnosis or Knowledge, as ap
plied to a system of philosophy, may be illustrated
by the language of Plato towards the end of the fifth book
of the Republic, in which he distinguishes between know
ledge (yvaxris) and opinion (86!-a) as being concerned
respectively with the real (to ov) and the apparent (to
<f>aiv6iJ.svov). When to this distinction is added the farther
explanation that the objects of sense, the visible things of
the world, belong to the class of phenomena and are
objects of opinion, while the invisible essence of things, the
one as distinguished from the many, is the true reality,
discerned not by sense but by intellect, we shall be jus
tified in identifying ' knowledge ' with that apprehension of
things which penetrates beyond their sensible appearances
to their essence and cause, and which differs in name only
from that ' wisdom ' (ao<j>la) which Aristotle tells us is by
common consent admitted to consist in a knowledge of
B

4

2 GNOSTIC HERESIES. lect. t.
First Causes or Principles.1 In this general sense how
ever, the term yvaxris has nothing to distinguish it from
the ordinary Greek conception of 'philosophy,' and so
long as it remains solely within the region of philoso
phical inquiry and terminology, we do not find it generally
employed to designate either philosophy as a whole or any
special philosophical system.2 It is not till after the
Christian era that the term comes into use as the distinct
designation of a certain form of religious philosophy,
emanating in some degree from Christian sources, and
influenced by Christian ideas and Christian language.
Even in the earlier association of Greek philosophy with
a revealed religion, which is manifested in the Grseco-
Jewish philosophy of Alexandria, though the teaching of
Philo may be regarded as embodying the essential consti
tuents of Gnosticism in an entire if an undeveloped form,
we do not find the distinctive name of Gnosis or Gnostic
applied to designate the system or its teachers. It is not
indeed difficult to detect in Philo the germs of the later
Gnosticism, but they are present under other names.
The wise man, the perfect man, the philosopher, the con
templative man,3 are names applied by Philo to those
favoured persons who are permitted to attain to a know
ledge of divine things, so far as it is attainable by man ;
the peculiar designations of Gnosis and Gnostic do not
appear.4 In their actual use, if not in their etymological
meaning, the terms Gnostic, Gnosis, Gnosticism, as names
of a sect of philosophers or the doctrines professed by
them, have been employed exclusively with reference to
philosophical systems which have distinguished themselves,
1 Metaph. i. 1 : tV bvoiu&iUiniv Fragm. p. 637 ; De Conf. Ling. 20,
ootpiav irepl rh irpara o!;tio koi apx&s p. 419; De Prism, et 'Pan. 7, p. 415.
viro\a-ii.f$dvov<ri navres. * Cf. Harvey's Irentsus, vol. I.
2 Cf. Burton, Bampton Lectures, p. cxiii ; Matter, Histoire du Gnosti-
p. 358. dame, vol. I. p. 62 (2nd edit.)
3 Legia Alleg. iii. 73, p. 128;

lect I. INTRODUCTION. 3
not merely as ontological speculations, but also as here
tical perversions of Christianity. It is necessary there
fore to a full explanation of the historical import of the
terms that we should pay attention, not merely to the
general distinctions between knowledge and opinion,
between the real and the apparent, between ontology
and phenomenology, but also to the especially Christian
feature, the perversion of which distinguishes Gnosticism
as a heresy from other forms of speculation, which, how
ever extravagant in their pretensions, however erroneous
in their results, however alien from or opposed to the
doctrines of the Christian revelation, have never been-
jdassified as heresies, but onlv_.as jpMLssopMes, heathenish
it may be or anti-Christian, but not properly heretical. \
The feature in question will be found in the idea, common
alike to Gnosticism and Christianity, but not shared by
that philosophy from which the name and many of the
leading ideas of Gnosticism are borrowed — the idea of a
Redemption — of a Divine interposition to deliver the world
from the dominion of evil and its consequences.1
Among the Greek philosophical systems, as the idea
of evil holds a very subordinate and insignificant place, so
the idea of redemption seems not to be recognised at all.
The world and its phenomena are regarded from the most
various points of view. It may be as the spontaneous
development of some primitive vital force, as in the hylo-
zoism of the early Ionians ; it may be as the momentary
collision of opposite forces and the perpetual passing from
one state of being to another, as in the system of Hera-
clitus ; it may be as a motionless uniformity, without
plurality and without change, as in the theory of the
Eleatics ; it may be as a continuous development under
the influence of an external power, as in the philosophy
1 Cf. Baur, DieCkristliche Gnosis p. 27.
b 2

4 GNOSTIC HERESIES. lect. i.
of Anaxagoras ; it may be as the subject of successive
cycles, of opposite states alternating with each other, as
in the doctrine of Empedocles, and again in that of Plato,
and more distinctly still in that of the Stoics ; it may be
as an organised system in eternal revolution, as in the
Peripatetic philosophy ; but in all these systems alike, the
world, through all its changes or appearances of change,
does but exhibit the working of one law or one nature
essentially belonging to it, and continuing to act upon it
or in it throughout its whole existence : there is no trace
of any such conception as that of a new power introduced
into the world to deliver it from the law to which it is
subject, to exalt it permanently and progressively to a
higher and better existence and destiny. This one per
vading deficiency, which characterizes the whole current
of Greek thought, is strikingly and painfully brought into
light in the lines of a great poet of our own country, one
who, unhappily an unbeliever in the truths of Christianity,
endeavoured to replace what, he had rejected by elevating
the speculations of Pagan philosophy to the Christian
level. The Great Tear of the Stoics, the destruction of
the old world, the commencement of the new cycle, takes
the place of the Christian expectation of the delivery of
the creature from the bondage of corruption; but after
the triumphant opening of the poem with its exulting
description of the regenerated world in its new cycle, the
melancholy conclusion tells us too plainly, by the un
willing confession of an advocate, that the vaunted re
generation of philosophy is but an endless repetition of
the old evil : The world's great age begins anew,
The golden years return ;
The earth doth hke a snake renew
Her winter weeds outworn;

lect. i. INTRODUCTION.
Heaven smiles ; and faiths and empires gleam
Like wrecks of a dissolving dream.
A brighter Hellas rears its mountains
From waves serener far,
A new Peneus rolls its fountains
Against the morning star,
Where fairer Tempes bloom, there sleep
Young Oyclads on a sunnier deep.
A loftier Argo cleaves the main,
Fraught with a later prize ;
Another Orpheus sings again,
And loves, and weeps, and dies ;
A new Ulysses leaves once more
Calypso for his native shore.
Another Athens shall arise,
And to remoter time
Bequeath, like sunset to the skies,
The splendour of its prime ;
And leave, if nought so bright may live,
All earth can take or heaven can give.

O cease ! must hate and death return ?
Cease ! must men kill and die P
Cease ! drain not to its dregs the urn
Of bitter prophecy.
The world is weary of the past ;
0 might it die, or rest at last ! •
The distinctive feature which marks Gnosticism hi all
its schools as a religious heresy, and not as a mere philo
sophical extravagance, is the presence of this idea of a
redemption of the world, and the recognition, in a per-
veffea^iormT^O^person and work of Christ as taking
part in this redemption.2 And this indication of a partly
1 Shelley, Hellas.
1 See Dorner, Person of Christ, vol. I. Note U (Eng. Tr. p. 344).

6 GNOSTIC HERESIES. lect. i.
Christian source of the system will also throw some light
on the origin of the name by which it has been generally
designated. Already in the LXX translation of the Old
Testament, and still more clearly in the Apocryphal Book
of Wisdom, the term yv&a-is had been employed to denote
a knowledge of the true God or a knowledge especially
given by Him ; * and the same term was employed by the
writers of the New Testament for that knowledge of God
through Christ which is given by the Gospel. The
mission of John the Baptist is prophetically declared by
his father as to give knowledge of salvation to the Lord's
people.2 St Paul speaks of his Corinthian converts as
enriched by Christ in all utterance and in all knowledge ; 3
he enumerates among the gifts of the Spirit the word of
knowledge;* he tells them again that God hath shined in
our hearts to give the light of the knowledge of the glory
of God in the face of Jesus Christ.5 In like manner he
speaks of casting down imaginations and every high
thing that exalteth itself against the knowledge of God ; 6
and says that he counts all things but loss for the excel
lency of the knowledge of Christ Jesus.7 St Peter, in a
like sense, exhorts the disciples to whom he writes to add
to their faith virtue, and to virtue knowledge,8 and bids
them grow in grace and in the knowledge of our Lord and
Saviour Jesus Christ.9 Yet there are manifest indications
of the existence, even in Apostolic times, of a system of
false teaching which had usurped to itself especially the
name of knowledge. Not to dwell now upon the pro-
1 Ps. cxviii (cxix). 66 ; Prov. viii. a Luke i. 77.
12, xxx. 3 (xxiv. 26 in Vat.) ; Eccl. s 1 Cor. i. 5.
ii. 26; Isa. xi. 2; Wisd. ii. 13, vii. * 1 Cor. xii. 8.
17, x. 10, xiv. 22. The term -yviarns s 2 Cor. iv. 6.
is sometimes employed in the sense of 6 2 Cor. x. 5.
a diviner or wizard: 1 Sam. xxviii. ' Phil. iii. 8.
3, 9 ; 2 Kings xxi. 6. See Matter, s 2 Peter i. 5, 6.
vol. I. p. 161. » 2 Peter iii. 18.

lect. i. INTRODUCTION. 7
bable meaning of the disputed passage in the eighth
chapter of the First Epistle to the Corinthians, where
the indifference as regards meats offered to idols is
spoken of as the knowledge that puffeth up,1 we have at
least the unmistakeable and emphatic warning of the
Apostle to Timothy, ttjv irapaKaTadrjicriv i^vKa^ov, sKTpsiro-
fisvos Tas /3s/3r]\ovs /cevocjxovlas nai avTidkasis rrjs i}rsv$wvviwv
yvojo-Ecos,2 a passage the point of which in relation to
the texts previously quoted is obscured in our Autho
rised Version by the substitution of the word science for
knowledge. It is probable therefore, that the adoption of the terms
Gnosis and Gnostic, as special designations of a philosophy
and its professors, arose from the language of Christianity,
and was intended to distinguish the Gnostic teaching as
the rival andthe assumed superior of the Christian Church.
The former of these terms (yvSitns), as we have seen, is
contemporaneous with the teaching of St Paul ; the latter
(yvcoari-icos) is of later origin, and is said to have been
first assumed towards the end of the first or beginning
of the second century by the sect of the Ophites,3 or
according to another account by Carpocrates.4 The dis
tinction between the true and the false knowledge,
between the knowledge claimed as the heritage of the
Christian Church and the knowledge claimed by the rival
systems which gloried in the name, is that which in all
ages has distinguished the wisdom which is built on faith
and received of God, from that which is built on doubt and
invented by man. The knowledge professed by the Christian
Church was a knowledge given by divine revelation and
accepted in faith ; whatever fuller insight into divine
1 1 Cor, viii. 1. 4 Irenseus, Her. i. 25 ; cf. Eusebius,
2 1 Tim.vi. 20. H. E. iv. 7, 9.
* Hippolytus, Eef. Her. v. 6.

8 / GNOSTIC HERESIES. lect. i.
things could be attained by study or contemplation was
admitted only in so far as it was in accordance with the
revealed teaching, and, if not identical with it, at least a
legitimate interpretation or explanation of it. The, know
ledge professed by the Gnostic teachers, on the other hand,
was a knowledge designed to subordinate the revelatioji_
of Christ to the speculations of human j)hilosophy^a
curious inquiry, searching after an apprehension of God,
not in what He has revealed of Himself, but in that which
He has not revealed — an inquiry which, under the pre
tence of giving a deeper and more spiritual meaning to the
Christian revelation, in fact uprooted its very foundations
by making it subservient to theories incompatible with its
first principles — theories of human invention, originating
in heathen philosophies, and making those philosophies
the criterion and end of revelation, instead of regarding
revelation as the discovery by God of those truths which
_human wisdom had desired to see and had not seen.
Such is the distinction with which St Paul combats the
Gnostic systems in their germ and infancy. 'As ye
have therefore received Christ Jesus the Lord, so walk in
Him ; rooted and built up in Him, and stablished in the
faith, as ye have been taught, abounding therein with
thanksgiving. Beware lest any man spoil you through
philosophy and vain deceit, after the tradition of men,
after the rudiments of the world, and not after Christ.
For in Him dwelleth all the fulness of the Godhead bodily.' '
And at the end of the second or beginning of the third
century,2 when the principal Gnostic systems had risen
and flourished and were entering on the period of their
decay, we find Clement of Alexandria adopting a similar
1 Coloss. ii. 6-9. (Potter). Cave, Hist. Lit. p. 89, sup-
2 The Stromateis were certainly poses the work to have been written
written after the death of Commodus in the same year.
(a.d. 193) : see Strom, i. 21, p. 406

lect. i. INTRODUCTION. ' 9
criterion to distinguish between the true Gnostic or perfect
Christian and the disciples of the false systems which laid
claim to the name. ' That alone,' he says, ' is the proper
and incontestable truth, in which we are instructed by
the Son of God '....' That truth which the Greeks
profess, though it partake of the same name, is divided
from ours, as regards magnitude of knowledge and force
of demonstration and divine power, and the like ; for we
are taught of God, instructed in truly sacred literature by
the Son of God.' 1 ' Faith,' he says in the same book, ' is
the first element of knowledge, as necessary to the true
Gnostic as breathing is to life. As we cannot hve without
the four elements, neither can we attain to knowledge
without faith.' 2 And again ; ' That which we possess is
the only true demonstration, being supplied by the sacred
literature of the Holy Scriptures and by the heaven-taught
wisdom, as the Apostle calls it (1 Thess. iv. 9). . . . But
that demonstration which begets opinion and not know
ledge is human, and is made by rhetorical argument and
dialectical syllogisms ; whereas the demonstration which is
from above produces the faith of knowledge, by the com
parison and interpretation of the Holy Scriptures, in the
soul of those who are desirous of learning.' 3
The Gnostics in fact regarded the Christian revelation
as having a similar relation towards speculative philosophy
to that in which the Jewish religion was regarded by
Christians as standing towards their own belief. As the
institutions of Judaism under type and symbol prefigured
in the Christian belief the fuller revelation of Christ, so
Christianity itself, in the estimation of the Gnostics, was
but a figurative and symbolical exposition of truths, the

i. 20, p. 376 (Potter). p. 136.
Cf. Bishop Kaye's Clement of Alexan- 3 Ibid. ii. 11, p. 454. Cf. Kaye,
dria p. 124. p. 139.
2 Ibid. ii. 6, p. 445. Cf. Kaye,

10 GNOSTIC HERESIES. lect. i.
fuller meaning of which was to be supplied by philosophical
speculation. Gnosticism revived the idea, familiar to
heathen thought but wholly ahen to the spirit of
Christianity, of one religion designed for the wise and
the initiated, and another for the ignorant and profane
vulgar. Faith, the foundation of Christian knowledge, was
fitted only for the rude mass, the ¦sJrvxMol or animal men
who were incapable of higher things. Far above these
were the privileged natures, the men of intellect, the
nrpsv/iaTiicol or spiritual men, whose vocation was not to
believe but to know.1 How completely this distinction
perverted the language of St Paul,2 on which it was
nominally founded, will appear in the subsequent course
i of our inquiry. Such a distinction, as Neander has well
observed, was natural in the heathen systems of antiquity,
because heathenism was destitute of any independent
means, adapted alike to all stages of human enlightenment,
for satisfying man's religious needs. Such a means
however was supplied in Christianity by a faith in great
historical facts, on which the religious convictions of aU
men alike wei*e to depend. Gnosticism, by a reactionary
process, tended to make religion forfeit the freedom gained
for it by Christ, and to make it again dependent on human
speculations. Christianity had furnished a simple and
universaUy intelligible solution of every enigma which
had occupied thinking minds— a practical answer to all
the. questions which speculation had busied itself in vain
to answer. It established a temper of mind by which
doubts that could not be resolved by the efforts of specu
lative reason were to be practically vanquished. But
Gnosticism wished to make religion once more dependent
1 See Neander, Church History, v/mv, alrols Se tV yvwatv (of the
vol. II. p, 2 (ed. Bohn). Cf. Clem. Valentinians).
Alex. Strom, ii. 3 (p. 433, Potter),. 2 1 Corji. 14, 15.
tV fitv iritrTiv toi? cmKoix aTroyflpavTes

lect. i. INTRODUCTION. 11
on a speculative solution of these questions.1 Religion
was to be founded, not on historical facts, but on ontological
ideas : through speculations on existence in general and its
necessary evolutions, men were to be led to a comprehension
of the true meaning of what Christianity represents under
a historical veil.- The motto of the Gnostic might be
exactly given in the words of a distinguished modern
philosopher, ' Men are saved, not by the historical, but by
the metaphysical.'2
Two metaphysical problems may be particularly speci
fied as those which Gnosticism borrowed from heathen
philosophy, and to the solution of which the Christian
revelation was made subordinate — the problem of Abwohitri
Existence and jthe problem of the Origin of Evil. The
two indeed, as we shall see hereafter, were by the Gnos
tics generalised into one ; and this union may explain the
language of Tertullian, Eusebius, and Epiphanius, all of
whom speak of the origin of evil as the great object of
heretical inquiry ; 3 but in themselves and in their his
torical relations, the two problems may be regarded as
distinct, and each contributes its own ingredient to form
the anti-Christian side of the Gnostic speculation. The
search after an absolute first principle, the inquiry how
the absolute and unconditioned can give rise to the relative
and conditioned, is one which, when pursued as a theo
logical inquiry, almost inevitably leads to a denial of 'Hie
personality of God. Philosophy striving after a first
1 Neander, Church History, vol. IL tatus implicantur; Unde malum et
p. 4. quare?'; Eusebius, H. E. v. 27
2 ' Nur das Metaphysische, keines- irepi tou iroAuOpuM^-rou ir&pas toTs
weges aber das Historische macht oXpiai&rais frr-tifiaTos, rov Tl68ev t)
selig ' ; Pichte, Anweisung sum seligen tca/cia ; Epiphan. Hcer. xxiv. 6 "Eirxe
Lehen ( Werke v. p. 485). Se fi apxv rrjs kqk)is irpotp&atws tV>
3 Tertullian, De Preiser, Hmret. 7 ahtav curb tqv farep koX \eyew, U66eu
' Esedem materiae apud haereticos et rb khk.6v ; Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosia
philosophos volutantur, iidem retract- p. J 9,

12 GNOSTIC HERESIES. lect. i.
principle which shall be one and simple and unconditioned,
and incapable of all further analysis in thought, is naturally
tempted to soar above that complex combination of at
tributes which is implied in our conception of personality,
and in endeavouring to simplify and purify our representa
tion of the Divine nature, ends by depriving it of every
attribute which can make God the object of any religious
feeling or the source of any moral obligation. Instead of
a religious relation between God and man, the relation of
a person to a person, this philosophy substitutes a meta
physical relation between God and the world, as absolute
and relative, cause and effect, principle and consequence —
happy if it stops short at this error only, and does not find
itself compelled by the inexorable laws of its own logic to
identify God with the world. And when the standpoint
of philosophy is thus removed from a moral to a meta
physical aspect of God, the other great problem, the Origin
of Evil, naturally assumes a similar character. Evil no
longer appears in the form of sin, as "a transgression on the
part of a moral agent against the laws and will of a moral
Governor. The personality of God having disappeared, the
personality of man naturally disappears along with it.
Man is no longer the special subject of relations towards
God peculiar to himself by virtue of that personal and
moral nature in which he alone of God's earthly creatures
bears the image of his Maker : he is viewed but as a por
tion of the universe, an atom in that vast system of derived
existence which emanates from the one First Principle.1
The course of the world is his course as a part of the
world ; the laws of the world are his laws also, and the one
pre-eminence of man among creatures, the one attribute""
which constitutes him a person and not a thing — the at
tribute of Free-Will — is swallowed up in the depths and
1 Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 67.

m:ct. i. INTRODUCTION. 13
carried along with the stream of the necessary evolution
of being. Contemplated from this point of view, evil is
no longer a moral but a natural phenomenon ; it becomes
identical with the imperfect, the relative, the finite ; all
nature being governed bythe same law and developed from
the same principle, no one portion of its phenomena can it
self be more evil, more contrary to the law, than another •
all alike are evil only so far as they are imperfect ; all alike
are imperfect, so far as they are a falling off from the per
fection of the absolute.1 Thus contemplated, the problem
of the origin of evil is identified with that of the origin of
finite and relative existence ; the question how can the
good give birth to the evil, is only another mode of asking
how can the absolute give birth to the relative ; the two
great inquiries of philosophy are merged into one, and
religion and morality become nothing more than curious
questions of metaphysics.
And such, as we shall see, was the actual course of the
Gnostic speculations ; and this circumstance will serve to
explain the earnest abhorrence, the strong feeling of irre
concilable hostility, with which this teaching was regarded
by the Apostles and Fathers of the Church. It was not
merely an erroneous opinion on certain points of belief that
they were combating ; it was a principle which destroyed
the possibility of any rehgion at aU ; which, in setting aside
the personality of God and the personality of man, struck
at the root and basis of all natural religion ; which, by
. virtually denying the existence of sin and consequently
of redemption from sin, took away the whole significance
of the revelation of Christ. With this view of the spirit
of the Gnostic teaching, we may the more readily believe
the tradition of the vehement language of St John, ' Let
us fly, lest the bath fall in, while Cerinthus the enemy of
1 Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 20.

14 GNOSTIC HERESIES. lect. i.
the truth is in it ' * — language which yet is hardly stronger
than his own recorded words, ' Who is a liar but he that
denieth that Jesus is the Christ ? He is antichrist that
denieth the Father and the Son.' 2 We may understand
the zealous horror with which St Polycarp, the disciple of
St John, addressed the Gnostic Marcion, ' I know thee the
firstborn of Satan.' 3 This very charge of destroying the
free will of man and subverting the distinction between
right and wrong is made in express terms by Clement of
Alexandria against the doctrines of Basilides and the
Valentinians ; and his argument may be extended beyond
the point of view in which he has stated it, to the whole
sphere of man's moral and religious action. ' Faith,' he
says, ' if it be a natural privilege, is no longer a voluntary
right action ; nor can the unbeliever be justly punished, not
being the cause of his own unbelief, as the believer is not
the cause of his own belief. Moreover, if we rightly con
sider, the whole distinctive character of belief and unbelief
cannot be liable to praise or blame, being preceded by a
natural necessity sprung from Him who is all-powerful.' 4
This feature of the controversy is not without interest
to us in this present day ; for, however different may be
the premises of the popular philosophy of our own time,
it conducts us to precisely the same conclusion. In
this common error the most opposite extremes meet
together ; the transcendental metaphysics of the Gnostic
philosophy and the grovelling materialism of our own day
join hands together in subjecting man's actions to a
natural necessity, in declaring that he is the slave of the
circumstances in which he is placed ; his course of action
being certainly determined by them as effect by cause and
1 Irenseus.Zfer.iii. 3 ; cf. Eusebius, 3 Irenseus, I. u.; Eusebius, I. c.
H. E. iv. 14. * Strom, ii. 3 (p. 434, Potter). '
2 1 John ii. 22.

lect. i. INTRODUCTION, 15
consequent by antecedent. Merged in the intelligible
universe by the Gnostic of old, man is no less by modern
' science falsely so called ' merged in the visible universe ;
his actions or volitions are moral effects which follow their
moral causes ' as certainly and invariably as physical effects
follow their physical causes.' l Under this assumption the
distinction between moral evil and physical entirely
vanishes. A man, however inconvenient his actions may
be to his neighbour, is no more to blame for committing
them than is a fire for consuming his neighbour's house
or a sickness for destroying his life. TVIan cannot offend
against any law of God ; for his actions are the direct con
sequence of the laws which God (if there be a God) has
established in the world ; he is subject, to repeat the words
of dement, to a natural necessity derived from Him who
is all-powerful. The consciousness of freedom is a de
lusion ; the consciousness of sin is a delusion ; the perso
nality of man disappears under the all-absorbing vortex of
matter and its laws. How long, we may ask, will it be
before the personality of God disappears also, and the
vortex of matter becomes all in all ?
Aivos /Saaiksvei, top At" s^ekrfKaKws?

1 Mill, Examination of Sir W. Hamilton's Philosophy p. 501.
2 Aristophanes, Nub. 1471.

16 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect.-ii.

LECTURE n.
SOURCES OP GNOSTICISM.
In my last lecture I mentioned two problems borrowed
from heathen philosophy, and intruded by Gnosticism on
the Christian revelation — the problem of Absolute Exist
ence and the problem of the Origin of Evil. These two
problems, as we have seen, were by the Gnostics merged
into one ; but they came to them from different sources,
and their previous history to some extent belongs to
different systems of philosophy. The problem of the
Absolute was handed down to them from Plato, through
the medium of the Grseco-Jewish school of Alexandria
represented by Philo. Plato, towards the end of the
sixth Book of the Republic, had described the endea
vour of philosophy to ascend as far as the unconditioned
(ps'xpt' tov dvviroOdTOv)1 to the first principle of the
universe, and had spoken of this first principle or ideal
good as being something transcending all definite exis
tence (ovk ovaias ovtos tov dyaOov, oU' sti sireKSiva rr/s
ovalas irpscr^sla icai Svvdfist, vTr£psj(pvTos).'i From this
language, coupled with a perverted interpretation of the
Platonic cosmogony, as represented in the Timaeusy
Philo elaborated a theory for the interpretation of the
Jewish Scriptures, according to which the God who made
and who governs the world, the God whose personal
intercourse with His chosen people is conspicuous through-
• vi. p. 511. 2 Ibid. p. 509.

lect. n. SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. 17
out the whole teaching of the Old Testament, is distin
guished from the absolute first principle, which, as being
beyond personality and beyond definite existence, is
immutable and incapable of relation to finite things.
This latter — the supreme God — is absolute and simple
existence, without qualities, and not to be expressed in
speech.1 The former — the Logos or mediator between
the supreme God and the world — is invested with those
personal attributes which characterize the God of the
Hebrew Scriptures, and to him are referred those several
passages of Scripture in which God is spoken of as holding
direct intercourse with man.2 Whether Philo really
intends to represent the supreme God and the Logos as
two numerically distinct beings, is a matter of dispute
among his commentators,3 and indeed in the case of a
writer so extremely fanciful and unsystematic it is difficult
to say whether he had any definite theory on this subject
at all. The same may be also said of his description of
the Divine powers or Bwd/isis, which are sometimes
described in language which seems to represent them as
distinct personal beings, sometimes appear to be merely
poetical personifications of the several attributes of God,
as manifested in relation to the world.4 But it must at
least be admitted that his language is such as to suggest
to subsequent speculators, aided, as we shall see, by

i. c. 13, p. 50 and by Dorner, Person of Christ
&ttoios & 6e6s : Ibid. c. 15, p. 53 Sei i. p. 27 (Eng. Trans.) and Note A,
yap TryeTffSat koI &towv airbv elpcu against Gfrorer, Dahne, Liicke, and
nal 8up8aprop nai &r perron: De Somn. the majority of recent critics. An
i. 39, p. 655, Keyeadai yap ov ire<pvitev, intermediate view is taken by Zeller,
d\\4 pivov elvai rb 6t>. Cf. De Vit. Philosophic der Griechen, III. 2, p. 324,

c. 1, p. 472 ; Quod Deus and to some extent by Professor
Immut. c. 11, p. 281. Jowett, Epistles of St. Paul, I. p. 484
2 Cf. Kitto's Cyclopedia (3rd (2nd edit.).
edit.), Art. 'Philosophy,' p. 526, and ' * Cf. J. G. Muller, Art. 'Philo ' in
the references there given. Herzog, vol. XI. p. 589 ; Gfrorer
3 The negative is maintained by Philo, vol. I. pp. 151, 155 sea.
Burton, Hampton Lectures Note 93,

18 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. n.
similar ideas borrowed from other sources, the theory of a
series of intermediate spiritual beings interposed between
the supreme God and the visible world, beginning with
the Logos, as the highest, but extending itself through
a succession of subordinate powers of no definite number
or relation to each other, but capable of increase ad
libitum according to the fancy of the philosopher for the
time being, or the exigencies of the theory which he may
happen to be occupied with.1
But the Gnostic philosophers differed from Philo in one
v important particular. Philo, as a Jew, had merely to
adapt his system to the interpretation of the Old Testa
ment : the Gnostics, dealing with the Christian revelation,
had to extend the theory so as to connect it with some
kind of an acknowledgment of the person and work of
Christ. The Gnostics professed to acknowledge Christ as
in some manner the Redeemer of the world ; but from what
does he redeem it ? Not from sin in the proper sense of
"*bhe term ; not from the evil entailed upon man by his own
voluntary transgression of God's law, for, under the
Gnostic hypothesis, there is no free will in man, and
therefore no voluntary transgression. The evil from
which Christ redeems must therefore be evil of another
kind — something not introduced into the world by man's
disobedience, but something inherent in the constitution
of the world itself. The evil that is in the world must
therefore be due to the Creator of the world ; it must be
inherent in the world from the beginning — the result of
some weakness at least, or some ignorance, if not of some
1 Thus in the De Cherub, c. 9, we is identified with the supreme God.
have three powers all distinct from InDeMut. Nom. c. 4, wehaveaS&o/iis
the supreme God, symbolized by the eiepyeriKi\ added to the jSacnAiK^ and
two cherubim and the flaming sword. toi^tik-^. In De Prof. ec. 18, 19, six
In De Abrahamo c. 24, there are three powers are invented to answer to the
powers (the three beings who appeared six cities of refuge.
to Abraham at Mamre), one of whom

lect. n. SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. 19
positive malignity concurring in its first formation. The
Demiurge is thus necessarily lowered from the position
which he holds in the system of Philo, as next to, if not one
with, the supreme God. The Redeemer of the world must
stand higher than the Creator ; for he is sent to remedy
the imperfection of the Creator's work : there will be a
gulf between them of greater or less extent, according
to the amount of evil which the philosopher may believe
himself to have discovered in the world, and the conse
quent amount of imperfection which he may think proper
to attribute to its maker, and this gulf may be filled up by
any number of intermediate beings, forming so many suc
cessive links in the chain of descent from good to evil. It is
obvious that under a theory of this kind the Jewish religion
and the Scriptures of the Old Testament may be regarded
as standing in either of two different relations towards
Christianity, or rather towards the philosophy which takes
the place of Christianity. The Creator of the world, the
God of the Jewish people, . may be regarded merely as
an imperfect, or as a positively malignant being. He
may be an emanation from the supreme God, imperfect in
proportion to his remoteness from the source of existence,
but still a servant of God, working under the Divine law
and accomplishing the Divine purpose (if we may venture
allusively to employ the term purpose in relation to an
impersonal being) — accomplishing the Divine purpose it
may be blindly and ignorantly, yet in subordination to a
higher and better power. Or, on the other hand, he may
be a being hostile to God ; either the offspring of some
power alien from God, and acting in opposition to the
Divine purpose — of an original evil principle, the head of a
kingdom of darkness in antagonism to the kingdom of
light; or at least one so far degenerated from the
c2

20 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. lt.
original source of good that his imperfection becomes in
result an actual contrariety to good.
Two opposite' views may thus be taken of the Jewish
religion. It may be an imperfect preparation for a
Christian philosophy, which the latter is designed to
supersede by completing, or it may be a system funda
mentally hostile to Christianity, which the latter is de
signed to combat and overthrow. On account of this
difference, the Gnostic schools have sometimes been
divided into the two classes of Judaizing and anti-Jewish
Gnostics ; the one regarding it as the mission of Christ
to complete an imperfect revelation, the other supposing
Him to be sent to deliver the world from the bondage of
an evil creator and governor. How far this distinction
may be considered as furnishing the ground for an accu
rate classification of the several Gnostic systems, will be
considered hereafter. At present we must endeavour to
complete our sketch of the philosophical sources of
Gnosticism, by recurring to the second great problem,
which its professors applied to the interpretation of
Christianity — the problem of the Origin of Evil.
The origin of evil holds a very subordinate place, if in
deed it can be said to have been considered at all, in the phi
losophy of Greece. The Greek mind was rather disposed to
view the world in the light of an evolution from below,
than in that of an emanation and descent from above.'
This may be seen not only in the poetical cosmogonies
and theogonies which preceded philosophy proper, evolving
the world and even the gods from a primitive chaos and
darkness, but also in the first efforts of philosophy itself —
in the hylozoism of the early Ionians, evolving the
higher forms of existence from the action of some primi
tive material element, and again, after this view had been
' Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 30.

lect. n. SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. 21
superseded by the influence of the mathematical and
metaphysical abstractions of the Pythagoreans and
Eleatics, in its revival in a modified form in later
theories, in the four elements of Empedocles, in the 6/j,ov
irdvTa of Anaxagoras, in the atoms of Leucippus and
Democritus. Even the metaphysical schools of Greek
philosophy, commencing their speculations with the
highest -and purest abstractions, cannot be said to have in
any way grappled with the problem of the existence of
evil. The Eleatics contented themselves with little more
than the dogmatic assertion that the One alone exists,
and that plurality and change have no real being. Plato,
though taking a transient glance at the problem in that
passage of the Republic where he lays it down as a rule
of teaching concerning God, that he is not the cause of all
things, but only of those things that are good,1 and again
in the mythical utterance of the prophet of destiny
towards the close of the book, alria s\o/j,svav, 8ebs dvahios,2
cannot be said to have fairly grappled with the positive
side of the question, what is the cause of evil, and how
can it come into the world . against the will of God ? In
the cosmogony of the Timseus, though the Demiurge
is represented as forming the world out of pre-existing
matter, yet this matter itself is so little regarded as a
cause of evil, as something in its own nature hostile to
the Deity, that on the contrary we are told that the
world, as thus made, was an image of the eternal gods,
and that the Father who made it admired it and was
rejoiced.3 In other passages, it is true, a darker side of
the world makes its appearance. God is said to complete
the idea of good in the world as far as is possible ; * a
1 Eesp. ii. p. 380, ph iravruv aXriov 3 Timmus p. 37.
rbv 8eiv, a\\a rwv ayatiaiv. * Ibid. p. 30 a: cf. p. 46 c.
2 Ibid.x. p. 617.

22 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. n.
struggle is intimated as having taken place between
reason and necessity, the actual constitution of the world
being compounded of both.1 In other dialogues 2 mention
is made of a something in the world which must always
be opposed to good,3 and of the bodily element in the
composition of the world which was disorderly before
it entered into this present world, and hinders it from
perfectly accomplishing the teaching of its Maker and
Father. But such hints as these, scattered and incidental
as they are, though they gave occasion to Aristotle to say
that Plato regarded matter as a source of evil,4 show
that the problem was one which the mind of the philo
sopher only glanced at transiently and unwillingly, which
he was glad" to keep as far as possible in the background
of his teaching, and of which- he never attempted a
systematic solution. Aristotle, while acknowledging the
existence of evil as a fact, and dealing with it practically
in his ethical doctrines and precepts, pays but httle
attention to the metaphysical problem of its origin.
Neither in the list of questions which he proposes to
discuss in his Metaphysics, nor in the body of the work,
does this inquiry appear ; and his conception of matter
as of a merely potential and passive nature is remote
from that point of view in which it is contemplated as an
actual cause of evil. The Stoics indeed may be said to
have partially considered the question from their own
point of view ; but their pantheism, and their theory of
the perfection of the world as a whole, compeUed them to
treat it only in a partial and superficial aspect. Their
1 Timeus p. 48 a. omit those passages in which Plato
2 Theatetus p. 176 A. speaks of the human body as the
3 Politwus p.' 273 a. Cf. Zeller, cause of the evil of the soul {e.g.
II. 1, p. 487. Phmdo pp. 66, 79). These do not

, i. 6 eri Se tV tov eS refer to the origin of evil in general,
nai tov kokZs oItW tois o-roixetois but to its particular working in a defi-
oire'SaiKey l/ca-repoti etcarepav. We cite organization.

lect. ii. SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. 23
inquiries were not so much directed to an explanation of
the origin of evil, as to attempts to reconcile the fact of its
existence with the supposed perfection of the universe,
and their conclusions were for the most part such as the
principles of their philosophy would naturally suggest and
which modern writers have sometimes borrowed without
being fully aware of their tendency — namely, that the
imperfection of part is necessary to the perfection of the
whole ; x that some things which appear to be evil are not
so in reality;2 that evil is necessary to- the existence of
good, because one of two contraries cannot exist without
the other.3 In such positions as these, we see the germ of
the questions discussed in works like Leibnitz's Theodicee,
or Pope's Essay on Man. They are not philosophical
inquiries intended to explain how evil came into the
world, but examinations of difficulties occasioned by the
fact of its existence when viewed in relation to other
facts or doctrines.
The slight and cursory notice which this question
received in Greek philosophy may to some extent be ac
counted for by the character of the national mind. The
Greek was of all men least disposed to look on the gloomy
or the negative side of the visible world : his feelings
opened themselves to all that was bright and beautiful
1 So Chrysippus in Plutareh, Cf. Zeller, III. 1, p. 199.
De Stoic. Eep. e. 44 TeKeov pev i 3 Chrysippus in Plutarch, De
Kotruos awpd ecriv, ov TeAea Se t& tov Stoic. Eep. e. 35 'H Se kuk'w. -npbs ra
k6(tjiov uept], Tqi npbs rb '6\ov irws Sewa avpitr&paTa tdt6p riva exet \6yov.
exew nal ph *<*&' alira elvai. Cf. yiyerai pivyap Kal avr ii ttois xararbi, Tijs
Zeller, III. 1, p. 160. So Pope, Essay Qvo-eus \6yov nai, 'in' oStus e'itta,
on Man : a-Xfrho'Ttes yiyerai irpbs ra '6\a, ofae yap
' All discord, harmony not understood ; raya8a ^j>: Chrysippus in A. Gell.
All partial evil, universal good.' vi. 1 ' Nam cum bona malis contraria
- 2 e.g. pain and physical evil in sunt, utra^ue necessarium est oppo-
general. Cf. Seneca, Epist. 85, 30 sita inter se et quasi mutuo adverso
' Dolor et paupertas deteriorem non quaeque fulta nisu consistere : nullum
faciunt ; ergo mala non sunt ' ; and adeo contrarium est sine contrario
the theological application of the altero.'
same position by M. Aurelius, ii. 11.

24 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. ir.
and beneficial in nature; his creative fancy imagined
gods for itself in the sun and moon and stars of heaven,
in the mountains and groves and streams of his native
land, in the corn and wine and fruits of the earth which
contributed to his enjoyment.1 Such a temperament was
not likely to be impressed with an overwhelming sense of
the evil that is in the world, nor to tinge the national
philosophy with dark representations of the inherent
malignity of matter.
Very different was the tone of thought in the East,
where philosophy, far more than in Greece, was identified
with religion ; where, consequently, the presence of evil,
was more keenly felt, and theories concerning its nature
and origin formed the very keynote of philosophical
speculation. Two principal theories may be specified as
endeavouring in different ways to account for the exist
ence of such a phenomenon : the dualistic theory, which
proceeded on the hypothesis of an original struggle be
tween two antagonistic principles of good and evil, and
the emanation theory, which supposes a gradual deteriora
tion by successive descents from the primitive source of
good. The former may be distinguished as the Persian,
1 Da der Dichtung zauberische Hiille
Sich noch lieblich um die Wahrheit wand,
Durch die Schopfung floss da Lebensfulle
Und was nie empfinden wird, empfand.
An der Liebe Busen sie zu driicken,
Gab man hohern Adel der Natur,
Alles wies den eingeweihten Blicken,
Alles eines Gottes Spur.
Wo jetzt nur, wie unsre Weisen sagen,
Seelenlos ein Feuerball sich dreht,
Lenkte damals seinen goldnen Wagen
Helios in stiller Majestat.
Diese Hohen fiillten Oreaden,
Eine Dryas lebt' in jenem Baum,
Aus der Urnen lieblicher Najaden
Sprang der Strome Silberschaum. Schiixeb, Die Gbtter Griechenlands.

lect. n. SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. 25
the latter as the Indian theory. I do not mean that the
emanation doctrine is peculiar to India ; on the contrary,
it holds a prominent position in the Persian religious
philosophy likewise, as indeed in most speculations of
Oriental origin ; ' but in the Persian philosophy the
hypothesis of emanations appears as a consequence of the
existence of evil, while in the Indian philosophy it is the
cause of it. The one assumes the existence of two con
flicting powers of good and evil, each of which gives rise
to subordinate beings of similar nature assigned to assist
in the conflict. The other supposes one original exist
ence, of the highest and most abstract purity, and repre
sents the origin of evil as the final result of successive
degrees of lower and less perfect being.
The Zoroastrian religious system, which, commencing
according to tradition in Bactria, one of the eastern pro
vinces of the Persian empire, became ultimately the
received religion of Persia in general, is involved in much
obscurity as regards the period, as well as the manner of
its origin. Whether Zoroaster (Zerdusht or Zarathustra),
its reputed founder, was a historical or a mythical per
sonage,2 whether he flourished, according to one favourite
opinion, in the reign of Darius Hystaspis, or, as others
maintain, at a much earlier period,3 whether his religious
system was wholly original or the reformation of a pre
vious belief, are points still under controversy, and about
which it is unsafe to pronounce any decided opinion.3
But the system itself, according to what appears to have
been its earliest form, was based on the assumption of the
existence of two original and independent powers of good
1 Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 30. * For different theories concerning
2 Niebuhr (Kleine Schriften, vol. I. the age and work of Zoroaster see
p. 200) regards him as mythical. See Milman, Hist, of Christianity, vol. I.
Art. ' Zoroaster ' in Smith's Diet, of p. .63 seg.
Biography.

26 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. n.
and evil, or light and darkness — Ormuzd (Ahura Mazda,
the wise Lord) and Ahriman (Angra Mainyus, the
wicked spirit). Another account of the doctrine repre
sents both these beings as the offspring of a higher prin
ciple called Zarvana Akarana (' boundless time '), but this
appears to be a later refinement of the theory which
originally regarded the two principles as co-existent from
the beginning in eternal antagonism.1 Each of these
hostile powers is of equal strength, each supreme within
his own domain. Ormuzd dwells in the region of perfect
light, Ahriman in that of perfect darkness, and between
them is an interval of empty space, separating the one
from the other. Each becomes at length aware of the
other's existence, and of the necessity of a contest between
them. For three thousand years each is occupied in the
creation of subordinate powers to assist him in the
struggle.2 Thus there arose from Ormuzd three orders of
pure spirits : first, the six Amshaspands who surround his
throne, and are his messengers to inferior beings ; then
the twenty-eight Izeds, together with their chief Mithra;
and finally, the innumerable host of Fervers, a kind of
personification of the creative ideas, the archetypes of the
sensible world.3 In opposition to these, Ahriman pro
duces an equal number of Devs or evil spirits. After
these creations Ormuzd is represented as having artfully
induced Ahriman to agree to a further truce, in conse
quence of which the latter subsides into complete inac
tivity for three thousand years longer, during which time
Ormuzd, with the assistance of his subordinate powers,
¦Spiegel, Art. 'Parsismus' in vol. I. p. 117. The six Amshaspands,
Herzog's EncyMop'ddie, XI. pp. 117, together with Ormuzd and Mithra,
1 19, and cf. Milman, Hist, of Chris. seem to correspond to the Valentinian
tianity, vol. I. p. 69. Ogdoad. The twenty-eight Izeds, with
2 Ibid. Ormuzd and Mithra, answer to the
8 See Matter, Hist, de Gnosiicisme, thirty ^Eons.

lect. n. SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. 27
proceeds to create the material world — first the heavens,
then water, then the earth, then the trees, then cattle,
and finaUy men. The earth is situated in the inter
mediate space between the kingdoms of light and dark
ness, and becomes ultimately the battle-field of the strife
between the two powers. At the end of the three thou
sand years of inaction, Ahriman obtains a footing on the
earth, and attempts to counteract the work of Ormuzd by
producing creatures of a contrary kind, noxious animals
and poisonous plants. He also led away from their
allegiance the first pair of mankind, and inflicted upon
them various evils, such as hunger, sleep, age, sickness,
and death. This struggle between good and evil upon the
earth is to continue for six thousand years, during which
the lower order of the material creation, inanimate as
well as animate, are good or evil of necessity, according
to the source from which they spring. Man alone has
the power of choosing for himself the one side or the
other, and partaking of good or evil, of reward or punish
ment, according to his choice.1
In reading the above cosmogony it is impossible not
to be struck with the resemblance of many of its details
to the Mosaic narrative of the Creation and the Fall,2 not
withstanding the wide departure of its dualistic hypo
thesis from the pure monotheism of the Hebrew faith.
The creation of the world by the good spirit; the
order of creation in its several parts, ending with man ;
the subsequent intrusion of the spirit of evil ; his seduc
tion of the first pair of human beings ; the evils which he
brings upon the earth and upon men ; are points of re
semblance which seem to warrant the conclusion that a
1 Spiegel, Art. ' Parsismus,' in on the creation, government, and end
Herzog's Encyklopadie p. 118. The of the world.
account is chiefly taken from the Per- 2 Cf. Franck, La Kabbale p. 359
sian work called Bundehesh, a treatise sea.

28 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. ii.
modification at least, if not the original formation of the
Zoroastrian system, is due to a period subsequent to the
intercourse between the two nations brought about by the
Jewish captivity. Whatever antiquity different critics
may be disposed to ascribe to the oral traditions on which
the religion of the Zendavesta is based, it is admitted that
the written records in which it is now contained cannot
for the most part claim a higher antiquity than the rise
of the Sassanid dynasty in the third century after Christ.1
How much of the earlier tradition is primitive, and what
accretions it may have received in the course of time, it is
impossible, in the absence of written documents, to decide
with any certainty ; but perhaps the different theories
concerning the age of Zoroaster and the introduction of
his religious system may be in some degree reconciled
with each other, if we suppose a reformation of the reli
gion to have taken place in the reign of Darius Hystaspis,2
a supposition which wiU help to conciliate the traditions
of the antiquity of the first origin of the religion with the
traces which it bears in its later form of the influence of
the sacred books of the Hebrew captives.
This suspicion receives some confirmation when we
compare the Persian system with one to which in its
original form it was probably nearly related — the religious
philosophy of India. If the affinity between the Zend
and the Sanscrit languages, and the similarity in some
of the legends and traditions of the two nations, indicate
1 According to the Persian tradi- Ardeshir I (Bleeck, Avesia, Introduc
tion, Alexander caused most of their tion p. x ; Erskine quoted by Mil-
earlier sacred books to be translated man, I. p. 65), though the document
into Greek, and then destroyed the from which it was compiled may be
originals. It is probable at least, that older in writing as certainly in oral
a great part of them were lost after tradition. The other books are
Alexander's conquest. See Spiegel, mostly later. See Spiegel, p. 128.
p. 127. The collection which consti- 2 See Milman, Hist, of Christi-
tutes the present written text of the anity, vol. I. p. 64.
Avesta is not earlier than the time of

lect. n. SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. 29
a common origin of their religious beliefs,1 the differences
between these two beliefs in their more developed stages
no less indicate a considerable change in one or the other
at a later period. The Persian system, as we have seen,
is dualistic ; the Indian is a monotheism, pushed to the
extreme of pantheism, and even (strange as such a de
velopment may seem) of atheism. In the Persian scheme
the source of evil is spiritual ; in the Indian it is material.
Evil itself in the one is a terrible reahty ; in the other, as
in all consistent pantheistic schemes, it is a mere appear
ance and an illusion. In the Persian doctrine matter
itself is not essentially evil ; it is the production of a
beneficent being, and the object into which it enters may
be good or evil according to the power by which they are
produced. In the Indian system matter is the root of
all evil, and the great aim of religion is to free men
from its contamination, even at the cost of annihilation
itself. Of the two great divisions of the Indian religion,
Brahmanism and Buddhism, the latter is that with which
we are chiefly concerned as the channel through which
Indian belief and speculation obtained an influence in
other countries. The Brahmanieal religion was founded
upon the total isolation of the Indian people and its
castes, and admitted of no communion with other nations ;
the Buddhist faith was designed for all mankind, and its
disciples were zealous and successful propagandists.2 The
principal points of contact however between Indian
philosophy and Gnosticism may be regarded as common to
both branches of the former. These are, (1) the doctrine
of the emanation of the world from the one absolute ex-

1 Bleeck, Avesta, Introduction . 2 Cf. Bitter, Hist, of Philosophy
pp. ix, x ; cf. Milman, Hist, of Chris- I. p. 63 ; M. Miiller, Buddhism and
tianity I. p. 66. Buddhist Pilgrims p. 22.

30 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. ii.
istence, and of its final reabsorption into that existence ;x
(2) the doctrine of the inherent evil, and at the same
time of the unreality of matter ; 2 (3) the doctrine of the
antagonism between spirit and matter, and the practical
consequence, that the highest aim of religion is to free the
soul from the contamination of matter, and to raise it to
a final absorption in the being of the absolute.3 The
Buddhist however carried his metaphysical abstraction
to a higher point even than the Brahman. While the
Brahm of the orthodox Hindu philosophy, the one sole
absolute substance, the ground and reality of all things,
is represented as simple existence,4 the first principle of
the Buddhist religion is carried a step higher still in
, abstraction, and identified with pure nothing. According
to the Buddhist creed nothing is, and all seeming existence
is illusion, the offspring of ignorance, which true knowledge
resolves into nothing.5 The highest end of human life
is to escape from pain by annihilation ; the highest virtue
is that which prepares the soul for the knowledge which
is to end in annihilation.6 In order to overcome ignorance,
the cause of seeming existence, and desire, the cause of
ignorance, the votary of Buddhism is bidden to practise
the most rigid asceticism and to devote himself to the most
intense meditation. ¦ By this process he is gradually to
extinguish desire, sensation, thought, feeling, even con
sciousness itself, till he finally arrives at complete rest
in complete extinction (Nirvana, literally 'blowing out'),
the soul being not even, as in the Brahman doctrine,
absorbed as a drop in the ocean, but in the literal meaning
1 Cf. Milman, Hist, of Christianity Philos. der Religion ( Werke, XI. p. 35).
I. P- 62. See St. Hilaire as quoted by Max
2 Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 54 ; Miiller, Buddhism etc. p. 20.
Milman, vol. II. p. 34. 5 M. Miiller, Buddhism etc. «p 14,
'Ibid. p. 58. 19.
* ' Das leere Wesen.' Cf. Hegel, • Bid. p. 15.

lect. n. SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. 31
of the phrase, blown out like a lamp.1 The Gnostic systems
fall far short of this gigantic heroism of absurdity; yet its
influence in a diluted form may undoubtedly be traced in
the antagonism which they maintained to exist between
matter and spirit, in the deliverance of spirit by asceti
cism, and in the contrast between ignorance and knowledge,
the one the source of illusion and misery, the other the
sole means of obtaining deliverance and repose.2
The influence of the Persian religious philosophy may
be most clearly traced in those forms of Gnosticism which
sprang up in Syria, a country which both from geographical
position and historical circumstances must have had fre
quent means of communication with the head-quarters of
the Magian system.3 The sects which sprang up in this
country chiefly based their teaching on the dualistic as
sumption of an active spiritual principle and kingdom of
evil or darkness, opposed to the kingdom of goodness or
light. The Indian influence in a modified form may chiefly
be traced in those forms of Gnosticism which sprang up.
in Egypt, which appears to have been visited by Buddhist
missionaries from India within two generations from the
time of Alexander the Great,4 and where we may find
permanent traces of Buddhist influence, established at all
events before the Christian era. The Therapeutse or con
templative monks of Egypt, described by Philo, whom
Eusebius by an anachronism confounds with the early
Christians, appear to have sprung from an union of the
Alexandrian Judaism with the precepts and modes of life
of the Buddhist devotees, and though their asceticism fell
1 M. Miiller, Buddhism etc. pp. 4 See King, The Gnostics and their
19, 46. Remains p. 23. The King to whom
2 Cf. King, The Gnostics and their the mission is attributed is Asoka,
Eemains p. 21. the grandson of Chandragupta
3 Cf. Gieseler, Church History, (Sandracottus), the contemporary of
vol. I. p. 138 ; Neander, Church His- Alexander.
tory, vol. II. p. 13.

32 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. n.
short of the rigour of the Indian practice, as their religious
belief mitigated the extravagance of the Indian speculation,
yet in their ascetic life, in their mortification of the body
and their devotion to pure contemplation, we may trace
at least a sufficient affinity to the Indian mystics to in
dicate a common origin.1
The principal sources of Gnosticism may probably be
summed up in these three. To Platonism, modified by
Judaism, it owed much of its philosophical form and
tendencies. To the Dualism of the Persian religion it
owed one form at least of its speculations on the origin
and remedy of evil, and many of the details of its doctrine
of emanations. To the Buddhism of India, modified again
probably by Platonism, it was indebted for the doctrines
of the antagonism between spirit and matter and the
unreality of derived existence (the germ of the Gnostic
Docetism), and in part at least for the theory which
regards the universe as a series of successive emanations
from the absolute Unity. Other supposed sources, to
which Gnosticism has with more or less probability been
sometimes referred, will be noticed in my next lecture.
1 On the connection of the Thera- the Jewish- Alexandrian philosophy,
peutse with the Indian mysticism, see see Dahne, Judisch-Akx. Religions-
Milman, Hist, of Christianity, vol. II. Philosophic, vol. I. p. 453.
pp. 37, 41. On its connection with

lect. in. CLASSIFICATION OF GNOSTIC SECTS. 33

LECTURE III.
SOURCES OP GNOSTICISM — CLASSIFICATION OP
GNOSTIC SECTS.
In addition to the three sources to which in my last lec
ture I endeavoured to trace the origin of the Gnostic sys
tems, namely, the Grseco-Jewish philosophy of Alexandria
and the religious systems of Persia and India, other coun
tries and systems have been occasionally named as probable
tributaries to the stream. Egypt, Phoenicia, China, have
all been enumerated by modern critics among the pre
cursors of Gnosticism ; J but it may be doubted whether
anything can be produced from the philosophy or religion
of these countries which may not be derived more directly
and with more probability from the sources previously
mentioned. There remains however at least one system
of religious philosophy, which, on account of its close
affinity to the Gnostic theories and the possibility, to say
the least, of an actual historical connection between it and
them, cannot be passed over without a special examination
—I mean the Kabbala, or secret teaching of the Jews.
The word Kabbala (if we may adopt a pronunciation
which, though not strictly accurate, has at least been
naturalised in English) 2 literally means reception or
received doctrines, and, substituting the active for the pas
sive relation, may be perhaps fairly rendered tradition, a
1 See Matter, Hist, du Gnosticisme, of the Lake, has
livre i. ch. v, vii, ix. ' Eager he read whatever tells
2 Heb. iTjaj?. Scott, in the Lady of magic, cabala, and spells.'
D

84 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. hi.
word more exactly corresponding to the Hebrew Massorah.1 v
In actual use it designates a system of traditional and
partially at least of esoteric or secret teaching, which has
not inaptly been called the Jewish Metaphysic,2 and which
may be compared to the Jewish philosophy of Alexandria,
as being, like it, an attempt to combine the theology of
the Old Testament with a philosophical speculation derived
from foreign sources. But while the Alexandrian philo
sophy was cultivated by Hellenistic Jews and published
entirely in the Greek language, the Kabbalistic doctrines,
if we allow them the same antiquity, must be regarded as
the peculiar study of the Jews of Palestine,3 and as con
fined with equal exclusiveness to the Hebrew language.4
The principles also of the two systems, notwithstanding
some resemblances in matters of detail,5 must be regarded
as fundamentally different. While the Platonic philo
sophy, which was the chief source of the speculations of
Philo, is, in principle at least, a dualism, recognising an
original distinction, and even opposition, between the
maker of the world and the matter out of which it is made,6
the philosophy which the Kabbalists attempted to blend
with the belief of their fathers is in principle a pure
pantheism, adopting as its foundation the hypothesis of an
absolute unity — a God who is at the same time the cause,
the substance, and the form of all that exists and all that

1 miDb- Cf. Franck La Kab- « Strictly speaking, the Platonic
bale, Preface p. 1 ; Ginsburg, The philosophy recognises three inde-
Kabbalah p. 4. pendent principles, the Demiurge,. the
2 Eeuss, Art. ' Kabbala,' in Her- ideal world, and the primitive matter.
zog's Encyklopadie, VII. p. 195. But the ideal world, which was also in
0 Cf. Franck, La Kabbah p. 270. its own way recognised by the Kab-
4 i.e. the dialect of Jerusalem bala, does not bear upon our present
Chaldee modified by Hebrew. Cf. comparison, and was, by the later
Franck, I. c. p. 103. Platonists at least, not regarded as an
5 e.g. the theory of ideas, the pre- independent world, but as existing in
existence and the transmigration of the mind of the Deity.
souls. See Franck, pp. 241, 262.

lect. in. CLASSIFICATION OF GNOSTIC SECTS. 35
can exist. » The Kabbala has been asserted to be .the parent
of the philosophy of Spinoza ; 2 and whatever may have
been the historical connection between the two, the
similarity of their principles can hardly be denied. In
the place of the personal God, distinct from the world,
acknowledged in the Old Testament, the Kabbala sub
stitutes the idea of an universal and infinite substance,
always active, always thinking, and in the process of
thought developing the universe. In the place of a
material world, distinct from God and created from
nothing, the Kabbalist substitutes the idea of two worlds,
the one intelligible, the other sensible, both being, not
substances distinct from God, but forms under which the
divine substance manifests itself.3 Here we have under
one aspect, that of the universal substance, the principle of
Spinoza, under another, that of the universal process,, the
principle of Hegel.4 The doctrines of the Kabbala are
chiefly contained in two books, known as the ' Sepher
Yetzirah " or ' Book of Creation,' and the book called
' Zohar ' 6 or ' Light.' The former professes to give an ac
count of the creation of the visible world ; the latter, of the
nature of God and of heavenly things — in short, of the
spiritual world.7 Both proceed from the same pantheistic
point of view, though differing in the details of their con
tents.8 The former pretends, to be a monologue of the patri-
1 Franck, La Kabbah p. 263. 3 Franck, La Kabbale p. 258. Cf.
2 By Wachter, who afterwards re- Eeuss in Herzog, Art. ' Kabbala,'
tracted the charge. Cf. Franck, p. 25. p. 197.
Leibnitz, in his Animadversions on * On Hegelianism in the Kabbala '
Wachter's book (published in 1854 by cf. Franck, pp. 162, 186, 193; and
M. Foucher de Careil under the title Milman, Hist, of the Jews III. p. 433.
Eefutation inedite de Spinoza par 5 fTI'V! "IQB.
Leibnitz), partly, though not entirely e ^.f-. -|gp. aname taken from
agrees with Wachter's first view. See .". "'¦'"' , _ •
? , . m, ¦ 7-- o „ni, tr\ Dan. xii. 3, or more commonly int.
also his Theodzcee § 372 (Opera, ' J '-"•
Erdmann, p. 612). For a parallel 7 Franck, p. 74.
between the Kabbala and Spinoza, see " R<™ss "» Herz°g> Art- Kat-
Ginsburg, p. 95. Ma>' P- 197"
d 2

. 36 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. iii.
arch Abraham, and professes to declare the course of con
templation by which he was led from the worship of the
stars to embrace the faith of the true God. J It consists of a
scheme of cosmogony and anthropogony, running parallel
to each other, man being regarded as the microcosm, or
image in miniature of the world, exhibiting in his consti
tution features analogous to those of the universe. The
method reminds us of Thales and Pythagoras together;
the letters of the Hebrew alphabet, together with their
numerical powers, being employed as symbols to represent
the material elements of the world regarded as emanations
or developments of the one divine substance or spirit.2
For the purpose of our present inquiry however, this work
is of little importance compared with the other Kabbalistic
book, the Zohar, in which, if at ah, the traces of a connec
tion between Kabbalism and Gnosticism will be found.
The theory of the Zohar is an attempt to exhibit all
definite existences, spiritual and material, as a series of
emanations, more or less remote, from a primitive abstrac
tion called En Soph (*|1D t*8, to arrsipov, ' that which has no
limits'). This En Soph is the highest of all possible ab
stractions, an incomprehensible unity, having no attri
butes and no definite form of existence, and which there
fore may be regarded as, in a certain sense, non-existent.3
At the same time, it virtually comprehends within itself
all existence ; for all that is emanates from it, and is con
tained in it ; for, as it is infinite, nothing can exist beyond
it. The first order of emanations, by which the primitive
infinite becomes known, consists of the Sephiroth (n'WSp),
a word which has been sometimes explained by Intelli
gences, but which may more probably be identified in
1 Ginsburg, The Kabbalahr>. 65. and Ginsburg, p. 65 seq.
2 For a complete analysis of this a Franck, p. 177 ; Ginsburg, p. 6
book, see Franck, 28me Partie eh. i, (cf. p. 99).

lect. in. CLASSIFICATION OF GNOSTIC SECTS. 37
meaning with its root "isp, - to number,' and with the
verbal Ifip, ' a numbering,' l which is by some supposed to
be the origin of our own word cipher.2 These ten
Sephiroth are the attributes of the infinite Being, having
no reality in themselves, but existing in the divine Being
as their substance, while he (or rather it) is wholly mani
fested in each one of them, they being but different
aspects of one and the same reality.3 They are divided
into three pairs, represented as male and female, with
three combining principles, and a final emanation uniting
the whole.4 This system of the ten primitive Sephiroth
is arranged in a form bearing a fanciful resemblance to
the human body, and their combination is from this
point of view called by the name of Adam Kadmon, the
primordial or archetypal man ; a figurative expression of
the theory which regards man as the microcosm, as the
miniature representation not only of the sensible world, but
of the intelligible systems of which the sensible world itself
is a further development. The division of these principles
into male and female was considered by the Kabbalists as
essential to the production and conservation of all that is
derived from them ; 5 and this fancy reappears, as we shall
hereafter see, in some of the Gnostic systems. From the
conjunction of the Sephiroth6 emanated directly or re
motely three worlds ; two caUed the worlds of creation and
of formation, being spiritual, though of different degrees
of purity, and inhabited by spiritual beings ; the last,
called the world of action, being material, subject to
change and corruption, and inhabited by the evil spirit
and the hosts subordinate to him.7 The final destiny
1 Franck, p. 147 ; Eeuss, p. 199. * Ginsburg, pp. 9, 20; Franck, p. 188.
2 Menage, as cited in Richardson's 6 For the details of this conjunc-
Dictionary, Art. ' Cipher.' tion, see Franck, p. 200 seg., Gins-
3 Franck, p. 178 ; Ginsburg, p. 15. burg, p. 19 seq.
* Ginsburg, pp. 9, 19. 7 Ginsburg, pp. 23, 25.

38 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. hi.
however of these worlds, as of all finite existence, is to
return to the infinite source from which they emanated.
Even the evil spirit himself will ultimately become once
more an angel of light. The souls of men however wiU
not return to the infinite till they have developed all the
perfections of which they are capable, and if this is not
effected in a single life, the soul must migrate into
another body until the development is complete. Some
times two souls are sent into the same body, that the
stronger may help the weaker.1
The resemblance of this strange theory to some of the
Gnostic speculations is undeniable, but the question as
regards the actual historical relation between the two
systems is involved in considerable chronological diffi
culties. If indeed we were to listen to the claims of
some of the Kabbalists themselves, there would be no
difficulty, so far as its antiquity is concerned, in supposing
their doctrine to have influenced every school of philo
sophy from the creation downwards ; for the Kabbala, we
are told, was studied by angels in Paradise, who communi
cated it to Adam after the faU, as a means of restoration
to his lost happiness.2 Even one of its written documents,
the Book of Creation, was supposed by admiring com
mentators to have proceeded from the pen of the patriarch
Abraham, whose meditations it records.3 The most
popular tradition however confines itself within much
more modest limits, attributing the composition of the
Book of Creation to Rabbi Akiba, the standard-bearer of
the insurgent Barcochab, who was put to death by the
Romans after the suppression of the rebellion (a.d. 135),
while the book Zohar is popularly ascribed to Rabbi
Simon ben Jochai, a few years later. There are not
1 Cf. Ginsburg, p. 64; Franck, 2 Ginsburg, p. 2.
p. 217. 3 Franck, p. 86.

lect. in. CLASSIFICATION OF GNOSTIC SECTS. 39
wanting however other eminent critics who maintain an
internal evidence that the Book of Creation cannot have
been written earlier than the ninth century of our era ; '
while the Book of Light is brought down to a still later
date, and regarded as the composition of a Spanish Jew
in the latter part of the thirteenth century.2 It is ad
mitted on all hands that there are portions of the book
which must be regarded as comparatively modern inter
polations ; and even those critics who. contend for the
antiquity of the doctrines allow that the book in its pre
sent form cannot have been completed earlier than the
end of the seventh, or beginning of the eighth century.3
But it is probable that some at least of the doctrines
existed in a traditional form long before the date of the
written authorities. Notwithstanding the fundamental
antagonism between the monotheism or rather pantheism
of the Kabbala and the dualism of the Zoroastrian reli
gious philosophy, the numerous resemblances of detail
which exist between the two systems seem to warrant the
conclusion that the remote origin of the Kabbalistic
traditions must be referred to the period of the Captivity,
and to the influence upon the Jewish mind of the philo
sophy of their Persian masters.4 Many of these resem
blances refer to points which have no direct relation to
our present subject ; but the parallel between the En
Soph, the abstract Infinite of the Kabbala, and the Bound
less Time which stands as a first principle in one form at
least of the Persian doctrine, as well as that between the
1 Zunz in Ginsburg, p. 77. 1305. See Ginsburg, p. 90.
Franck on thefpther hand asserts 3 Franck, p. 135; Beuss in Her-
that the langu^e) of the book shows zog, p. 196; Milman, Hist, of the
that it must have been written not Jews III. p. 431.
later than the middle of the first cen- ' See Franck, pp. 353-390 ; Mil-
tury, if not earlier ; La Kabbale man, Hist, of the Jews III. p. 432 ;
pp. 80, 91. Matter, I. p. 136,
2 Moses de Leon, who died in

40 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. hi.
six Amshaspands or first emanations of the one doctrine
and the ten Sephiroth of the other,1 with the innumerable
subordinate developments of spiritual beings in each, con
stitute a similarity of first principles which can hardly be
explained except on the supposition of a common origin.
The very similarity however of the two systems makes it
difficult to decide whether the Gnostic theories were in
any degree directly influenced by the early traditions of
the Kabbala, or whether the relation between them may
not be accounted for by their common descent from a
Persian source. Matter, the learned historian of Gnosti
cism, propounds this question without venturing to give a
decisive answer to it ; 2 and it may be doubted whether we
are in possession of sufficient materials for a complete
investigation of the case. Yet though the direct influ
ence of the Persian doctrines must be recognised in some
portions at least of the Gnostic teaching, there are others
in which it seems more probable that the influence has
been conveyed through a Hebrew channel. Such, for in
stance, is the division of the supreme emanations into
pairs as male and female, a representation which, if it
appears at all in the original Persian theory, occupies at
least a very subordinate place,3 while in the Kabbalistic
teaching it is made essential to the production of an en
during offspring in the inferior emanations. The same
distinction appears at the very beginning of the Gnostic
teaching. Simon Magus, who, if not, as he is usually con
sidered, the founder, must at least be regarded as the
precursor of the Gnostic heresies, and who professed to be
1 That the Persian Amshaspands, " Matter, vol. I. p. 117, says, 'Les
like the Jewish Sephiroth, are but Amshaspands sont des deux sexes.'
allegorical names for the attributes of But in the Zend Avesta one only of the
the Deity, see Quarterly Review for . six isfemale, and the sexual distinction
October, 1867, p. 456. is not connected with any theory of
2 Histoire Critique du Gnosticisme generation. See Bleeck's Avesta, Part
I. p. 141. ii. p. 29.

lect. in. CLASSIFICATION OF GNOSTIC SECTS. 41
' the great Power of God,' * is described as carrying about
with him a certain woman named Helena, ' of whom he
said that she was the first conception of his mind, the
mother of all things, by whom in the beginning he con
ceived the idea of making the angels and archangels ; for
that this conception (hanc ennoian) proceeded forth from
him, and knowing her father's wishes, descended to the
lower world, and produced the angels and powers by whom
the world was made.' 2 The relation thus profanely as
serted to exist between Simon himself claiming to be the
first power or emanation from God, and his female com
panion announced as his own first ennoia or conception,
almost exactly corresponds to the Kabbalistic account
of the highest pair of Sephiroth, proceeding from the
crown or primordial emanation. At first there proceeded
forth a masculine or active potency designated Wisdom
(nD?n). This Sephira sent forth an opposite, i.e. a femi
nine or passive potency, denominated Intelligence (>V3),
and it is from the union of these two, which are called
the Father and Mother, that the remaining seven Sephiroth
proceeded.3 Another remarkable parallel may be found in
the language of Irenseus with regard to a later school of
Gnostics — the Marcosians, or disciples of Marcus, a fol
lower of Valentinus. ' Some of these,' he says, ' prepare
a bridal chamber, and perform certain mystic rites of
initiation with incantations addressed to the persons
being initiated. This ceremony they say is a spiritual
marriage after the similitude of the celestial unions (/caret
ttjv ofiowrriTa t&v avco av^vyt&v) . Others bring their dis
ciples to the water, and baptize them with the following
form of words : Into the name of the unknown Father of the
1 Acts viii. 10. 3 Ginsburg, The Kabbalah p. 8.
2 Irenseus, i. 23. Cf. Burton, Cf. Franck, p. 343.
Bampton Lectures p. 390.

42 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. m.
universe, and into truth, the mother of all things, and into
him who came down upon Jesus, and into unity, and redemp
tion, and communion of powers. Others repeat Hebrew
words over the initiated, the more to amaze them.' x The
words themselves are given by Irenseus in the continua
tion of the passage, but the text is so corrupt that hardly
any sense can be made of them.2 Yet the mention of the
celestial unions and of the father and mother of all things,
as well as the employment of Hebrew words in their in
cantations, seem to indicate not only that these heretics
had, in common with other Gnostics, adopted a classifica
tion of divine emanations as male and female, but also
that they had derived their classification from some source
in which the language employed was the same as that of
the Jewish Kabbala.3
Other parallels will come before us when we proceed
to treat of the details of the several Gnostic sects. At
the present stage of the inquiry it will be more appro
priate to sum up the results in a general and provisional
form, which we may do by borrowing the language of the
learned French expositor of the Kabbala. Of the two
most distinguished leaders of the Gnostic schools, Basilides
and Valentinus, M. Franck remarks : ' In the remains
which have descended to us of these two celebrated
heresiarchs we can without difficulty detect the presence
of the most characteristic elements of the Kabbala ; such
as the unity of substance, the formation of things first by
concentration, then by gradual expansion of the Divine
light, the theory of pairs and of the four worlds, the two
Adams, the three souls, and even the symbolical language
of numbers, and of the letters of the alphabet. . . . We
1 Irenseus, i. 21. 3. Cf. Eusebius, Bampton Lectures p. 305.
H.E.iv. 11, and Theodoret, Hmr. Fab. 2 Cf. Massuet's note on this pas-
i. 14, who notices the use of Hebrew sage of .Irenseus.
terms by the Gnostics. See Burton, 3 Cf, Matter, vol. I. p. 141.

lect. in. CLASSIFICATION OF GNOSTIC SECTS. 43
have already shown that the metaphysical ideas which
form the basis of the Kabbala are not borrowed from the
Greek philosophy ; that, far from having been the native
products of either the Pagan or the Jewish school of
Alexandria, they were imported into those schools from
Palestine ; and finaUy we have shown that Palestine, or
at least Judea properly so called, is not even itself the
cradle of the doctrines ; for, notwithstanding the impene
trable mystery with which they were surrounded by the
doctors of the synagogues, we find them, though in a form
less abstract and less pure, in the unbelieving capital of
the Samaritans, and among the heretics of Syria. . . .
The foundation of these ideas remains always the same ;
nothing is changed in the relations between them or in
the formulas in which they are clad or in the strange tra
ditions which accompany them.'1
I shall conclude this lecture with a brief account of
the various attempts that have been made in modern
times (the early authorities in this respect are altogether
deficient) to form something like a classification or syste
matic arrangement of the several Gnostic schools, so as to
exhibit the scattered notices which we possess of their
several tenets with some regard to their philosophical
affinity ahd connection with each other. It must be pre
mised however, that all such attempts coming as preli
minaries to an account of the details of the different
systems must be regarded as merely general and pro
visional. The grounds which may be alleged in justifica
tion or in condemnation of one or another cannot be fully
understood till the details themselves are before us ; and
though a preliminary account of these classifications is of
interest in itself, and may help to throw light on what is
1 La Kabbale p. 350 seg. For the Gnosticism, see Burton, Bampton
Adam Kadmon of the Kabbala in Lectures p. 305.

44 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. ni.
to follow, we are not yet in a position to judge between
the several principles, and to decide which is best sup
ported by the actual features of the several systems with
which they attempt to deal. Nevertheless, as such classi
fications have occupied the attention of some of the most
learned and acute inquirers of modern times, and as most
of the recent writers on the subject have attempted some
thing of the kind as a preliminary to a more detailed
examination, I shall venture in this respect to follow their
example by giving a short statement of what has hitherto
been done in this province.
The first writer who attempted to classify the Gnostic
systems on any other ground than that of mere chrono
logical sequence, is the learned Mosheim, briefly in his
' Ecclesiastical History,' and more fully in his ' Commen
taries on the Affairs of the Christians before the time of
Constantine the Great.' ' It wiU be easily perceived,' he
says in the latter work, ' by any one who shall have care
fully investigated the account here given of the sects
called Gnostic, that there is this principal point of differ
ence between them ; namely, that while some retained
whole and entire the ancient Oriental doctrine of two
principles of things, others subtracted something from it
and supplied the deficiency by foreign inventions.. AU
agree in admitting the existence from aU eternity not
only of God, but of a matter containing the cause of all
depravity and evil. . . . But those who sprang up in Syria
and Asia assigned to this eternal matter a special Lord
and Master, either self-existent or sprung from matter
itself; thus recognising, in addition to the good principle,
an evil principle, which however was regarded as distinct
from the Creator of the world. Those on the other hand
who sprang up in Egypt, such as Basilides, Valentinus,
and others, know nothing of this Prince of matter, though

lect. iii. CLASSIFICATION OF GNOSTIC SECTS. 45
they added to the Oriental teaching various fancies and
inventions of Egyptian origin.'1 A similar principle of
classification is adopted by another learned German
Church historian, Gieseler, who however finds it neces
sary to add to the Egyptian and Syrian schools a third
class comprising Marcion and his followers.2 A more
philosophical principle of arrangement has been suggested
by Neander, who distinguishes the Gnostic sects into two
classes according to the relation which Christianity, in
their conception of it, is supposed to bear to the Jewish
religion and to the God of the Old Testament. All the
Gnostic systems had one feature in common ; namely, that
they regarded the Old and the New Testament as revela
tions of two different Gods, and considered the mission of
Christ to proceed from a higher power than the God of
the Jewish religion, who was identified with the Demiurge
or Maker of the world. But under this common assump
tion there was room for two very opposite estimates of the
older revelation and of the God whom it reveals. Some
of the Gnostic sects regarded the Demiurge as a being
altogether alien from and opposed to the Supreme God ;
others considered him merely as a subordinate power,
inferior but not hostile to the Supreme God, and acting,
before the coming of a more perfect revelation, as his
unconscious organ.3 By the former, Judaism was re
garded as a religion wholly antagonistic to Christianity,
and which the higher revelation was designed to destroy.
The latter regarded it as an imperfect preparation for
Christianity, which the higher revelation was designed to
complete. From this point of view the Gnostic schools
may be divided into two classes, those hostile to and those
1 De Eebus Christ, ante Const. §§45-47.
p. 410. 3 Neander, Church History, II.
2 Gieseler, Eccl. Hist. vol. I. p. 39 (ed. Bohn).

46 SOURCES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. hi.
comparatively favourable to Judaism. Under the former
head Neander classes the Ophites, as well as the schools
of Carpocrates, Saturninus, and Marcion. Under the
latter he reckons Cerinthus, Basilides, Valentinus and his
foUowers, and Bardesanes. As Mosheim's classification
was supplemented . by Gieseler, so that ¦ of Neander has
been supplemented by Baur, who adds Heathenism to
Judaism as two religions whose relations to Christianity
and to each other were contemplated from different points
of view, and thus he recognises three principal forms of
Gnosticism. The first, which embraces most of the earlier
sects, including the schools of BasUides, Valentinus, the
Ophites, Saturninus, and Bardesanes, regarded the pre-
Christian forms of religion, the Heathen no less than the
Jewish, as preparations for Christianity and partial dis
coveries of the truth. The second, represented by Marcion,
regarded Christianity in the light of a system whoUy
antagonistic both to Judaism and Heathenism ; while the
third, to which belongs the system of the Clementine
Homilies, and perhaps that of Cerinthus, endeavoured to
unite Judaism and Christianity together in a common
antagonism to Heathenism.1 In opposition to these
attempts at philosophical classification, the historian of
Gnosticism, Matter, considers the only true classification
to be that which exhibits the succession of events and
points out the principal schools according as they arose
in different countries. From this point of view he recog
nises three principal centres of Gnosticism, Syria, Egypt,
and Asia Minor, and classifies the different sects according
as they were formed under influences emanating from one
or other of these localities. Under this classification the
Syrian Gnosticism is represented by the schools of Satur
ninus and Bardesanes; the Egyptian by those of Basilides,
1 See Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis pp. 114-121.

lect, hi. CLASSIFICATION OF GNOSTIC SECTS. 47
Valentinus, and the Ophites, with some minor sects ; and
the Gnosticism of Asia Minor by Cerdon, Marcion, and
their successors.1
In the midst of these conflicting opinions concerning
the true method of classification, it would be dangerous,
at any rate at the present stage of our inquiry, to attempt
anything like a phhosophical division of the Gnostic sects,
a task which is rendered more difficult by the variety of
the influences under which the different systems were
formed. For the present I shaU endeavour to confine
myself as nearly as possible to a chronological order of
events, commencing with a question in itself the most
interesting, and to be answered from sources with which
we are most famUiar, that of the traces of the existence of
an early Gnosticism to be discovered in the books of the
New Testament. This inquiry will be prosecuted in my
next lecture, from which we shall afterwards proceed to
those later developments which manifested themselves
subsequently to the close of the Canon of Scripture.
1 Matter, Hist. Critique du Gnosticisme I. p. 323 seq.

48 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. iv.

LECTURE IV.
NOTICES OP GNOSTICISM IN THE NEW TESTAMENT.
On the mention of Gnostic teachers contemporaneous with
the Apostles and aUuded to in the New Testament, we are
naturally disposed in the first instance to turn to the
account given in the Acts of the Apostles concerning
Simon Magus, who by general consent, at least of the early
authorities, has been selected as the father and first re
presentative of the Gnostic heresies. Yet with the excep
tion of the expression ' the great Power of God,' which
we shall have occasion to consider hereafter, the narrative
of the Acts throws no light on the peculiar character of
Simon's teaching, the particulars of which must chiefly
be gathered from later and uninspired authorities. The
earliest distinct indications of a Gnostic teaching con
temporary with the Apostles is to be found in the Epistles
of St. Paul ; chiefly, as might naturaUy be expected, in
those addressed to churches, or persons presiding over
churches, in Asia, one of the early centres of the Gnostic
teaching ; to which must be added those addressed to the
city of Corinth, whose commercial activity and constant
intercourse with other centres of civilisation rendered it
easily accessible to the influences of Asiatic and Alexandrian
teaching. In fact the two Epistles to the Corinthians are
the earliest in point of time of the Apostolic writings in
which we can with any probability recognise an aUusion
to the germs of a teaching which afterwards developed

lect. iv. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 49
itself in the Gnostic schools.1 Here we have the earliest
instance of the use of the word yv&ais in a depreciatory
sense, r\ yv&cns <f>vaiol, r) Ss dyairrj oIkoSo/j,si,2 and the oc
casion on which these words are used is such as to warrant
us with some probability in interpreting the term in the
same technical and peculiar sense in which it was after
wards so constantly employed. The question to which the
words relate is the lawfulness of eating meats which had
been offered to idols; and we have evidence that the
lawfulness of partaking of these sacrifices was distinctly
maintained, not merely by the later Gnostics, but by their
precursor Simon Magus, who, under the pretence of superior
knowledge, indulged in this respect in the utmost licence
of practice, maintaining that to those who knew the truth
idolatry was a thing whoUy indifferent, and that whether
they partook of the heathen sacrifices or not was a thing
of no consequence in the sight of God.3 The context of the
passage seems to support this interpretation. The words
of the next verse, sl Be ns Soksi slSkvai, [al. syvaotcsvai] ti,
ovhsrrai ovSsv syvwicsv icdOous Sei yv&vai, sl Ss ns dyaira tov ®sbv,
ovros syvwo-Tat, u7r' avrov, read like a direct rebuke of that
pretension to a perfect knowledge of God and divine things
which forms the basis of the whole Gnostic teaching ; to
which it may be added that Ireneeus, who wrote at a time
when the Gnostic systems were stiU in existence, and who
entitled his work, 'The Detection and Overthrow of Know
ledge falsely so caUed,' expressly cites these words of St. Paul
as having reference to the Gnostic doctrine. ' On this ac
count,' he says, ' Paul declared that knowledge puffeth up
1 Assuming the probable date of Origen, c. Cels. vi. 11, Katrot ye inrip
the two Epistles to the Corinthians as tov irXeiovas vvayaye<r8at o 'Sipav Tbv
AD, 57. irepl toB Bavdrov ntvBwov, ov Xpicr-
2 1 Cor. viii. 1. Tiovol alpe7tr8ai iSiSdx8rio-av, irepieiXe
3 Cf. Burton, Bampton Lectures tS>v paBrrrwv, ivaSiatyopelv avrovs
p. 100, and note 64. His authority is 8i8a|os irpbs t\v eiSw\o\arplay.

50 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. iv.
but charity edifieth ; not as blaming the true knowledge of
God, for then he must first have accused himself; but
because he knew that certain men, elated by the pretence
of knowledge, were falling away from the love of God, and
whUe deeming themselves to be perfect, imagined an im
perfect creator of the world.'1 We may infer also from
other passages in these Epistles that among the opponents
of St. Paul in the Corinthian Church were some who en
deavoured to disparage the authority of the Apostle on the
ground of their own superior knowledge ; and when we find
St. Paul, in writing to this church, both vindicating his
own claim to knowledge so far as such a claim could
be justly made by man, sl Ss ical ISiaiTrjs t& \dyo>, dXk' ov Ty
yvdxrei,2 and at the same time reminding his readers that
aU human knowledge is but in part, and shaU vanish away
when that which is perfect is come,3 these words acquire
a fuller significance if we recognise in the Corinthian
opponents of the Apostle's authority the precursors of
those Ebionite Gnostics who at a later period calumniated
him as an apostate from the Law.4
It is not improbable that Gnostic doctrines are at least
partially and indirectly combated, along with other errors of
a simUar character, in the Apostle's elaborate and trium
phant argument for the resurrection of the body in the
fifteenth chapter of the First Epistle.5 It is true that this
article of the Christian faith was so entirely opposed to aU
the schools of heathen phUosophy (as may be seen from
St. Paul's dispute on the same topic with the Epicureans
and the Stoics at Athens), that it is difficult to select
any one school of heathen thought as peculiarly or especiaUy
referred to. But we shaU see a little later how the pe-
1 Census, °- B-<Br. ii. 26. * Cf. Neander, ChurchHist.I p. 479.
I ? °01- x!:.6- s Cf. Burton, Bamptm Lectures
3 1 Cor. xm. 8, 10. p. 133.

lect. iv. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 51
culiarly Gnostic form of this error appears in the teaching
of St. Paul's subsequent opponents, Hymenseus and Phi-
letus ; and we may reserve what has to be said on this point
tiU we come to speak of the Epistle in which their heresy
is mentioned.1 Passing over the very doubtful allusions to Gnosticism
which some have supposed to exist in the Epistle to the
Romans,2 we come next in order to the letters addressed
to the two Asiatic churches of Ephesus and Colossse. Here
we are in one of the chief centres of Gnostic influences, both
as regards phUosophical teaching and practical addiction
to magic arts and enchantments ; 3 and here, accordingly,
we find aUusions to the Gnostic teaching more frequent
and more distinct. When the Apostle prays that his
Ephesian converts may know the love of Christ which
passeth knowledge (ttji' {nrsp/3aWovo~av tyjs yvdxrsws dydir^v
tov Xpio-Tov),* we are reminded of that contrast between
knowledge and love, on which he had previously insisted
in his advice to the Corinthians ; and when he adds ' that
ye may be fiUed with all the fulness of God ' (wa irk^pwdrfTs
sis irav to TfKr\pwixa tov ®sov) ,5 we are at least conscious -of
the use of a current term in Gnostic phraseology, though
the verse does not, taken by itself, necessarUy imply an
allusion to Gnostic theories.6 But when in two other
1 Burton, Bampton Lectures p, 84, 5 Ibid. Cf. Burton, B. L. p. 83.
seems to allow a possible allusion to 6 The literal meaning of wA-fipwpa
Gnosticism in the wisdom censured by is either ' id quod impletum est,' or
St. Paul, 1 Cor. i. 21, ii. 6. But 'id quo res impletur'; and the pas-
these passages may as probably refer sage may mean, ' up to the measure of
to Greek philosophy. ' . that which is filled with God,' i.e. ' so
2 Burton, p. 96, supposes a refe- as yourselves to be thoroughly filled
rence of this kind in Bom. xvi. 17- with God,' or 'up to the measure of
19, which he allows to be the only one. that with which God is filled,' i.e. ' so
3 Acts xix. 19. Cf. also the as to be full of the spiritual perfec-
' Ephesian letters,' for which see tions with which God is filled.' Elli-
Matter, I. p. 204, Burton, Bampton cott and Alford seem to adopt the
Lectures p. 83. latter sense, but the former best suits
4 Ephes. iii. 19. the use of irKiipiepa in the other pas-
) B 2

52 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. iv.
passages of the same Epistle we find the Church spoken
of as the body of Christ, ' the fulness (to TrXr/pcofia) of Him
thatfilleth all in all,'1 and when the Christian is spoken of
as coming ' unto a perfect man, unto the measure of the
stature of the fulness (tou TrXrjpdbfiaTos) of Christ,'2 though
the word in all these passages is used in a different sense
from that in which it held so conspicuous a place in the
Gnostic teaching, we are tempted at first sight to assent
to the surmise that the choice of this term may have been
dictated by a desire to turn the minds of his readers from
the false to the true use of it, to remind them that the true
Pleroma, the place of those united with God, was not in
that mystic region of spirits where the Gnostics placed it,
nor to be attained to, as they asserted, by knowledge only ;
that the body of Christian believers was the true Pleroma
of God — the place which God fills with His presence ; and
that the bond of union which raised man to it was not
knowledge, but love.^3 And this surmise is perhaps con
firmed bythe words which follow the last of these passages,
and which seem distinctly to point to a false teaching
which it is designed to correct : ' That we henceforth be
no more children, tossed to and fro, and carried about
with every wind of doctrine, by the sleight of man, and
cunning craftiness, whereby they lie in wait to deceive.'4
The interpretation however of these passages must be
admitted to be very doubtful ; and it is at least an open
question whether the use of the term rrr\ripwp,a was
sage. Philo, De Pram, et Pan. 11 2 Ephes. iv. 13.
(p. 418 m), uses it of the human soul, s Cf. Burton, Bampton Lectures
yevopivw nhifpupa aperioy T) tyv-)(4) ; and pp. 125, 6.
this seems to correspond to its appli- * Ephes. iv. 14. The last words,'
cation to God as filled with all excel- iv vavovpyia -rpos tV peSoSeiav ttjj
lencies. Cf. Olshauseu on Ephes. ir\dvris, may be more literally rendered,
'in craftiness tending to the delibe-

i. 23.

Ephes. i. 23. rate system of error.' See Ellicott

lect. iv. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 53
suggested to St. Paul by Gnostic writers, or borrowed by
them from the New Testament.
The Epistle to the Colossians, which was written at
the same time with that to the Ephesians, contains how
ever more distinct indications of the existence of Gnostic
errors among those to whom it was addressed.1 The false
teaching which the Apostle denounces in this Epistle seems
to have manifested itself in the form of a combination of
Judaism with Gnosticism, such as was, afterwards more
fully developed in the teaching of Cerinthus ; though the
tradition which brings Cerinthus himself into personal col
lision with St. Paul wiU hardly bear the test of chronology.2
The characteristics of this teaching may be easily
gathered from evidence furnished by the language of the
Epistle. First ; it pretended, under the plausible name of
philosophy, to be in possession of a higher knowledge of
spiritual things than could be obtained through the
simple preaching of the Gospel. Secondly ; it adopted the
common tenet of all the Gnostic sects, that of a distinc
tion between the supreme God and the Demiurgus or
creator of the world. Thirdly ; by virtue of its pretended
insight into the spiritual world, it taught a theory of its
own concerning the various orders of angels and the
worship to be paid to them. And fourthly ; in connection
with these theories, it enjoined and adopted the practice
of a rigid asceticism, extending and exaggerating the cere
monial prohibitions of the Jewish law, and probably con
necting them with a philosophical theory concerning the
evU nature of matter.3
' Probably from Borne, during imprisonment at Csesarea from a.d. 58
St. Paul's first imprisonment, a.d. 61 to 60.
or 62. Both Epistles were sent by the 2 Cf . Neander, Planting of Christi-
hands of Tychicus ; Ephes. vi. 21, anity p. 325 (ed. Bohn).
Coloss. iv. 7. Some consider them to 3 See Neander,. Pto*^ of Christir
have been written during the earlier anity p. 321.

54 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. iv.
All these characteristics may be distinctly traced in
the warning language of St. Paul. As regards the first,
we find him bidding his readers to beware lest any man
spoil them ' through phUosophy and vain deceit, after the
tradition of men, after the rudiments of the world, and
not after Christ ; ' l and he speaks of the false teacher as
'intruding into things which he hath not seen, vainly
puffed up by his fleshly mind.' 2 As regards the second,
we find the Apostle exhausting every power of language
in declaring that by Christ, ' the image of the invisible
God,' ' all things were created, that are in heaven and
that are in earth, visible and invisible, whether they be
thrones or dominions or principalities or powers; all
things were created by Him and for Him ; and He is be
fore all things, -and by Him all things consist.'3 As
regards the third, the obscure text, ' Let no man beguile
you of your reward in a voluntary humUity and wor
shipping of angels,' 4 receives a satisfactory explanation if
we suppose that the well-known doctrine of the early
Gnostics, that the world was created by angels, had
among the Judaizing Gnostics taken, as it naturaUy
might, the form of a worship addressed to them as
mediators between the supreme God and the world.5 And
1 Coloss. ii. 8. The expression ra cott here), or ' for his own arbitrary
o-Toixeta toS koV/*ou seems to mean pleasure.' See Neander, Planting
elementary teaching, sensuous rather p. 327.
than really spiritual, and so belonging « Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 49.
to this world. Cf. Lightfoot and Elli- Simon Magus held that the world was
cott on Gal. iv. 3. created by angels (Irenseus, i. 23).
2 Coloss. ii. 18. On the retaining But Simon's anti- Judaizing tendency
of the negative, S pit Upaicev, see would lead him to regard these angels
Ellicott on this place, and Neander, as governing ill, and to state his own
Planting p. 327. mission as opposed to theirs (Irenseus,
3 Coloss. i. 16, 17. Cf. Burton, I. c), though he seems to have used
B. L. p. 113. their names for magical purposes
4 Coloss. ii. 18. The word fleW (Tertullian, De Prtescr. c. 33).
may be more literally rendered either Judaizing Gnostics on the other
' purposing to beguile you ' (see Elli- hand, identifying the Demiurge with

lect. rv. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 55
finaUy, as regards the fourth characteristic, the spurious
asceticism which manifests itself in subjection to ordinances
of man's commanding, ' Touch not, taste not, handle
not,' and the show of wisdom which consists in wUl-
worship, and humility, and neglecting of the body, are
contrasted with the true mortification of those who are
dead to the world, and whose life is hid with Christ
in God. 'Mortify therefore your members which are
upon the earth : fornication, uncleanness, inordinate
affection, evU concupiscence, and covetousness, which is
idolatry.' [
The Gnostic term pleroma appears in this Epistle as
well as in that to the Ephesians, and with very nearly the
same significance. That which was before said of the
Church, the body of Christ, 'the fulness of Him that
filleth aU in aU,' is now said of Christ, the head of that
body : ' It pleased the Father that in Him should aU ful
ness dwell.' 2 But we may perhaps further remark that
in the second of the two passages in this Epistle in which
the word is used, otl ev ainm KaTOiKel irav to TrXijpwfAa rrjs
OeoTrjTos o-ffl/ttoTWHwy,3 the stress that is laid on this last
word is designed to refute another error of the Gnostic
teaching, arising from their hypothesis of the evU nature
of matter — the denial of the real Incarnation of Christ.
The Docetic heresy was one of the earliest forms of
Gnosticism ; 4 and we shaU have occasion to show that, not
very long after the time at which this Epistle was
written, it came distinctly under the notice of St. Paul,
and was the object of one of his most severe rebukes.
If teaching of this character had begun to corrupt the
Ephesian Church at the time of St. Paul's first imprison-
the God of the 0. T., would be likely 2 Coloss. i. 18, 19.
to worship him and his assistant or a Coloss. ii. 9.
subordinate angels. * See Burton, B. L. p. 158.
1 Coloss. ii. 20-23, iii. 3-5.

56 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. iv.
ment at Rome, when the Epistle to the Ephesians was
written, we find further evidence that the evil had spread
more widely, and taken root more deeply, at a somewhat
later date, when the two Epistles were written to Timothy,
the bishop of that Church. The first of these Epistles,
together with that to Titus, was probably written some
time after St. Paul's release from his first imprisonment,
about a.d. 65 ; and the second, the latest of the Apostle's
writings, during his second imprisonment, shortly before
his martyrdom, probably a.d. 67. In the First Epistle the
heretical teaching is distinctly mentioned under its own
name — tysvSwvvfios yvwais, ' knowledge falsely so caUed ' ; '
though it is doubtful whether the dvTiQscrsis ascribed to
this false knowledge refer to the opposite principles re
cognised in most of the Gnostic systems, or simply to the
opposition which these false teachers offered to the Gos
pel.2 The latter seems on the whole to be the more
simple and probable interpretation. As at the end of the
Epistle St. Paul thus warns Timothy against the falsely-
named knowledge, so at the beginning he bids him not to
' give heed to fables and endless genealogies, which minister
questions, rather than godly edifying which is in faith ' ; 3
a passage which the majority of commentators, ancient
and modern, consider with reason as applying to the suc
cessive emanations of spiritual beings which were asserted
in the Gnostic systems from the very beginning of their
teaching. Nor does it in any way invalidate this inter
pretation, when we find these same genealogies mentioned
in the contemporary Epistle to Titus together with
1 1 Tim. vi. 20. For the former, see Matter, Hist, du
¦' Cf. Burton, B. < L. p. 80. For Gnost. vol. I. p. 208.
authorities for referring this text to 3 1 Tim. i. 4, where owoyopiav
the Gnostics, see ibid, note 37. Elli- should rather be read and rendered
cott on this passage gives reasons for ' a dispensation.' The easier reading
preferring the latter interpretation. olnotioplav is deficient in authority.

lect. iv. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 57
' strivings about the law ' (j*,dyai vop,acal),1 while in the
earlier part of the same Epistle there is a similar warn
ing against ' Jewish fables ' (fir) trpoo-s^ovrss 'lovSaitcois
p,v0ois),2 for we have already seen in the Epistle to the
Colossians how the Gnostic speculations at this time were
accompanied by a spurious asceticism based on the Jewish
law, such as to mark its teachers as men of Jewish origin
and Judaizing tendencies, even if we do not admit an
allusion (which is possible, though disputable on chrono
logical grounds) to the genealogical emanations of the
Jewish Kabbala.3
In the Second Epistle to Timothy, written probably
about two years later than the First, we find an aUusion to
a definite feature of heretical teaching which there is
little difficulty in connecting with Gnostic principles.
The Apostle here writes, ' Shun profane and vain bab
blings, for they wiU increase unto more ungodliness, and
their word wiU eat as doth a canker : of whom is Hymenseus
and Philetus, who concerning the truth have erred, saying
that the resurrection is passed already, and overthrow the
faith of some.' 4 The Hymenseus here mentioned is pro
bably the same person who in the former Epistle to
Timothy is coupled with Alexander as having put away
faith and a good conscience, and made shipwreck con
cerning the faith ; 5 and a reference to the earliest form
of Gnostic error will enable us to understand the exact
nature of the false doctrine here reprehended. One of
the fundamental tenets of Gnosticism from the beginning,
and one which we have already seen manifested in the
corruptions of the Church at Colossae, was the doctrine of
the evU nature of matter and of the material body. This
1 Titus iii. 9. Alfbrd on 1 Tim. i. 4.
2 Ibid. i. 14. * 2 Tim. ii. 16-18.
3 See Burton, B. L. p. 114. The 5 1 Tim. i. 19, 20. Cf. Burton,
same view is held by Vitringa ; see B. L. p. 135.

58 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. rv.
led, as we have already observed, to a denial of the Incar
nation of Christ ; for a Divine being could not be supposed
to assume a body made of evil matter. This heresy mani
fested itself in two forms : first, that of the Docetse, who
held the body of our Lord to be an immaterial phantom ;
and secondly, that of the Ebionites and others, who
asserted that the spiritual being Christ was a distinct
person from the man Jesus; that the former descended
upon the latter at his baptism and left him before his
crucifixion, never being united to him in one person. It
is obvious at once how radicaUy incompatible this theory
must be with the central doctrine of the apostolic preach
ing — the bodily resurrection of Christ as the first fruits of
them that slept, and through Christ the future resurrec
tion to life of those that are Christ's at His coming.
How to such a philosophy was it conceivable that ' Christ
did truly rise again from death, and took again his body,
with flesh, bones, and all things appertaining to the perfec
tion of man's nature ' ? Or how could it be believed that
hereafter * at His coming aU men shah rise again with
their bodies ' ? StUl the doctrine of the resurrection was
too fundamental a point of the Christian faith to be
openly and altsgether denied by any having the slightest
claim to be in any sense believers in Christ. If not openly
repudiated, it must be evaded ; it must be neutralised — to
adopt a device not limited to the first century or to
Gnostic heretics ; it must be * spirituaUy understood.'
There is no doubt a resurrection, but it is a resurrection
of the spirit, not of the flesh. The Gnostic, the man of
religious knowledge emancipated from the dead letter and
outward symbols of truth and admitted by wisdom to the
higher mysteries beyond them, may be truly said to have
passed from death to life, to have risen from the natural
and put on the spiritual state. In this way it was main-

lect. rv. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 69
tained that ' the resurrection is past already,' being a
spiritual process taking place during the present life.1
That such a doctrine was actually held, not only by some
of the later Gnostics, but also by the earliest disciples of
the heresy, may be inferred from the language of Irenseus,
who attributes to the Simonians, the followers of Simon
Magus, as well as to the disciples of the later Carpocrates,
the theory ' esse autem resurrectionem a mortuis agni-
tionem ejus, quse ab eis dicitur, veritatis.' 2 It is probable
that this error may be one of those to which St. Peter
alludes, when he speaks of the unlearned and unstable
wresting passages in St. Paul's Epistles to then own de
struction ; 3 for the heresy in question, though utterly
contradicting the whole tenor of St. Paul's teaching,
might have found an imaginary support in his language
to the Romans and to the Colossians. ' Therefore are we
buried with him by baptism unto death, that hke as
Christ was raised up from the dead by the glory of the
Father, even so we also should walk in newness of life ' ;
and again, ' Buried with him in baptism, wherein also ye
are risen with him through the faith of the operation of
God, who hath raised him from the dead.' 4
I have reserved to the last place the Epistle to the
Hebrews, on account of the doubts that have been raised
as to its authorship. It is probable however, that under
any circumstances the position now assigned to it, if not
strictly in the order of chronology, wiU not be more than
two or three years out of it. If, as I think on the whole
the most probable, we coiisider this Epistle as written or at
least superintended by St. Paul, the most natural date to
assign to it wUl be the year 64 or 65, after the termina-
1 On this doctrine as held by the 2 Irenseus, ii. 31, 2. Cf. Ter-
Gnostics, see Burton, B. L. p. 134, tullian,- De Eesurr. Carnis c. 19.
and note 59. Cf. Alford and Ellicott 3 2 Peter iii. 16.
on 2 Tim. ii. 18. 4 Bom. vi. 4; Coloss. ii, 12.

60 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. iv.
tion of the Apostle's first imprisonment at Rome. It will
thus only just precede the First Epistle to Timothy and
that to Titus. If on the other hand we deny the Pauline
authorship, we may possibly place it a short time after
the Apostle's death, but at all events before the destruc
tion of Jerusalem — probably therefore not later than 68
or 69.1 The date of this Epistle wiU therefore very nearly
coincide with the period which we have just been consi
dering, and we may naturaUy expect to find allusions to
the same phase of false doctrine. And in fact we may
trace in this Epistle probable aUusions to the two great
errors which characterized Gnosticism from the be
ginning — the attempt to distinguish the supreme God,
the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, from the God of the
Old Testament, and the denial of the real Incarnation of
the Redeemer. In the opening words of the Epistle the
writer confidently affirms that it is one and the same God
who spake to the Jews by the prophets and who speaks
now by Christ ; ' God, who at sundry times and in divers
manners spake in time past unto the fathers by the pro
phets, hath in these last days spoken unto us by His
Son.' a And in a subsequent passage the Incarnation of
Christ is asserted in terms which seem to have direct
reference to some of the Docetic theories : ' Forasmuch
then as the children are partakers of flesh and blood, he
also himself likewise took part of the same ; that through
death he might destroy him that hath the power of death,
that is, the devil. . . . For verily he took not on him the
nature of angels, but he took on him the seed of Abra
ham. Wherefore in all things it behoved him to be made
1 Timothy seems to have been rence will be immediately after the
just set at liberty when this Epistle death of Nero in a.d. 68.
was written (Heb. xiii. 23). If this - Heb. i. 1, 2. Cf. Burton, B. L.
event occurred after St. Paul's death, p. 128.
the most probable time of its occur-

lect. iv. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 61
like unto his brethren.' l The occurrence of these allu-
' sions to Gnosticism seems to strengthen the supposition
that this Epistle was addressed, if not to the Jewish
Christians at Jerusalem (which on the whole the language
in which it is written renders improbable 2), at least to
that other seat of Judaism and Jewish worship, Alex
andria, one of the chief centres from which Gnostic doc
trines emanated. If this hypothesis be tenable, it is, to
say the least, a noteworthy coincidence, that of all the
early Christian Churches that of Alexandria is the one
which has most positively and consistently affirmed the
Pauline authorship of the Epistle.3
A separate consideration must be given to a few
passages from these Epistles, which are sometimes cited
as containing allusions to the Gnosticism of this period,
but which labour under some peculiar difficulties, both
chronological and exegetical. I mean those texts in
which the word Mon occurs either in the singular or the
plural number. In the midst of numerous passages of the
New Testament in which this word is undoubtedly used
without any reference to its Gnostic signification, two
have been selected in which the term has by some critics
been interpreted in a personal sense as meaning one of
the spiritual beings of the Gnostic mythology.4
The first of these is in the Epistle to the Ephesians (ii.
2), [Tats dfiapriats] sv ah •KOTSTrspiSTraTrjcraTS /caTti tov alcova
tov Koafxov tovtov, KaTa tov dpxpvTa Trjs s^ovaias tov dspos,
where our translation renders ' according to the course of
this world,' which is probably the true meaning. The
1 Heb. ii. 14, 16, 17. Cf. Burton, Script. Eccles. c. 5.
B. L. p. 167. 3 See the Alexandrian evidence on
2 Unless we accept the tradition this point in Alford's Prolegomena;
of a Hebrew original of this Epistle who however himself holds a different
asserted by Clement of Alexandria, view.
Eusebius, Jerome, and others. Cf. * Cf. Burton, B. L. pp. Ill, 115.
Euseb. iii. 30, vi. 14; Hieron. Cat.

62 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. iv.
Gnostic sense is open to the objection that it makes the
Apostle himself in some degree sanction the Gnostic
mythology, as well as that it is opposed to St. Paul's con
stant use of the term almv in other places.1 The second
passage is that in the beginning of the Epistle to the
Hebrews, Si' ov ical tovs amvas siroirjosv, where again our
English translation, 'he made the worlds,' is more accurate
than that which supposes a Gnostic sense. The latter
interpretation is refuted by the parallel passage in the
beginning of the eleventh chapter, ttIotsi voovfksv Karrjp-
TLcrdcti Toiis almvas prjfiaTt <&sov, sis to pvq sk <patvo/j,si/oov to,
B\s7r6p,sva [al. to f3Xsir6fisvov] ysyovsvat, where the explana
tion of tovs alcovashj to, /3XsTr6/j,sva (or to f3\s-n-6fievov) pre
cludes the possibility of an allusion to the Gnostic iEons.
But a more general objection may be found in the chro
nology of the Gnostic language. Though the term Mon
is known to have been used by Valentinus and others of
the second century to express their emanations of spiritual
beings, there is not sufficient evidence to show that the
word was so used as early as the time of St. Paul, or
rather there is some evidence to the contrary. In a
curious fragment from a work of Simon Magus which has
been preserved by Hippolytus, the term occurs apparently
in a different sense ; 2 and the language of Hippolytus
himself in a subsequent passage seems to imply that the
term Mons was first introduced by Valentinus as an inno
vation on the language of Simon.3
1 See especially Gal. i. 4 Ik tov of all things. Cf. Harvey's Irenmus,
iveffTunos alwvos irovTjpod, ' from this Introd. p. lxvii.
present evil world ' or ' course of 3 Hippol. B. H. vi. 20, p. 258
things.' (Duncker), Ov~tos S*i Kal 5 Kara, rbv
2 Simonis 'Air6(pa<ris Meydkn in 'Sipava pvBos, lup' ov ObakeyrTvos ras
Hippol. Eef. Hmr. vi. 18, p. 250 (ed. lupoppas Kafrliv &\Kois bvdpaai xa\e7.
Duncker), Siio eiVl TrapaQvdSes tuv 6 yap vovs Kal fi a\ri8ela, /cal \6yos k»!
'6\uv a'uiyay, where the term aluves fiuj), xdi &v8pamos Kal eKKKr\aia ot
seems to mean the first principle OiaKevTtyov a'taves, SpoKoyovpeyas

lect. rv. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 63
Thus far we have examined the traces of early Gnosti
cism furnished by the Scriptures of the New Testament
down to the death of St. Paul. We must postpone to
another lecture the examination of the evidence furnished
by later writings, particularly those of St. John.
et-txlv al Upayos l| ^Ifoi, voOr, iirivoia, <p»W), ivopa, Koyiopbs Kal iv8vpr\ais.
Cf. Matter, I. p. 303.

64 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. v.

LECTURE V.
NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM IN THE NEW TESTAMENT.
Our last lecture was occupied with an examination of
those notices of Gnostic doctrines or practices which are
to be found in the Scriptures of the New Testament down
to the death of St. Paul, a date not more than three years
earlier than the destruction of Jerusalem. Before pro
ceeding to examine the later historical notices of the
same errors which are to be found in those portions of the
sacred writings which belong to the last thirty years of
the century, it may be weU to caU your attention for a
short time to some passages of the earlier Scriptures in
which the Gnostic teaching appears to be noticed, not by
way of historical reference to that which was already in
existence, but by way of prediction of that which was to
come. Three passages at least may be pointed out as
containing prophecies of this kind, two from the writings
of St. Paul, and a third from those of St. Peter. The
earliest in point of time is the well-known passage in the
First Epistle to Timothy (iv. 1) : ' Now the Spirit speaketh
expressly, that in the latter times some shaU depart from
the faith, giving heed to seducing spirits and doctrines of
devils;1 speaking lies in hypocrisy,2 having their con-
1 StdaffKaAiais Saipoviuv, i.e. doc- 2 iv xnroKp'uret ifievSo\6ywv, properly,
trines emanating from evil spirits, not ' in the hypocrisy of speakers of lies.'
doctrines about devils. Cf. Pearson The A. V. connects \pevSo\6yaiy with
Minor Theol. Works II. p. 45, and Al- Satpoviav inaccurately.
ford and Ellicott on this passage.

lect. v. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 65
science seared with a hot iron ; forbidding to marry and
commanding to abstain from meats, which God hath
created to be received with thanksgiving of them which
believe and know the truth.' The expression iv vo-Tdpois
Xpovois, which our translation renders in the latter times,
may be more accurately rendered in after times, meaning
some time subsequent to that at which the Apostle is
writmg, but by no means necessarily a remote future or a
time immediately preceding the end of all things.1 It
seems clear indeed from the context, that the writer is
referring to an apostasy the beginning of which was dis
cernible in his own day,2 though its full development
might be reserved for a later period. The false asceticism
which we have already pointed out as corrupting the
Church at Colossae, the judging in meat and drink, the
Touch not, taste not, handle not, may here be discerned in
the command to abstain from meats, though it maybe that
the prohibition of marriage, which afterwards formed a
conspicuous feature in the teaching of Saturninus and
Marcion, had not yet extended itself from the Jewish
Essenes 3 to any body claiming the name of Christians.
That the passage has a prophetic reference to the Gnostics
of the second century is expressly maintained by the early
Fathers, Clement of Alexandria and Tertullian ; 4 and the
historical aptitude of the reference perhaps receives fur
ther confirmation in this, as in the next prediction to be
quoted, by the use of the expression ' them which know
the truth' (sirsyvcoKotriv ttjv dXr)6siav).
The other prophecy of St. Paul, from the Second
1 Cf. Alford and Ellicott on this cf. Josephus, Ant. xviii. 1. 5, B.J.
passage. ii. 8. 2 ; Pliny, N. H. v. 17.
2 This may be inferred from the * Clem. Alex. Strom, iii. 12 (p. 550,
directions given to Timothy per- Potter) ; Tertullian, De Prmser. Hmr.
sonally, vv. 7-rll. c. 33. Cf. Pearson's Minor Works
3 On the celibacy of the Essenes, II. p. 51.

66 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. v.
Epistle to Timothy (iii. 1-7), no doubt has a principal
reference to events stiU future and to be fully accom
plished in the times immediately preceding the second
coming of the Lord. Yet there is distinct evidence that
the Apostle regarded his words as having a partial fulfil
ment in his own day and in the times immediately to
follow his approaching death. Whilst he prophesies that
' in the last days perilous times shall come,' and describes
the men of those times in language in which we can only
very partially trace a likeness to the false teachers of the
Apostolic age, yet his warning to his own son in the faith,
' from such turn away,' and the transition in the next two
verses from the future tense to the present, seems to indi
cate the Apostle's conviction that the features which he
prophetically depicted as characterizing the men of the
last days were at least partiaUy realised in the age in
which he was writing.1 The words, ' For of this sort are
they which creep into houses and lead captive siUy
women,' might remind us of what the Apostle himself
may have seen in Simon Magus and Helena, and in the
beginnings, probably already discernible, of the teaching
and practice of the Nicolaitans : 2 whUe the language in
which these deluded captives are further described, ttovtots
fiavddvovTa Kal p,r)SsTroTS sis eTrtyvcocnv dXrjdslas kXdslv
Svvdfisva, seems to imply that one of the chief aUurements
of this teaching was the promise which it held out of
attaining to a superior knowledge.
The third predictive passage, written probably about
the same time with the last, is from the Second Epistle of
St. Peter, and is one of which the fulfilment appears to
have followed very closely upon the prophecy. In this
passage, as in the one just cited from St. Paul, the cha-
1 Cf. Bp. Bull, Sermon xv, Works I. p. 372 (ed. 1827),
2 Cf. Burton, B. L. p. 152.

lect. v. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 67
racteristics of the false teachers who are condemned by the
Apostle seem to comprise the two features of immoral
hving and pretension to a peculiar knowledge. 'There
shall be,' he writes, 'false teachers among you, who
privUy shall bring in damnable heresies, even denying the
Lord that bought them, . . . and many shaU follow their
pernicious ways ; by reason of whom the way of truth
shaU be evU spoken of.'1 In the continuation of the
passage the same persons are spoken of as presumptuous,
as despising government, as speaking evil of the things
that they understand not ; * and a little later it is said,
' Spots they are and blemishes, sporting themselves with
their own deceivings while they feast with you ; having
eyes full of adultery and that cannot cease from sin ; be
guiling unstable souls ; an heart thej' have, exercised
with covetous practices ; cursed children ; which have for
saken the right way, and are gone astray, following the
way of Balaam the son of Bosor, who loved the wages of
unrighteousness.' 3 . . . And again he continues, ' For
when they speak great sweUing words of vanity, they
allure through the lusts of the flesh, through much
wantonness, those that were clean escaped [roiis ovtojs
dwotpvyovras, al. those that are hardly escaping, tovs oXiyms
d-n-otpsvyovTas'] from them who live in error. WhUe they
promise them liberty, they themselves are the servants of
corruption.'4 In these words- we have a description of a false teaching
and practice partly already present when the Apostle
wrote, but to be further developed hereafter, proceeding
from persons who bore the name of Christians and took
part in the Christian feasts, but whose immoral lives were
the occasion of calumnious accusations against the whole
1 2 Peter ii. 1, 2. 3 2 Peter ii. 13, 15.
¦' w. 10, 12, 4 ii. 18, 19.
F 2-

68 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. V.
body of the Church : persons moreover, who laid claim to
a liberty which placed them above the ordinary restraints
of morality, and who, under this pretext, seduced many
that had once been converts to the Christian faith. How
exactly this description applies to some of the Gnostics of
the next century wUl be seen hereafter, but there is
evidence also of its partial accomplishment in the Apo
stolic age itself, as indeed the state of things here described
is one of tbe natural results of teaching extant in that
age. The Gnostic tenet of the evil nature of matter, and
the consequent worthlessness of the body, might lead and
did lead with them, as in other times and countries, to
two very opposite moral results. In some, as we have
already seen, it manifested itself in a spurious asceticism,
which strove in every possible way to mortify the flesh as
a means of emancipating the soul from its influence. But
in the eyes of others the soul was everything, the body
was nothing. Provided the soul were furnished with the
true knowledge, it would derive no poUution from a thing
so worthless and so foreign to it as a material body ; all
bodily actions therefore were wholly indifferent, and
might be practised at wiU without affecting the sublime
state of the wise soul. Some at a later period even went
further than this, and maintained that the moral law, with
the whole Jewish economy, having proceeded from an evil
being, it was a duty in the enlightened man to transgress
the law, in order to free himself from the yoke of the
Creator of the material world.1 The ascetic side of this
teaching we have already seen noticed in the Epistle to the
Colossians and in the First Epistle to Timothy ; the licen
tious side we have now seen partially described in the
Second Epistle to Timothy, and more fuUy in the contem-
1 Cf. Burton, B. L. p. 41.

lect. v. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 69
poraneous Second Epistle of St. Peter, and we shall after
wards see it noticed again in the writings of St. John.
But before proceeding to these last writings, it wiU be
necessary to caU your attention to another book of the
New Testament, which, as regards the time of its compo
sition, may, I think, be most fitly assigned to some period
intermediate between the deaths of St. Peter and St. Paul
and the appearance of St. John's writings towards the
end of the century. I mean the Epistle of St. Jude. The
resemblance between this Epistle and the Second of St.
Peter is too close to be accounted for by undesigned coin
cidences, and we must suppose that one of the writers has
availed himself of a similarity of circumstances to repeat
in substance the rebukes and warnings of his brother
Apostle. Some eminent modern critics have attempted,
on the very precarious evidence of style, to assign the
priority in time of writing to St. Jude ; but there are two
circumstances which appear to me to prove most conclu
sively that St. Jude's Epistle was written after that of St.
Peter, and with express reference to it. The first is, that
the evils which St. Peter speaks of as partly future, St.
Jude describes as now present. The one says, ' There
shall be false teachers among you ; ' x the other says,
' There are certain men crept in unawares, who were be
fore of old ordained to this condemnation.' 2 The other
circumstance is stUl more to the point. St. Peter in his
Second Epistle has the remarkable words, toOto irpSyrov
yivobaicovTSs, oti sXsvaovTat stt ia^arov twv f]fispmv [al. sir
so-^aTav t&v rjp,spa>v\ ifiiraiKTai, /card Tas ISlas ainSiv
¦mOvfilas Tropsvofisvoi.3 St. Jude has the same passage,
repeated almost word for word, but expressly introduced
1 2 Peter ii. 1. The future tense 2 Jude 4.
is continued through the two following 3 2 Peter iii. 3.

70 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. v.
as a citation of Apostolic language : vfisis Ss, dyairr]TOi,
p,vr)a6r)TS t&v prj/mTav t&v irposLprjfisvcov vwo t&v airocrToXwv
tov Kvplov rjp,&v 'Irja-ov Xpt,crTov, oti, sXsyov v/uv on sv ia%a.T<p
ypova [al. sir' scryaTov tov yp6vov\ scrovrat sp/iraiKTat, Kara
Tas havi&v siridvplas iropsvofisvot t&v dosfSsi&v.1 The use
of the plural number (t&v diroo-roXcov) may be explained by
supposing that the writer may also have intended to
allude to passages similar in import, though differently
expressed, in the writings of St. Paul (such as 1 Tim.
iv. 1, 2 Tim. iii. 1), but the verbal coincidence can hardly
be satisfactorUy explained, unless we suppose that St. Jude
had principally in his thoughts, and was actually citing
the language of St. Peter.2 On these grounds we are
justified in regarding the Epistle of St. Jude as written
after the death of St. Peter, and probably some time after,
when the evils, which the earlier writer saw only in their
commencement, had attained to a fuUer development and
could be spoken of as actually in being, though not even
yet so far advanced as they appear subsequently in the
Revelation of St. John.3
In the language of St. Jude, as in that of St. Peter,
which it closely imitates, we may clearly discern a refer
ence to the Gnostic sect of the Nicolaitans,4 mentioned
by name in the Revelation. The comparison, in aU these
passages, of the error condemned with that of Balaam

1 Jude 17, 18. commandment of us the Apostles,'
2 Cf. Wordsworth on both pas- in general terms. He does not cite
sages, and Hengstenberg on the Eeve- the next verse as an Apostolic predic-
lation, I. p. 14 (Eng. Trans.). Alford tion.
attempts to explain the coincidence by 3 Cf. Hengstenberg on Eevelation,
supposing that St. Peter's words are I. pp. 14, 15, Wordsworth, Introduc-
also a reminiscence of things before tion to St. Jude, and Schaff, Hist, of
said by the Apostles. But St. Peter Apost. Church II. p. 374.
only mentions in a previous verse, not * That the Nicolaitans were Gnos-
directly connected with this, 'the tics, see Burton, Bampton Lectures
words of the holy Prophets and the p. 145.

lect. v, IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 71
is decisive as to the identity of the persons intended.1
The other characteristics noted by St. Peter are also re
peated by St. Jude — their denial of the Lord; their profli
gate lives ; their contempt of government, and evil speak
ing of dignities and of things that they know not ; their
pollution of the feasts of charity; their great swelling
words. The antinomian, no less than the ascetic side of
Gnosticism, seems by this time to have fuUy manifested
itself. Of the writings of St. John we may perhaps, though
with considerable hesitation, assign the earliest date to
the Apocalypse. The Gospel we may with tolerable con
fidence regard as prior to the Epistles; and, in the absence
of more conclusive evidence, we have at least the authority
of tradition for placing the Apocalypse before the Gospel.2
At all events, it wiU be convenient to adopt this order
in our present examination, on account of the illustration
which the Apocalypse affords to the two Epistles which
we have just been considering. The general testimony
of antiquity assigns the date of the Apocalyptic vision
to the close of the reign of Domitian, i.e. to the year
95 or 96,3 nearly thirty years after the death of St.
Peter and St. Paul, a date at which we may expect that
the heresies which had only begun to manifest them
selves to the elder Apostles would have attained to some
maturity, and perhaps have divided themselves into
various schools.
The Revelation is the only book of Scripture in which
1 See 2 Peter ii. 15; Jude 11; says that St. John wrote his Gospel
Eev. ii. 14. while residing at Ephesus.
2 Clement of Alexandria, Quia " So Irenseus, Eusebius, Jerome,
Dives salvus § 42 (Potter, p. 959), and others. The only exception is
speaks of St. John as having taken up Epiphanius, in whose statement there
his abode at Ephesus after his de- is clearly an error. See Alford's Pro-
parture from Patmos. Irenseus, iii. 1, legomena.

72 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. v.
we find a sect of the Gnostics mentioned by name ; for the
general testimony of the Fathers warrants us in classifying
as a branch of the Gnostics the persons who are there
spoken of under the name of Nicolaitans.1 ' This thou
hast,' the Apostle is bidden to write to the angel of the
Church of Ephesus, ' that thou hatest the deeds of the
Nicolaitans, which I also hate.' 2 And again, to the
angel of the Church of Pergamos ; ' I have a few things
against thee, because thou hast there them that hold
the doctrines of Balaam, who taught Balak to cast a
stumbling-block before the chUdren of Israel, to eat
things sacrificed to idols, and to commit fornication.
So hast thou also them that hold the doctrine of the
Nicolaitans, which thing I hate.' 3 Two characteristics
of the Nicolaitans are here mentioned : first, their eating
of things offered to idols; secondly, their immoral living.4
The former connects them with the yv&o-is reproved by St.
Paul in the First Epistle to the Corinthians ; s whUe the
latter, together with the comparison to Balaam, connects
them with the false teachers denounced by St. Peter and
St. Jude.
We have the testimony of Irenseus, foUowed by Hippo
lytus,6 as weU as of Clement of Alexandria,7 for deriving
the name of these heretics from their reputed founder,
Nicolas, the proselyte of Antioch, one of the seven
deacons, whose native country, Syria, was one of the
homes of early Gnosticism. It is true that the anec
dote related of Nicolas by Clement seems to represent his
1 Burton, B. L. p. 145. Cf. 16. Cf. Burton, B. L. p. 147 ; Her-
Neander, Ch. Hist. II. p. 119. zog, X. p. 338.
2 Eev. ii. 6. 5 1 Cor. viii. 1.
' Eev. ii. 14, 15. * Irenseus, i. 27 ; Hippolytus, E.H
4 OStws exeis Ka' <** KT-X- Rev. ii- vii. 36. Neander ( Ch. Hist. II. p. 122)
15 ; i.e. as Balaam taught Balak of old, considers the tradition apocryphal.
so do the Nicolaitans teach now. The ' Clem. Alex. Strom, iii. 4 (p. 523
reference ib to Num. xxv. 1, 2, xxxi. Potter). Cf. Eusebius, H. E. iii, 29.

lect. v. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 78
so-caUed followers as giving a false interpretation to the
teaching of their master ; l but on the other hand both
Irenseus and Hippolytus represent Nicolas himself as
teaching that all actions are morally indifferent, and the
latter expressly speaks of him as an apostate from sound
doctrine. Even the anecdote related by Clement, while it
appears to deny the charge of personal licentiousness,
betrays at least a want of reverence for the sanctity of
marriage.2 The ingenious conjecture of some modern
critics, that the name Nicolaitans was not derived from a
person, but is a Greek equivalent for the name of Balaam,
which means destroyer or corrupter of the people,3 is pro
bably more ingenious than true. It is opposed to the
earliest tradition, and is not without etymological diffi
culty, destroyer or corrupter being by no means the same
as conqueror.* Another passage in the same chapter of the Apoca
lypse, which has probably a reference to Gnosticism, occurs
in the message to the angel of the Church of Thyatira ;
' Unto you I say, and unto the rest in Thyatira, as many
as have not this doctrine, and which have not known the
depths of Satan, as they speak.' 5 In the expression, ovk
syvcoo-av tu fiddr) tov aaTavd, some commentators have sup
posed an ironical aUusion to the Gnostic claim to a know
ledge of the deep things of God ; 6 but it seems more
natural to refer it to their favourite inquiry into the
nature and origin of evil,7 or even more especially to the
boast of the Ophites.8

1 Sri TiapaxpfaatiBai Tp aapKl Sei. Church II. p. 377.
2 Cf. Harvey's Irenmus, Introd, 5 Bev. ii. 24.
p. lxx. " Schaff, II. p. 378.
8 See Hengstenberg on Eev. ii. 6, 7 Cf. Herzog, Encykl., Art. ' Niko-
and Neander, Ch. Hist. II. p. 120 ; laiten,' vol. X. p. 338.
DI? \hl, (absorptio populi). 8 Hippol. v. 6. See below, Lecture
4 Cf. Schaff, Hist, of the Apost. VII, on the Ophites, p. 105.

74 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. v.
As regards the Gospel of St. John, we have the ex
press testimony of Irenseus, that it was written to oppose
that form of the Gnostic heresy which was taught by
Cerinthus, and, before him, by the Nicolaitans.1 The
nature of that heresy, so far as it concerns our present
inquiry, may be stated in the words of the same Father :
' A certain Cerinthus,' he says, ' in Asia, taught that the
world was not made by the Supreme God, but by some
power altogether separate and distant from that Sovereign
Power which is over the universe, and one ignorant of the
God who is over aU things. He taught moreover, that
Jesus was not born of a virgin (for this seemed to him
to be impossible), but was the son of Joseph and Mary,
born after the manner of other men ; though pre-eminent
above other men in justice and prudence and wisdom :
and that after his baptism the Christ, in the form of a
dove, descended upon him from that Sovereign Power
which is over all things : and that he then announced the
unknown Father, and wrought miracles ; but that at the
end the Christ departed again from Jesus, and that Jesus
suffered and was raised from the dead, whUe the Christ
continued impassible as a spiritual being.' 2
That the first chapter of St. John's Gospel contains
passages directly opposed to this heresy is evident on the
most casual inspection. The words, 'All things were
made by Him, and without Him was not anything made
that was made,' 3 strike directly at the root of that false
principle common to all the Gnostic schools, which re
garded the Creator of the world as a being distinct and
remote from the Redeemer and from the Supreme God ;
while the declaration that ' the Word was made flesh and

1 Irenseus iii. 11. restored by Harvey as the original
2 Irenseus i. 26, closely followed text of Irenseus.
by Hippolytus vii. 33. The latter is 3 John i. 3.

lect. v. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 75
dwelt among us,' 1 is equaUy opposed to that other error
of Cerinthus, which taught that the man Jesus and the
spiritual being Christ were whoUy separate beings, only
temporarUy united by the indwelling of the one in the
other. We have also other notices, which fix Cerinthus as
having been a contemporary of St. John,2 and it is quite
possible that his doctrines may have been directly before
the mind of the Apostle when he wrote the above passages.
But though Cerinthus may have been one of the first who
exhibited the doctrines of the Jewish Alexandrian phUo
sophy in the form of a heresy concerning the Person of
Christ, we must look to an earlier writer for the source of
the error and for an explanation of the language in which
the Apostle's protest is couched.3 Cerinthus, as we are
expressly told, though he taught in Asia, learnt the prin
ciples of his heresy in Egypt ; and the two great errors of
Gnosticism — the separation of the Creator from the Su-
' preme God, and the abhorrence of matter as the source of
aU evU — may be found before Cerinthus, in that Alex
andrian Judaism which has its representative in PhUo.
The choice of the term 6 A6.yos as a designation of Christ,
the assertion of the eternity and proper Deity and Incar
nation of the Logos, have a direct relation and antagonism
to the Jewish Gnosticism of Philo, as well as to the
Christian Gnosticism of Cerinthus. There was in fact
an earher Gnosticism founded on the perversion of the
Law, as there was a later Gnosticism founded on the
perversion of the Gospel ; and it is possible that when St.
John wrote, the influence of both had begun to be felt in
the Christian Church, and had modified to some extent
1 John i. 14. 3 Cf. Dorner, Person of Christ
2 Cf. Irenseus, iii. 3; cited by I. p. 17 (Eng. Tr.), and Burton,
Eusebius, H. E. iii. 28, iv. 21. Bampton Lectures p. 223.

76 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM lect. v.
the language of its theology.1 The aim of the Apostle, in
adopting this language as a vehicle of Christian teaching,
seems to have been both to correct the errors which had
actually crept into the Church, and also to counteract the*
influence of the source from which they sprang.
As the Gospel of St. John was in some portions of its
language directed against the teaching of Cerinthus, who,
in common with the Ebionites, denied the Deity of our
Lord, so the language of his Epistles seems partly to be
directed against another form of the Gnostic error — that
of the Docetse, who denied His proper humanity. The
opening words of the First Epistle, ' That which was from
the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen
with our eyes, which we have looked upon, and our hands
have handled, of the word of life — that which we have
seen and heard declare we unto you,' 2 announce the
direct sensible evidence of an eyewitness and personal
friend to the reality of that human body in which his
Master lived on the earth ; while the subsequent language
of the same Epistle is yet more explicit and more dis
tinctly controversial in its tone : 3 ' Beloved, beheve not
every spirit, but try the spirits whether they are of God,
because many false prophets are gone out into the world.
Hereby know ye the Spirit of God ; every spirit that con-
fesseth that Jesus Christ is come in the flesh is of God,
and every spirit that confesseth not that Jesus Christ is
come in the flesh is not of God ; and this is that spirit of
antichrist, whereof ye have heard that it should come,
1 See Burton, Bampton Lectures Christian spirit. The Apostle is
P- 218. clearly warning his reader against a
2 1 John i. 1-3. false form of Christianity. The as-
3 It seems impossible to refer this sumption of some critics (e.g. Eitschl,
language to the mere Jewish expecta- Altkatholische Kirche pp. 342, 454)
tion of a future Messiah. Jews would of the late origin of Docetism is per-
never pretend to be inspired by a feetly arbitrary.

lect. v. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 77
and even now already is it in the world.' l The same lan
guage is repeated in the Second Epistle : ' For many de
ceivers are entered into the world, who confess not that
Jesus Christ is come in the flesh. This is a deceiver and
an antichrist.' 2 It is also possible, as a learned writer on
this subject has remarked, that St. John may have had
the same heresy in view, when in his Gospel he bears wit
ness in such significant and emphatic language to the
actual issue of blood and water from the side of Him
whom they pierced : 'And he that saw it bare record, and
his record is true ; and he knoweth that he saith true,
that ye might believe.' 3
Other passages in St. John's First Epistle seem, from
the terms in which they are expressed, to have a more
direct reference to the heresy of Cerinthus, which we have
already noticed in connection with the Gospel. The
vehement language in the second chapter of this Epistle,
' Who is a liar, but he that denieth that Jesus is the
Christ ? ' and the corresponding expression in the fourth
chapter, ' Whosoever shaU confess that Jesus is the Son
of God, God dweUeth in him, and he in God,' though
capable of being referred to other forms of error, yet
acquire an especial significance when we remember the
existence at this very time of heretical teachers who
maintained that Jesus and the Christ were two separate
beings, and distinguished between Christ who descended
from the Supreme God, and Jesus the man upon whom
he descended.4
1 1 John iv. 1-3. by water and blood' (B. L. p. 188).
2 2 John 7. This is very possible, though it seems
3 John xix. 35. Cf. Burton, B. L. more natural to understand the blood
p. 170, as referring to Christ's death, than to
4 Cf. Burton, Bampton Lectures His birth into the world. We might
p. 185. Dr. Burton also sees a refer- perhaps paraphrase the text, ' Christ
ence to Gnosticism (Cerinthianism) in was not merely joined to Jesuc at His
1 Jchn v. 6, ' not by water only, but baptism, to leave Him before His

78 NOTICES OF GNOSTICISM. lect. v.
It is not without profit for us in these latter days to
examine this record of the Apostolic treatment of early
and, it might be thought, obsolete heresies. There are not
wanting teachers at the present time who tell us, in the
spirit of the Gnostics of old, that dogmas and historical
facts are no part of the Christian religion ; that there is a
spiritual sense in which these things may be understood
which is superior to the letter ; that we may be Christian
in spirit without troubling ourselves about the facts of
Christ's earthly life, or the supernatural doctrines con
nected with His Person. How far this teaching is en
titled to call itself by the name of Christian may be tested
by the evidence of him who of all the first teachers of
Christianity can least be accused of a harsh or narrow
view of the terms of Christian communion ; who loved to
dwell, not on opinions about Christ, but on the hope and
spirit of Christ Himself; who is never weary of enforcing
the precept of love to our brethren ; whose last breath
passed away in the constant repetition of the one summary
of his teaching, ' Little children, love one another.' Of
all men he would surely be the last to deny the claim of
Christian brotherhood to any that could truly urge it.
Yet it was a dogma — the Incarnation of the Divine Son — a
historical fact — the birth of Jesus Christ and His life as a
man — which caUed forth from his lips the strong words of
indignation and abhorrence against aU gainsayers : ' Who
is a liar, but he that denieth that Jesus is the Christ ?
.... Every spirit that confesseth not that Jesus Christ
is come in the flesh is not of God : and this is that spirit
of antichrist.' 1
crucifixion. It is one and the same the cross.'
Jesus Christ, who manifested Himself * 1 John ii. 22, iv. 3.
by water in baptism and by blood on

lect. vi. SIMON MAGUS AND MENANDER. .79

LECTURE VI.
PRECURSORS OP GNOSTICISM — SIMON MAGUS AND MENANDER.
When, from the incidental notices of Gnostic doctrines
existing during the lifetime of the Apostles, we proceed to
inquire concerning the history of these doctrines and the
persons by whom they were taught, we find the early
Fathers almost unanimously agreed in referring the origin
of the Gnostic heresies to a man of whom a brief and
passing mention is made in the New Testament, and who
thus serves as the connecting hnk between Scripture and
ecclesiastical tradition as regards the history of false
doctrine.1 Simon Magus, the person in question, appears
sufficiently early in the Apostolic history to aUow of the
spread of his doctrines almost pari passu with the preach
ing of Christianity, and to account for the notices of those
doctrines which we have already pointed out as existing
in the Apostolic writings. Within seven years (to take
the longest probable interval) after the Lord's Ascension,2
we read that when the Church was scattered abroad after
the martyrdom of St. Stephen, PhUip went down to a city
(not the city, as in the A.V.) of Samaria,3 and preached
Christ unto them, . . . 'But the re was a certain man
1 For the authorities who regard even less.
Simon as the parent of Gnosticism, 3 The name of the city is not
see Burton, Bampton Lectures p. 87. mentioned. Possibly Sychar or Si-
2 For the chronology, see Alford's chem, which is mentioned in the same
Prolegomena to the Acts, p. 22. Others manner, John iv. 5.
shorten the interval to one year, and

80. PRECURSORS OF GNOSTICISM: lect. vr.
called Simon, which beforetime in the same city used sor
cery, and bewitched the people of Samaria, giving out that
himself was some great one ; to whom they all gave heed,
from the least to the greatest, saying, This man is the
great Power of God.' l If we adopt the reading which has
the best claim to be considered as the true text, Ovtos
sctiv -fj Svva/j,is tov ®sov rj KaXovfisvrj fisydXr), ' This man is
that power of God which is caUed great,' i.e. which is
known as the great one, we obtain a clearer insight into
Simon's pretensions than is afforded by the reading from
which our version is made. The language of the Sama
ritans may be most naturally understood as an acknow
ledgment of the truth of Simon's claims in his own
behalf;2 and it would thus appear that Simon maintained
the existence of various powers or emanations from God,
and gave himself out to be the chief of all.
We are at once reminded of the Svvd/j,sts or ' divine
powers ' of Philo, and of the supreme power, the Aoyos, and
we may conclude that Simon had at least borrowed from
the Jewish Alexandrian phUosophy so much of this hypo
thesis as was convenient for his own purpose,3 though in
representing this supreme power as assuming a human
body in his own person, he seems at first sight to place
himself in distinct opposition to the spirit of that philo
sophy — an opposition which can only be avoided by attri
buting to him a Docetic doctrine, which, as we shall see
hereafter, there is some ground for ascribing to him.
Simon indeed seems to have borrowed indiscriminately
from Alexandrianism and Christianity, in order to exalt
himself and his teaching as the rival of both. In the
Jewish philosophy of Alexandria the Logos, or revealed
1 Acts viii. 5, 9, 10. of the Alexandrian philosohy. See
2 This obviates DeWette's objection Alfordhere.
that the Samaritan people were not 3 Cf. Gfroerer's Philo, vol. II.
likely to be familiar withthe language p. 372.

lect. vi. SIMON MAGUS AND MENANDER. 81
God, is identified with the Creator of the world and with
the God of the Jewish people. But Sim-on, a Samaritan
by birth,1 and a teacher among the Samaritan people,
represents the spirit of national hatred, hostile alike to
the phUosophy of the Jewish Platonists and to the Chris
tian revelation which acknowledged a Messiah of Jewish
birth.2 In announcing himself as the supreme • Power of |
God, he probably intended to avail himself of the current
language of the Alexandrian philosophy to support his
own pretensions to a mission which that philosophy
would have been the last to recognise, and at the same
time to pervert the Christian doctrine of God manifest in
the flesh by setting up himself as a rival Messiah, in the
strictest sense of the term an Antichrist. It is true that,
awed for a time by the superior powers of the preachers
of the Gospel, Simon professed himself a Christian and
submitted to be baptized, but his subsequent conduct says
little for the sincerity of his profession ; and it is probable
that he merely regarded the Apostles as magicians of
higher powers than himself, and wished to purchase their
gifts for his own purposes.3 At all events the momentary
impression in favour of Christianity seems ultimately to
have had no other effect than to stimulate his rivalry ; N
and it is not improbable that his continued assumption of
the title of the Logos in furtherance of an antichristian
1 Justin Martyr, himself a Sama- zog, vol. XIV. p. 392'.
ritan, calls Simon a native of Gitton 2 From John iv. 25 it is clear that
or Gitta in Samaria, Apol. i. c. 26 ; the Samaritans expected a Messiah,
cf. Apol. ii. u. 15. Justin's own birth- but it is probable that they expected
place makes him in this respect -a. one of Israehtish {i.e. Samaritan, as
better authority than Josephus {Ant. they opposed the term to Jewish)
xx. 7. 2), even supposing that the birth. At least this is the view of
Jew of Cyprus there mentioned is the the later Samaritans ; cf. Petermann
same person with Simon Magus. But in Herzog, vol. XIII. p. 373.
the name of Simon was so common 3 Moller in Herzog, XIV. p. 391.
that we may reasonably suppose them Cf. Milman, Hist, of Christianity II.
to have been different ' persons. Cf. p. 45.
Moller, Art. ' Simon Magus,' in Her-

82 PRECURSORS OF GNOSTICISM: lect. vi.
teaching may have had some share in prompting the em
ployment of the same term by St. John as a designation
of the true Messiah. That Simon actually adopted this
name, as weU as the cognate term Svvafiis, from the
Alexandrian philosophy, may be gathered from the
language attributed to him by St. Jerome, who professes to
be citing from his writings : ' Ego sum Sermo Dei, ego sum
speciosus, ego paracletus, ego omnipotens, ego omnia Dei."
According to another account given by St. Irenseus, Simon
is said to have spoken of himself as having appeared to
the Jews as the Son, to the Samaritans as the Father, and
to the Gentiles as the Holy Spirit2 — language in which
we may probably trace the distortion of Christian terms
in an heretical sense,3 to express the superiority of that
Divine manifestation which he boasted of as residing in
himself to those which had been made of the same Deity
to other nations through other representatives. Another
account, which, however differing in detaUs, implies the
same theoretical doctrine, is aUuded to by Justin Martyr,
and detailed at length by Irenseus. ' Simon,' says the
latter author, 'having purchased a certain woman named
I Helena, who had been a prostitute in the city of Tyre,
carried her about with him, and said that she was the first
Conception 4 of his mind, the mother of all things, by whom
in the beginning he conceived the thought of making the
angels and archangels ; for that this Conception (hanc En-
1 S. Hieron. in Matt. xxiv. 5 3 In a Sabellian sense, to denote
{Opera, Vallarsii VII. p. 193). not three Persons but only three
2 Irenseus, c. Hmr. i. 23. Cf. Hip- manifestations of the same being.
polytus Eef. Hcer. vi. 19 ; Theodoret, Cf. Massuet, Diss. Prmv. in Irenamn.
H<er. Fab. i. 1. In the subsequent Ian- i. § 100. Massuet gives a different in-
guage of Irenseus, ' Esse autem se sub- terpretation of Simon's purpose in as-
limissimam virtutem, hoc est eum qui suming these three relations.
sit super omnia Pater,' the latter words 4 evvoiav, Justin, Apol. i. 26 ; and
may perhaps, as Burton supposes the translator of Irenseus himself uses
(B. L. p. 388), be a gloss of Irenseus the Greek word just below.
himself in explanation of the former.

lect. vi. SIMON MAGUS AND MENANDER. 83
noian) proceeded forth from him, and knowing her father's
wishes, descended to the lower world, and produced the
angels, and powers ; by whom also he said that this world
was made. But after she had produced them, she was
detained by them through envy, since they were unwilling
to be considered the offspring of any other being; for he
himself was entirely unknown by them ; but his Concep
tion was detained by those powers and angels which were
put forth from her, and suffered every insult from them
that she might not return upward to her father ; and this
went so far that she was even confined in a human body,
and for ages passed into other female bodies, as if from
one vessel into another. He said also that she was that
Helen on whose account the Trojan war was fought; ....
and that after passing from one body to another, and con
stantly meeting with insult, at last she became a public
prostitute, and that this was the lost sheep. On this
account he himself came, that he might first of all reclaim
her and free her from her chains, and then give salvation
to men through the knowledge of himself.1 For since the
angels ruled the world badly, because every one of them
desired the chief place, he had come down for the restora
tion of all things, and had descended, being changed in
figure, and made like to principalities and powers and
angels,2 so that he appeared among men as a man, though
he was not a man, and was thought to have suffered in
Judea, though he did not suffer. . . . Furthermore he
said that the prophets uttered their prophecies under the
1 Sia ttjs ISias eirvyvdio-ews, Hippol. sen {Hippolytus, vol. I. p. 48) supposes
vi. 19 ; 'per suam agnitionem,' Transl. quite arbitrarily, that Simon, or the
Iren. The Greek shows clearly the person writing in his name, is here
Gnostic element. giving an account, not ot himself, but
2 Hippol. vi. 19 Qopoiavpevov rais of Jesus. Bunsen's view is rejected
a-pxais Kai rats i{,ov<riais «al tois 0776- by his admirer Milman, Hist, of
Aois; ' Transl. Iren. ' assimilatum vir- Christianity II. p. 51.
tutibus et potentibus et angelis.' Bun- G 2

84 PRECURSORS OF GNOSTICISM: lect. vi.
inspiration of those angels who framed the world ; for
which reason they who rest their hope on him and his
Helena no longer cared for them, but as free men could
act as they pleased, for that men are saved by his (i.e.
Simon's) grace, and not according to their own just works,
for that no acts were just by nature, but by accident,
according to the rules established by the angels who made
the world,1 and who attempt by these precepts to bring
men into bondage. For this reason he promised that the
world should be released and those who are his set at liberty
from the government of those who made the world.'2 In
another passage of Irenseus the doctrine of Simon is
summed up more briefly. ' Simon Magus,' he says, ' was
the first to declare that he himself was the God who
is over all things, and that the world was made by his
angels.'3 From this strange medley of Christian, Jewish, and
heathen ideas, we may without much difficulty disen
gage the leading principles of Simon's teaching. In
common with the Alexandrian Platonists and with all
the subsequent Gnostics, he distinguished between the
Supreme God and the Creator of the world, and adop
ting with some modifications a hint furnished by the
figurative language of Plato's Timseus, he considered the
material world to be the work of subordinate beings who
were in rebellion against the higher powers emanating
from the Supreme God. Combining with this phUosophy
a strange perversion of the Christian doctrine of redemp
tion, he seems to have represented himself as the subse
quent receptacle of the same Divine power which had
1 ov ydp iarupvaei KaKbv aWii. Eef. Ha>r. vi. 19; Tertullian, De
fleVei. eBevro ydp, tpri<rlv, ol &yye\oi Anima c. 34 ; Epiphanius, Hcer.
k.t.K. Hippol. vi. 19. xxv. 4; Theodoret, Hcer. Fab. i. 1.
2 Irenseus, i. 23, partly translated 3 Irenseus, ii. 9.
by Burton, B. L. p. 390. Cf. Hippol.

lect. vi. SIMON MAGUS AND MENANDER. 85
previously dwelt in Jesus, and in his person had appeared
to suffer in Judea.1 The mention of our Lord's humanity
and suffering as apparent but not real seems to point to
Simon as the first teacher of the Docetic heresy ; but if
this interpretation be put upon his language, we must
suppose that in consistency he maintained his own body
to be unreal also ; and there are not wanting other notices
which give an incidental support to this supposition.2
Combined with these philosophical theories we find that
hostUity to the Jewish law and scriptures which became
afterwards characteristic of .a large school of Gnostics,
and those licentious doctrines concerning moral distinc
tions which afterwards conferred an evil notoriety on
Carpocrates and Epiphanes, and which were too much in
accordance with the practices of Simon himself.
In the wild and grotesque theory of Simon concerning
the nature and past history of his companion Helena, we
may trace an aUusion to that division of the Divine
emanations into pairs, male and female, which we find in
another form in the Jewish Kabbala, and concerning which
we find some further details in other notices of the teach
ing of Simon. In the recently discovered work of Hippo
lytus against heresies an account is given of the doctrine
of Simon as contained in a work called the 'Great
Announcement' ('Air6(j)aat,s MsydXrj), which is cited as the
production of Simon himself.3 According to this work
the principle of all things is a certain indefinite power
(dirspavTos Svvafus) which is spoken of under the name of
1 Cf. Burton, Bampton Lectures surdity to suppose this work written
pp. 117, 396. by the Simon Magus of the Acts. He
2 See the strange story told in the gives however no reason for this
Clementines, Horn. ii. 24, of the staff strong assertion, and allows that it
of Dositheus passing through Simon's may have been the work of Dositheus
tody. " or Menander. Hippolytus evidently
3 Milman {Hist, of Christianity regarded it as a genuine work of
II. p. 50) says that it were utter ab- Simon.

86 PRECURSORS OF GNOSTICISM: lect. vi.
Fire, and also under that of Silence.1 Under the name of
Fire it is described as having two natures, one secret and
one manifest, the secret nature being hidden in the
manifest, and the manifest produced by the secret ; the
one embraces the whole intelligible and the other the
whole sensible universe. The world was generated from
the ungenerated fire by means of six roots or principles of
things, which are produced from the primitive fire in pairs,
called vovs and hrivoia, (pcovrj and ovofia, Xoyiafibs and
svdvfj,7)o-Ls.2 In these six roots is potentially contained the
whole of the primary indefinite power, which power, he
says, is manifested as 6 sctt&s, o-Tas, o-Trjaofievos. By this
last term seems obscurely to be designated the Gnostic or
perfect man represented by Simon himself, who is re
garded as the consummation or perfect fruit of this pro
cess of manifestation, combining in himself the whole
development of the Divine principle and identified with
it.3 The six partial roots or emanations of the same
principle have each its material counterpart, vovs and
hrivoia answering to heaven and earth, <pa>vr) and ovop,a to
the sun and moon, Xoyiap.bs and svOvfirjais to air and water.4
Man, that is to say the perfect man or Gnostic, is the
counterpart and complete manifestation of the whole. In
a subsequent passage Hippolytus teUs us that the roots
(pl&t) of Simon's system correspond under a different
name with the seons (al&vss) of his successor Valentinus.5
The whole theory is illustrated by an aUegorical interpre
tation of the Mosaic account of the creation worthy of
Philo Judseus himself. Of this theory, which is repeated
in an abridged form by Theodoret,6 the more abstract and
1 Hippol. Eef. Hcer. vi. 9, 18. 3 Cf. Moller in Herzog, vol. XIV.
2 Hippol. vi. 12. The same three 396, 397.
pairs are mentioned by Theodoret iSs?-. 4 Hippol. vi. 13.
Fab. i. 1, where however ivvoia is 5 Hippol. vi. 20.
substituted for ivopa. ' Har. Fab. i. ].

lect. vi. SIMON MAGUS AND MENANDER. 87
metaphysical portion contains much which we have already
seen partly represented in the Oriental sources of Gnos
ticism. The six roots, together with the indefinite power
which is their source, remind us of the six Amshaspands
of the Persian theosophy, with Ormuzd, their source, as a
seventh. The perfect man, the completion of all the
Divine powers, corresponds to some extent with the Adam
Kadmon of the Kabbala ; and the relation of these roots
or powers, half of which are represented as female, to the
indefinite power which gave rise to them and to the
perfect man who is the image of that power, illustrates
the position assigned in other notices to Simon as the so-
called representative of the Father of aU things, and to
Helena, under whose form is concealed the first Ennoia
or Conception sprung from the Father. But there is
another singular feature of this mystic rhapsody which we
may doubt whether to refer to an Oriental or to a Greek
source, and that is the concrete and physical description
of the primitive power under the name of fire. Hippolytus
notices the analogy in this respect between Simon's philo
sophy and that of Heraclitus,1 and it is quite possible that
the Samaritan magus may have foUowed the philosopher
of Ephesus in introducing a theory of metaphysical
pantheism under the imagery borrowed from the pheno
mena exhibited by the material element. But we may
also remember that the Persian religious philosophy con
trasts the good and evU principles under the forms of
light and darkness, and that its disciples, if not literally, as
they are commonly called, fire-worshippers, at least re
garded fire as an emblem of the JDivine power.2 But
whatever may be the origin of the theory, its whole tenor
leads to the conclusion that the fire of which it speaks is
1 Hippolytus, Ref. Hcer. vi. 9.
2 Max Miiller, Chips from a German Workshop I. p. 169.

88 PRECURSORS OF GNOSTICISM: lect. vi.
not to be understood literaUy but figuratively, as the
emblem of some spiritual force, the several moments of
whose development are supposed to explain the real
nature of the universe. Thus interpreted, the theory bears
a strong resemblance to that scheme of logico-meta-
physical pantheism which formed the culminating point
of the German spiritual philosophy of the last generation,1
and which has been strangely enough revived in connec
tion with a materialistic hypothesis by a recent writer in
our own country ; 2 the scheme which represents the
Divine nature in the form of a universal process passing
through successive stages of lower development, and
finaUy becoming conscious in man.
One continuous fragment of the 'ATr6(pa<ns MsydXv has
been preserved by Hippolytus, in which the above theory
is exhibited in the author's own language. I wUl not
say that a literal translation will make the above expo
sition more inteUigible ; but in this respect Simon Magus
(if he be indeed the author of the work) only shares the
fate of some of his German foUowers in recent times.
Simon, we are told, speaks expressly in his 'Announce
ment ' as follows : ' Now I say to you that which I say,
and write that which I write. The scheme is this :
There are two offshoots of the perfect ages,3 having
neither beginning nor end, from one root, which is the
invisible, incomprehensible Power, Silence ; of which one
is manifested from above, the great Power, Intellect
(vovs) of the universe, that administers aU things, the
''In reading Miller's German ex- used in the same sense in which God
position of the theory, we might almost is called i flacri\evs tuv aldvuv,
fancy, were the Greek citations omitted, 1 Tim. i. 17 (cf. b Qebs twv aluvwv,
that we were reading an extract- from Ecclus. xxxvi. 17), meaning aiaves
Hegel. twv almvav, the aggregate of the ages,
2 Bray, On Force p. 75.. or eternity. Cf. Ellicott and Alford on
3 t&v Zhav aimvav, fe. probably of 1 Tim. i. 17. See also Burton, B. L.
eternity. The term alwves seems to be p. 110.

lect. vi. SIMON MAGUS AND MENANDER. 89
Male Principle ; and the other from beneath, vast Thought
(sTrivoia), generative of aU things, the Female Principle;
whence in mutual correspondence (dvTio~ToiypvvTss) they
combine in consort, and exhibit the mean space as an
immense atmosphere, having neither beginning nor end.
But within it is the Father that upholds and sustains all
things that have beginning and end. This is he who
standeth, who stood, who wUl stand (o sctt&s, ends, aTr/cro-
p,svos), being a bisexual power (dpcrsvoOijXvs Svvafiis), the
reflex of the pre-existent indefinite power, still subsisting
in solitude, which hath neither beginning nor end ; for
from him, Thought subsisting in solitude, emanating,
made two. Yet he was one, for having her within him
self, he was alone, not in truth first, howbeit pre-existent,
but himself, manifested from himself, became second.
But neither was he called Father, before his Thought so
named him. As therefore evolving himself from himself
he revealed to himself his own Thought, so also the
revealed Thought acted not [otherwise],1 but seeing him,
she hid within herself the Father, which is the power ;
and thus Thought also is a bisexual power ; so that in this
way they mutually correspond (for Power differs in no
respect from Thought), being one. Power is found to be
from above, Thought from beneath. It is thus that the
manifestation also emanating from, them, being one, is
found to be two, a bisexual, having the female within
itself. He is Intellect in Thought, and these being
separated from each other,2 being one, are found to be
two.' 3
If we adhere to the distinction pointed out in a pre-
1 ou/c inoinaev. Harvey conjectures by Harvey, ' Being one inseparably
irolrio-ev aKKas. from each other.'
2 a x<°P'<TTa air' aAA^AwK, the read- 3 Hippol. Eef. Hcsr. vi. 18. The
ing of Duncker and Schneidewin. translation is chiefly taken from
Miller's text reads hx^p^ra, rendered Harvey, Irenceus Introd. p. Ixvii.

90 PRECURSORS OF GNOSTICISM: lect. vi.
vious lecture between heresy properly so caUed and a
merely unchristian or antichristian philosophy,1 it is not
easy to assign to the system of Simon (and the same may
be said of that of his successor Menander) a definite posi
tion in the one class or the other. On the one hand, the
conception of a redemption, of a Divine interposition to
deliver the world from the dominion of evil, a conception
common to Christianity and to the later forms of Gnos
ticism, and which distinguished both from heathen sys
tems of philosophy, is also present, though in a grossly
perverted form, in the teaching of Simon. The material
world is the work of, and is under the dominion of, re-
beUious powers ; a divine power descends from above, in a
seemingly human form, to effect its deliverance. But on
the other hand, this doctrine differs widely even from the
most depraved of the later Gnostic systems, in that the
heaven-sent deliverer is not Jesus, but Simon himself.
There is no recognition of the person and work of Jesus
Christ as the Redeemer, save in so far as an inferior and-
imperfect mission is ascribed to Him, subordinate to that
claimed by Simon for himself. Were it not that the office
of Christ, however degraded and distorted, is still that of
a Redeemer, and not merely of a teacher, we should be
disposed to say that the relation of Simon's teaching to
that of Christianity more nearly resembles that after
wards assumed by Mahommedanism than that of any sect
pretending to the name of Christian. Simon however is a
false Christ; not merely a false prophet. If we admit
his system to a place among the Gnostic heresies, it is not
because it has any pretension to the name even of a here
tical Christianity ; but partly because it borrows, whUe it
perverts, the Christian idea of Redemption, which the later
Gnostics also adopted in a less perverted form, and partly
1 See above, Lecture I.

lect. vi. SIMON MAGUS AND MENANDER. 91
because the heathen ideas upon which its metaphysical
speculations are based were transmitted by it to the later
systems, and constitute an historical as well as a philoso
phical link of connection between them.1
The personal history of Simon Magus, after he dis
appears from the narrative of the Acts of the Apostles,
has assumed various traditional forms, aU of these having
more or less of a legendary character, though possibly
with some fragment of real history imbedded in them.
Hegesippus, the earliest ecclesiastical writer by whom his
name is mentioned, speaks of him merely as one of the
heretics proceeding from the Jewish sects, among whom
he reckons the Samaritans.2 As we proceed to later
writers, the notices of Simon become more definite. His
countryman, Justin Martyr, tells us that he came to
Rome during the reign of Claudius, and obtained such a
reputation by his magical powers that he was believed to
be a god, and had a statue raised to him on the river
Tiber, between the two bridges, with a Latin inscription,
Simoni Deo Sancto. He adds that Simon is stiU honoured
by nearly all the Samaritans as the first God, and his
companion Helena as his first Conception.3 The story of
the statue, which is repeated by Irenseus, Tertullian, and
others,4 has been much discredited in modern times by the
1 Mosheim {De Rebus Christ, ante nature of heresy. The view adopted
§ 65) altogether excludes in the text is intermediate between

Simon from the list of Gnostic here- these opposite judgments.
tics as being an open enemy of Chris- 2 Hegesippus in Eusebius, H. E.
tianity. He is followed by Neander iv. 22.
{Church History II. p. 123) and by 3 Justin Martyr, Apol. i. c. 27
Dorner {Person of Christ vol. I. (cf. c. 56), and Euseb. H. E. ii. 13.
p. 186, and note u). Bunsen on the 4 Cf. Burton, B. L. p. 374. He
other hand {Hippolytus, vol. I. p. 54), cites Irenseus, i. 23 ; Tertullian,
recognises Simon as a heretical Apol. 13 ; Theodoret, Hmr. Fab. i.
Christian, but on an erroneous inter- 1 ; Cyril. Hieros. Cateches. vi. 14 ;
pretation of his doctrine ; and Burton Augustin. De Hmr. 1, vol. VIII.
{B. L. pp. 87-90, and note 38) admits p. 6.
him by taking a wider view of the

92 PRECURSORS OF GNOSTICISM: lect. vi.
discovery in the year 1574, on the island in the Tiber, of a
fragment of marble bearing an inscription commencing
Semoni Sanco Deo Fidio Sacrum.1 Hence the majority of
modern critics have supposed that Justin mistook an in
scription to the Sabine deity, Semo Sancus, for one to
Simon the holy God.2 Justin's account has nevertheless
found many learned defenders, but it is, to say the least,
liable to suspicion from the fact that Hippolytus, who
lived in the immediate neighbourhood of Rome, who was
a suffragan bishop of the Roman Church, who was well
acquainted with the treatise of Irenseus, and has copied
word for word a considerable portion of his account of
Simon, makes no mention of this statue.3 A stUl stranger
story, and of later origin, is the popular tradition con
cerning the manner of Simon's death. It is said that
while St. Peter and St. Paul were at Rome, Simon, in
order to delude the people into a belief in his pretensions,
caused himself to be raised into the air by two demons in
a chariot of fire, but that the two Apostles having united
in prayer against him, the impostor was deserted by his
demons, and feU to the ground, breaking both his legs by
the fall, after which he destroyed himself through shame
and vexation, by throwing himself from the top of a
house.4 The earliest writer in whom we can trace any
aUusion to this story is Arnobius, in the beginning of the
fourth century; and Eusebius, who wrote some years
afterwards, evidently knows nothing of it.5 It was known
to Greek writers by the middle of the fourth century, as it
1 Cf. Burton, B. L. p. 375. The pp. 377, 378.
full inscription is Semoni Sanco Deo 3 Cf. Bunsen, Hippolytus vol. I.
Fidio Saceum Sex. Pompeius Sp. F. p. 52.
Col. Mtjssiantjs Quinqhennams De- 4 Cf. Burton, B. L. pp. 94, 371.
ctjr. Bidentaiis donum dedit. s Cf. Arnobius, Adv. Gent, ii.' 12,
2 For the names of modern writers, compared with Euseb. H. E. ii. 13;
who deny or defend the truth of and see Burton, B. L. p. 95.
Justin's story, see Burton, B. L.

lect. vi. SIMON MAGUS AND MENANDER. 93
appears with full particulars in the ' Catecheses ' of Cyril
of Jerusalem, and in the so-called 'Apostolical Constitu
tions,' which may have been compiled about the same
time or a little earlier.1 Here again the recently re
covered treatise of Hippolytus, who wrote nearly a century
earlier than Arnobius, refutes the marvellous tradition by
giving another and wholly different account of Simon's
death. ' He announced,' says Hippolytus, ' that if he
were buried alive, he would rise again on the third day.
And accordingly, having ordered a trench to be dug by
his disciples, he gave directions that he should be buried
therein. They then did as they were commanded, but he
remained away from them unto this day : for he was not
the Christ.' 2
This story may perhaps agree with the later tradition
in attributing the death of Simon to the failure of some
trick which he had contrived to support his credit ; but in
the actual circumstances recorded it is wholly different,
and certainly far more probable.3 Other marvellous nar
ratives of Simon are told in the pseudonymous works
known as the Clementine Homilies and Recognitions —
works themselves1 of a Gnostic character, though entirely
opposed to the teaching of Simon. Of these we shall
give an account in a future lecture.
The doctrine of Menander, the disciple and immediate
successor of Simon, was of the same antichristian charac
ter, his own name however being substituted for that of
his master. Menander, like Simon, was a Samaritan by

' Cyril. Hieros. Catech. vi. 15 ; others as (Ussher and Tillemont) as
Const. Apost. vi. 9. Burton {B. L. late as the sixth. See Jacobson's
p. 371) regards the Constitutions as Article, 'Apost. Constitutionen' in
a work of the fourth century. Mansi Herzog, I. p. 449.
( Concil. I. p. 256) places them between 2 Hippol. Eef. Har. vi. 20.
309 and 325. Some critics place 3 Cf. Harvey, Irenams Introd.
them at the end of the third century, p. Ixix.

94 PRECURSORS OF GNOSTICISM. lect. vi.
birth,1 and is said even to have surpassed his master in
magical prodigies.2 He maintained, like Simon, that the
world was made by angels, the offspring of the Ennoia or
Conception, and that he himself was sent from the unseen
supreme power, to deliver men from their dominion by
means of the magic which he taught. He is also said to
have instituted a form of baptism in his own name, which
he called the resurrection, and to have asserted that those
who received it would be exempt from old age and death.3
A promise of this kind, if it was ever made, would admit
of being very soon tested by facts, and accordingly the
sect of the Menandrians seems to have soon become ex
tinct, whUe the followers of Simon, though with dimi
nished numbers, lingered on to the sixth century.4 The
antichristian sects founded by Simon and Menander may
be regarded as precursors of Gnosticism properly so caUed.
Of some of the early forms of the latter heresy I shall
give an account in my next lecture.
1 Irenseus, i. 23 ; Justin Mart. 3 Irenseus, i. 23. Cf. Justin Mart.
Apol. i. c. 26. Apol. i. c. 26.
2 pel£o<riv iiritiatytKeveTai reparo- " Herzog's Encyklopadie, Art.
\oyian, Euseb. iii. 26. Epiphanius, 'Menander.' Origen {c. Cels. i. 57)
Hcer. xxii. 1, says -that Menander doubts whether there were in his time
gave himself out as a greater person as many as thirty Simonians in the
than Simon. world.

lect. vn. THE OPHITE SECTS. 95

LECTURE vn.
THE OPHITE SECTS.
In regarding Simon Magus as the earliest teacher of
Gnostic principles, we foUow the almost unanimous testi
mony of those Fathers who have spoken on the subject, as
weU as the probable chronology suggested by the early
mention of him in the Acts of the Apostles. As the first
meeting between him and St. Peter must be placed, at the
latest, not more than seven years after our Lord's ascen
sion, it is scarcely possible that any heretical system can
have arisen at an earlier date under any Christian in
fluence. Yet though the foundation of Simon's teaching
was laid thus early, it is probable that his complete system
may have been matured several years later, and that other
heretical sects may have come into notice contemporary
with, or in some respects earlier than his doctrine in its
complete development. This supposition may perhaps
serve to explain the circumstance that Hippolytus, who
professes to treat of the several heresies in the order of
their appearance, commences his account with certain sects
which he places before Simon Magus and seems to con
sider as the earliest Gnostics.1 It is also probable that
some of these sects may have been of Jewish or heathen
origin, and may have engrafted some ideas borrowed from
1 Cf. Bunsen, Hippolytus I. p. 39. given by Hippolytus, belong to a
Yet it is quite certain that many of later date.
the details of the Ophite teaching, as

96 THE OPHITE SECTS. lect. vii.
Christianity on tenets existing from an earlier date, and
this may perhaps account for the apparently conflicting
statements which have been made concerning their chrono
logical position, some writers considering them even earlier
than Christianity, while others postpone them to the
beginning of the second century.1
These sects, to take them in the order in which they
are mentioned by Hippolytus, are the Naasseni, the Peratse,
the Sethiani, and the followers of one Justin, who of
course must not be confounded with the Christian apolo
gist and martyr of the same name in the second century.
The first of these sects, he says, compiled their heresies
from principles borrowed from the Greek philosophers and
the teachers of the mysteries ; the second from astrology ;
the third from Musseus, Linus, and Orpheus; and the
fourth from the marvels narrated by Herodotus.2 All of
these however must be regarded as branches of the
Ophite heresy, the serpent being a principal figure with
all. The Naassenes derived their name from the Hebrew
word Naash (B*nj) which signifies, a serpent; afterwards they
assumed the name of Gnostics, professing that they alone
had knowledge of the depths.3 The veneration of the
serpent, from which their appellation as weU as that of
the Ophite generally is derived, was but the logical deve
lopment of a theory, the germ of which is common to many
of the Gnostic sects. Proceeding on the assumption that
the Creator of the world is to be regarded as an evil
power, acting in hostility to the supreme God, it follows,
as a natural consequence, that the faU of man through
1 Cf. Neander, Church History aKeiv, Hippol. v. 6. May not this con-
II. p. 112; Baur, Christliche Gnosis junction of the serpent and the depths
p. 196. be referred to by St. John, Eev. ii. 24
2 Hippol. v. 2-5. o'hives ovk eyvutrav ra jSaflea tov
3 (bdo'KOvres p&voi ra ySafli) yuids- o-arava?

lect. vn. THE OPHITE SECTS. 97
disobedience to the command of his Maker must be re
garded, not as a transgression against the will of the
Supreme God, but as an emancipation from the authority
of an evil being. The serpent therefore, who tempted
mankind to sin, is no longer their destroyer but their
benefactor; he is the symbol of intellect,1 by whose means
the first human pair were raised to the knowledge of the
existence of higher beings than their Creator. This con
ception, consistently carried out, would have resulted in a
direct inversion of the whole teaching of Scripture ; in
calling evU good, and good evil ; in converting Satan into
God, and God into Satan. The majority of the Ophite
sects however seem to have shrunk from this portentous
blasphemy ; while acknowledging the faU of man as in
some manner a deliverance from evU and an exaltation of
human nature, they hesitated to carry out their principle
by investing the evil spirit with the attributes of deity.
A kind of compromise was made between Scripture and
philosophy ; the serpent was, notwithstanding his service
to mankind, represented as a being of evil nature and an
enemy to man, though his work was overruled to man's
good, and he himself was, beyond his intention, the instru
ment of a higher wisdom. But in one sect at least of
the Ophites, the more logical and thoroughly blasphe
mous consequences of their first principles were exhibited,
as we shaU see, openly and unblushingly.
The assumption, which appears to have been common
to all the Ophite sects, was the representation of the
highest principle of all things as a Spiritual Man, an
swering to the Adam Kadmon of the Jewish Kabbala.2
' 'Nun in figura serpentis con- the second principle may thus have
tortum ; ' Irenseus, i. 30. 5. been introduced to form a pair with
2 Irenseus, i. 30. 1 ; Hippol. v. 6. the third. This seems to have been
The first principle, according to Hip- overlooked by Irenssus.
polytus, is bisexual (ap<revb'0ijAus),and H

98 THE OPHITE SECTS. lect. vii.
With him is associated a second principle, caUed the
Son, also known by the name of "Evvoia, which however
does not, as in the teaching of Simon, denote a feminine
principle, but a second spiritual man. The feminine
principle occupies the third place, and, if we may accept
the account of Irenseus, was known as the Spirit ; and
below and distinct from these principles existed a chaos
of material elements. It is impossible to overlook in
this representation a profane parody of the Christian
doctrine of the Holy Trinity; and, offensive as are some of
the details of the theory, it is a,t least valuable as testifying
to the primitive existence of that article of the Catholic
fahh from which it is borrowed. The theory then proceeds
to declare how the union of these spiritual principles gave
rise to a fourth spiritual being, whom they caUed Christ,
and indirectly a feminine principle caUed Sophia or
Prunikos,1 who forms an intermediate link between the
spiritual Pleroma of Divine beings and the material
world with its Creator. Sophia is represented as sinking
down to the material chaos, and giving birth to a son
caUed Ialdabaoth,2 who in his turn becomes the parent of
six successive generations of angels, himself being the
seventh, and forming in conjunction with Sophia an
ogdoad. Ialdabaoth and his angels are the artificers of the
material world and the rulers of the seven planets.
The above account, which is abridged from Irenseus,
seems to represent the general principles which, with
some slight differences of detail, were common to the
various Ophite sects. But at this point, at which the
1 -irpovveiKos \ayvelas tnrotpaivei to Herzog, Art. 'Ophiten,' interprets
irriivvpov, Epiphanius, Hcer. xxv. 4; it as n-lrD Kl^' ('son of Chaos').
cf. Petavius on this place. For other H {l/enceus'l. p. 230) suggests
explanations cf. Harvey, Irenceus I. ^.^.t, , ^ ^
p. 225. y: -'
2 This name has been variously trum.
interpreted by conjecture. Gass, in

lect. vn. THE OPHITE SECTS. 99
serpent, the principal figure in their systems, is intro
duced, the different theories branch off into the most
curious and discordant forms of representation. According
to one statement, the serpent is the offspring of Ialda
baoth the Demiurge, in conjunction with the dregs of
matter, and is employed by Sophia Prunikos to tempt
Adam and Eve to transgress the command of the Demi
urge, the latter having designed by means of Eve to
deprive Adam of the breath of life, or spiritual intelligence
and thought, which he had unwittingly conferred upon
him. For thus thwarting his father's designs, the serpent
is cast out from heaven, together with Adam and Eve (the
Ophite Paradise seems to have been placed in the celestial
regions) ; and from henceforth the serpent and his offspring
became the enemies of mankind in revenge for the expul
sion which they had suffered on their account.1 Another
version of the legend makes the serpent to be identical
with Sophia herself, and to have bestowed knowledge upon
man out of hostility to the Demiurge.2
Another division of this school seems to have identified
the serpent with the Word or Divine Son, and made him,
like Philo's Logos, the intermediate link between the
Supreme God and matter.3 They also, perverting our
Lord's language to Nicodemus, identified him with the
brazen serpent in the wilderness, with the rod of Moses
which became a serpent, and with the constellation Draco
in the heavens. Another sect seems to have identified the
serpent, first with the winds, on account of its hissing
sound ; and then, playing upon the language of Scripture,
with the creative spirit moving on the face of the waters ;
1 Irenseus, i. 30. 8. the worshippers of the serpent.
2 Irenseus, i. 30. 15. According 3 These were the Peratse of Hip-
to Neander {Ch. Hist. II. p. 110) this polytus, v. 16, 17.
portion of the sect are Ophites proper, H 2

100 THE OPHITE SECTS. usct. vn.
and finally, with the Divine Word, who assumed the form
of the Serpent-Creator to deliver the intellectual man from
his original bondage.1 Another sect,2 apparently repre
senting in a mythical form the Persian doctrine of two
' principles, placed the serpent among the original ungene
rated causes of the universe, as part of a compound being,
half woman and half snake, from the human portion of
which proceeded certain good angels and mankind, and
from the serpentine portion evil angels and the brute
creation. One of these evil angels again inherits the
serpent nature, and is identified with the tree of knowledge
and connected with the introduction of evil into the earth.
The boldest and most consistent of the Ophite sects, in
the development of their blasphemous principle to its
legitimate consequences, were the Cainites. This sect, if
we may trust the accounts which have come down to us
concerning them, carried out to its minutest detaUs the
monstrous assumption that, the God of the Old Testament
being an evil being, all that is condemned in that book is
to be regarded as good, and aU that is approved as evU.3
Those characters who in Scripture are expressly held up to
reprobation as examples of rebellion and disobedience to
God — Cain as the leader, the men of Sodom, Esau, Korah —
were proclaimed by this sect as their heroes and kindred.
Cain and Abel were the offspring of antagonistic spiritual
1 This seems to have been the Gnosis p. 198 seq. Lardner {Hist, of
view of the Sethians, according to Heretics, bk. ii. ch, xiv.) doubts alto-
Hi ppoly tus , v. 19. gether the existence of the Cainites, and
2 The followers of Justin the supposes the notion of their having ex-
Gnostic ; see Hippolytus, v. 26. The isted to have arisen from the Sethites
female monster of this legend is con- speaking of others metaphorically as
sidered by Hippolytus to have been children of Cain, as does St. Jude. But
borrowed from the fable told by Lardner does not see the so-called phi-
Herodotus, iv. 9. losophical principle ofwhich the Cainite
3 Epiphan. Hcer. xxxviii. 2 SiSdcr- heresy is the legitimate development,
kovcti Se TauTa Kal to roiavra, tous and therefore sets aside the testi-
irovripovs rtpwyres Kal tovs cryaOois monies on the subject on a priori
a.rci.yoovjovTes. Cf. Baur, Die Chr. grounds of incredibility.

lect. vii. THE OPHITE SECTS. 101
powers; Cain of the stronger and better, Abel of the weaker
and worse. Cain and his successors were the true martyrs,
whom the ruler of this world persecuted, but could not
finally hurt, for the higher wisdom took them to herself.1
In consistency with the same teaching, their favourite
character in the New Testament was Judas Iscariot. He
alone of the Apostles had the knowledge to perceive the
true character of Christ's mission to complete by His death
the overthrow of the God of the Jews and the victory of
the superior power, and therefore he betrayed the Saviour
to His death, that this good work might be the more
speedily accomplished. They went so far as to compUe a
sacred book for their own use, which they called the
Gospel of Judas — a work which is happily lost, but whose
character may be imagined from the tenets of its authors.
Their moral practice, unless they are greatly belied, was
precisely what might be expected from their theory.2
The Sethites, or Sethiani, one of the sects of which I
have already spoken as mentioned by Hippolytus, were the
antagonists of the Cainites thus far, that they acknowledged
the ordinary principles of morality, and selected Seth
instead of Cain as their example of the higher human
nature. But, as Ophites, they agreed with their anta
gonists in a common hostility to the Creator of the world.
Seth, and the spiritual men of whom he is the leader,
were inspired by the Sophia, as her instrument, to coun
teract the work of the Demiurge. The same wisdom
sought to destroy, the evU race of mankind through the
deluge, and to preserve Noah as the father of a spiritual
race ; but her efforts were thwarted by the powers of the
world, who introduced Ham into the ark, and thus con
tinued the evil along with the good.3 The contest between
1 Irenseus, i. 31 ; Epiphan. Hcer. * Irenseus, I. c. ; Epiphanius, I. c.
xxxviii. 1. s Epiphan. Hcer. xxxix, 2, 3.

102 THE OPHITE SECTS. lect. vn.
the powers of good and evil thus continued tiU the coming
of Christ, who, according to these heretics, is no other than
Seth himself, sent again upon the earth by Sophia for the
completion of her work.
Of the other two Ophite sects mentioned by Hippo
lytus, the Peratse have been already alluded to as those
who identified the serpent with the Divine Word. They
are described as the foUowers of a certain Euphrates,
called 6 TispaxiKos, by which is probably meant a Chal
dean,1 and Celbes a Carystian, probably from Carystus in
Euboea. Hippolytus gives many details of their astro
logical theories, all of which seem to point to Chaldsea,
the great seat of astrology, as the source, if not of the
original doctrine, at least of many of the subsequent
accretions which distinguish this heresy. Justin the
Gnostic, of whom nothing was known before the discovery
of the work of Hippolytus, seems to have been an early
teacher of the Ophite doctrines, who wrote a work called
the Book of Baruch for the use of his disciples — Baruch
being the name of one of the twelve good angels who
form an important feature in his system. From internal
evidence we may probably conjecture that this book was
written subsequently to the Gospel of St. John,2 though it
is probably an early work of the second century. In it
the Ophite principles are mixed up with a wUd legend
from the Greek mythology, and with a strange aUegorical
interpretation of the early part of Genesis. In common
with Cerinthus, with whom he was probably nearly
1 The most probable derivation cisme I. p. 257.
seems to be from n"lg, the Hebrew 2 The words which are attributed
name of Euphrates, which makes it to Jesus oa tlle cross, Tivai, airexe's
doubtful whether the so-called founder <rov T0" vl6v (Hippol. v. 26, p. 228, 41)
Euphrates is not a mythical person- seem to be a perversion of John xix.
age. Cf. Harvey's Irenceus I. *6.
p. lxxxvii ; Matter, Hist, du Gnosti-

lect. vn. THE OPHITE SECTS. 103
contemporary, he regarded Jesus as the son of Joseph
and Mary, caUed to his Divine mission by the angel
Baruch.1 The Ophite heresies, shocking as are many of the
detaUs of their systems, are, as regards their general
principle, so far less antichristian than the schools of
Simon Magus and Menander, that they at least recog
nise Jesus Christ as the central figure in their teach
ings, and attribute to Him, in however perverted a form,
some kind of work which they regard as a redemption.
But they differ from the majority of the Gnostic sects
in making the work of redemption begin with the
creation of man, the work of Christ being only the
last act in a series of struggles carried on between the
Divine Wisdom and the corrupt Demiurge.2 The carry
ing out of the idea involves such a complete inversion
of Christian doctrine, that, instead of a Saviour who de
livers mankind from the curse of the FaU and bruises
the head of the serpent, we have represented one whose
saving work consists in perfecting that which the FaU
began, who acts in common with the serpent as a minister
of the Divine Wisdom, and, according to one form of the
teaching, is even identified with the serpent himself. The
fundamental principle of the Ophite theory is undoubtedly
of Jewish origin. The names of their mythology are
clearly Hebrew. The serpent from which they derived
their name is the serpent of the Book of Genesis, the
tempter of man; and in all the various and discordant
phases of their teaching we may trace some kind of per
version of the Mosaic narrative. But upon this Jewish
foundation was erected a superstructure, the materials for
which were coUected promiscuously from every form of
1 Hippol. v. 26 (p. 226, 26. 2 Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis
Duncker). p. 199 aeq.

104 THE OPHITE SECTS. lect. vn.
heathen superstition. The Phrygian orgies of Cybele, the
Phoenician and Assyrian mysteries of Adonis, the Egyptian
rites of Osiris and Isis, the secret doctrines of Eleusis, the
dualism of Persia, the astrology of Chaldsea, the fables of
Greek mythology, the poetic cosmogony of the Platonic
Timseus,1 all find a place in that comprehensive farrago
which marks the Ophites as the most syncretic of heretics.2
The exact date of these several accretions, and of the con
sequent development of the different Ophite sects, it is
impossible to determine, though the balance of probabUity
seems to incline in favour of the supposition that a certain
amount of Judaism and heathenism in combination may
have formed the basis of their teaching a short time before
the Christian era, and that Christianity, along with fresh
accumulations of heathenism, contributed the materials
for a superstructure gradually erected on this foundation.3
The primary conception which underlies aU phases of their
teaching — that of the antagonism of a good and an evU
principle, applied to the Mosaic narrative of the Creation
and the FaU — may have been the produce of an apostate
Judaism in connection with Parsism ; but the great
stimulus to the development of their systems must have
been given by Christian influences,4 corrupted, as the
Gospel was preached to the dispersed Jews in different
lands, by the several mythologies with which they were in
contact. The first appearance of the Ophite heresy in connec
tion with Christian doctrines can hardly be placed later
than the latter part of the first century.5 The Naassenes,
' Hippolytus, v. 7, 8. Cf. Baur, their speculations.
Die Chr. Gnosis p. 196. 5 Cf. Baur, Das Christenthum der
2 Cf. Harvey, Irenceus I. p. lxxxvi. drei ersten Jahrh. 1853, p. 176. He
3 Cf. Neander, Ch.Hist. II. p. 112; considers that the oldest Gnostic
Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 1 96. sects are those which do not bear the
4 The doctrine of the Trinity name of an individual founder, but
appears in a perverted form in all only one representing Gnostic ideas,

lect. vn. THE OPHITE SECTS. 105
the earliest sect according to the arrangement of Hippo
lytus, are spoken of by him as the first body who assumed
the name of Gnostics ; and the reason which he assigns
for this assumption, fisrd Ss TavTa iirsKaXsaav suvtovs
yvwaTiKovs, <fsdo-KOVTSs fiovoi Ta fiddr) yivwaxsiv,1 combined
as it is with an earlier name derived from the serpent,
and their reverence for that being, can hardly fail to
remind us of the words of St. John in the Apocalypse ;
< But unto you I say, and unto the rest in Thyatira, as
many as have not this doctrine and which have not known
the depths of Satan as they speak (ohivss ovk iyvwoav Td
(3d@sa tov aaTavd, cos Xsyovatv).' 2 From this language we
may, I think, infer the 'existence of an Ophite sect, boast
ing of its peculiar gnosis before the date of the Apocalypse.
Oh the other hand, the abundant use made by the Naas-
senes of the Epistles of St. Paul 3 seems to imply that their
acquaintance with Christianity was derived from the
teaching of that Apostle; and the intermixture of this
teaching with legends derived from the Phrygian worship
of Cybele seems naturally to refer us to that second
Apostolical journey, in which St. Paul went throughout
Phrygia and the region of Galatia.4 The date of St.
Paul's first visit to this region may be placed in the year
j51 or 52, and that of his second visit in 54 ;5 and the rise
of the Naassene heresy may therefore probably be placed
somewhere between this period and the latter part of the
reign of Domitian. The supposition that Ophite doctrines
were in existence as a pretended Christian phUosophy,
and specifies the Ophites as of this 3 See the quotations in Hippoly-
class. It is probable however, that tus, v. 7.
some of the details recorded by Hip- 4 Acts xvi. 6. For a second visit,
polytus represent a later develop- during his third journey, cf. Acts
ment. Cf. Milman, Hist, of Christi- xviii. 23.
anity II. p. 83. 5 Cf. Lightfbot on Galatians
' Hippol. Bef. Hcer. v. 6. pp. 22, 24.
2 Eev. ii. 24.

106 THE OPHITE SECTS. lect. vii.
and were exercising a corrupting influence on the Church
at the date of the Apocalypse, gives an additional signifi
cance to" a later passage of the same book, in which the
Apostle describes the casting out from heaven of the
great dragon, 'that old serpent, caUed the Devil, and
Satan, which deceiveth the whole world.' '
Notwithstanding the dualism which appears on the
surface of the Ophite representation of the struggle
between Sophia and Ialdabaoth, we find lurking at the
foundation of the theory a conception which, if not iden
tical with pantheism, admits of an easy development into
it. The Sophia Prunikos, the great agent in all that goes
on in the world, is in fact a mythical representation of
the soul of the universe ; 2 and, though the relation in
which this principle stands to a primitive material chaos
prevents us from identifying it with the universe, it never
theless appears as the one active principle to which aU
that takes place in the world may ultimately be traced.
Ialdabaoth, the antagonistic power, is an emanation from
the Sophia, and all the powers deriving their being from
him are remotely emanations from the same source. The
inert mass of matter plays a merely passive part in the
theory ; that which forms the central point of it is the
doctrine of a mundane soul, the source of aU spiritual life,
which attracts to itself whatever has emanated from it.3
The end moreover of the redemption by Christ has a
similar pantheistic character. Jesus after his resurrection
ascends into heaven and sits on the right hand, not of the
Divine Father, but of Ialdabaoth the Demiurge; his
office being to draw to himself, unobserved by the latter,
all the souls that are purified by the redemption and
released from the tabernacle of sense. In proportion as
' Eev. xii. 9. II. p. 107.
' Cf. Neander, Church Hiatory 3 Neander, I. o.

lect. vii. THE OPHITE SECTS. 107
Jesus becomes enriched in his own spirit by this attraction
to himself of kindred natures, Ialdabaoth is deprived of
his higher virtues, and is finaUy stripped of aU intelligence
and power, when the spiritual life confined in nature is
fully emancipated, and once more absorbed into the mun
dane soul from which it originally emanated.1
Viewed in this light as an imperfectly developed
scheme of pantheism, the Ophite theory acquires a new
interest and importance when we see one of its principal
features reproduced in the philosophical pantheism of a
later age. The irp&Tov yjrsvSos, the fundamental and
ineradicable error of pantheism, that of ignoring the
difference between good and evU, disguised in Ophism
under the image of an evU emanating from good as a
transient phenomenon in the action of the mundane soul,
appears in a more logical form in -the representation
which, by making evil a necessary moment in the rhythm
of existence, deprives it of aU that makes it evU, and even
gives it the name of good.
After contemplating the Ophite theory of the fall of
man as a stage in the process of his elevation to spiritual
hfe, we are startled to come across the same representation
in the writings of a philosopher who stands at the head of
German thought in the last generation, and whose genius,
doing aU that man could do to adorn with Christian em
bellishment a conception essentially pantheistic, has,
consciously or unconsciously, succeeded only in repro
ducing this wUdest of the disordered dreams of heathen
Gnosticism. 'The state of innocence,' says Hegel, 'in
which there is for man no distinction between good and
evil, is the state of the brute, the unconsciousness in
which man knows nothing of good nor yet of evU, when
1 Neander, Church Hiatory II. p. Ill ; cf. Irenseus, i. 30. 14.

108 THE OPHITE SECTS. lect. vii.
that which he wills is not determined as the one or the
other ; for if he knows nothing of evU, he also knows
nothing of good.' ... ' We find,' he continues, ' in the
Bible a representation caUed in an abstract manner the
Fall — a representation which in its great depth is not a
mere accidental history, but' the eternal, necessary history
of mankind represented in an external mythical manner.' '
We are further told that ' it is the eternal history of the
freedom of man, that he comes forth from the deadness of
his first years, that he advances nearer to the light of con
sciousness, that good and evU have both an existence for
him ; ' and hence that ' the loss of Paradise must be
regarded as a Divine necessity ; ' and that, as necessitated
to come to an end, this representation of Paradise sinks
down to a ' moment of the Divine totality which is not the
absolutely true.' 2 I do not mean to extend this paraUel
beyond the point which I have mentioned, or to deny the
vast inteUectual and moral gulf which separates the pro
found if misdirected speculations of the German philo
sopher from the undigested syncretism and immoral
ravings of the Ophites. But the paraUel, so far as it is
admissible, may be pardoned for the sake of the moral
lesson which it teaches — a lesson never more needed than
at the present time. Every attempt to represent the
course of the world, including man as a part of the world,
in the form of a necessary evolution, or of a series of
phenomena governed by necessary laws, whether it take
the pantheistic form which represents human action as
part of a Divine process, or the materialistic form which
reduces it to an inevitable sequence of consequent upon
antecedent, must, as the very condition of its existence,
ignore the distinction between good and evU (except as in
1 Philosophic der Eeligion {Werke XI. p. 269)
2 Ibid. pp. 271, 272.

lect. vii. THE OPHITE SECTS. 109
their consequences, not in themselves), and must annihilate
the idea of sin, which is not a consequence, but a trans
gression of God's law. Let no philosophy be trusted,
however tempting its promises, however great its apparent
success, which does not distinctly recognise the two great
correlative ideas of a personal God, and a personal, that
is, a free-wiUing, man. With these, its efforts, however
feeble, may be true as far as they go ; without these, its
most brUliant seeming achievements are at the bottom a
mockery and an imposture.

110 CERINTHUS, CARPOCRATES, lect. viii.

LECTURE VIII.
CERINTHUS — CARPOCRATES  THE NAZARENES AND
EBIONITES.
The heresies which we have hitherto been examining
/exhibit two opposite and equally fatal errors in relation to
' the Person of Christ : the one the denial of His proper
Humanity, the other the denial of His proper Divinity.
5 Simon Magus, as we have seen, though the central figure
of his system was not Jesus but himself, yet represented
our Lord as in some degree his precursor, and distinctly
asserted that He appeared in the form of a man, not
being really a man, and seemed to suffer, not having
reaUy suffered.1 The Ophites on the other hand, at
least one portion of them, distinctly asserted that Jesus,
as regards his original nature, was a mere man, the
son of Joseph and Mary ; that the Christ was a separate
spiritual being who descended upon him at his baptism
and left him before his passion : and they are said to have
asserted in proof of this theory that no miracles are
recorded as having been wrought by him either before his
baptism or after his resurrection.2
1 Irenseus, i. 23. 3 ; Hippolytus, man distinct from the spiritual power
vi. 19 (p. 254, Duncker). Christ.and alleged theabsence of mira-
2 Hippolytus, v. 26, says of the cies before His baptism and after His
followers of Justin the Gnostic (a resurrection in proof of this (Irenseus,
branch of the Ophites) that they re- i. 30. 14). The miraculous draught
garded Jesus as the son of Joseph of fishes, John xxi, refutes the latter
and Mary. Others of the Ophites assertion. Perhaps the miracles of the
seem to have acknowledged His super- Gospel of the Infancy were forged to
natural birth of a virgin (Irenseus, i. refute the former.
30. 12). Still they regarded Jesus as a

lect. vni. THE NAZARENES AND EEIONITES. ¦ 111
Both these heresies were the natural result of one and
the same principle— a principle which before the Christian
era had become dominant in the Grseco-Jewish philosophy
of Alexandria, and which, as that phUosophy came in con
tact with the preaching of the Gospel, found a ready
application in relation to the Person of Christ. The
principle in question is that which regards matter as
eventually evil and the source of aU evil, and which con
sequently found itself at once placed in direct antagonism
to the Christian belief in a real Incarnation of the Re
deemer. Two possible modes of evasion would naturally
suggest themselves, by means of which a kind of nominal
Christianity might be professed without the admission of
the fundamental doctrine. The bolder and simpler resource
was plainly to declare that the body of Christ was a phan
tom and not a reality, and this gave rise to the heresy of
Docetism. A subtler and less violent device was to distin
guish between the spiritual Redeemer and the human
Person in whom He was manifested ; regarding them as
two separate and incommunicable personalities, which
might for a time be in juxtaposition with each other, vet
remaining whoUy distinct, as water is distinct from the
vessel in which for a time it is contained. This was a
doctrine common to many of the Gnostic sects, its coarsest
and crudest form being found in the mere humanitarianism
of the Ebionites.
I have already pointed out the notices of the existence
of the Docetic heresy in the Apostolic age, which may be
gathered from the New Testament. The names of its
teachers in that age subsequently to Simon Magus are not
known (unless indeed Hymenseus and PhUetus, whose
theory of the resurrection was quite in accordance with
Docetic principles, may be reckoned among them) ; but of
the existence of the teaching there is unquestionable

112 CERINTHUS, CARPOCRATES, lect. vin.
evidence in the language of St. John concerning those who
deny that Jesus Christ is come in the flesh;1 and a similar
doctrine may, at least with great probability, be attributed
to the false teachers condemned by St. Paul in the Epistle
to the Colossians and in the Pastoral Epistles.2
The other form of heresy, subsequently known as the
Ebionite, appears towards the close of the first century
in the person of Cerinthus, a man of Jewish descent 3 and
educated at Alexandria, the head-quarters of that philo
sophy from which his corruption of Christianity would
mostnaturaUy emanate. The date of his notoriety as a'
teacher may be inferred with tolerable certainty from the ;
well-known anecdote recorded by Irenseus on the authority
of Polycarp, that St. John, having entered into a bath at
Ephesus, and finding Cerinthus within, hastened out of it
with the words, ' Let us fly, lest the bath should faU while
Cerinthus, the enemy of the truth, is in it.'4 Other, but
less trustworthy, authorities assign to him a yet earlier-
date. According to Epiphanius, he was one of those
Judaising disciples who censured St. Peter after the con
version of Cornelius for having eaten with men uncircum-
cised, and also one of the multitude who raised a tumult
against St. Paul on the charge of having brought Greeks
into the temple, and one of the false brethren whom
St. Paul mentions in the Epistle to the Galatians.5
But the narrative of Epiphanius is very confused, and
1 1 John iv. 2. times supposed to be a contemporary
2 Cf. Dorner, Person of Christ of Cerinthus (Epiphan. Hcer. xxxi. 2),
I. p. 220 (Eng. Tr.). was probably only a nickname of
3 His Jewish descent may be in- Cerinthus, from piipivBos, a cord.
ferred from the character of his * Irenseus, iii. 3.
teachings ; cf. Burton, B. L. p. 477. 5 Epiphan. Hcer. xxviii. Epipha-
His studj in Egypt is asserted by nius seems to have confounded- St.
Hippolytus, vii. 33, and by Theodoret, Paul's visit to Jerusalem in company
Hcer. Fab. ii. 3. Cf. Burton, B. L. with Titus, Gal. ii. 2, Acts xv. 2, with
p. 175 ; Milman, Hist, of Christianity the later one in company with Tro
ll, p. 55. Merinthus, who is some- phimus, Acts xxi. 28.

lect. vm. THE NAZARENES AND EBIONITES. 113
all these supposed early aUusions to Cerinthus are at
variance with the statement of Irenseus, who speaks of the
Cerinthian heresy as much later than that of the Nico
laitans.1 The principal features of the teaching of Cerinthus are
given in the following brief summary by Irenseus, who is
followed almost word for word by Hippolytus. I have
already quoted this passage in a former lecture, but it may
be as weU to repeat it here : ' A certain Cerinthus in Asia
taught that the world was not made by the Supreme God,
but by a certain power altogether separate and at a
distance from that Sovereign Power which is over the
universe, and one which is ignorant of the God who is
over all things. He represented Jesus as not having
been born of a virgin (for this seemed to him to be impos
sible), but as having been the son of Joseph and Mary,
born after the manner of other men, though distinguished
above aU others by justice and prudence and wisdom. He
taught moreover, that after the baptism of Jesus the
Christ descended upon Him in the form of a dove from
that Sovereign Power which is .over all things, and that
He then announced the unknown Father and wrought
miracles; but that towards the end (of His ministry)
the Christ departed again from Jesus, and Jesus suffered
ahd rose from the dead, while the Christ remained im
passible as a spiritual being.'2
To this brief account a few further particulars may be
added from other sources. Epiphanius tells us that
Cerinthus adhered in part to Judaism, and taught that
the law and the prophets were inspired by angels, the
giver of the law being one of the angels who made the
1 Djenaeus, iii. 11. 1. Cf. Massuet, 2 Irenseus, i. 26. Cf. Hippolytus,
Diss. Prcev. in Iren.i. § 125. vii. 33.

114 CERINTHUS, CARPOCRATES, lect. vm.
world.1 Two writers of the third century, Caius the
presbyter of Rome, and Dionysius bishop of Alex
andria,2 ascribe to him the doctrine that there would be
a temporal reign of Christ upon earth for a thousand
years, to be spent in sensual delights; and the former
seems to have gone so far as to maintain that Cerinthus
forged the Revelation of St. John to give support to his
views.3 Dismissing this ChUiastic theory, which has nothing
in common with Gnosticism, and which, if held by
Cerinthus at aU, can only have been held by an inconsis
tent attempt to unite the theories of opposite schools,4 we
may observe in those parts of the teaching of Cerinthus
which have a properly Gnostic character one or two
peculiarities which indicate, in like manner, a partial and
somewhat inconsistent adhesion to the doctrines which he
had adopted and developed from his Alexandrian teachers.5
In common with the majority of the Gnostics he borrowed
from the school of Philo the theory which made the
Creator of the world a distinct being from the Supreme
God, and in common also with the majority of the
Gnostics he engrafted a pseudo-Christianity upon this
pseu do- Judaism by interposing a series of intermediate
powers between the Supreme God and the Creator, so as to
make the latter distinct from the former, and to leave
room for the work of the Christ as mediating between the
two. At the same time Cerinthus must be placed among,
and indeed as the earliest known name among, those
Gnostics who were on the whole disposed to look favour-
1 Hcer. xxviii. accounts of the sensual Chiliasm of
2 Euseb. H. E. iii. 28. Cerinthus to be misrepresentations.
" Cf. Bouth. Eel. Sacr. II. p. 15. 5 Neander, Ch. Hist. II. p. 43,
* Cf. Dorner, Person of Christ points out the resemblances between
I. p. 197. Both Mosheim {De Bebus the teaching of Cerinthus and that of
Christ, ante Const, p. 199) and Nean- Philo.
der {Ch. Hist. II. p. 47) consider the

lect. vm. THE NAZARENES AND EBIONITES. 116
ably on the Jewish religion, regarding it as imperfect
indeed, but not as evU. The Demiurge in his system is
represented as ignorant of the Supreme God, but not as
hostile to Him ; the mission of the Christ is not to oppose
and undo the work of the Creator, but to supply its defi
ciencies by a higher revelation.
The Christology of Cerinthus, though less exaggerated
in some of its errors than that of some of the later
Gnostics, betrays at the same time its essentially Gnostic
character. The mission of the Christ, His purpose in
coming into theworld, is not to save His people from their
sins, but to enlighten their minds by proclaiming the
Supreme God. He is not so much a redeemer as a
teacher, and a teacher not of righteousness so much as
of speculative knowledge. The separation of Christ from
Jesus asserted by Cerinthus, and his refusal to aUow to the
spiritual teacher any share in the sufferings of the human
instrument, show how entirely the conception of the
supreme exceUency of knowledge had removed from his
mind all appreciation of Divine love, aU apprehension of
the nature of sin and the need of atonement.1 Yet while
depriving the death of Jesus of its chief significance, and
reducing His birth to the level of that of an ordinary man,
Cerinthus seems to have been unable to resist the evidence
of a fact which mUitated against his whole philosophy and
overthrew the main piUar on which it rested. He was
unable to deny that the crucified Jesus had risen again
from the dead. It is scarcely possible that he could have
brought this great . truth into any coherence with the
general principles of his system; but the fact of his
accepting it notwithstanding shows the strength of the
conviction, produced by the preaching of the Apostles, in
1 Cf. Dorner, Person of Christ I. p. 197 (Eng. Tr.).
i 2

116 CERINTHUS, CARPOCRATES, lect. vm.
this central doctrine to which it was especially their office
to bear witness.1
According to the testimony of Irenseus in a later part
of his work, the Gospel of St. John was written for the
purpose of refuting the heretical doctrines maintained by
. Cerinthus, and before him by the Nicolaitans.2 The two
errors which he specifies are the separation of God the
Father from the Creator of the world, and the separation
of Christ from Jesus. I have in a former lecture pointed
out some passages in the beginning of St. John's Gospel
as well as in his First Epistle, which appear to be directed
against these errors, and I may now add that a similar
purpose may perhaps be discerned in the Apostle's own
declaration at the end of the last chapter but one of his
Gospel : ' These are written that ye might believe that
Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and that believing ye
might have life through His name.'
A curious circumstance is mentioned by Epiphanius
concerning the followers of this heretic, which some
modern as weU as ancient commentators have applied to
explain a difficult passage in the writings of St. Paul.
'A story,' says Epiphanius, 'has come down to us by
tradition, that when any of them happened to die without
baptism, others were baptized in their name instead of
them, that they might not, when they rose again at the
resurrection, suffer punishment for not having received
baptism, and become subject to the power of the Creator
of the world. It was for this reason, as the tradition says
1 Epiphanius {Hcer. xxviii) speaks been a meaningless fact. If so, how
of Cerinthus as asserting that Christ strong must have been the evidence
had not yet risen, but awaited the which compelled him to admit it!
final resurrection. But Irenseus, fol- Burton, B. L. note 77, endeavours, not
lowed by Hippolytus, expressly says very successfully, to reconcile ' the
that he asserted that Jesus had risen. contradictory accounts.
Dorner(I.p.l98)says thatto Cerinthus 2 Irenseus, iii. 11.
the resurrection of Christ must have

lect. vm. THE NAZARENES AND EBIONITES. 117
which is come down to us, that the holy Apostle said, If
the dead rise not at all, why are they then baptized for them, ? ' !
Epiphanius himself does not adopt this interpretation,
which however has found favour with one or two of the
Fathers and several modern writers.2 The supposition
however, that Cerinthus or his foUowers are actuaUy
aUuded to by St. Paul, is hardly reconcilable with chro
nology; and if we adopt this interpretation, we must
suppose the practice to have existed at a somewhat earlier
period, either among a party in the Corinthian Church
itself, or possibly among some heretics who went beyond
the Corinthians in denying the resurrection altogether,
and whom St. Paul here refutes by reference to their own
practice : ' What wiU become of those (ti Troir]aovaiv) who
are in the habit of being baptized (ol fiaTTTitpfisvoi, not
fSaiTTiaOevTss) for the dead?' . . . 'Why,' he continues,
' do we (ti Kal ripels) stand in jeopardy every hour ? '
By this change from the third person to the first, the
Apostle seems to separate himself and those to whom he
is writing from the persons who observed this custom of
vicarious baptism, and thus to imply a condemnation of
the practice.3
Opinions very simUar to those of Cerinthus are attri
buted to another Gnostic teacher, who probably lived
about the same time, Carpocrates.4 His exact date has
been a matter of dispute, and he is said, in conjunction
with his son Epiphanes, to have carried his heresy to its
height in the reign of Hadrian ; but, as Hadrian began
his reign in a.d. 117, this statement is perfectly consistent
with the supposition that the father may have commenced
his teaching in the previous century, and thus far have
1 Epiph. Hcer. xxviii. 6, translated 3 See Alford, 1. c, and Burton,
by Burton, B. L. note 78. B. L. p. 180.
2 See Burton, B. L. note 78, and * Theodoret, Hcer. Fab. i. 5.
Alford on 1 Cor. xv. 29.

118 CERINTHUS, CARPOCRATES, lect. vm.
been contemporary with Cerinthus, and with the later
years of St. John's life.1 In favour of assigning this
early date, it may be observed that the Fathers in general
place Carpocrates before Cerinthus,2 and that Irenaaus
seems to speak of his followers as the first who assumed
the name of Gnostics — a distinction which Hippolytus
awards to the Naassenes, a branch of the Ophites.3 The
doctrines of Carpocrates have indeed a considerable
affinity to some of the Ophite theories, as weU as to those
of Cerinthus. His opinion concerning the Person of
Christ is stated by Irenseus in language very simUar to
that which he employs in speaking of Cerinthus. ' Car
pocrates,' he says^.'_ajid.Jiis foUowers say -thaLiba .world
and the things that are therein were made byjingels. far
inferior to the unbegotten Father. They also say that
Jesus was the son of Joseph and boxn^after.the manner of
other men,5 but differed from the rest of mankind in that
His soul, being stedfast and pure, remembered those
things which it had witnessed in that revolution in which
it was carried round with the unbegotten God. On this
account they say that a power was sent down to him from
God, that by means of it he might be able to escape from
the makers of the world; and that this power, haying
passed through them all, and being made free in aU,
1 See Burton, B. L. note 75. says the translator of Irenseus, which
2 Cf. Burton, B. L. pp. 175, 480. Eusebius, iv. 7, paraphrases by erepas
Pseudo - Tertullian {De Prcesor. c. aipecrews rrjs tuv Tvuo-tm&v imK\rj-
48) and Philastrius {Hceres. 36) ex- 8eio-i\s irarepa.
pressly place Cerinthus after Carpo- 4 Irenseus, i. 25; cf. Hippolytus,
crates. Eusebius (iv. 7) cites Irenseus vii. 32.
as making Carpocrates contemporary 5 ' Et qui similis reliquis homini-
with Saturninus and Basilides, which bus fuerit.' Tr. Iren. The text of
however is not distinctly asserted by Hippolytus probably supplies the
Irenseus. original Greek Kal Zprnov rols avBpdnrois
3 Cf. Irenseus, i. 25. 6, and Hip- yeyov6ra,
polytus, v. 6. ' Gnosticos se vocant,'

lect. viii. THE' NAZARENES AND EBIONITES. 119
ascended again to God, as the soul which embraces like
things wiU in like manner ascend.' x
Closely as the substance of this extract resembles the
account given by the same author of the tenets of Cerin
thus, there are one or two important differences to be
noticed. The maker of the world is not, as in Cerinthus,
a power subordinate to, yet ignorant of, the Supreme God,
but a power or powers hostile to God, and from whose
dominion the highest souls are to be set free. Carpocrates
moreover does not merely, like Cerinthus, regard Jesus as
a man superior in virtue and wisdom to other men, but
he assigns a very remarkable reason for this superiority —
that His soul remembered those things which it had wit
nessed in its revolution (tjj irspicpopa) along with the unbe
gotten God. We have here an evident aUusion to the
mythical description in Plato's Phsedrus (p. 246 seg.),
which represents the soul of man as the driver of the
chariot with its winged steeds, sometimes permitted to
raise his head into the upper sphere, so as to be carried
round with the gods in their circuit and to behold the
eternal forms of things. Notwithstanding the similarity
of their conclusions the two philosophers approach the
question from opposite sides. Cerinthus deals with it as
a Jew, under the influence of the Platonic philosophy as
modified by PhUo, and retaining a certain amount of re
spect for the Jewish rehgion and Scriptures. Carpocrates
1 I have followed the text of Hip- that it might escape from the makers
polytus as corrected by Duncker and of the world, and having passed
Schneidewin : V Kal Sia irdvrwv through them all, and being freed in
X<»pi\o-a<rav iv rcael Te ehevBepaBelaav all, might ascend to Him,' etc. Per
ave\r\\vBevai irpbs aiiToV, [«al Spoius omnes, like the Sii, irdinaiv of Hippo-
TV] to Spoia airy acrita^opevnv. The lytus, seems naturally to refer to the
Latin version of Irenseus may perhaps makers of the world. In the para-
be more exactly rendered : ' On this phrase of Epiphanius it seems to be
account they say that a power was understood of passing through all
sent from God into the soul of Jesus, actions.

120 'CERINTHUS, CARPOCRATES, lect. vnr.
deals with it as a heathen, under the influence of the
Platonic phUosophy in its original form, and regarding
the Jews and their claims to Divine instruction with
feelings partly of contempt, partly of hatred.
These feelings are more plainly manifested in the
other portions of the teaching of Carpocrates, as recorded
by Irenseus. He maintained that Jesus, though brought
up in the customs of the Jews, despised them, and therefore
received power to destroy those passions which are given
to man as a punishment ; and that aU those who, hke
him, could despise the powers which created the world,
could become as great and even greater than he and his
Apostles. The means which he recommended to those
who would show their contempt for the Creator and His
laws were of the same flagitious character which we have
already seen in the cognate doctrines of the Cainites. He
is said to have taught that it was necessary for those who
aspired to the higher life to pass through every form of
action usually reputed sinful, in order to complete their
defiance of the powers which rule the world,1 and that
those who did not complete their allotted task in a single
body must migrate after death into another, tiU the duty
was accomplished. Here again we see the conclusion of
the poetical mysteries in the Phsedrus distorted from its
original purpose to serve as a cloak for licentiousness.
That transmigration of souls into successive bodies which
Plato represents as taking place for their punishment
or for their purification 2 is poUuted in the hands of
1 Euseb. H. E. iv. 7 tovtois Te appiiTo-iroiias airovelpavras XP*a- Cf.
aKoKoiBus icdvra Spqv xp5"<" SiSdo-Keiv Irenseus i. 25, where this monstrous
to aiVxpoupyoTaTa robs peWovras eis doctrine is connected with the theory
to riheiov rrjs hot' outoJ/s p-vo-raya- of transmigration. See also Tertul-
7(as ^ nal paKKov pvaapoiroitas Ban, De Anim. 35. and Hippolytus,
iKelcreoBai, as pi) av aXhws iKcpev^ope- vii. 32.
tous tous KocrpMobs {&>s av ixetvoi 2 Phcedrus pp. 248, 249.
cpaUv) &px°"Tas, pit obx^ 7r"ir' T" &'

lect. vni. THE NAZARENES AND EBIONITES. 121
Carpocrates so as to become the expected means of wal
lowing in every variety of vice, and even the mode of
representing its practice in the light of a duty.
Epiphanes, the son of Carpocrates by a Cephallenian
mother, is said to have been honoured by the inhabitants of
Same in CephaUenia as a god, though he died at the early
age of seventeen. This precocious philosopher was cer
tainly not overburdened with modesty on account of his
youth ; indeed his phUosophy was of that kind which a for
ward boy might be very apt at learning and teaching. He
wrote a book ' On Justice,' a fragment of which is pre
served by Clement of Alexandria ; in which, enlarging on
a suggestion of Plato, in whose phUosophy he had been
instructed by his father, he openly advocated the most
licentious theories of communism, asserting that the
natural life of man was similar to that of the brutes, and
that the law, by introducing the distinction of meum
and tuum, was the real author of the sin of theft and
adultery. In support of this licentious twaddle he per
verted the words of St. Paul, that 'by the law is the
knowledge of sin ' (Rom. iii. 20), and sneered at the tenth
commandment as making the sin which it condemned, by
recognising the right of property.1
It is difficult to imagine how doctrines like these, so
flagrantly opposed to the teaching of the Gospel, can have
been coupled with the slightest respect for the person of
Jesus or the precepts delivered by Him. In explanation of
this difficulty, the disciples of Carpocrates seem to have had
recourse to the convenient fiction of an exoteric teaching
which they said that Jesus had taught to His Apostles and
disciples in private, and had bidden them to teach to those
who were worthy of it. The substance of this teaching
1 Clem. Alex. Strom, iii. 2 (p. 514).

122 CERINTHUS, CARPOCRATES, lect. vni.
seems to have been that faith and love alone were neces
sary to salvation, aU other things being naturally indif
ferent, and made good or bad by the opinion of men.1
Here again we find Christianity made the vehicle for
teaching a heathen philosophy ; not however the phUo
sophy of Plato, but the worst of the paradoxes of his
adversaries the Sophists. In the whole teaching of the
Carpocratians, not only does the heathen element prepon
derate over the Christian, but the Christian element is
reduced to its least possible dimensions. Going beyond
Cerinthus, they not only asserted that Jesus was a mere
man, born like other men, but even that the Divine power
which was given to him was no more than may be
acquired even in a greater degree by other men. In
accordance with this teaching they are said to have
honoured him among the wise teachers of mankind by
placing his image along with those of Pythagoras, Plato,
Aristotle, and others, and paying reverence to them after
the manner of the Gentiles.2 Epiphanes is said to have
been succeeded by one Prodicus, who founded a sect caUed
the Adamites, professing even more shamelessly than then
predecessors the principles of communism and licentious
ness of life.3 Prodicus is said to have rejected prayer,
probably as inconsistent with the supposed absolute
nature of the Supreme God,4 and to have held that men
ought not to profess their religious belief in times of
persecution.5 Another branch of the same antinomians
1 Irenseus, i. 25. ence of this sect. Yet a similar
2 Irenaaus, I. c. ; cf. Epiphan. Her. practice is attributed to the Beghards
xxvii. 6. or Brethren of the Free Spirit in the
3 Theodoret, Hcer. Fab. i. 6 ; Clem. thirteenth century, and again in the
Alex. Strom, iii. 4. The Adamites fifteenth. Cf. Mosheim, II. pp. 243,
according to Epiphanius {Hcer. lii) 362 (ed. Stubbs).
assembled in their churches, men and 4 Clem. Alex. Strom, vii. 7. Cf.
women together, naked, in imitation of Neander, Ch. Hist. II. p. 119.
Adam in Paradise. Lardner {Hist, of 5 Tertullian, Scorp. c. 15,
Her. bk. ii. ch, 6) doubts the exist-

lect. vni. THE NAZARENES AND EBIONITES. 123
were the Antitactce, or Adversaries of the Creator, mentioned
by Clement of Alexandria,1 who held that it was a
duty owing to the Supreme God who made all things
good, to resist the commands of the Creator, the author
of evil. Cerinthus, with his semi-Judaising tendencies, com
bined with purely humanitarian views regarding the
Person of Jesus, may be considered as the precursor of the
sects known in the second century by the names of Naza-
renes and Ebionites. These two sects are not distinguished
from each other by the earliest writers on the subject,
and the distinction between their doctrines is noticed
earher than their separate names. Irenseus and Hip
polytus merely teU us that the Ebionites differed from
Cerinthus and Carpocrates in maintaining that the world
was created by the Supreme God, but agreed with them
in regarding Jesus as a mere man.9 The former adds
that they accepted St. Matthew alone among the Evan
gelists, rejected St. Paul as an apostate from Judaism,
and practised the observances of the Jewish law. Origen,
and more fully Eusebius, distinguish between two classes
of Ebionites : the one holding, like Cerinthus, that Jesus
was a mere man, the son of Joseph and Mary ; the other
admitting His supernatural birth, but denying His pre-
existence.3 FinaUy Epiphanius, who is partly supported by
1 Strom, iii. 4. Clement's terse ToSSevTepou. eirelodvotrosOSpoixevcreis
description of these heretics should be eipyKev, iipeis cpacri, poixevopev iirl
read in the original : "kXKoi rives, otis KaraXvcret rrjs ivroKrjs avrov.
Kal 'AvrndKras KaKovpev, \eyovcriv Sti 2 Irenseus, i. 26 ; Hippol. vii. 34.
6 pev &ebs 5 ray Shay iraT^p ripav iari The Greek text of the latter enables
cpiaei- Kal irdvB' Sera ireiroinKev ayaBd us to correct an error in the Latin
io-Tiv. ets Se tis tSv im' aurou translation of the former. Instead
yeyovcWcuv errecrtieipev ra fifoVia, tV of 'non similiter ut Cerinthus et
ray kokwv cpiaiv yevvitcas, oh xal Si) Carpocrates opinantur,' we should
trdvras iipas irepie$a\ev, avriri^as clearly read ' similiter ut,' etc.
ripas rep irarpi. Sib Sj) Kal outoI 3 Euseb. H. E. iii. 27 ; cf. Origen,
avriTaaaipeBa rovrcp els ixSiKiav tou o. Cels, v. 61.
TtarpSs, avTiirpdacrovTis rip fjovldipaTi

124 CERINTHUS, CARPOCRATES, lect. vm.
Jerome, distinguishes the Nazarenes from the Ebionites,
and describes the former in language which seems to
identify them with the less heterodox of the two classes
of Ebionites mentioned by Origen and Eusebius.1
Both names seem to have been transferred in course of
time from a general to a special signification. We know
from the Acts of the Apostles that the Christians in
general were contemptuously caUed by the Jews of Pales
tine the sect of the Nazarenes ; 2 and this appeUation
probably continued to be applied for some time to all who
professed to be believers in Christ, without reference to
any difference which may have existed between orthodox
and heterodox forms of Christianity. From the testimony
of Origen3 it seems probable that the term Ebionites was
also originally a name of contempt given by the Jews to
the Christians ; and this serves to corroborate, if corrobo
ration be needed, the explanation given by the same writer
of the meaning of the word as derived from the Hebrew
|i»3§! poorf Yet both Origen and Eusebius, who foUows him,
seem to have mistaken the ground of this appeUation,
when they suppose it to have been given to the Ebionite
heretics on account of the poverty of their conception of
Christ. As originally applied by the Jews to the Christians
in general, it was probably aimed at the poverty and low
estate of the first foUowers of Christ in the spirit of the
language used by the Pharisees of our Lord Himself :
' Have any of the rulers or of the Pharisees believed on
Him? butthis people who knoweth not the law are cursed.'5
The heretic Ebion, who is assumed by TertuUian and
1 See Epiphan. Hcer. xxix. 7, 8 ; 'Iijo-ouv its Xpicrrbv vapaSe^dpevoi.
Hieron. De Vir. Illustr. c. 3; Epist. 4 Origen, De Princ. iv. 22; In
ad August. 112, c. 13. Cf. Dorner, Matt. T. xvi. c. 12; c. Cels. ii. 1 ;
Person of Christ I. p. 191 seq. Euseb. H. E. iii. 27.
2 Acts xxiv. 5. 5 John vii. 48, 49. Cf. Neander,
3 Origen, c. Cela. ii. 1 'Efliavaloi Ch. Hiat. I. p. 478.
Xpr)paTl£ovo~iv ot imb 'lovSaluv rbv

lect. vm. THE NAZARENES AND EBIONITES. 125
others as the founder of this sect,1 may be safely dismissed
to the region of mythical eponymi. It is interesting how
ever to inquire how two names, originally given to the
Christian Church as a body, came afterwards to be em
ployed as the designation of heretical sects. The names,
as we have observed, were, one certainly, the other probably,
originaUy given by the Jews of Palestine, and therefore to
Christians who were for the most part of Jewish origin
and, in their own practice at least, more or less observant
of Jewish customs. After the destruction of Jerusalem,
this Jewish-Christian Church continued to exist in Pella
and the neighbouring region beyond the Jordan, to which
it had withdrawn during the siege,2 and where it appears
to have remained until the reign of Hadrian when, after
the revolt and destruction of Bar-Cochab and his followers,
the Roman city of iElia Capitolina was founded on the
ruins of the ancient Jerusalem.3 In that city no Jew was
permitted to dwell, and the prohibition would naturally
extend to those Christians of Jewish origin who had not
renounced the customs of their forefathers.4 This circum
stance led to a division in the Church, the GentUe members
of it, together with the less rigid Jewish Christians,
establishing themselves at Jerusalem under a succession
1 Tertullian, De Prceacr. c. 33 ; Hist. I. p. 475) says that the Church
cf. Epiphan. Hcer. xxx, and see is said to have returned to Jerusalem,
Neander, Ch. Hist. I. p. 477. hut gives no authority for the state-
2 Euseb. H. E. iii. 5. ment, and seems to doubt its truth
3 Euseb. H. E. iv. 6. In chapter (see p. 476). It is possible however,
5 Eusebius gives a list of fifteen as Milman supposes {Hist, of Jews II.
bishops of Jerusalem of Jewish race, p. 431), that some sort of rude town
down to the time of the revolt in may have grown up cm the wreck of
Hadrian's reign ; but these, though the city ; and if so, it is possible that
nominally bishops of Jerusalem, could the Judaizing Christians may have
hardly have resided in that city, gone back to Pella after the edict of
which remained uninhabited except Hadrian. Cf. Neander, I. c. p. 476 ;
by a Eoman garrison in its towers Lightfoot, Galatians p. 304.
(Josephus, B. J. vii. 1), till Bar- 4 Justin, Dial c. Tryph. c. 16. Cf.
Cochab seized it, and attempted to Neander, Ch. Hist. I. p. 475 ; Bitschl,
rebuild the temple. Neander {Ch. Entstehung der Altk. Kirche p. 257.

126 CERINTHUS, CARPOCRATES, lect. vm.
of bishops of Gentile birth,1 while the stricter Judaizers
remained at PeUa, where after the departure of their
brethren they would naturally enforce their own rites with
greater strictness than ever. Under these circumstances
the Jewish Christian settlement at PeUa, retaining its
old appellations of Nazarene and Ebionite, which from
terms of reproach had probably become among themselves
titles of honour, seems to have gradually relapsed still more
into Judaism, retaining a certain kind of acknowledgment
of Jesus as the Messiah, but ceasing at last to acknowledge
His Deity and pre-existence. These heretical views would
naturally be developed into more consistency by some than
by others, and thus give rise to the two divisions of the
Ebionites, of whom the less heterodox, or Nazarenes, were
probably the earlier in point of time.2
The Ebionites (using the term in its more general
sense) made use of a Gospel which is called by Irenseus
the Gospel of St. Matthew, and by Eusebius the Gospel
according to the Hebrews.3 This work is supposed by
some critics to be the Hebrew original of St. Matthew's
Gospel; 4 but, to say nothing of the doubt whether such a
Hebrew original ever existed at ah,6 it is certain that the
Ebionite gospel differed from the text of St. Matthew in
many important particulars,6 and almost certain that it
was an Aramaic translation of the canonical gospel, with
alterations and additions from other sources.7 In the
fourth century, if not earlier, there were two different
' Euseb. H. E. iv. 6. das N. T. pp. 101-103.
2 Cf. Dorner, Person of Christ 5 See Bleek, Einleitung p. 109,
I. p. 191 (Eng. Tr.); Neander, Ch. who shows the probability that the
Hist. I. p. 476. translation was mistaken for the
' Irenseus, i. 26 ; Euseb. H. E. iii. original.
27. 6 For some of the variations, see
4 See Harvey's Irenceus, I. p. 213. De Wette, Einleitung in das N. T.
For a full account of various opinions § 65a ; Bleek, Einleitung p. 107.
on this question, see Bleek, EM. in ' See Bleek, Einleitung p. 108.

lect. vin. THE NAZARENES AND EBIONITES. 127
recensions of it, one of which omitted, while the other
retained, the first two chapters of St. Matthew. The
former was used by the Ebionites proper, who denied the
supernatural birth of our Lord. The latter was accepted
by the more orthodox Nazarenes.1
The most noteworthy feature in the heresies described
in this and the two previous lectures, is the testimony which
they indirectly bear to the universal belief of the Church
in the Divine Nature of her blessed Lord. Had it not
been that the Christian consciousness in the Apostolic age
was penetrated and pervaded by this belief, it would have
been hardly possible that the early heretics, who desired
to retain a nominal Christianity as a cloak for their own
speculations, should not have thought of the .device, so
simple and natural to the unbelievers of later times, of
regarding the Saviour as a mere man, a wise philosopher,
a great teacher of truth, a great moral example, as other
wise and good men had been before Him. But this idea,
so famUiar to. us in the present day, is nowhere to be found
among the early heresies. It seemed to them more simple
and obvious to deny that which was natural and human
than that which was supernatural and Divine. The
earliest form of Gnosticism, so far as we can trace its
development in chronological order, seems to have been
pure and simple Docetism.2 The Divine Being who came
down from the Supreme God had no human body, but only
the appearance of one. The modification of this belief,
which manifested itself in the Cerinthian and Ebionite
theories, was probably due to the circulation of the first
three Gospels, and to the testimony which they bore to

1 Epiphan. Hcer. xxix. 9, xxx. 14. (e.g. Eitschl. Altk. Kirche, pp. 342,
Cf. Bleek, Einl. p. 105; Mosheim, 454) of the late origin of Docetism is
De Eebus Chr. ante Const, p. 328. very arbitrary, and by no means esta-
2 The hypothesis of some critics blished by the authorities adduced.

128 CERINTHUS, CARPOCRATES, ETC. lect. vin.
the real humanity of Him of whom they wrote.1 Even
then a purely humanitarian theory was felt to be impos
sible. The Divine element must be retained in some form
or other ; and this was done by distinguishing between
Jesus the man and Christ the spiritual being, regarding
the former as merely the vessel or abode in which the
latter for a short season condescended to dwell.2 The work
of redemption was still Divine, though carried on by means
of a human instrument ; it was the work of Christ the
Spirit, not of Jesus the man. Even Carpocrates, the most
heathen of the early Gnostics, and the least conscious of
the real nature of Christ's work and kingdom, cannot
divest himself of the idea of some supernatural being,
some Divine power, dwelling in and inspiring the human
teacher. The testimony of the enemies of the faith is
thus far at one with that of its Apostles and Evangelists.
The whole world was groaning and travailing together,
waiting for its redemption, and none but God could satisfy
the universal yearning.
1 Cf. Burton, Bampton Lectures, p. 481.
2 Ibid. pp. 244-246.

lect. rx. SATURNINUS, TATIAN, BARDESANES. 129

LECTURE IX.
SYRIAN GNOSTICISM — SATURNINUS — TATIAN — BARDESANES.
' From Menander, the successor of Simon,' says Eusebius,
' there went forth a power, as it were of a two-mouthed
and two-headed serpent, which established leaders of two
different heresies, namely Saturninus, a native of Antioch,
and Basilides, an Alexandrian, who founded . schools of
heresies hateful to God, the one in Syria, the other in
Egypt. Saturninus, as we are told by Irenseus, for the most
part taught the same false doctrines as Menander, whUe
BasUides, under the pretence of revealing deeper secrets,
extended his fancies into the region of immensity, forging
for himself monstrous fables of impious heresy.'1 Thus far
Eusebius. Of Basilides, the founder of the Egyptian form
of Gnosticism, we shall treat in our next lecture ; our
present wiU be devoted to an examination of the Syrian
Gnosticism, commencing with its founder Saturninus. The
remark quoted by Eusebius from Irenseus, that Saturninus
taught the same doctrines as Menander, is not, taken by
itself, strictly accurate ; nor, when we examine the context
of Irenseus, does that Father seem to intend an assertion
of the identity of the teaching of the two heresiarchs in all
respects, but only in the common points from which both
started, namely, that the Supreme God is unknown, and
that the world was made by angels.2 In other respects
there is a wide difference between the two systems.
1 Euseb. H. E. iv. 7. 2 Irenseus, i. 24.

130 SYRIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. ix.
Menander, like his master Simon, announced himself as
the being sent down from the invisible powers as the
Saviour of the world. No such blasphemy as this can be
detected in the teaching of Saturninus, who, however
erroneous his views may have been, propounded them in
connection with the person and work of Christ, not
assuming to himself any higher office than that of teaching
them. Hence he is the first person who gave to the
doctrines of Simon the distinct character of a Christian
heresy, whereas in the hands of Simon himself, and of
Menander, they appear as anti-Christian schemes, exalting
their own teachers into the place of Christ.
From Menander and Simon, Saturninus appears to
have borrowed three of his principal doctrines, namely
that of the malignity of matter, which made it impossible
for the Supreme God to have any direct relation to the
material world, and its two immediate consequences,
that the world was created by inferior powers, and
that the body of Christ was a phantom only, not a
reality. With these however he combined other prin
ciples of a different kind, borrowed from the dualism of
Persia ; the result of the whole being a somewhat incohe
rent eclecticism, less bold than the teaching of his prede
cessors, but at the same time less consistent. The angels
who made the world are represented in the teaching of
Simon as beings who, though emanating remotely from
God, are in rebeUion against him, and whose power it is
the primary object of the Redeemer to destroy. In the
scheme of Saturninus, the source of evil is referred, as in
the Persian doctrine, to an independent power, antago
nistic to the good principle, who does not create the world,
but endeavours to usurp a dominion over it. Hence the
direct enemy of God is not found in the creative angels,
but in Satan, the leader of the powers of darkness ; and

lect. ix. SATURNINUS, TATIAN, BARDESANES. 131
the creative angels hold an intermediate position between
good and evil, faUen away from the good power from whom
they emanated, but hostile to Satan and the powers of
darkness, with whom they contend for the government of
the world. So too the malignity of matter holds a
somewhat incongruous position in the teaching of Satur
ninus. His Docetic views of the person of Christ and the
rigid asceticism of his practical teaching imply the inhe
rent and essential evil of matter as their fundamental
assumption. But by adding to this assumption the
Persian theory of a spiritual kingdom of darkness (accord
ing to which theory matter is not in itself evU, but only
capable of being employed for evU by spiritual powers),
Saturninus encumbered his teaching with a double hypo
thesis, whose separate results, though held in conjunction,
can hardly be said to fit into each other as parts of a
system. The foUowing is the summary of the doctrines of
Saturninus as given by Irenseus, the original Greek of
whose text in this passage may now be restored from the
recently recovered treatise of Hippolytus : ' Saturninus,
like Menander, taught that there is one Father unknown
to aU, who made angels, archangels, powers, and principali
ties ; that the world, and aU that therein is, was made by
certain angels, seven in number ; and that man was made
by the angels in the foUowing manner. A shining image
was manifested from above from the supreme power, which
the angels were not able to detain, because, as he says, it
immediately again ascended above ; they therefore ex
horted each other, saying, Let us make man according to
the image and likeness. When this was done, he con
tinues, and when the thing made was unable to stand
upright, through the inability of the angels, but writhed
K 2

132 SYRIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. ix.
upon the ground like a worm,1 the superior power, pitying
him, because he was made in his own likeness, sent a
spark of life, which raised man upright, and formed his
joints, and made him live. This spark of life then, he
says, returns after death to those things which are of the
same nature with itself, and the remaining portions are
resolved into the elements out of which they were made.
The Saviour he supposed to have no human birth,2 and to
be without body and without form, and to have been
manifested as a man in appearance only. The God of the
Jews, he says, was one of the angels, and because the
Father wished to depose aU the principalities from their
sovereignty,3 Christ came to depose the God of the Jews,
and for the salvation of those who trust in him, that is to
say, of those who have in them the spark of life. For he
said that there were two classes of men formed by the
angels, one evil and the other good,4 and that because the
demons were in the habit of assisting the evil, the Saviour
came down for the overthrow of the evil men and
demons, and for the salvation of the good. He asserted
also that marriage and procreation are of Satan. Many
of his followers also abstain from animal food, and by this
false austerity seduce many. The prophecies, they say,
were partly inspired by the angels who made the world,
partly by Satan ; the latter being held to be himself an

1 A similar fancy to this occurs served by Hippolytus, is Sia touto
in the Ophite theory ; Irenseus, i. 30. {I. to) $oi\ecr8ai rbv -irarepa Karahvaai
5. Ttdvras robs &pxovras, which admits
2 Innatum {ayevv-nrov, Hippol.), of either construction. The one
which Neander understands to mean adopted in the text seems more pro-
not born of a woman. Cf. Harvey's bable in itself and more suitable to
Irenceus, I. p. 197. A similar view the context.
was afterwards held by Marcion. * Epiphanius {Hcer. xxiii. 2) adds,
* The Latin translation of Irenseus Suo yip ire-TrKdcrBai aw' apxys avBpti-
renders ' propter hoc auod dissolvere ttovs cpdcrxei, eca ayaBbv Kal eva cpav\ov,
voluerint Patrem ejus omnes prin- e'| Sv Sio eivai rh yevq rav avBpumcov
cipes.' But the Greek text, as pre- iv Kiapep, ayaBiv re »al irovripdv.

lect. IX. SATURNINUS, TATIAN, BARDESANES. 133
angel, the enemy of the makers of the world, and especially
of the God of the Jews.' 1
In this description it is not difficult to discern the
Persian accretions engrafted by Saturninus on the original
teaching of Simon and Menander. The seven angels who
made the world are obviously borrowed from Ormuzd and
his six Amshaspands ; only instead of being placed, as in
the Zoroastrian system, as the highest rank of the celestial
hierarchy, they are degraded to the extreme verge of the
kingdom of hght,2 and regarded as ahenated from the
Supreme Father, though hostUe to the powers of darkness.
A supposition of this kind was necessary in the scheme
of Saturninus in order to make room for the work of the
Saviour, just as in the theory of Simon and others,
borrowed from the Alexandrian Judaism, the creation of
the world is transferred from the Logos to an inferior order
of emanated powers. The material world, as in the
Persian theory, occupies the intermediate space between
the regions of hght and darkness ; only the conflict for its
possession is in the first instance not between Ahriman
and Ormuzd directly, but between Satan and the inferior
angels by whom it was created.. The nature of man,
formed as regards his bodUy frame by the inferior angels,
but quickened by a spark of life from above, seems intended
to combine the theory of the evU nature of matter with the
belief in a spiritual principle in man and a capabUity of
salvation ; though the assumption of two races of men,
good and evU, descended from two pairs of parents, good
' Irenseus, i. 24. it is however quite in accordance with
2 Matter, vol. I. p. 334, ' Sur le Saturninus's modification of Parsism,
dernier degr6 du monde pur, Saturnin and is perhaps a fair expansion of the
place sept anges, qui sont ce qu'il y a language of Epiphanius, Hcer. xxiii.
de moins parfait dans les regions in- 1. robs Si ayye\ovsSieo-TdvaiairbTrisa-
This position of the va Svvdpeus.

angels is not mentioned by Irenseus :

134 SYRIAN GNOSTICISM : lect. ix.
and evU likewise,1 while quite in accordance with the
arrogant pretensions of Gnosticism, substitutes a kind of
inherited fatalism and rigid necessity for the free choice
between the powers of good and evil which is allowed to
man in the Zoroastrian philosophy. The hatred of the
Jewish nation and religion, which is conspicuous in the
teaching of the Samaritan Simon, appears in a modified
form in that of his Syrian successor. Having combined
the Persian doctrine of an active power of evil with the
Grseco-Alexandrian hypothesis of a passive source of evU
in matter, Saturninus was unable so fundamentally to con
tradict both the phenomena of the world and the tradi
tional source of his own teaching, as to identify the maker
of the world with the evil spirit. The Creator, the God of
the Jews, is permitted so far to partake of an imperfect
goodness as to be the antagonist of Satan, while at the
same time his nature and his government of the world are
so far removed from the goodness of the Supreme Being,
that it is a part of the mission of the Redeemer to over
throw his empire, along with that of his enemy Satan.
In his rigid asceticism and condemnation of marriage
Saturninus is quite consistent with his assumption of the
evil nature of matter and the imperfect, if not evU, cha
racter of the Creator, though at variance with the theory
and practice of his predecessor Simon, as weU as of some
of the other Gnostics who held the same assumptions.
But it has been well observed that this principle, which
supposes an antagonism between the Creator of the world
and the Supreme God, may find two ways of expressing
1 Epiphan. Hcer. xxiii. 2. Mil- receiving a feebler and less in-
man {Hist, of Christianity II. p. 63) fluential portion of the divine spirit,
remarks on the difficulty of reconciling or whether they were a subsequent
the theory of the divine origin of the creation of Satan, who assumes the
soul of man with the assumption of station of the Ahriman of the Persian
two distinct races, good and bad. system, does not clearly appear.'
' Whether the latter became so from

lect. ix. SATURNINUS, TATIAN, BARDESANES. 135
itself, both at variance with the spirit of Christianity.
' Among the nobler and more sensible class it took the
form of an extreme and rigid asceticism, of an anxious
abhorrence of aU contact with the world, though to mould
and fashion that world constitutes a part of the Christian
vocation. In this case, morality could at best be only
negative, a mere preparatory purification to contemplation.
But the same eccentric hatred of the world, when coupled
with pride and arrogance, might also lead to wild fanati
cism and a bold contempt of aU moral obligations. When
the Gnostics had once started upon the principle that the
whole of this world is the work of a finite, ungodlike
spirit, and is not susceptible of any revelation of the
Divine; that the loftier natures, who belong to a far
higher world, are held in bondage by it ; they easily came
to the conclusion that everything external is a matter of
perfect indifference to the inner man ; nothing of a loftier
nature can there be expressed; the outward man may
indulge in every lust, provided only that the tranquillity
of the inner man is not thereby disturbed in its medita
tion. The best way to show contempt of, and to bid de
fiance to this wretched alien world, was not to allow the
mind to be affected by it in any situation. Men should
mortify sense by indulging in every lust, and still pre
serving their tranquUlity of mind unruffled.1 . . . Not
only in the history of Christian sects of earlier and more
recent times, but also among the sects of the Hindoos,
and even among the rude islanders of Australia, instances
may be found of such tendencies to defy all moral obliga
tions, arising either from speculative or mystical elements,
or, it may be, from some subjective caprice opposing
itself to ah positive law.' 2 The author of these remarks
1 Neander refers to Clement of 2 Neander, Church History II.
Alexandria ; Strom, ii. 20 (p. 411). p. 26.

136 SYRIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. ix.
concludes with a warning which has lost none of its force
since the time when he wrote, now upwards of forty years
ago. ' In the general temperament of the present period,
the false yearning of the subjective after total emancipa
tion, and the breaking loose from aU the bonds, holy or
unholy, by which society had been previously kept
together, is quite apparent. And this tendency might
seem to find a point of sympathy in that unshackling of
the spirit, radically different however in its character,
which Christianity brought along with it.'
Some of the leading features of the Gnosticism of
Saturninus, his separation of the Creator of the world
from the Supreme God, and consequently of the Old
Testament revelation from the New, his Docetism as
regards the person of Christ, and his practical asceticism,
appear in the later tenets of Tatian and in those of his
foUowers the Encratites. Tatian was an Assyrian or, as
some say, a Syrian by birth,1 and by profession a sophist
or teacher of rhetoric, often traveUing in various countries.
He came to Rome, where he became acquainted with
Justin Martyr and was converted to Christianity. It was
nrobably as a Christian convert that he wrote his extant
^ork, 'AdGrsecos' (lipos "EXXr/vas), an exhortation ad
dressed to the Greeks in commendation of Christianity as
compared with the Greek phUosophy and mythology.
Though this work contains some strange and fanciful
speculations, it is difficult to discover in it any positive
traces of the Gnostic theories which the author subse
quently adopted.2 After the death of Justin, Tatian
1 In the Oratio ad Grcec. c. 42, Assyria proper. See Moller in Herzog,
Tatian calls himself an Assyrian, vol. XV. p. 420.
Clement Alex. {Strom, iii. 12, p. 547 2 For Tatian's views on the Logos
Potter) calls him a Syrian. Tatian see Dorner, Person of Christ I. p. 280.
may have used the words iv rjj t&v His errors approach more to Sabelli-
' Acrcrvpuav yij in a wide sense ; but anism than to Gnosticism. Matter,
the probability is rather in favour of vol. III. p. 48, finds Gnosticism in the

lect. ix. SATURNINUS, TATIAN, BARDESANES. 137
seems to have returned to the East, where he took up his
abode in Syria, and was carried away by the Gnostic
speculations prevalent in that country. His opinions as
a Gnostic seem to have had some connection with those of
Valentinus ' and Marcion, but were more nearly aUied to
those of Saturninus.2 He distinguished between the
Creator of the world and the Supreme God, and main
tained that the words Let there be light were to be inter
preted as a prayer from the former to the latter,3 an inter
pretation which reminds us of the doctrine of Saturninus,
which represents the body of man as formed by the
creative angels, while the spark of light which gives life
is communicated from above. He also regarded the Old
and New Testament as the work of different Gods,4 and
denied the salvation of Adam as being the author of trans
gression, and as condemned by the words of St. Paul,
In Adam all die.6 His most remarkable tenets however,
from which his disciples derived their name, were those
of practical asceticism. Like Saturninus he condemned
marriage and the use of animal food,6 and even went so
far as to use pure water instead of wine at the Eucharist ;
for which reason his foUowers were called Hydroparastatw.1
These ascetic doctrines were probably, like those of Satur
ninus, the result of an assumption of the evU nature of
matter, which appears also to have led him to Docetic

Oratio ad Grcecos, which on the other 3 Clem. Alex. Eel. Prophet. 38,
hand is defended by Moller in p. 999 (Potter).
Herzog, Art. ' Tatian,' vol. XV. p, 423. 4 Clem. Alex. Strom, iii. 12, p. 548
Cf. Bull, Def. F. N. iii. u. 6. (Potter).
1 From Valentinus he seems to 5 Hippol. viii. 16; Irenseus, i. 28,
have borrowed the theory of iEons. iii. 23 ; Euseb. H. E. iv. 29.
See Irenseus, i. 28 ; Euseb. H. E. iv. 8 Irenseus, i. 28 ; Euseb. H. E. iv.
29. 29 ; Theodoret, Hcer. Fab. i. 20.
2 Moller in Herzog, Art. ' Tatian,' * Theodoret, Hcer. Fab. i. 20. Cf.
vol. XV. p. 423. Cf. Irenseus, i. 28, who Clem. Alex. Pcedag. ii. 2 (p. 186,
regards his doctrine as derived from Potter) ; Epiphan, Hcer. xlvi. 2.
Saturninus and.Marcion.

138 SYRIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. ix.
views concerning the body of Christ.1 In accordance with
these views Tatian is said to have compiled a Diatessaron
or harmony of the four Gospels, omitting the genealogies
of our Lord and all allusion to His human descent from
David.2 If we regard the Syrian Gnosis solely with reference
to the country of its teachers, we must add to the names
previously mentioned that of Bardesanes, who lived in the
latter part of the second century. Bardesanes (or more
correctly Bar-Daisan, so called from the river Daisan3
which ran by his native city) was born at Edessa in
Mesopotamia, close to the borders of Syria, formerly the
capital of King Agbarus, whose correspondence with our
Saviour is one of the fabulous embeUishments of ecclesias
tical history.4 The dynasty of the Abgars appears to have
continued down to the middle of the third century ; and
one of these is mentioned as having been the friend and
patron of Bardesanes. According to the brief account
given of this heresiarch by Eusebius, who however is
not supported by other authorities, he was at first a
disciple of Valentinus, but afterwards rejected his master
and refuted many of his mythical fictions ; but though
thus seeming to return more nearly to orthodoxy, he did
not entirely wipe off the stain of his early heresy.5 Epi
phanius, on the other hand, represents him as having
been originally sound in the faith, but as having been
afterwards infected by the heretical doctrines of the
1 Hieron. in Epist. ad Gal. vi. 8 have the same meaning, ' leaping.'
' Tatianus .... putativam Christi ' Euseb. H. E. i. 13. Bardesanes
carnem inducens,' where however is called a Syrian by Eusebius, Prcep.
Vallarsi reads ' Cassianus.' Yet the Evang. vi. 9,
doctrine is quite in keeping with 5 Euseb. H. E. iv. 30. Epipha-
Tatian's opinion. Cf. Moller in nius and Theodoret say nothing of his
Herzog, Art. ' Tatian,' vol. XV. p. return to orthodoxy, and the account
423. of the former seems to place the ortho-
2 Theodoret, Hcer. Fab. i. 20. dox writings of Bardesanes earlier
8 Also called Scirtus. Both names than the heretical ones.

lect. rx. SATURNINUS, TATIAN, BARDESANES. 139
Valentiuians.1 As a Christian, he wrote in defence of the
faith and against the errors of Marcion,2 and showed his
constancy by refusing to abjure his belief when threatened
with death by ApoUonius the Stoic in the name of the
Emperor Verus.3 As a Gnostic, his opinions for the most
part closely resembled those of Valentinus, of which we
shaU give an account in a subsequent lecture, but there
are one or two features of his teaching which more nearly
connect him with the Gnostics of Syria, among whom, on
account of his birthplace, he is classed by some distin
guished authorities.4 Like Saturninus, he is said to have
combined the doctrine of the malignity of matter with
that of an active principle of evU; and he connected
together these two usuaUy antagonistic theories by main
taining that the inert matter was co-eternal with God,
while Satan as the active principle of evil was produced
from matter (or, according to another statement, co-eternal
with it), and acted in conjunction with it.5
He also agreed with Saturninus in holding Docetic
views concerning the person of Christ ; though this error
was not peculiar to the Gnosis of Syria, but was shared
by some of the followers of Basilides as well as by Valen
tinus and others of the Egyptian school, and also in
another form by the antagonist of Bardesanes, Marcion.
Bardesanes, in common with some other of these heretics,
asserted that our Lord, though born of the Virgin Mary,
took nothing of her substance, and merely assumed the
appearance of a man, as he had appeared in human form
1 Epiphan. Hcer. lvi. 2. This ac- 4 e.g. Gieseler and Matter.
count is accepted by Mosheim {De 5 Cf. Eph. Syr. Adv. Hcer. Serm.
Eebus Chr. ante Const, p. 396) and xiv, Opera V. p. 468; Pseudo-
by Matter (I. p. 363) as the more pro- Origen, De Recta Fide sect. iii.
bable. Matter (vol. I. p. 365) considers Mar-
2 Euseb. H. E. iv. 30 ; Theodoret, cion in the latter dialogue to have
Han. Fab. i. 22. misrepresented the doctrine of Barde-
8 Epiphan. Hcer. lvi. 1. sanes, but this is not clear.

140 SYRIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. ix.
to Abraham and others of the older patriarchs,1 and that
his suffering likewise was a suffering in appearance only.
In consistency with these opinions he also denied the
resurrection of the body.2
Yet Bardesanes must be considered as only partiaUy
a Gnostic. At least, the one cardinal error which
may be considered as characteristic of Gnosticism, the
separation between the Supreme God and the Creator
of the world, finds no place in his teaching. God the
Father in conjunction with the Divine Word or, according
to another representation of his view, the Divine Word
in conjunction with Wisdom or the Holy Spirit, is the
maker of the world and of man.3 Bardesanes also ac
cepted aU the Scriptures of the Old and New Testament,
as well as some apocryphal books4 — in this again
showing himself the antagonist of Marcion ; and pro
bably, notwithstanding his many aberrations in the direc
tion of Gnosticism, there was no time in his life in which
he did not consider himself a Christian.5
Bardesanes was the author of a work in Syriac on Fate,
of which a remarkable fragment in a Greek translation
has been preserved by Eusebius,6 and of which the whole
has recently been published in the original Syriac text
with an English translation by the late Dr. Cureton.7 In
1 Theodoret, Epist. 145 BaXevri- iii, v ; Epiphan. Hcer. lvi.
vos Se, «al Bao"Ae(Brjs, Kal BapSeo-dvvs, 3 De Recta Fide iii, iv. Cf. Eph.
Kal 'Appivios, Kal al tt)s tovtuv Syr. Adv. Hcer. Serm. 55 {Opera V.
crvppopias, Sexovrai pev ttjs irapBevov p. 557), Serm. 3 (p. 444). Cf. Burton,
tt/v Kvi\aiv Kal rbv t6kov, ovSev Se rbv Lectures on Eccl. Hist. II. p. 184 ;
®ebv Aiyov eK rrjs napBevov irpocreiKri- Matter, I. p. 367 seq.
cpevat (pacrlv, aWa iropoSoV riva SC 4 Epiphan. Hcer. lvi. 2.
a»Tr)s So-irep Sia ffinKrjvos iroir)cracr8ai, s Cf. Burton, Lectures on Eccl.
imcpavrivai Se Toir avBpiiirois cpavTacrlu Hist. II. p. 184.
Xpvo-dpevos Kal Sd'Jar etvai &v8pa>iros, s Prcep. Evang. vi. 10; cf. H. E.
iv Tp6irov HtpOri rip 'Afipaap Kal tibiv iv. 30.
&\\ois t&v vahaiiiv. Cf. Pseudo- ' Spicilegium Syriacum, London
Origen, De Recta Fide, sect. iv. 1855.
2 Pseudo-Origen, De Eecta Fide,

lect. ix. SATURNINUS, TATIAN, BARDESANES. 141
this work, which Eusebius calls irspl elfmp/jJvris SidXoyos,1
but which in the Syriac is entitled 'The Book of the Laws
of Countries,5 Bardesanes reasons with much acuteness
and good sense against the assumption that the actions of
men are caused either by nature, or by fortune or destiny.
From both these he carefully distinguishes free will, and
maintains that whUe the body of man and its animal func
tions are governed, like those of other animals, by natural
laws, the soul is free to choose its own course of action, and
is responsible for the choice it makes. In support of this
position he adduces among other arguments one which is
well known to most of us from its employment in Aris
totle's Ethics, namely, that men are not blamed for their
bodily deformities, which come by nature, but are blamed
for their vicious actions, as being in their own power to
avoid.2 Against the astrological fatalism of the Chaldeans
he very sensibly argues that the customs and actions of
men vary in different countries, though some of the
natives of these several countries are born under the same
conjunction of the planets. '
Though sharing the opinions of Saturninus concerning
matter, and connecting it even more closely with the evil
principle, Bardesanes did not carry out his doctrines in
practice to the ascetic conclusions of his predecessor. He
was the father of a son named Harmonius, who inherited
his father's philosophical opinions.3 Both father and son
were poets as well as phUosophers. Bardesanes is said to
have written 150 hymns, according to the number of the
Psalms of David ; 4 and his hymns with those of his son
1 ff_ J£, iy. 30. * Ephr. Syr. Adv. Hceret. Serm. 53
2 Spicil. Syr. p. 10. Cf. Arist. {Opera V. p. 554); cf. Matter, Hist.
Eth. Nic. iii. 5, 15. du Gnost. I. pp. 359-361; Milman,
3 Sozomen, H. E. iii. 16; cf. Hist, of Christianity II. p. 7 4.
Theodoret, Har. Fab. i. 22.

142 SYRIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. ix.
Harmonius, notwithstanding their heterodox character,
continued to be used by the Syrian Christians for two
centuries, tUl they were superseded by those of St.
Ephraim.1 The above teachers have been classed together as
Syrian Gnostics, because, taking the term in a somewhat
wide sense, they may all be considered as natives of that
country, and because a general affinity may be observed
between the features of their several systems. Yet it
would be difficult to select any one positive doctrine which
can be regarded as specially characteristic of the Syrian
Gnosis as distinguished from that of other countries. The
Docetism which is common to all the above systems is
shared by others of different local origin ; and the morbid
asceticism which is characteristic of Saturninus and Tatian
does not appear in Bardesanes. The feature which is
usually selected as characteristic of the Syrian Gnosis is
the doctrine of dualism ; that is to say, the assumption of
the existence of two active and independent principles,
the one of good, the other of evil.2 This assumption, as
we have seen, was distinctly held by Saturninus and
Bardesanes ; and if it is not so directly traceable in Tatian,
we have the authority of Epiphanius for attributing it to
his followers the Encratites,who probably borrowed it
from their master, with the remainder of whose teaching
it is perfectly in accordance.3 We-are therefore perhaps
justified in selecting this tenet as the characteristic
feature of the Syrian Gnosis, in contradistinction to the
1 Sozomen, H. E. iii. 16. avriKeipevriv irpbs ra tov Qeov -woir)-
2 Gieseler, Eccl. Hist. vol. I. para Kal p^ xmoracro-opevqv @ecf, a\\a
p. 143 (Eng. Tr.). IcrxiovTa Kal icpdrrovTa as Kar' ISiav
3 Epiphan. Hcer. xlvii. 1 ('De ifyvatav, Kal oix w iv irapeKTpoTtrj
Encratitis ') (pdaKovai. Si Kal oZtoi yevipevov. Cf. J. C. Wolf. Mani-
apxds rivas ehai tt)v re tou SiafldKov chceismus ante Manwhceos p. 211.

lect. ix. SATURNINUS, TATIAN, BARDESANES. 143
Platonic theory of an inert semi-existent matter, which
was adopted by the Gnosis of Egypt. The former prin
ciple found its logical development in the next century
in Manicheism ; the latter, as we shaU see hereafter, leads
with almost equal certainty, if not with the same logical
necessity, to Pantheism.

144 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. x.

LECTURE X.
EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM — BASILIDES.
In proceeding from the Syrian to the Egyptian form of
Gnosticism, our first attention is directed towards a man
who, if we could accept the various and conflicting notices
concerning his teaching which have descended to us from
different quarters, might be regarded as being the con
necting link between the two systems, and as having
occupied that position by virtue of uniting in his own
teaching the heterogeneous ingredients of the one and the
other. And as if at first sight to justify this conclusion,
we find the same man described as belonging in his own
person to both countries : Syrian by birth,1 Egyptian by
residence,2 the disciple of the Samaritan Menander and
fellow pupU with the Syrian Saturninus,3 the preacher,
according to one account, in Persia,4 the resident at
Alexandria, and the student of the Greek phUosophy.5
Basilides, the teacher concerning whom these several state
ments have been made, has been the object of dispute as
regards the time in which he lived, no less than as regards
the doctrines which he taught. The language of Clement
of Alexandria, who was likely to be well informed on this
1 Epiphanius (ifer. xxiii. 1,7), cited 2 Irenseus, i. 24; Euseb. H. E.
by Neander, Ch. Hist. II. p. 47 : cf. Mat- iv. 7.
ter, I. p. 402. In the Disp. Archelai et 3 Euseb. H. E. iv. 7.
Manetis (Routh, Ed. Sacr. V. 196) he 4 Disp. Archelai, I. c.
is called a Persian, possibly to account 5 Hippolytus, vii. 14.
for the dualism there ascribed to him.

lect. x. BASILIDES. 145
point, would lead us to fix the close of his life at the
beginning of the reign of the elder Antoninus, who
ascended the throne a.d. 138.1 St. Jerome however
enumerates him among the heretics of the Apostolic age,
from which statement some critics suppose that he must
have promulgated his opinions at least before the death
of St. John.2 Though the statement of Clement is quite
compatible with the supposition that the youth of Basi
lides was contemporary with the latter days of the Apostle,
the preponderance of testimony seems to place his prin
cipal activity in the reign of Hadrian, i.e. from a.d. 117
to 138.3 Among the various and not easily reconcilable accounts
which have come down to us concerning the doctrines of
Basilides, the most trustworthy are probably the occasional
notices furnished by Clement of Alexandria and the
detailed account of the system given in the recently dis
covered work of Hippolytus against heresies. The former
of these Fathers, from his residence in the city where
Basilides had taught, had peculiar opportunities of be
coming acquainted with the particulars of his teaching,
whUe the latter was in possession of a work written by
Basilides himself, from which he quotes several passages
verbatim. Irenseus on the other hand,, though earlier in
point of time than both the above-named Fathers, seems
to have obtained his information from less direct sources,
and possibly in some degree confounded the teaching of
Basilides himself with that of some of his professed
foUowers.4 In the account which I shall attempt to give
1 Clem. Alex./S!7W?i.vii.l7,p.898, 168, ed'. Schone ; Theodoret, Hcer.
ot . . . Kal pexpi y€ ttjs 'Avravivov tov Fab. i. 2.
Trpeafrvrepov Siereivav r)\iKias, KaBditep i Neander. Church Hist. vol. II.
o Bacri\eiSr,s. p. 113. Cf. Matter, vol. II. p. 20.
2 Massuet, Diss. Prcev.in Irenceum So also Baur, Chr. Gnosis p. 210, and
; g 112 in his later works referred to by
3 Euseb. H. E. iv. 1; Chron. ii.p. Ueberweg, Gesch. der Philosophic II.

146 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. x.
of their doctrine, I propose to take as a groundwork the
exposition of Hippolytus, as the most complete and syste
matic, illustrating it as far as possible from the notices of
Clement, leaving the other accounts to be compared
subsequently with the results derived from these sources.
Basilides, according to Hippolytus, who is supported
by Clement,1 professed to derive his doctrines from a
secret teaching communicated by. the Saviour to St.
Matthias.2 He also claimed as his teacher a certain
Glaucias, said to have been the companion and interpreter
of St. Peter,3 of whom nothing further is known. Accord
ing to this teaching, the first principle of aU things, the
supreme Being, is one whose nature cannot be expressed
by any language, for he is above every name that is
named. He cannot properly be even said to exist ; for he
cannot be identified with any one thing that exists : he is
rather to be called absolute non-existence. This non
existent Deity Hippolytus compares, not very happily, with
the voijais vorjosoos of Aristotle, and illustrates the theory
by an imaginary resemblance to the Aristotelian doctrine
of genera and species, which are not identical with any of
the individuals comprehended under them. It is tolerably
evident however, both historically and philosophically,
that the source of this teaching is to be found in another
quarter, and that Plato, whose authority was predominant
in Alexandria, was the phUosopher to whose influence the
theory is mainly due. The language in which the ideal
good is described in the Republic, ovk oiaias ovtos tow
dyaBov, dXX sti sirsKSiva ttjs ova-las TrpsaBsia Kal Svvdfisi
p. 31. Hilgenfeld on the other hand and in Thcol. Jahrb. 1856, p. 121 seq.,
(seeUeberweg^. c. p. 33) holds that the all regard Hippolytus as the ' most
exposition of Irenseus represents the reliable authority.
earlier doctrine. Jacobi, Basihdis Philo- ' Hippol. vii. 20. Cf. Clem. Alex.
sophi GnosticiSententice, Berolini 1852, Strom, vii. 17, p. 900.
Uhlhorn, Das Basilidianische System, * 2 Clem. Alex. Strom, vii. 17, p. 898.
Gott. 1855, Baur, Das Christenthum ' Hippol. vii. 20.
der drei ersten Jahrh. 1853 and 1860,

lect. x. BASILIDES. 147
virspsxovTos,1 with the further development of the same
doctrine by Philo, in which God is represented as without
qualities and not to be expressed in speech,2 contains in
substance the very same thing which BasUides has ex
pressed with some little rhetorical exaggeration, but with
out any substantial change. In the next century the same
theory reappears in the Neoplatonism of Plotinus, who
speaks of the supreme unity as above existence,3 and
again, two centuries later, in the expiring Neoplatonism
of Proclus, who speaks of God as above substance and life
and intelligence;4 and it has reappeared with all the
advantages of modern philosophical genius and learning
in the resuscitated Neoplatonism of Germany, in Schelling,
who speaks of the Absolute as neither ideal nor real,
neither thought nor being,5 and in Hegel, who identifies
pure existence with pure nothing.
The continuation of the exposition of Basilides, strange
as it may sound, is nothing but the same theory expressed
as before in somewhat rhetorical terms. , ' Since therefore,'
he continues,6 ' there was nothing, neither matter, nor sub
stance, nor unsubstantial, nor simple, nor compound, nor
inconceivable, nor imperceptible, nor man, nor angel, nor
God, nor in short any of the things that are named or
perceived by the senses or conceived by the intellect, but
all things being thus, and more minutely than thus, simply
obliterated, the non-existent God (whom Aristotle calls
thought of thought, but these men, non-existent), without
thought, without sense, without counsel, without choice,
1 Plato, Eesp. vi. p. 509. 5 Bruno, p. 58.
2 Philo, De Mundi Opif. c. 2 " Hippol. vii. 21. The text seems
(p. 2); Legis Meg. i. c. 13 (p. 50), incomplete. "We should perhaps read
c. 15 (p. 53) ; De Somn. ¦ i. 39 oi>x vK-rj, ovk &vv\ov, and (with Uhl-
(p. 655). horn, approved by Duncker and
3 Enn. v. 1. 10 to hreKeiva ovtos Schneidewin) ov votjt6v, ovk av&i\Tov,
T0 |'y. ovk oio-AtjtoV, ovk avaiadr\Tov.

4 Inst. Theol. a. 115.

l 2

148 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. x.
without passion, without desire, wUled to make a world.
When I say willed, I mean to signify without will and with
out thought and without sense; and by the world I mean
not that which was afterwards made and separated by size
and division, but the seed of the world. For the seed of the
world had eveiything in itself, as a grain of mustard seed in
the smaUest compass comprehends all things together, the
roots, the stem, the branches, the leaves, and the innumer
able seeds of other and yet other plants mingled with the
grains of the plant. Thus the non-existent God made a
non-existent world from things non-existent, having cast
down and deposited a single seed, having in itself the
universal seed of the world.' ' We are further told that
Basilides rejected the hypothesis of creation by emanation
(irpofioXri) or out of pre-existent matter; ' for what emana
tion,' he asked, ' or what matter need be assumed, that
God may make a world, as if He were a spider spinning
its threads, or a mortal man who takes for his work brass
or wood or some other material ? But, he said, God spake
and it was done, and this, as they say, is what Moses
expresses in the words Let there be light and there was
light. Whence, says Basilides, came the light? from
nothing. For it is not written whence, but only that it
came from the voice of him that spake. And the speaker,
he continues, was not, and that which was produced was
not. The seed of the world was produced from things that
were not, and this seed is the Word which was spoken,
Let there be light ; and this, he adds, is that which is spoken
in the Gospels, That is the true light which lighteth every
man coming into the world., 2
In this description, in which it is hard to say whether
sublimity or extravagance predominates, one or two things
are expressly worthy of notice. First, it will be seen that
1 t$jj/ tov K6o~pov nav<rireppiav. '* vii. 22.

IECT- x- BASILIDES. 149
BasUides altogether rejects the attempt, so common among
the Gnostics, to account for the origin of evil by the
hypothesis either of an eternal inert matter, or of a self-
existing, active, malignant principle. The unity of his
first principle is maintained in terms whose intenseness
borders on absurdity. He plunges at once into the most
abstract representation of the absolute, and seems to admit
evil in no other form than as a phase in the world's
development. His theory, if not distinctly pantheistic,
needs but one step to make it so.1 The name of God has
but to be transferred from the non-existent to the only
recognised existence, the process of the evolution of the
world, and evU at once ceases to be evil and becomes a
part of the Divine manifestation. Secondly, it is easy to
trace in this exposition the influence of Greek philosophy
modified by Alexandrian Judaism. The non-existent God,
as I have already observed, is the Platonic absolute good,
above aU definite existence ; the seed of the world, with its
development into definite existences, bears a close resem
blance to the ofiov irdvra or primitive chaos of Anaxagoras ;
and the word iravarrsp/j,ia, which Basilides borrows, is em
ployed by Aristotle to denote the relation of the ofioiofispij
of Anaxagoras to the four elements.3 The Xoyos o-nispfiamms
again holds an important position in the Stoical philo
sophy as denoting the productive power of nature, by which
the world is developed according to a fixed and rational

' Cf. Uhlhorn, Das Basilidianische Zeller, Phil, der Gr. I. p. 670. Th©
System. Gott. 1855, p. 34 ; Hilgenfeld word is also used by Aristotle, DeAn.
in Theol. Jahrb. 1856, pp. 88, 115; i. 2, 3, with reference to the philo-
Baur, ibid. p. 138. Yet this pan- sophy of Democritus. It had pre-
theism is not incompatible with a viously been employed by Plato>
certain kind of dualism, as in Spinoza : Timceus p. 73 o. On the resemblance
the One presents the opposite side of between Basilides and Anaxagoras,
.thought and extension. See Baur, see Baur in Theol. Jahrb. 1856,
I. c. P- 146.
2 Arist. De Gen. et Corr. i. 1, 5. Cf.

150 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. x.
law ; ' and this philosophy, with its pantheistic conception
of the world and its phenomena, presents many analogies
to the theory of Basilides.2 But these heathen materials
are here combined with a higher teaching borrowed from
the book of Genesis interpreted somewhat after the
manner of Philo. But, thirdly and especially, we should
observe that Basilides attempts to reinforce his heathen
and Jewish cosmogony by a Christian element borrowed
from the Gospel of St. John ; and this newly recovered
quotation, coming" in a work written at latest during the
reign of Hadrian, is fatal to the favourite hypothesis of
the Tubingen critics, who would persuade us that the
Gospel was not written tiU the middle of the second
century.3 The conception of matter as part of the divine creation,
and therefore not necessarily evU, is further carried out in
the sequel of the theory. In the seed of the world, says
Basilides, there is a threefold sonship, of one substance4
with the non-existent God, produced from things that are
not. Of this sonship, divided into three parts, one part
was fine, another gross, and a third needing purification.5
The first of these immediately sprang up to the non
existent God ; the second strove to ascend, but was only
enabled to do so by the assistance of wings, such as those
described in Plato's Phsedrus, and which Basilides caUs, not
wings, but the Holy Spirit. By the aid of this wing or
spirit the second sonship ascended, not to the non-existent
' See Zeller, Phil, der Griechen in the Stoical philosophy; and it is
III. 1, p. 146. exactly here that the Platonic in-
2 Cf. Uhlhorn, Das Basil. Syst. fluence may be traced.
p. 12, and Baur in Theol. Jahrb. 1856, 3 Bunsen, Hippolytus I. p. 87.
p. 145, who refers especially to the * Spoovtrios.
doctrine of Cleanthes in Stobseus, Eel. * The words naxvpepes, to Si must
i. 372. Baur denies that there is any clearly be supplied from the summary
trace of Platonism in Basilides. Yet (x. 14). So Duncker and Schneidewin
he admits that the representation of read.
the Deity as ovk &v is not to be found

tBCT. x. BASILIDES. 151
Deity, but to the next inferior place, while the spirit became
separated from the sonship and occupied the intermediate
place between the world and the supermundane region,
being placed as a firmament between the one and the
other.1 The third sonship, which needed purification,
remained in the mass which constituted the seed of the
universe. In this strange allegory it seems natural to recognise
a very embellished form of the Mosaic account of the
creation. The first sonship seems to indicate that portion
of finite existence which is purely spiritual, and which,
like the ideas of Plato, is in immediate- connection with
and* subordination to the ideal good which is above all
definite existence. In the second or grosser sonship, we
seem to recognise the finer portion of the material creation,
the ' waters which are above the firmament,' borne up by
the sphit, which is here identified with the firmament
and the atmosphere pervading the sphere below the firma
ment. The third sonship, that which needs purification,
seems to represent that portion of the spiritual creation
which remains on earth united to material bodies, from
which however it is to be separated hereafter. Having
thus described the generation of the supermundane region
and the firmament by which it is separated from the
world, Basilides next proceeds to the formation of the
world below the firmament. 'After the firmament was
formed, there sprang forth from the seed of the world
the great Ruler, the head of the world, of indestructible
beauty and magnitude and power. He sprang up and
ascended as high as the firmament,, but being unable to
1 This irvevpa pe86piov (Hipp. be taken from Heb. i. 14, eis Siaxoviav
vii. 23) seems to answer to the Sidjcovos ctirocrTe\\6peva : and here also the
or ministering spirit, cited from the reference is in the first instance to the
teaching of Basilides by Clem. Alex. wind, as seems to be also the inter-
Excerpt. Theod. 16, p. 972. Cf.Baur pretation of the theory as stated by
in Theol. Jahrb. 1856, p. 154. The Hippolytus. Cf. Alford on Heb. i.
expression in the latter case seems to 14.

152 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM : lect. x.
ascend higher, and being ignorant of the existence of the
region beyond, he became the wisest and most powerful
and brightest of mundane existences, superior to all beneath
except that portion of the divine sonship which still
remained in the world. Believing himself to be the
highest of all beings, he undertook the formation of a
world of definite existences. First he begat a son wiser
and more powerful than himself, whom he seated at his
right hand, thus forming what in the language of these
philosophers is called the Ogdoad ; the whole celestial or
ethereal creation being formed by the great Ruler with the
aid and counsel of his greater son. In thus acting, the
Ruler of the world did but accomplish unwittingly the
counsel of the non-existent God, which he had predeter
mined when he created the seed of the universe.' The
relation between the ruler of the visible world and his
son is explained by Hippolytus as identical with Aristotle's
distinction between the body and the soul, the latter being
the svTsXs'xsia or completeness of the former, by which it is
governed and acts.1
The great Ruler and his son govern the whole ethereal
region down to the sphere of the moon, where the finer
ether is succeeded by the grosser air. Within the lower
sphere is generated in like manner a second ruler inferior
to the first, whose region is called the Hebdomad, and who
is the creator and governor of aU below him, commencing
his creation like the first ruler with the generation of a
son greater than himself. He too acts unwittingly in
subordination to the non-existent Deity, and the things
that are produced come into existence according to the
laws first ordained in the seed of the world. The great
Archon, the ruler of the Ogdoad, we are further told,
bears the mystical name of Abrasax, or, as other authors
1 Cf. Baur in Theol. Jahrb. 1856, p. 148, who identifies the son of the
Archon with the world-soul.

lect. x. BASILIDES. 153
give it, Abraxas, and rules over 865* heavens,1 his name
¦containing the number 365, according to the numerical
powers of the Greek letters of which it is composed.
Many and various attempts have been made to discover a
hidden meaning in this name and in the parts of which
it is composed,2 but probably no other explanation is
needed than that supplied by the numerical force of its
letters.3 The number 365 has an obvious connection with
the solar year, and it is not impossible that the so-called
365 heavens may have been a mistaken interpretation of
some theory connected with the 365 days of the year,4 or
they may merely represent the apparent diurnal revolution
of the sun. But be this as it may, there can be no doubt
that the personified Abraxas was meant as a symbol of
the sun. The name is to be met with on numbers of stones
which stUl exist, and which are known generally by the
name of Abraxas gems, though the name is often incor
rectly given to other remains besides those to which it
properly belongs. These gems confirm the explanation
which identifies Abraxas with the sun-god.5
1 That it is improbable that the 4 Something of this sort might
doctrine of 365 heavens was literally naturally arise from the Egyptian
held by Basilides, see Lardner, Hist. doctrine of a guardian genius for
of Heretics b. ii. c. 2. sec. 4. Hence the every day in the year. Abraxas would
probability, as suggested below, that then be the head of all these. Cf.
it was the misrepresentation of some Matter, II. p. 4. Massuet (Irenseus,
theory concerning the year. Diss. Prcev. i. § 116) supposes the 365
2 For some of these explanations, apparent revolutions of the sun to be
see Matter, Hist, du Gnosticisme meant.
vol. I. p. 412 seq. 5 Cf. King, The Gnostics and their
3 See Harvey's Irenceus, I. p. 202, Bemains p. 35, 78 seq. Pseudo-Ter-
where a similar explanation is cited tullian, De Prcescr. c. 46, and Jerome,
from St. Augustine, De Hceres. 4. The Comm. in Amos iii. 9 seq., say that
sum is as follows : — Abraxas in Basilides is the name of
a= 1 the Supreme God. This is by no
f} = 2 means so clear in the representation of
p = 100 Irenseus, nor in Epiphanius and Theo-
a— i doret, who follow him. Hilgenfeld in
|= 60 Theol. Jahrb. 1856, p. 118, and Baur,
a= i ibid. p. 157, state the difference
s = 200 between Hippolytus and the other
"~7T authorities too generally. For an

154 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. x.
The second ruler, the Lord of the Hebdomad, is ex
pressly identified with the God of the Jews who appeared
to Moses in the burning bush. As the number 365 is
connected with the solar year, we are naturally tempted
to suppose a connection between the number seven and
the four phases, of the moon, within whose sphere the
Hebdomad is placed, as well as with the seven days of
creation and the consequent institution of the week of
seven days. It is also probable that the Hebdomad and
the Ogdoad contain an aUusion to the seven spheres of the
planets, and the eighth of the fixed stars ; ' but without
attempting to fix minutely the details of these allusions,
we may at least conclude in general that this portion of
the cosmogony of Basilides contains an aUegorical appli
cation of the scriptural account of the creation as symbo
lical of theories of astronomy. Such is a brief outline of the
creation of the world according to the theory of Basilides.
We have next to consider his account of its redemp
tion. This consists in the lifting up to God of that third
class of sonship which was described in the beginning as
needing purification. In this third sonship it is easy to
recognise the Gnostic distinction of the irvsvjxaTiKoi or
spiritual persons, that portion of mankind who are capable
of attaining to knowledge, but who are compeUed for a
time to reside in the material world imprisoned in material
bodies, and having their spiritual part clogged and hin
dered by bodUy senses and passions. The means of their
deliverance is the Gospel, which is characteristicaUy de
fined as r) t&v wrspKoo-fjiiaiv yv&tjis,2 the knowledge of those
account of the so-called Abraxas gems, the Ogdoad represents the sum of all
many of which are heathen, see the spheres, corresponding in number
Lardner, Hist, of Heretics b. ii. o. 2, to those of Plato, Eesp. x. p. 616. Cf.
sect. 22. Baur in Theol. Jahrb. 1856, p. 158.
1 The Hebdomad may perhaps z Hippol. vii. 27 (p. 376,
represent the sublunar sphere, while Duncker).

lect x. BASILIDES. 155
Divine things which are above the world, in the region of
the non-existent God and of the spiritual offspring who
have already ascended to him. It is the need of this
deliverance which is expressed in the language of St. Paul,
'The whole creation groaneth and trayaileth in pain
together, waiting for the manifestation of the sons of
God ; ' l and by the sons of God, says Basilides, are meant
the spiritual men who are left here to arrange and
mould and rectify and complete those souls which are
constituted by nature to remain below in this region. The
former state of the world may be divided into two periods.
In the first, as it is written, ' Sin reigned from Adam to
Moses ; ' 2 that is to say, the great Archon, the ruler of the
Ogdoad, whose name is unspeakable, had his dominion,
and believed himself to be the only God, for all above him
was hidden. After this came the government of the
second Archon, the ruler of the Hebdomad, who is the God
who revealed himself to- Moses as being the God of
Abraham and of Isaac and of Jacob, but as not having
revealed to them the unspeakable name of the first Ruler.
From the inspiration of this Archon spoke the prophets
who lived before the time of the Saviour. Then came the
third period, when the sons of God should be revealed,
when the Gospel came into the world, passing through
every principality and power and dominion and every

1 Hippol. vii. 25. It will be seen rbv Baffi\etSr)V KaBb Kal iirl tSjs
that this quotation is a combination eK\oyi)S rdTTovcriv avri\v, ri paB-fipara
of two verses of Bomans viii, the avairodelKTus evpicrnovo-av KaraK^ei
first part from ver. 22, the second vairriKy. Here again the eKKeKrbs is
from ver. 19. The vvevpariKis of Ba- from Bom. viii. 33, the whole
silides, as described in the extract cited chapter being pressed to the support
by Hippolytus, is the same as the of the theory. Cf. Baur in Theol.
person described by Clement, Strom. Jahrb. 1856, p. 152 seq.
v. 1 (p. 645 Potter) cpvaei mOTov Kal 2 Kom. v. 14. St. Paul how-
eK\eKTOv ovtos, &s Bao-i\elSris vopl(ei, ever says iPacrLKevo-ev d Bdvaros, not
and Strom, ii. 3 (p. 433) eVraC0a fi apaprla.
cpvaiK.'ijv rryovvrai tV TticxTiv oi apcpl

156 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. x.
name that is named.1 It did not indeed come down, for
nothing which is in the region above can quit the presence
of God and descend, but it kindled the intellects which
rose to it from below, as the Indian naphtha attracts fire
from a distance. First, the great Archon of the Ogdoad
was illuminated by means of his son, and learned that he
was not the Supreme God, and he feared and confessed
his sin in having magnified himself, as it is written, ' The
fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom.' 2 From the
first Archon and his kingdom the light of the Gospel was
communicated to the second Archon with similar results ;
and after the whole of his dominion had been illuminated,
the light came down from the Hebdomad to the earth and
enlightened Jesus the son of Mary. From that time the
constitution of the world is to continue tUl the remaining
sons of God have been formed after the likeness of Jesus,
and have been purified and enabled to ascend on high.
When this ascension is completed, God shall bring upon
the whole world the great ignorance, that aU things may
remain in the place assigned to them by nature, and
desire nothing beyond. All souls which are designed by
nature for the world, and not for the region above the
world, from the Archon of the Ogdoad downwards, shall be
involved in utter ignorance of aU that is above them, that
thus they may have no sense of deficiency or pain of
desire ; and thus wUl be brought about the restoration of aU
things which in the beginning were established in the seed
of the universe, and shaU be restored in their own season.
1 An adaptation of Ephes. i. 21. redemption as a separation of the
2 Cf. Clem. Alex. Strom, ii. 8 spiritual element. Indeed Hippolytus
(p. 448). Clement uses the expression uses the same language, vii. 27 iva
apxhvyev6pevov troeplas cpvXoKpivnriKris airapxh "ji cpv\oKpwi]creas yevrrrai
re Kal SiaKfiirtKris Kal reKewriKrjs Kal t&v ovyKexvpevtov 6 'Irjcrovs k.t.\. Cf.
aTroKaTao-TOTiKijs, which quite agrees Uhlhorn, Das Bas. Syst. p. 49 ; Baur
with the representation of Hippolytus, in Theol. Jahrb. 1856, p. 151.
according to which Basilides regarded

lect. x. BASILIDES. 157
In addition to this theory of the generation and
restoration of the universe, Hippolytus teUs us that the
disciples of Basilides accepted the Gospel narrative of the
life of Jesus, and admitted the reality of his sufferings,
which however, they said, were endured for no other
purpose than the separation of the spiritual element in
the universe from the inferior things which were mingled
with it. Of that separation Jesus himself was the first-
fruits. His bodily nature suffered and was resolved into
formlessness. The several constituents of his higher
nature ascended each to its cognate region ; the psychical
to the domain of the great Archon ; the spiritual to the
intermediate region of the spirit ; the divine to the super
mundane abode of the Supreme God and his true sons.
From this statement of Hippolytus, which is indirectly
confirmed by Clement of Alexandria,1 it appears that
BasUides did not adopt the Docetic views of the person of
Jesus which were attributed to him (or perhaps rather to
his foUowers) by Irenseus and others.2 Especially that
strange and profane fancy, that Simon of Cyrene was
changed into the likeness of Jesus and suffered in his
stead, while Jesus, in the form of Simon, stood by and
laughed at his enemies, could have had no place in the
original teaching of BasUides, though it may have been
engrafted on his system by some of its later exponents.
A comparison of the notices of Hippolytus with those
of Clement wUl also enable us to correct another erroneous
impression which has generally prevailed concerning the
teaching of BasUides, namely, that he was one of those
1 Strom, iv. 12 (p. 600), where 2 Irenseus, i. 24. 4. Cf. Epiphan.
Basilides is represented as speaking , Hcer. xxiv. 3 ; Theodoret, Hcer. Fab.
of the sufferings of Jesus, and likens i. 4. So also Tertullian, De Ees. Cam.
them to those of the infant, who has c. 2 ; and Pseudo-Tertull. De Pressor.
committed no actual sin, yet suffers, c. 46. Cf. Uhlhorn, p. 50 ; Matter, II.
exeev iv eavrcp to apaprrjTiKSv. Cf. p. 22.
Uhlhorn, Das Bas. Syst. p. 43.

158 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. x.
who accounted for the existence of evU by the Persian
hypothesis of two independent principles.1 A passage
in Clement, which was once supposed to give some sup
port to fhis view, receives quite a different interpretation
when examined by the light of the new information
furnished by Hippolytus. Basilides and his followers,
according to Clement, called the passions of man irpoo--
apTr)p,a,Ta, or appendages, and regarded them as spirits
appended to the rational soul in consequence of a certain
disturbance and confusion of principles (jcaTa Tiva rdpa%ov
Kal avyyuo-w dpyiKrjv) ;2 with these were connected other
spurious spirits of different natures, such as those of
the wolf, the ape, the lion, or the goat, or even of plants
and minerals, which form desires in the soul of a similar
kind.3 We are reminded of Plato's figurative representa
tion of the appetitive portion of the soul as a many-headed
monster, and of the shells and seaweed clinging round the
divine form of the sea-god Glaucus ; 4 but there is nothing
in the passage to suggest a dualistic origin of evU, unless
it be in the words KaTa avyyycriv dpyiKr]v, which have
often been explained as implying a conflict between the
good and evil principle, but which the exposition of
Hippolytus, who uses the same term, clearly shows to be
employed in their more natural sense as denoting a mix
ture of elements, spiritual and material. The only

1 This has been maintained by necessity based on the doctrine is
Neander, Bitter, Baur (in his Chr. also Platonic. The rational soul
Gnosis, subsequently dropped in his must contend with and overcome the
later exposition), and recently by material accretions.
Hilgenfeld in Theol. Jahrb. 1856. * Hippol. vii. 27 (p. 244 Miller
2 Clem. Alex. Strom, ii. 20 378 Duncker) SXr) yap avr&v r\ \m6-
(p. 488, Potter). On this passage, Beais avyxvois olovel wavo-ireppias Kal
see Baur in Theol. Jahrb. 1856, epv\oKpivr}o~is Kal et-KOHarderTaais t&v
p. 152. crvyKexvpevav els to oiKeia. Cf.
3 Plato, Besp. ix. p. 588, x. p. 611. Uhlhorn, Das Basilidianisehe System
The argument of Isidore recorded p. 44; Baur in Theol. Jahrb. 1856,
by Clement against the plea of p. 152.

LECT. x. BASILIDES. 159
evidence which exists, for distinctly charging Basilides
with dualism, is found in a work, the authority of which
has been much disputed,1 the extant Latin translation of
a lost original,2 purporting to be the account of a dis
cussion between the Persian Manes and Archelaus, Bishop
of Caschar in Mesopotamia. In that work BasUides is
named as a precursor of the Manichean doctrine, and a
fragment is quoted from a writing of his, in which he
maintains the doctrine of certain barbarians concerning
two eternal principles. But the fragment as quoted does
not show whether BasUides accented this doctrine ; and
the assertion that he does so rests only on the very
doubtful authority of the writer by whom he is quoted,
and is too much at variance with what we know of his
philosophy from other sources to have any claim to
acceptance.3 In fact, the philosophy of Basilides, as described in our
previous notice, is of all Gnostic systems the one which
least requires or admits of such a hypothesis. In its
external character it seems to be an allegorical represen
tation of the religious progress of the world, from Sabaism
to Judaism, and from Judaism to Christianity ;¦ the first
stage being represented by the reign of Abraxas, the Sun-
God, from Adam to Moses ; the second by the revelation of
the Archon of the Hebdomad to the Hebrew lawgiver ; the
third by the period of purification introduced by the
Gospel. In its internal or philosophical character, it is a
pantheistic representation of the evolutions of the world
in a series of necessary developments, in which, as in all
systems conceived in a pantheistic spirit, free-will and
1 As by Beausobre, Histoire de Syriac; thence translated and epito-
Manichie I. c. 12, 13, and by Milman, raised in Greek, and thence into Latin.
Hist, of Christianity II. p. 272. Cf. 3 Cf. Uhlhorn, Das Bas. " '
South, Bel. Sacr. V. p. 23. p. 53.
2 It was originally written in

160 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. x.
moral guilt have no place,1 and the only form of evil
admitted is that of a mere temporary disturbance of the
natural position of things ; the spiritual being mingled
with the material instead of being exalted above it.2
With the views which Basilides entertained of the
nature o fevil and of the relation of the world to Gock
there could be no need of the hypothesis adopted in other
Gnostic systems of a series of emanations or intermediate
beings between God and the world, so disposed as to make
the creation of the material universe the work of an
inferior and imperfect agent; and accordingly, in the
extract above cited, we find Basilides expressly repudiating
the theory of creation by emanations, as well as that of
an eternally pre-existent matter. Nevertheless, in the
commonly-received account of his doctrine as given by
Irenseus and those who have followed his statements, we
find this doctrine expressly ascribed to Basilides. ' He
sets forth,' says Irenseus, ' that from the unborn Father
sprang Now, and from this again Aoyos, from Aoyos,
tppovr/o-is, from Qpovrjeris, SooS/a and Avvafiis, and from
Avva/us and 2o<pta, powers and principalities and angels,
whom he calls the first, and by whom the first heaven was
made. From these by emanation were derived others
who made a second heaven, similar to the first ; and in
like manner, by emanation from these, others were made,
the counterparts of those above them, and these formed a
third heaven ; and from the third again in downward
succession a fourth; and in succession after this manner
they say that other principalities and angels were made,
and heavens to the number of 365. Wherefore the year

1 Clement expressly charges Basi- 2 Cf. Uhlhorn, Das Bas. Syst.
lides with excluding free-will, Strom. p. 35; Baur in Theol. Jahrb. 1856,
ii. 3, p. 434. Cf. Uhlhorn, Das Bas. p. 142.
Syst. p. 38.

lect. x. BASILIDES. 161
contains so many days, according to the number of the
heavens.1 The" theory as here exhibited is probably a later modi
fication of the original teaching of BasUides, under the
influence of the school of Valentinus.2 But though it is
scarcely possible that Basilides himself could have held
the theory in the form in which it is here attributed to
him, it is by no means improbable that he may have pre
pared the way for it, by recognising something like the
personification of spiritual attributes which head the
above list, though not in the form of successive emana
tions. The resemblance which has been already noticed
between the non-existent Deity of Basilides and the ideal
Good of Plato renders it probable that Basilides, like Plato,
may have connected his absolute first principle with a
subordinate inteUigible world of ideas, though these
would form but minor details in his system, and could
not be interposed as successive links in the world of
creation.3 This supposition receives some support from
a brief notice in Clement of Alexandria, who speaks of
BasUides as recognising an Ogdoad of which two of the
members were Justice and her daughter Peace.4 If we
add these to the five intellectual qualities personified in
the list of Irenseus, and omit the creative powers and
angels which seem to belong to a later form of the theory,
we shaU have, with the addition of the absolute first prin-
1 Irenseus, i. 24. 3. Cf. Epiphan. refer the name Abraxas to the latter).
Hcer. xxiv. 1 ; Theodoret, Hcer. Fab. The Tvavoirepu-ia being cut off with the
i. 4. first part of the system, a theory of
2 Cf. Uhlhorn, Das Bas. Syst. emanation became necessary, and the
p. 58, 60. The change probably was dualistic assumption of a primitive
made by cutting off the ovk Siv matter can come in. Cf. Baur in
0eoV, an abstraction which few could Theol. Jahrb. 1856, p. 158.
follow, and with it all the v*epK6crpia. 3 Cf. Uhlhorn, Das Bas. Syst.
The first Archon will then take the p. 48.
place of the Supreme God (which 4 Strom, iv. 25 (p. 637).
explains the statement of those who M

162 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. x.
ciple, a spiritual Ogdoad bearing considerable resemblance
to the ideas of Plato.1
It was natural, according to the distinction drawn by
Basilides between the spiritual and the material and his
theory of redemption as a separation of the former
from the latter, that he should deny the resurrection
of the body.2 But he is also said to have maintained
the doctrine of a transmigration of souls from one body
to another,3 which, though not a natural consequence
of his chief doctrine, is not inconsistent with it, if we
suppose the several transmigrations to be admitted,
as in Plato,4 as steps in the purification of the soul.
Besides this Pythagorean doctrine, BasUides is also said
to have required of his foUowers a probation of five years
of silence,5 a rule which might probably have been adopted
also from the Pythagorean philosophy, which at this time
was being resuscitated in Alexandria.6 Another of the
minor details of the teaching of Basilides as recorded by
Irenseus has received a fuUer explanation from the dis
covery of the work of his disciple Hippolytus. According
to Irenseus and Theodoret, the disciples of BasUides gave
to the Saviour of the world the strange title of Caulacau.7
The meaning of this term, which had been partly ex
plained by Epiphanius,8 is more fuUy illustrated by
1 This class of spiritual ideas will E. iv. 7.
correspond to what Hippolytus de- B Cf. Matter II. p. 18.
scribes as the first wo'tjjs, which ' Irenaeus, i. 24. 5 ; Theodoret,
ascended immediately to the Father. Hcer. Fab. i. 4. The text of the
Cf. Jakobi in Herzog, Art. ' Basilides,' former, which is obviously corrupt,
I. p. 709. may be corrected by the latter.
2 Irenseus, i. 24. 5. Epiphan. Hcer. xxv. 3 attributes a
3 Origen in Bom. lib. v. ( Opera similar doctrine to the Nicolaitans.
VI. p. 336, Lommatzsch). Cf. Clem. 8 Hcer. xxv. 4, where the three
Alex. Strom, iv. 12 (p. 601), and words KavXaKav, cravXacrav, and
Matter, Hist, du Gnosticisme II. iiriperdp, are traced to their origin,
p. 2. though their significance in the Gnostic
1 Phcedrua pp. 248, 249. teaching is not explained.
> Agrippa Castor in Euseb. H.

lect. x. BASILIDES. 163
Hippolytus, who however attributes it, not to the Basili-
deans, but to the Ophites. He refers to these heretics
the use of these mystical words, KavXaicav, eravXacrav, and
fyt]Gap ; * the first as meaning the heavenly, spiritual man ;
the second, the mortal man upon earth ; the third, the
spirit raised by the Gnostic doctrine from earth to
heaven.2 The words as thus given represent in a com
plete form the original Hebrew of Isaiah xxviii. 10, pre
cept upon precept, line upon line, here a little? The
celestial man was caUed line upon line, or perhaps rather,
as in the LXX version, hope upon hope ; the earthly man
was precept upon precept ; whUe the iUuminated Gnostics,
the chosen few, were here a little.* This classification,
though quite in accordance with the general spirit of
Gnosticism, has little connection with the peculiar theory
of BasUides, and may have been one of the later features
of the school, introduced by his foUowers.
Irenseus charges the disciples of BasUides with gross
immorahty of life;5 but the testimony of Clement of
Alexandria seems to show that the teaching of Basilides
himself, as weU as of his son Isidorus, was of a very different
character.6 Yet as Clement expressly says that he cites
their teaching to refute those Basilideans who assumed a
licence not permitted by their first teachers, we may con
clude that there was some foundation for the charge as
regards the later members of the sect. It is not impro
bable that the distinction, on which so much of the teach-
' Hippol. Bef. Hcer. v. 8. ' Cf. Harvey's Irenceus I. p. 201.
2 The last word is explained 5 Irenseus, i. 24. 5.
to mean tou iirl ri &vu peiaavros 6 Clem. Alex. Strom, iii. 1.
'lopSdvov. But in v. 7 the backward Epiphanius, Hcer. xxxii. 4, cites the
flow of the Jordan is interpreted as same passage from Isidorus with a
signifying the irvevpariK)] yivecris of very immoral interpretation ; but the
the Gnostic. Cf. Harvey's Irenceus I. context of Clement shows that this
p. 201. is not the true meaning. See also
3 O0 *1»J*t ip^ ^ 1vS> 1S. Clem- Alex- 8trom- iv- 12 (P- 600)'
m 2

164 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. x.
ing of Basilides was based, between his own followers as
the elect, and the rest of mankind as carnal, might foster
the delusion that these privileged persons were not bound
by the same laws as other men ; ' though it was far from
the intention of the teacher to inculcate this licentious
doctrine. In one respect however the practice of
Basilides himself gave just offence to Christian writers,
in that he taught that it was lawful to partake of sacrifices
to idols and to deny the faith in time of persecution.2
We cannot trace in Basilides any of that hostility to
the Jewish religion and the God of the Jews which dis
tinguished some of the Gnostic sects. On the contrary,
he seems to have regarded Judaism as a necessary stage
in the development and education of the world ; and he
appears to have received and made use of the Jewish
Scriptures, at least in part, as weU as the New Testament,
though he added to these sacred books certain apocryphal
writings by pretended prophets of his own, called Barcabbas
and Barcoph or Parchor, of which it is difficult to say
whether they were real books of Eastern theosophy or
forgeries of his own composition.
The system of Basilides is of all the Gnostic systems
the one which least recognises any break or distinction
between the Christian revelation and the other religions
of the world, heathen or Jewish. His1 leading thought is
the continuity of the world's development, the gradual
purification and enlightenment, we might almost say in
modern language, the education of the world, by means of
a progressive series of movements, succeeding to one
another by a fixed law of evolution. But while the
system thus gains in philosophical unity, it loses in moral
1 &s ijroi ixAvruv ityvtrlav Kal toC 2 Agrippa Castor in Euseb. H. E.
apapreiy Sid tV TeAeioT7)Ta, Clem. iv. 7. Cf. Irenseus, i. 24.
Alex. Strom, iii. 1.

lect. x. BASILIDES. 165
and religious significance. No place is left for the special
providence of God, nor for the freewill of man. The
^scheme almost approaches to a Stoical pantheism, and
quite to a Stoical fatalism. The Supreme God is an im
personal being, capable of no religious relation to man,
and introduced for no other purpose than to give the first
impulse to the mechanical movement of the world's
self-development; even this amount of activity being
introduced as it were per saltum, by a gratuitous and in
consistent assumption. As a mere system of metaphysics
the theory of Basilides contains the nearest approach to
the conception of a logical phUosophy of the absolute
which the history of ancient thought can furnish, almost
rivalling that of Hegel in modern times ; but in the same
degree in which it elevates God to the position of an
absolute first principle, it strips Him of those attributes
which alone can make Him the object of moral obedience
or religious worship.

166 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xi.

LECTURE XI.
EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM — VALENTINUS AND THE
VALENTINIANS.
The Egyptian Gnosticism attained to its fullest develop
ment and its greatest popularity in the system of Valen
tinus, who, whUe building on the same foundations, and
for the most part with the same materials, as his prede
cessor Basilides, obtained for his philosophy a more
general reception by exhibiting it in the form of poetical
personifications instead of metaphysical abstractions.
Valentinus is reported, though not upon very certain
testimony, to have been a native of Egypt, and to have
been educated at Alexandria, where he received instruc
tion in Greek literature.1 From Egypt he came to Rome
during the pontificate of Hyginus, and remained there
during that of Pius, and untU the succession of Anicetus ; 2
a period which may be roughly stated as extending from
a.d. 140 to 157 or later.3 Subsequently he is said to
have retired to Cyprus, and there to have openly pro
claimed his secession from the Church, having previously
been in at least a nominal communion.4 According to
1 Epiphan, Hcer. xxxi. Epipha- his system.
nius confesses that the earlier writers 2 Irenseus, iii. 4 ; Euseb. H. E.
give no account of the birthplace of iv. 11.
Valentinus, and that he merely follows 3 Hyginus became Pope a.d. 139 ;
tradition. His Greek training how- Pius a.d. 142; Anicetus a.d. 157.
ever is manifest from the character of 4 Epiph, Hcer. xxxi. 7.

lect. xi. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 167
Tertullian, his open secession was occasioned by disap
pointment in the hope of succeeding to a bishopric.1
The heresy of Valentinus has an especial interest for
us, as having, through one of its branches, given occasion
to the great work of Irenseus in opposition to Gnosticism,
' The Refutation and Overthrow of Knowledge falsely
so called.'2 The branch of the Valentinians which had
attained to the greatest celebrity at this time, and whose
tenets are directly described by Irenseus in the first nine
chapters of his work, seems to have been that founded by
Ptolemseus, a disciple of Valentinus,3 whose variations
from the teaching of his master we shall have to consider
hereafter ; but the doctrines of Valentinus himself, as well
as of other schools of Gnosticism, are also noticed in
detail in the course of the work. The main principles of
the system remain in the subsequent schools as they were
invented by the master, varying only in some subordinate
details. The system of Valentinus is an eclecticism derived
from various sources, but we may trace in it the influence
especially of three leading ideas. The first, which is
derived from the Platonic philosophy, is that which
considers the higher existences of the terrestrial world 4
as having their superior and more real counterparts in
the celestial world, the ideal substances being but imper- j
fectly reflected in their earthly shadows.5 The second, j
which is derived in a modified form from the pantheistic I
1 Tertull. Adv. Valent. c. 4. sect.
2 'E\e'7xou Kal avarpoirris ttjs 4 According to the original concep-
ifievSavvpov yvdcreas, Euseb. H. E. v. tion of Plato himself, as represented
7. That this was the title adopted by by the youthful Socrates in the Par-
Irenseus himself, see Harvey's Ire- menides, p. 130, where the higher
nceus I. p. clxiii. class of existences only are regarded
3 See Massuet, Diss. Prcev. in Iren. as having ideal counterparts.
i. § 83. The Ptolemseans described 5 Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis
subsequently by Irenseus, i. 12, seem p. 124.
to have been a later perversion of the

168 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xi.
phUosophy of India, is that which regards the origin of
material existence as due to an error, or faU, or degrada
tion of some higher mode of being ; material existence, if
not relative existence in general, being regarded as a
transient blot on the perfection of the absolute.1 The
third, derived from the Judaism of Alexandria, is that
which attributes the creation of the world, notwithstand
ing its deterioration from a higher exceUence, as due to
the Wisdom of God, an attribute which appears in a
representation approaching to a separate personality, such
\ as is figuratively given to it occasionally even in the
i canonical books of the Old Testament (as in Job, chap.
xxviii, and Proverbs, chap, viii), and stUl more in the
apocryphal books of Ecclesiasticus and the Wisdom of
\ Solomon.2 The influence of the Persian religious philo
sophy may perhaps be seen in some of the minor detaUs
of the system, but only as regards external form and
arrangement applied to a very different philosophical
conception. To the first of these ideas is due the addition
which Valentinus made to the system of Basilides, by
filling the supermundane region beyond the firmament
with a succession of Mons_ or celeslialJbeings, the^JUeal
prototypes of things imperfectly realised oil earth.3 The
vague conception which appears in the earlier Gnostic
of the Sonship of God finding its appropriate place in the
celestial region, assumes in the hands of his successor the
form of a definite multitude of personified ideas. The
1 Baur, I. c, derives this idea also even the material world to the
from Platonism. But first, Plato Supreme God as its creator. It is
recogliiseB an eternal unformed only the mortal bodies of men which
matter, which is not to be found in are the work of inferior beings, and
the system of Valentinus, and which even this is done by the command of
precludes the pantheistic hypothesis God. Cf. Timceus pp. 29-34, 41
of the origin of matter ; and secondly, seq.
Plato does not regard the creation as 2 Cf. Eccles. i. 1-10, xxiv. 1-18;
a fall, but distinctly attributes it Wisd. vii. 22-30, viii. 1-9, ix. 9-11.
to the goodness of God; and refers 3 Cf. Harvey's Irenceus I. p. cxi. sey,

lect. xi. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENT1NIANS. 169
half-material, half- spiritual conception of the firmament,
or air, or spirit, which in the theory of Basilides forms
the boundary between the supermundane and the mundane
region, is replaced in the system of Valentinus by the iEon
Horus (opos), not the Egyptian deity of that name, but a
personification of the Greek term signifying limit or boun
dary.1 To the combination of the second and third ideas
is due the strange fancy of the passion and sorrow of the
lower or mundane Sophia) whose distinctive name, Acha-
moth, borrowed from the word designating creative wisdom
in the Book of Proverbs,2 together with the whole descrip
tion of her fall and sufferings, is intended to intimate that
divine wisdom cannot stoop to the work of material creation
without being first degraded from her divine nature, and
expelled, as it were, from her heavenly habitation.
Tlie system of Valentinus commences with an assump
tion which, though cognate to that of Basilides, differs
from it as a poetical^jpCT^qnification differs from a merely
metaphysical ^abstraction. In the place of the non-exis
tent God, who is simply described by negatives, who has
no name in language and no attributes, not even that
of definite existence, Valentinus substitutes the conception
of a primary being who is named By6os_mJ0^gth ; a
term which, whUe it is not much more definite than the
ovk wv dibs of Basilides, yet serves to exhibit the absolute
first principle in a positive rather than a negative aspect,
as potentially containing all existence rather than as
actually determined by none.3 The negative or meta-
1 Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis singular nEOn is used of creative
p. 128. wisdom in viii. 1, 12. Cf. Harvey's
2 Achamoth is the Hebrew Irenceus I. p. cxxiii.
n'lDSn. The exact word, in its a cf. Neander, Church Hist. II.
plurafform, though with a singular p. 72 (Bohn). Irenseus gives the
sense, occurs Prov. ix. 1, ' Wisdom name of BvBbs to the first principle of
hath builded her house';' while the those Valentinians whom he is de-

170 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: - lect. xi.
physical side of the same conception appears however in
the other name said to be given by Valentinus to the
same principle, that of "Apprjros or the UmpeotJcable.
After this first assumption, we are told that the disciples
of Valentinus differed from each other, some regarding
the first principle as a solitary monad, developing all
derived existence from itself alone, whUe others, foUowing
the analogy of natural generation, by the union of male
and female, assigned to the first principle a consort caUed
"Ziyrj or Silenced If we may venture to conjecture, both
from the natural development or rather corruption which
such a system was likely to undergo, as well as from the
relation which probably existed between Valentinus and
Basilides, we should be disposed to consider the former as
the original theory ; the two epithets bestowed upon the
primary Being, Bv8bs and "Appr/Tos, having been subse
quently, in order to give a supposed symmetry to the
system, developed into two separate beings, Bv0bs and
Itiytj.2 The rest of the system proceeds according to a
regular co-ordination of pairs, a masculine and a feminine
principle. From Bv66s, or from Bvdbs and 2iy>], sprang Nous
and 'AXijdeia ; from these Aoyos and Zmtj ; and from these
again vAv9p<aTros and 'EKKXr/o-ia.3 According to one, and
scribing in i. c. 1, who are probably valent XlpotraTup', seems to assign
the Ptolemseans. But in c. 11, when especially to the Ptolemseans, while
describing the theory of Valentinus he gives the name of irar^p to the
himself, he seems to speak of the second male principle, i. 11.
terms BvBbs and "ApprjTos as applied ' Hippol. Bef. Hcer. vi. 29. Bun-
by him to the same being, the former sen {Hippolytus I. p. 63) supposes the
being cut off from the rest of the extracts cited by Hippolytus to be
Pleroma by the first "Opos. HereBuflor from Valentinus himself, and thus
perhaps comprehends "Appnros and confirms the supposition that the
'Siy^l, and may thus have designated monadic assumption was the original.
at the same time the unity and genera- 2 Cf. Matter, Hist, du Gnosticisme
tive power of the first principle. II. p. 55.
Hippolytus, who professes to give s Irenseus, i. 1; cf. i. 11, where
a system common to Valentinus and Uariip is substituted for Nous ; Hip-
his followers, substitutes the name polytus, vi. 29,
Ylarkp, which Irenseus, under the equi.

lect. xi. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 171
probably the earlier, representation, these three pairs,
omitting the first principle, formed the beginning of an
Ogdoad, which had yet to be completed by a fourth pair ;
according to another representation, they formed in con
junction with the first pair, Bvdbs and .Ziyi, an Ogdoad
complete.1 t-
The number of the Ogdoad may perhaps have been
suggested by the eight primary gods of the Egyptian
mythology,2 but it had also a further mystical signification
connected with the Pythagorean theory of numbers. For
the eight were in a manner reduced to four, by regarding
the four feminine elements as mere negative complements
of the masculine, the latter being represented as bisexual,
and as giving names to the four members of the series.3
The first series of iEons thus answers to the celebrated
Pythagorean Tetrad, i.e. the first four numbers, which
added together form the perfect number ten. The
Ogdoad, including the feminine elements, was also sub
divided into two Tetrads.4
It was probably this arithmetical and philosophical
relation between the numbers four and ten which sug
gested the next step in the generation of the Valentinian
iEons, in which A 670s and Za>r), or, according to another
view, Nous and 'AXrj8eia- — these being in different state
ments the completing numbers of the first Tetrad — gave
birth to a second order of iEons, ten in number.5 These
1 The former view is given by 5 Irenseus, i. 11. 1 ; Hippolytus, vi.
Hippolytus, vi. 29, 31 ; the latter by 29. The former view seems to
Irenseus, i. 1. 11. accord with the theory of those who
2 Herodotus, i. 46, 145. excluded BvBbs from the Ogdoad and
3 Irenseus, i. 1. 1. Cf. Harvey, left it for a time incomplete; and
p. cxv; Matter, Hist, du Gnost. II. this view is attributed by Irenseus to
p. 56. Valentinus himself. The second
4 Cf. Irenseus, i. 1. 1 and i. 8. 5. view belongs more naturally to those
For the Pythagorean theory, see Sext. who framed the first Tetrad by BvBbs
Empir. Adv. Math. vii. 94 seq. Cf. and Siyii, NoSs and 'AMjfleia.
Hippolytus, vi. 23.

172 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xi.
ten iEons of the second order are arranged, like the
former, in pairs, male and female, and are named BiOios
and Mitjis, 'AyrfpaTos and "Evwtris, AvTo<i>vr)s and 'HSov??,
Akwt)tos and IZvyKpacris, Movoysvrjs and MaKapia.1 After
this, "AvOpojTros and 'EKKXrjo-la (or, according to another
account, Aoyos and Zeor/) produce a third order of iEons,
comprised in the imperfect number twelve (a number
perhaps suggested by the twelve secondary gods of the
Egyptian mythology). These twelve are, like their pre
decessors, arranged in pairs, male and female, and are
called UapaKXr/Tos and nto-Tts, HaTpiKos and "EXitis,
MnTpiKos and 'AyaTr^, 'Aeivovs [perhaps read Al&vios] and
"Zvvsctis, 'EKKXvaiaeTTiKbs and M.aKapioTrjs, ©sXr/rbs and
Zoipia.2 The entire sum of the iEons of the three orders,
the Ogdoad, the Decad, and the Dodecad, amounts to
thirty, or, with the imperfect Ogdoad, to twenty-eight ;
and the circumstance that these numbers correspond also,
according to different modes of reckoning, with those of
the Izeds of the Persian mythology (with or without
Ormuzd and Mithra), the six Amshaspands also corre
sponding in number with the imperfect Ogdoad,3 has led
some writers to suppose a Persian origin for this portion
of the Valentinian system.4 But when we consider that
the principle of the Valentinian doctrine is whoUy incom
patible with the Persian dualism, that the elements of the
calculation can be obtained from other and more cognate
sources, and that both Irenseus and Hippolytus expressly
refer this portion of the Valentinian theory to a Pythago
rean source,5 we may perhaps doubt whether the affinity

1 Irenseus, i. 1. 2. Cf. Hippoly- I. p. 118; Harvey's Irenceus I.
tus, vi. 30. p. cxi ; Massuet, Diss. Prcev. in Iren.
2 Irenseus, I. c. ; Hippolytus, I. c. i. § 45.
3 See above, Lecture II. p. 26. 5 Irenseus, i. 1. 1 ; Hippolytus, vi.
4 See Matter, Hist, du Gnosticisme, 21-23, 29.

lect. xi. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 173
with the Zoroastrian numbers is more than an accidental
coincidence. Amid much that is fanciful and arbitrary in this wild
play ofthe imagination, it is yet possible to trace a philo
sophical principle and method disguised under a luxuriance
of poetical imagery. The first order of iEons, the Ogdoad, j
is obviously intended to represent the Supreme Being in f
two aspects : first, in his absolute nature, as inscrutable and ''¦
unspeakable; secondly, in his relative nature, as mani
festing himself in operation.1 We have, first, BvObs and
.Ziyrj, the impenetrable depth, the unutterable sUence. Then
the first manifestation, Thought, preparatory to action, a
purely intellectual process indicated by Nous, whose counter
part is 'AXijdsia, that perfect truth which belongs to Divine
thought, the companion, as in Plato,2 of real existence.
Then' comes Aoyos, or Speech, representing the manifesta
tion of the Divine thought, with Zcor/, indicating the life-
giving power of the creative word, and finally "AvOpcovos,
the ideal man, the most perfect expression of the Divine
thought, regarded, like the Adam Kadmon of the Kabbala,
as the sum of aU the Divine attributes, to whom is assigned
as a companion 'E/weXr/o-t'a, indicating the Gnostic theory
of a perfect separation between the higher and the lower
orders of men ; the ideal man being the type only of the
Gnostic or spiritual man, who is separated from the rest
of mankind, as the Church is separated from the world.3
All these however it must be remembered, have thus far
1 This explanation is perhaps con- Matter (vol. II. p. 57) traces "AvBpamos
firmed by the appellation SiaBeereis and 'EkkXtjo-Io to the Christian doc-
given to the iEons by Ptolemseus trine of Christ being the Head
(Irenseus, i. 12. 1); -cf. Matter, II. of the Church, and 'AXiiBeia and Zoji;
p. 49, See also Matter, II. p. 59, for to our Lord's words, John xiv. 6.
the germ of a similar explanation of The language may perhaps have been
the iEons. partly suggested by these expressions,
o. vi. p. 508. but the Christ proper in the system

3 Cf. Harvey's Irenceus I. p. cxxi. of Valentinus is a later emanation.

174 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM. lect. xi.
no relation to the actual creation of a material world. The
spiritual man is not, as in the system of BasUides, re
garded as first existing in combination with matter, and
afterwards purified from material accretions and exalted
„ to the celestial region. The ideal man of Valentinus is a
being who not only has not as yet any reflected counter
part in the material world, but who ought not to have
_ any. He exists only as a Divine conception ; the subse
quent imperfect realisation of that conception in connec
tion with matter, and indeed the existence of matter
and the material world altogether, being no part of the
Divine plan, but only taking place in consequence, as we
shaU see hereafter, of a fall from the original perfection of
the ideal world. The only existence recognised at present
is that of the Divine Being, evolving and contemplating
his own perfections. The philosopher has sprung per
saltum, apparently without being conscious of the diffi
culty, over the first problem of ontology, how the absolute
can give existence to the relative; but he has not yet
approached the second and yet more difficult problem,
how perfection can give rise to imperfection, good to
evil. If now we examine the second and third orders of
iEons, the Decad and the Dodecad, we shaU see that the
masculine terms in nearly every instance represent some
epithet which may be applied directly or indirectly to the
VDeity, while the feminine terms represent some operation
/or gift by which he is manifested in nature, or in grace.
In the Decad the terms BvOios, Ayrjparos, 'AkIvtjtos, with
their feminine counterparts; Mlgis, "Evcoais, 2uy«joao-ts,
speak for themselves ; they are clearly meant to represent
that combination of unity with variety, of the infinite with
the finite, of identity with difference, which is implied in
the notion of derived and definite existence. These then

lect. xi. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 175
are intended to represent the action of the Deity, through
his attributes, in the formation of a world, not however
of a material world, but only of a primary ideal world — a
conception which may perhaps have been suggested by
Philo's commentary on the first chapter of Genesis.1 Of
the two remaining pairs of the Decad, the masculine
elements, AvToefivrjs and M.ovoyevtjs, are of the same character
with the others. The feminine elements, 'HoWi) and
Maxapia, do not so readily lend themselves to this inter
pretation : but perhaps when we remember that Plato in
the Timseus describes the Creator as rejoicing in his
work,2 and that in the Book of Genesis God is described
as seeing ' everything that He had made, and behold it
was very good ; ' and when we consider the mixture of
Platonism and Judaism in the Alexandrian philosophy, in
which Valentinus was brought up, we shaU perhaps be
able to comprehend the original introduction of these
terms into the system, though they may have been after
wards perverted to a less innocent meaning.3 Finally,
the conception which represents the Decad as having
sprung, not from the absolute Bvdos, but from Aoyos and
Zt»)/, or from Nous and ,AXf)9sia, seems intended to indicate I
that God, in the aspect of Creator, is viewed, not in his '
absolute and secret nature, but in his relative character,
as manifested by his attributes.
In -the Dodecad in hke manner, the masculine terms
Trapd/cXrjTos, iraTpiKos, k.t.X., represent God, especiaUy in His

1 De Mundi Opif. incorporated to attract converts from
2 EvcppavBeis, Timceus p.. 37. the Syrian heathen. But the doctrine
3 For the perversion of ifiovii, see of Valentinus belongs to Egypt, not
Harvey's Irenceus, I. pp. lxxxi, lxxxii. to Syria, and a much simpler expla-
MaKapidVrjj in the Dodecad (the expla- nation can be found for both paKapia
nation might perhaps more naturally and patcapiirns. The former is given
apply to the paxapia of the Decad) is in the text ; the latter simply de-
supposed by Harvey (p. cxxiii) to notes blessing or happiness, as the
refer to Astarte, the Syrian- Forluna, result of religious grace.

176 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM. lect. xi:
religious relation towards man ; while the feminine terms
¦iricrTis, sX-ms, k.t.X., represent the gifts of grace which
that relation conveys and implies. Here also it must be
remembered that we are considering not the terrestrial
and mortal man, but his ideal archetype. The Platonic
conception is carried out to the end, and every operation
in nature or in grace is considered as first existing in
idea, and as only realised in a lower stage through imper
fection. The 'especially religious relation indicated by
the Dodecad gives a fitness to its production from the
quasi-human terms of the Ogdoad, "Avdpmiros and 'EK/cXrjcria,
though the same relation is also indicated less immediately
by the other derivation from Aoyos and Z&jj?.1
In support of their theory, the Valentinians adopted
some wild aUegorical interpretations of various passages
in the New Testament, in which they asserted their views
to be figuratively intimated.2 But they also professed to
find a more direct assertion of them in the opening words
of the Gospel of St. John,3 and if the use of this last
1 The explanations above given Valentinus himself, is expressly cited
are based on the Greek names as- by Epiphanius as the work of one of
signed to the iEons, which both his disciples (cf. Massuet, Diss, in Ire-
Irenseus and Hippolytus give as if nceum i. § 1 0). It would be quite in the
they were original to the system. It spirit of a Palestinian impostor like
is true that Epiphanius {Hcer. xxxi. Marcus to render his master's terms
2, 6) gives the names in a different into an Oriental language, to terrify
language (probably Aramaic), arid his dupes by mysterious sounds in an
this list is considered by Matter, II. unknown tongue. For the Aramaic
p. 64, as the original. But the text names of the iEons, with an attempted
as given in Epiphanius is too corrupt explanation, see Matter, vol. II. pp.
for any certain explanation without 65, 66.
the aid of the Greek; and it is more 2 See the various passages in
than probable that the latter was the Irenseus, i. 8. 1-4.
original form. Valentinus, educated 3 Since the* recovery of the work
at Alexandria, and a devoted Platonist, of Hippolytus, who (vi. 35) refers to St.
would be most likely to use the Greek John x. 8, apparently as cited by Va-
language. The names, which Epipha- lentinus himself. Even this is hardly
nius gives three times, are obviously needed, for the same work (vii. 22,
taken from the work which he quotes 27) shows that this Gospel was also.
in §§ 5, 6 ; and this work, which some used by the earlier Basilides.
have erroneously thought to be by

lect. xi. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 177
authority can be traced, as it now almost certainly can,
to Valentinus himself, it wiU furnish an additional proof
of the untenable character of the Tubingen hypothesis,
which maintains this Gospel to have been written as late
as the middle of the second century.1 The fourth verse
of this Gospel, sv avT& [sc. t& Aoyai] fak, rjv, Kal f) far) r)v to
<f>&s t&v dvQpumwv, was interpreted by these heretics as
speaking of the second portion of the Ogdoad, Aoyos and
Zcotj, "Avdponros and (by implication) 'EKKXrjo-ia, while the
latter part of the fourteenth verse, Kal 6 Aoyos adp% kysvsTo,
Kal iaKijvooosv sv fjfuv (kcii i&eacrdfiiOa Trjv So^av aiiTov, Soljav &s
fiovoysvovs •Trapa HaTpbs) irXr)pr)s %dpiTos Kal dXrjdsias, was in
terpreted in like manner with reference to the first Tetrad,
the unseen Father, the Siy?/ (identified with %dpis), the
only-begotten Nous, and his feminine counterpart AXrjdeia.2
This exposition, as cited by Irenseus, appears to> be taken
from a work of Ptolemseus, the disciple of Valentinus, the
date of which, though it cannot be determined exactly,
can hardly be placed later than a.d. 170.3 The evidence
which we now possess of the use of St. John's Gospel by
Valentinus himself would lead to the conclusion that the
nomenclature of the heresiarch himself, as well as that of
his disciple, was partly borrowed from this source ; and
even were that testimony not in existence, it is utterly
inconceivable that a forgery of the middle of the second
1 Baur, Kanon. Ecang. p. 357, case §§ 1-4 prove nothing.
deals very unfairly with the testimony 2 Irenseus, i. 8.5.
of Irenseus, i. 8. He builds on the fact 3 Matter, II. p. 102, places the
that St. John is not cited in the first floruit of Ptolemssus about a.d. 166.
four sections, to show that the early The composition of the work of Ire-
Valentinians were unacquainted with nseus can hardly be placed later than
this Gospel, but omits the fifth section a.d. 188, or, according to another com-
in which it is expressly quoted. But putation, 190 (cf. Harvey, p. clviii ;
either the whole testimony of this Beaven, Account of Irenceus p. 34),
chapter is earlier than the date and twenty years is not too long to
assigned by Baur to the Gospel, in allow for the spread of Ptolemsean
which case § 5 overthrows the hypo- doctrines to the point at which they
thesis ; or the whole is later, in which appear in Irenseus.
N

178 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xi.
century should have been generally received as a canonical
book, and the work of an Apostle, within twenty years
after its composition.
The use of the term Mons (al&vss) to denote these per
sonifications of the Divine attributes appears to have
originated with Valentinus.1 The term, as we have seen,
had previously been used by Simon Magus (if the ' Great
Announcement ' is his work) in its more ordinary sense of
ages, to denote eternity, and also in the same sense by St.
Paul (1 Tim. i. 17), and previously in the Book of Eccle-
siasticus (xxxvi. 17).2 All these may be traced back to
the use of the same term in the singular number by Plato3
to signify the ever-present form of the Divine existence
prior to the creation of time, i.e. eternity. The tran
sition from this sense to that of the different modes or
attributes by which this eternal existence was supposed
to be manifested is not very violent.
As regards the other Valentinian term irXrjpwfia, em
ployed to designate the entire system of thirty iEons
regarded as a collective whole,4 there are no positive data
to determine the time when it was first used in connection
with Gnostic doctrines. There is no reason why it may
not have been used to denote the pi^ai of Simon Magus,
as well as the al&vss of Valentinus ; and its employment
by St. Paul, as we have pointed out in a former lecture,
may possibly in some passages have been suggested by
some such application of the term by the early Gnostics ;
but the word itself is a common one, and may naturally
have been employed independently of any such suggestion,

1 Hippol. vi. 20 (p. 258, Duncker). 2 Timceus 37 D.
See above Lect. IV, p. 62. See also 4 Irenseus, i. 1 . 3 toCto to
Matter, vol. II. p. 53, and on the aSparov Kal irvevpaTiKbv kot' aureus
iEons, as manifestations of God, ibid. TrK-fipupa, rpixri Sieerrapevov elsbySodSa
p. 59. Kai StuaSa Kal SaiSeKaSa.
2 See above, Lect. VI, p. 88.

lect. xi. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 179
and though there is probably some connection between its
use as applied to God in the New Testament and its
similar use by the Gnostic teachers, it is impossible to
decide whether the former suggested it to the latter or
the latter to the former.1
The remainder of the Valentinian theory carries out!
with the utmost exactness the same Platonic conception)
which is predominant in the portion already exhibited.!
As there is an ideal archetype of the Divine manifestation;
in nature and in religion, so there must be an ideal arche-1
type of the fall and the redemption of the world, and even
the Christ who comes into the world for the redemption
of mankind must find his ideal pattern in another Christ '
who has a redeeming office in heaven. And in strict
accordance with the Gnostic doctrine the work of redemp
tion consists in the communicathni_gj^kjiowledge. In the
application of this theory the different Valentinian schools
differed from each other ; and those details which are
expressly ascribed to Valentinus himself are unfortunately
the most meagre and incomplete of all. Much however
of what is recorded by Irenseus as the doctrine of his
disciple Ptolemseus must have been common to both
teachers, the differences probably extending only to some
unimportant particulars, on which it is not necessary to
dweU.2 The several iEons according to this exposition
1 See Olshausen on Eph. i. 23. parate existences. See Olshausen,
The word is often used in the Septua- I. c.
gint in relation to material objects, as 2 Valentinus himself is said to
in Ps. xxiii. (xxiv.) 1, toS Kupiou^ yri have imagined first a dyad with-
Kal to -n-Klipaipa abrris. Philo, De out name, comprising 'ApprjTos and
Prcem. et Pcen. 21 (p. 418), uses it with %iyii\, probably, as observed above, a
reference to the soul of man, yevopevv bisexual monad, the two names being
SiTT\-h,poipaaper&VTiyvxi\. As applied identical in sense; then a second
to God in the N. T., it means in like dyad, called naW/p. and 'AKi/Beia {liariip
manner God as filled with all divine being thus applied to the second
excellencies; and the Gnostic error masculine -Son NoCs : this more nearly
consisted merely in the mode in which approaches to Basilides, Father
they viewed these excellencies as se- being thought too definite a concep-
N 2

180 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xi.
were not originally equal in knowledge. Nous alone was
cognisant of the nature of the supreme Father,1 which he
wished to communicate to the others, but was withheld
according to the Father's wUl by Styr;. This created in
them a desire of the forbidden knowledge, which was
moderate in elder iEons, but became a violent passion in
the youngest, 1<o<pia. In her the desire to comprehend
the Father became an agony and a struggle which would
have ended in her entire absorption into the Divine
essence, had she not come into contact with "Opos, the
limiting power, which keeps all things apart from the
ineffable magnitude.2 By this power she was finally
restrained and convinced that the Father is incompre
hensible, and thus laid aside her former design (t^v
TrpoTspav svOvfirjaiv) with the passion that had accompanied
it. This abandoned design, which is itself personified,
plays an important part in the subsequent portion of the
theory, being separated hj"Opos from "Zoefiia and banished
to the region outside the Pleroma, while \%o<pia herself was
restored to her place within it.
tion for an absolute first principle) ; the latter however being princi-
thenthe other iEons as enumerated in pally intended), AurpwT-Jjy, KapiricrTiis
the account given in the text. He also (perhaps, as Neander interprets it,
assumed two°Opoi, one between BvBbs the reaper, or rather winnower, as
and the rest of the Pleroma, the other separating the grain from the chaff
separating the whole Pleroma from all or the wheat from the tares), 'OpoBerris,
beyond it. He also regarded Christ, and MeTa7o>7ei5y (as restoring Soepia to
the second Christ, as generated, not her place in the Pleroma) : cf, Ire-
from all the iEons, but from the mother naeus, i. 2. 4. Also Meroxeis (Hinpol.
(Achamoth) without the Pleroma. vi. 31), as the boundary of' the
See Irenseus, i. 11. 1. That this is Pleroma, and therefore common to
not Valentinus's original view, see that within and that without. Ac-
Baur, Chr. Gnosis p. 133. cording to one form of the theory
1 Perhaps an application of (Irenseus, i. 2. 4; Hippol. vi. 31) this
Matt. xi. 27, though the Valentinian Horus was at this time first put forth
NoSj is distinguished from Christ, Cf. by the Father to restrain the purpose
Matter, II. p. 68. of Sophia. The other account
2 "Opos is also called STaCpos (Irenseus, i. 2. 2) seems to regard him
(perhaps with a play upon the two as already existing.
meanings, a cross and a stake-fence,

lect. xi. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 181
We are next told that to prevent the recurrence of a
similar disturbance in the Pleroma, the forethought of the
Father caused Movoysvrjs (Nous) to put forth by emanation
another pair of iEons, who are called Christ and the Holy
Spirit [the latter being, as in some other Gnostic systems,
represented as feminine].1 Christ prevented any future
longing of the iEons for unattainable knowledge by teach
ing them that the supreme Being is incomprehensible in
himself and can only be known through the Only-begotten 1
(Nous), and that their existence and continuance depended;
upon this truth. After this the Holy Spirit rendered all j
the iEons equal to each other, so that the same names
became applicable to aU ; and having thus given them
perfect rest, taught them to unite in giving gifts as a
thank-offering in honour of the Father. Each Mon contri
buted that which was most excellent in himself, and from
these contributions emanated a Being, ' the most perfect
beauty and consteUation of the Pleroma,' called Jesus and
Saviour and Christ and Logos, and also Td TrdvTa, as pro
duced from aU. With him were also produced the Angels,
who acted as his body-guard.2 In support of this hypo
thesis of the generation of the Saviour, the Valentinians
perverted the words of St. Paul, s£ ainov Kal oV avTov Kal
sis avTov Ta -rravra (Rom. xi. 36), and sv avT& KaToiKSi nrdv
to nrXripoofia Trjs Osottjtos (Col. ii. 9), and dvaKsepaXaiwaao-dai
rd irdvTa sv t& Xpio-Tw (Eph. i. 10). It wiU be observed
1 Cf. Harvey's Irenceus, I. p. cxxvii; latter, Christ and the Holy Spirit are
Matter, Hist, du Gnost. II. p. 70. emitted first from Novs and 'AA-rfjfleia,
The accounts given by Irenseus, i. 2. to separate the %Krpapa {ivBip-ncns)
5, and by Hippolytus, vi. 31, slightly and to console the mourning 2o<p(a,
differ in detail. According to the and then "Opos is emitted by the
former "Opos is emitted first, to sepa- Father to keep the impupa for ever
rate the ivBvp-nois from 'Socpta and to apart from the perfect ^Eons.
restore the latter to the Pleroma ; 2 Irenseus, i. 2. 6. Cf. Hippo-
then Christ and the Holy Spirit are lytus, vi. 31, who describes the second
emitted to teach the .Sions and Christ under the names of Jesus and
Testore harmony. According to the o Koivbs to5 Tt\-rip6pzTos Kapm6s.

182 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xi.
that this theory recognises two Christs, one emanating,
together with the Holy Spirit, from the first iEon Nous,
the other subsequently emanating from the contributions
of all the iEons.
Thus far we have given only the first portion of the
Valentinian theory, relating to the divine economy within
the Pleroma prior to the existence of the material world.
Stripped of its allegorical imagery, the general meaning
of this part of the theory seems to be the exposition of a
doctrine in itself far from heretical, and indeed expressly
admitted by some of the most orthodox of the Fathers,
namely, that the representation of the divine nature by a
plurality of attributes, each attribute being distinct from
and therefore limited by others, is but an inadequate and
imperfect manifestation of the Unlimited, and that these
attributes, though manifested to the finite inteUect as
different, are, in their own nature, one with each other,
and with the divine Essence. The futile desire of 2,o<f>ia
to comprehend the absolute nature of the supreme God,
the assertion that this desire could not be gratified save
by her entire absorption into the Divine essence, intimates
the doctrine that each attribute of the Deity, so long as it
is a separate attribute, contains but a partial and relative
manifestation, and that in His absolute nature this dis
tinction of attributes does not exist. In conformity with
this view, the emanation of the relative from the absolute,
of the many from the one, though it be but the manifes
tation of God Himself under various attributes, is regarded
in some sort as a FaU, typical of the lower Fall which
gave existence to the material world ; and the recognition
of the real unity and indifference of these apparently
diverse manifestations is in some sort a redemption,
typical of the redemption of the lower world. That this
recognition is due to revelation made by a Christ, is in

lect. xi. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 183
accordance with the Platonic character of the whole
system, which requires a first Christ for the redemption
of the celestial world, to be followed by a second Christ,
whose office wiU afterwards appear in the redemption of
the terrestrial world. That this representation of re
demption by knowledge involved a grave misconception of
the office and work of Christ, cannot, even on the most
favourable view of the theory, be denied ; and many of its
details, literally taken, might undoubtedly lead to heretical
views of the Saviour's person and nature. Vet every
error is but a truth abused, and under the veil of the
wild fancies and the poetical allegory of Valentinus we may
perhaps find hidden the doctrine distinctly expressed in
the philosophical theology of St. Augustine : ' Deus
multipliciter quidem dicitur magnus, bonus, sapiens,
beatus, verus, et quidquid aliud non indigne dici videtur ;
sed eadem magnitudo ejus est quse sapientia ; non enim
mole magnus est, sed virtute; et eadem bonitas quae
sapientia et magnitudo, et eadem Veritas quse iUa omnia ;
et non est ibi aliud beatum esse, et aliud magnum, aut
sapientem, aut verum, aut bonum esse, aut omnino ipsum
esse.' l
The remainder of the system of Valentinus, containing
his theory of the creation and redemption of the lower
world, must be reserved for our next lecture.
1 De Trin. vi. 7. Cf. De Trin. xv. 5. See Aquinas, Summa, P. I. Ou . iii.
Art. 5, 6, 7 ; Qu. xl. Art. i.

184 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xii.

LECTURE XII.
VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS.
The phU^s^hic^lj^mance of Valentinus consists of three
parts. The first, which has been described in our last
lecture, contains an account of the nature and. system of
the Pleroma itself, that is, of the fulness of the Divine
attributes and operations : the second relates to the con
dition of things beyond the Pleroma, before the formation
of the visible world, constituting the stage of transition
from the celestial to the terrestrial ; the third describes
the origin and constitution of the sensible world itself.1
In the second portion, to which we have now to direct our
attention, the principal interest is created by the descrip
tion of the sorrows and sufferings of a lady who figures
under the name of the younger Sophia or Achamoth, the
latter name (niDpn), as I have already stated, being taken
from the Hebrew word signifying 'wisdom' in the Book of
Proverbs.2 This interesting heroine is a personification of
the &esign_(sv0vfirijns\o& the elder Sophia, the last of the
iEons,. to comprehend the absolute nature of the Deity.
We have seen that Sophia, when finaUy restrained by
1 Massuet, Diss. Preev. in Iren. text is cited by the author of the
i. § 12. Didasc. Orient, with reference to the
2 Especially Prov. ix. 1 n'lDSn second Sophia, as through the Demi-
,„. , , . , , .,j j urge forming the material world
rllV3 nma Wisdom hath builded ,„? .. %, J " ,
1 'V •* ' "-,'i t-j (Clem. Alex. Excerpta ex Theodoto 47,
her house,' where the word is singular p. 980).
in sense, though plural in form. This

lect. xii. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 185
Horus, and convinced that the Deity is incomprehensible,
is described as having laid aside her former design, with
the passion which accompanied it, and that this aban
doned design was taken away by Horus and banished to
a region outside the Pleroma. The adventures of the
Design, thus personified as a child deserted by its parent,
form the second portion of our romance. At first, we are
told, she lay as it were stranded (sK^sfSpdaOai) in the region
of shadow and emptiness outside of the Pleroma, being
herself without shape or form, as a defective birth.5 In
this state she remained till the higher Christ, the emana
tion from Nous,2 took compassion on her, and extending
her power beyond the limit of the"Opos and %Tavpos,3 con
ferred upon her form, though without knowledge.4 Having
done this, he withdrew his influence, leaving her however
with a certain odour of immortality,5 and desire after
higher things. Under the influence of this desire,
Achamoth attempts to follow after the light which had
been withdrawn, but was restrained by Horus, and unable
to enter the Pleroma.6 Upon this she became afflicted
with every kind of passion : grief, fear , and perplexity,
1 Ssarrep eKrpupa, Sia. to p-nSiv There is a play on the double meaning
KaTei\7j<peVai, Iren. i. 4. 1. __The theory of 2ravp6s.
was, thgti fpT™ ^q giver by ,t.be_Trig.1p 4 popep&erai pSpcpeoeriv tt\v Kar'
parent, substance ..by^ the female. ovoiav p6vov, a\X' ov t^v koto
Hence Achamoth, as the offspring of yv&criv. Achamoth was not enlight-
Sophia alone, was formless, having ened like the iEons, in order that she
received nothing from a father. might strive after higher knowledge.
2 rbv [ava?] XpwTdV, superiorem 5 This resembles the theory of
Christum, (Iren. i. 4. 1 : the Greek Basilides concerning the Holy Spirit
text as preserved by Epiphanius, when left by the second v16tvs ; d\\a
must be completed from the Latin), yap tiarrep e\s 0770s ip$Kr\Biv pipov
i.e. the elder or first Christ, the ema- evaSeaTarov, ei Kal iWi pdXiara
nation of NoCs (<5 Xpicrrbs imirpofSXr)- impe\&s iKKevwBeiri, Spas bcrpr) tis
Bels airb toC NoC Kal rr)s 'AKrfBeias, in pevei tov pipov Kal KaTaXeirrerai
Hippol. vi. 31). k.t.a., Hippol. vii. 22.
3 iweKTavBrjvai Sia tou "Opou Kal " Kal ivravBa rbv "Opov KwXiovTa.
iravpov KaXovpevov, Theodoret, Hcer. avrr/v rr)s els ToiprrpooBev bpprjs e'ateiv
Fab. i. 7, explaining the language of 'lad- 'iBev rb 'Iai) ivopa yeyevrtoBai
Irenseus, Sih tov 'Stravpov iireKTavBevra. epioKoveri, Iren. 1. 4. 1.

186 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xn.
together with ignorance, and finally an earnest desire of
returning to the source of her life (i.e. Christ). From
these different affections the lower world came into exis
tence; the soul of the world, and that of the Demiurge,
sprang from her desire of returning to God; the material
portions from her several passions, all liquid substance,
having sprung from her tears, all that is bright from her
laughter ; and the corporeal elements from her grief and
consternation.1 The principal agent in these transmuta
tions was, according to the Valentinian theory, the second
Christ, the Saviour sprung from all the iEons, who being
sent down from the Pleroma, together with his attendant
angels, at the prayer of the suffering Achamoth, imparted
to her knowledge and healed her passions, separating
them from her and consolidating them, so as to change
them from incorporeal passions to unorganised matter, out
of which subsequently the world was formed. This
matter (using the term in a wide sense) was of two kinds :
the first (brute matter), which was evU, sprang from the
passions of Achamoth ; the second (the animal soul)
sprang from her desire after higher things, not in itself
evU, but liable to passions.2 After this, Achamoth is said
to have brought forth a spiritual progeny after the like
ness of the attendant angels, by gazing on their light.
Thus then came into existence three kinds of substance,
all in different ways the offspring of Achamoth: the
material (v\tj) sprung from her passions ; the animal
(yjrvxiKov) from her conversion or repentance; and the
spiritual (irvsvfiaTiKov) from her joy at the angelic light.
1 Hippplytus gives the particulars rbv piv cp6fSov \f/vxiK^v ireoi-ncrev ohcrlav,
differently ; E. H. vi. 32. See the tt\v Se \irtr\v v\iKi)v, rr)v Si airopiav
next note. Saip6vuv, tJ)c Se irno-rpocpiiv Kal Setjcriv
2 Cf. Hippol. vi. 32 irrolrierev Kal iKereiav &voSov Kal perdvoiav Kal
efiv iKcrrrivai to irdBfi air' outtjs, Kal Sivapiv ifivxiKrjs cwaias, 5Jt(S KaAeiTai
STroirjcev avra inroiTTaTiKas overlas, Kal Se£id.

lect. xii. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 187
The last of these, being of the same nature as herself,
was not susceptible of any further formation by her ; but
to the second, the animal, she gave a form ; and thus pro
duced the Demiurge, by whom the material world was
afterwards created out of the remaining substance. The
formation of the Demiurge concludes the second portion
of the romance, which relates to things intermediate
between the Pleroma and the visible world.
In this marveUous narrative, we seem at first sight to
have fallen on a poetical metamorphosis as fanciful as any
in Ovid, and far more difficult to reduce to any definite
meaning. A spiritual attribute, an impersonation of
Wisdom shedding tears (even ' tears such as angels weep '),
and these tears, immaterial tears, afterwards becoming
condensed into matter, is a representation in which it is
difficult at first sight to see anything but an utter con
fusion between both kinds of existence. But in truth
Valentinus had a difficult, indeed an impossible, task
before him, and we must not be surprised if he betrays an
inclination to evade rather than to accomplish it. Hitherto
he had exhibited the Absolute and the Relative as merely
different aspects of one and the same spiritual being. He
has now to take the next step, or rather leap, and explain
the manner in which this spiritual being gives existence
to matter. He jloesjaoi content himself, -like Plato, whom
in other respects he so closely foUows, with assuming as
the germ of the natural world an unformed matter existing
from all eternity;1 this is to assume two independent
principles, the Deity and matter existing in contrast to
each other, and therefore neither of them the one absolute
existence. He has commenced with one sole absolute
spiritual existence ; and the material must, in some way
1 That Valentinus does not recognise an eternal matter, Bee Baur, Dia
Chr. Gnosis p. 165.

188 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xn.
or other, be evolved from it. In this difiicultyjhe adopts,
in a disguised form, a hypothesis which is. yirtuaUy that
of pantheism : the material world has no real existence ;
it is, as it were, but the shadow or reflection. of_jfche
spiritual. In proportion as consciousness becomes de
finite and limited, and therefore unable to apprehend the
absolute in its fulness, in the same proportion it becomes
conscious of an inabUity, a limitation, a something hinder
ing complete knowledge. As spiritual knowledge becomes
fainter and less complete, this indefinite negation of know
ledge becomes stronger and more intense, till at last the
substance and the shadow, as it were, change places, and
the mere limit to the consciousness of the spiritual assumes
a definite existence as the material. The second Sophia,
the Achamoth, banished from the Pleroma to the region of
emptiness and shadow, represents the development of the
absolute existence to that degree of self-limitation in
which the positive consciousness of the absolute is on the
point of being superseded by the negative consciousness
of limitation. She is the abortion, the mere negative
side of the higher wisdom, at first wholly formless, then
wrought to a form in substance, but not in knowledge,
assuming a definite, but unreal consciousness ; the nega
tive sense of limitation, indicated by the suffering or
passion, having a distinct and definite presence, the
positive side assuming the form only of an indefinite
longing after the unknown; this last, the only germ
remaining of true knowledge, being derived from the
same Christ to whose revelation is ascribed the higher
enlightenment of the iEons. This last representation
seems intended to exhibit, in the form of an ideal arche
type, that which was historically realised in the state of
the world before the Christian revelation — a fallen world,

lect. xn. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 189
with the material and the sensual predominant, yet with /
a dim consciousness of a relation to God, and a partial
Ulumination by the Divine Word. The mission of the
second Christ, the Saviour, to impart knowledge to Acha
moth and separate her from her passions, is the counter
part of the mission of the first Christ (or, according to
another version, of the "Opos), to separate the first "Zocpia
from her svOvftr/cris. The whole theory may be described
in general terms as a development, in aUegorical language,
of the pantheistic hypothesis which in its outline had
been previously adopted by Basilides. All finite existence,
first spiritual and then material, though seeming to have
separate, and substantial being, is but a mode of the exis
tence of the absolute ; becoming graduaUy more definite
and concrete as it becomes more limited and further
removed from the primitive absolute. Real existence,
according to jthjs hypothesis, has no distinctive attributes,
not even self-consciousness. With the first development
of consciousness begins the unreal, a seeming relation of
subject to object, becoming more unreal as the develop
ment increases in definiteness, and finaUy culminating in
the grossness of an apparent matter, opposed to thought
in nature as well as in relation.1 This representation,
like most others of the kind, is, I fear, not transparently
inteUigible ; but it is at least as clear and as satisfactory
as any other of the attempted solutions of the insoluble
problem, How can the absolute give birth to the relative,
unity to plurality, good to evil ?
The third portion of the romance treats of the forma
tion and redemption of the visible world, which, in con
formity to the author's general plan, presents an imperfect
counterpart of the previous sketch of the celestial world.
¦ Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 167.

190 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xii.
Achamoth, the second Sophia, as the highest being outside
the Pleroma, takes the place . of Bythus, the supreme
Father ; and her offspring, the Demiurge, corresponds to
Nous, the first and only begotten iEon ; 1 his nature how
ever, as we have already noticed, being not spiritual, but
only animal. This animal Demiurge is the framer of the
visible world out of the unorganised matter whose origin
has been already described ; he also brings into existence
two classes of men, the animal, similar to himself, of
whom he is called the Father, and the purely material, of
whom he is called the Maker (Br/fiiovpyos). He also
framed the seven heavens (i. e., as in Basilides, the spheres
of the seven planets), which are regarded as angels, form
ing the Hebdomad, and, with the addition of his mother
Achamoth, the Ogdoad, after the hkeness of the celestial
Ogdoad of the iEons.2 In this work of formation, the
Demiurge wrought blindly, as the instrument of his
mother Achamoth, ignorant of her existence and ignorant
of the celestial forms which he imitated, believing himself
to be the source of all things, the one and only God. But,
though ignorant of the higher spiritual world, the Demi
urge is nevertheless the maker of a lower world of spiritual
existences, namely, evil spirits ; the Devil, the prince
of this world,3 and his angels, who are formed from the
grief of Achamoth, and, as being spiritual, surpass their
maker in knowledge, being cognisant of the higher spiri
tual system of which he, as being merely animal, is
ignorant. The DevU, as the prince of this world, has his
1 ko! oAtV piv cWkoVi toC aoparou seem that the Demiurge himself pre-
iraTpos rerripriKevai, p^ yiveeaKopevr\v sided over one of the planetary
imb tov Snpiovpyov, tovtov Se toC spheres ; probably, like the Abraxas
povoyevovs v'iov, t&v Se Xom&v Aidvwv of Basilides, he represents the sun-
tovs vwb Toirwv [towtou] 7e7ovoVas god. The whole of this part of the
apxayye\ovs re Kal dyyeMvs, Iren. theory is borrowed from Basilides.
i. 5. 1 . 3 KocrpoKpcvrup, L?en. i. 5. 4.
2 From this account it would

lect. xii. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 191
residence in the lower world; the Demiurge in the
heavens ; and the mother Achamoth in the region above
the heavens, between them and the Pleroma.1
In the formation of man, the Demiurge is described as
having first given him a body, formed of an invisible and
transcendental matter, and as having breathed into this
body the breath of life, i. e. the animal soul. Afterwards,
the gross sensible body of flesh was added, which is figura
tively signified by the coats of skins in which God is said
to have clothed Adam and Eve. Thus framed however,
man had but two natures, the animal and the material :
the spiritual principle was infused into a select few from
a higher source, through the mother Achamoth, who
infused into the Demiurge, without his knowledge, the
spiritual offspring which she had brought forth from the
vision of the angelic glory, and which he unwittingly
communicated to the souls of those whom he created.2
The Valentinian theory thus recognises three distinct
classes of men, the material, the animal, and the spiritual,
typified by the three sons of Adam, Cain, Abel, and Seth,
each of whom represents separately one of the three
natures which in Adam were united in one person.3 The
work of redemption in Valentinus as in Basilides consisted ]
in the separation of the spiritual from the inferior portions I
of man's nature; but Valentinus allowed a second and ;
inferior kind of redemption to the second class of men,
the psychical or animal, whose nature was incapable of
being exalted to the purely spiritual life of the Pleroma,
but who might be capable of dwelling with the Demiurge ,
in the region without. For the material or carnal portion
of mankind there was no redemption ; and hence they
maintained that Christ when he came into the world took
¦ iren. j. 5. 4. 3 Cf. Harvey, on Irenseus, i. 7. 5,
'' Irenseus, i. 5. 6. Mass. (vol. I. p. 65).

192 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xn.
notjm. Him a body of flesh,1 but assumed those portions
of humanity only which were capable of— .redemption,
namely, a seeming body given by the Demiurge, composed
of the same substance as the animal soul, prepared in a
marvellous manner so as to be, like the material body,
visible and tangible and capable of suffering, and a spi
ritual nature bestowed by Achamoth. At the end of all
things, when the redemption of the spiritual seed shall be
complete, Achamoth, the mother of the spiritual seed on
earth, shaU be received within the Pleroma and united to
the Saviour (a perversion of the Scriptural figure of the
marriage of Christ with the Church) ; the spiritual seed,
by whom are meant the initiated Gnostics, shall also enter
into the Pleroma and be united to the angels attendant on
the Saviour. Without the Pleroma, in the region previously
occupied by Achamoth, there shall be a second kingdom,
that of the Demiurge or father of the animal race of men,
who shall give rest to the souls of his own children, the
[ men of animal nature, i.e. the ordinary Christians of the
-, Church, including probably also religious Jews and all
\who worshipped the Creator of the world as their God.2
The material raee of men, and all else that is material,
being incapable of salvation, shaU be consumed with fire,
, and utterly cease to exist.3
The exact views of the Valentinians concerning the
nature of Christ by whom this redemption was accom
plished, are not very clearly expressed ; but if we may
judge from some incidental notions, as well as from the m
1 In order to separate Christ en- 'Valentinus,' XVII. p. 37. Theu\iKof
tirely from connection with the flesh, would in like manner be generally
the Valentinians, or at least some of represented by the heathens, though
them, maintained of the psychical these also would include some few of
Christ, eivai tovtov rbv Sia Mapfas the higher classes. Cf. Heracleon
StoSeiffavra, KaOdirep iiSaip Sid crw\r]vos; in Origen, In Ioann. t. xiii. c. 16-
Iren. i. 7. 2. Neander, Ch. Hist. II. p. 85 (Bohn).
2 Cf. Moller in Herzog, Art. 8 Irenseus, i. cc. 6, 7.

lect. xii. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 193
whole analogy of the system, we may conclude that they
regarded him as the son of the Demiurge (thus answering
to the iEon Christ of the Pleroma, who is an emanation
from Nous), and as having derived from his Father a
psychical nature consubstantial ¦ with that of the Demi
urge himself, but having also a spiritual nature whereby
He is superior to his Father. The source of this spiritual
nature seems to have been variously stated by different
disciples of the school. According to some, it was im
parted by Sophia Achamoth, the mother of the spiritual
seed on earth ; according to others, it was given by the
Saviour, the combined production of all the iEons, who
descended upon the psychical Jesus at his baptism, and
left him before his passion.2 Some seem to have com
bined these two theories, attributing to the Redeemer a
threefold nature : the psychical, derived from the Demi
urge ; the spiritual from Achamoth ; and the celestial
nature of the Saviour, who descended from above, to which
they added a fourth element,- the marveUous constitution
of his psychical body, so as to have the attributes without
the reality of matter ; and by this addition they succeeded
in finding, in the compound nature of Christ, a fanciful
resemblance to the Tetrad, the first and mystical member
' Cf. Irenseus, i. 5. 4, speaking of Irenceus I. p. 49.
the invisible body and psychical life 2 That these two views were some-
supposed to have been given by the times held separately, may be inferred
Demiurge to the first man, Kal emoVa from Hippolytus, vi. 35, who gives the
pev rbv 6\iKbv irrdpxeiv naparr\r\aiov first alone. That the two in combina-
pev, dXK' ovx bpooicriov rip 0ei£. tion were held by some of the Valen-
KaB' bpoiaeriv Se rbv ^vxik6v k.t.X. tinians, is stated by Irenseus, i. 7- 2.
From this we may infer that the According to those who held this

rical nature was regarded by latter view, the Soter was supposed
Valentinus as bpooicriov with the to have left Jesus when he was
Demiurge. The same word is used, brought before Pilate (Irenseus, I. c),
i. 5. 1, of the spiritual nature, as cog- while the pneumatic element departed
nate to that of Sophia Achamoth. with the words naTep, eh x«/"k erov
This may be noted as an early use of rrapariBepai to revevpd pov, Luke
the word afterwards so important in xxiii. 46. Cf. Orig. to Ioann. x. 19 ;
the Arian controversy, Cf. Harvey's Neander, Ch.Hist. II. p. 91.

194 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xii.
of the Pleroma. In this complex form, the Christology of
the Valentinians exhibits a curious combination of the
Docetic and Ebionite hypotheses ; the psychical immaterial
body attributed to our Lord being characteristic of the
former of these heresies, while the separation of the
person of Jesus from that of the Saviour is identical with
the alternative assumption of the latter. The general
philosophical theory which gave rise to these assumptions
- — that of the incompatibility between the Di'vine Nature
and the material body — might have been satisfied by the
adoption of either separately ; but the union of the two is
in accordance with the spirit of the philosophy of Valen
tinus, whose exaggerated Platonism, carrying out the
relation of idea and imitation in every successive stage
of existence, acknowledged no less than three Christs, a
first for the redemption (i.e. the enlightenment) of the
celestial iEons ; a second for the redemption of Achamoth,
the Wisdom without the Pleroma ; and a third, born into
the world for the redemption of inanMnd.1
The philosophical teaching which is embodied in this
last portion of the Valentinian allegory is of the same
tendency with that of the former portions, though the
tendency is in some degree checked by other considera
tions, and does not attain to its fuU development. As the
thought which underlies his whole theory is substantiaUy
that of the Indian pantheism, according to whieh all
finite existence is an error and an unreality, so his scheme
of redemption logically carried out should have resulted in
the absorption of all finite and relative existence into the
bosom of the infinite and absolute. The remains of the
Christian influence which Valentinus had received during
his communion with the Church, appear to have prevented
the development of his doctrine to this extreme conse-
1 Cf. Hippolytus, Bef. Hcer, vi. 36.

lect. xii. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 195
quence, and perhaps in so eclectic a thinker it would be
hardly natural to expect a complete logical development
of any single idea. Vet the germ of such a conse
quence may be traced, though it does not ripen into its
mature fruit. Redemption,, in. the_.highest sense, is re-
seryed_^r_jthe_spiritual_ element alone; all those powers i
and operations of the soul which are directed to the rela-'
tive and the finite are destined to fall entirely away, and\
nothing remains immortal but the faculty of immediate I
intuition whose object is the absolute and infinite.1 In~
the language of Aristotle, whose teaching this part of the
theory closely repeats, the active inteUect, the Divine
element in man, is alone immortal ; the passive inteUect,
to which belongs memory and self-consciousness, is perish
able and wiU be cast aside.2 Such a destiny as this, an
indestructibility of the intellect rather than an immortality
of the soul, cannot be called a personal immortality at all;
and Valentinus, in accepting the theory, is at least so far j
more consistent than his master that he expressly denies/
to the highest order of mankind the one attribute on]
which personality depends, and which holds a foremosti
place in Aristotle's teaching, that of free wiU. His view
of the nature and destiny of mankind has been not inaptly
likened to the supralapsarian theory of predestination.3
Some men are born into the world as spiritual, the
chUdren of God, and these are incapable of faUing away,
and inevitably destined to salvation; others, equally with
out their own choice, have a material nature, and these
by a like necessity are destined to destruction.4 A kind
of choice is permitted only to the intermediate race, the
psychical men, who are capable of inclining to good Or

1 Cf.

Neander,

Church

Hist.

II.

Griech. II. 2. ;

pp. 441,

465.

p. 84 (Bohn).

3 Harvey's
I Irenceus I. p.
cxli.
2 De
Anima i.
4, iii.
5.
Cf.
4 Irenseus,
i. 6, 2.
Neander,
1. c;
Zeller,
Phil.
der 0
2
196 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xii.
evil, but these have no admission into the Pleroma ; the
very fact of their freedom, we might almost say of their
personality, makes them incapable of redemption in the
highest sense of the term. A doctrine like this is not
explicitly pantheistic, but it escapes from pantheism only
by being inconsistent with itself. The moral results of
this teaching, in the disciples at least, if not in the
masters, were, if Irenteus may be accepted as a witness,
pernicious in the extreme. The spiritual man, according
to their teaching, was incapable of corruption by any course
of life whatever. As gold, they said, when lying buried
in mud, does not lose the nature of gold, but remains
distinct from the mud, so the spiritual man, in whatever
course of action he may be engaged, retains his spiritual
nature and is incapable of deterioration. 'Hence,' says
IrenEeus, ' the most perfect among these commit without
fear aU forbidden acts. They are indifferent about eating
meats offered to idols, maintaining that they are not
contaminated thereby ; they are the first to attend at every
Gentile feast in honour of idols, and some of them do not
abstain from the sanguinary and abominable exhibitions
of combats of wild beasts and gladiators. Some surrender
themselves insatiably to carnal pleasures, saying that they
give to the flesh the things of the flesh, and to the spirit
the things of the spirit.'1 No doubt this description,
which in the original is carried into further details, was
applicable only to the worst portion of the sect ; but the
character of the theory is unhappily such that it may be
applied in practice with equal facility to the most rigid
asceticism or the most abandoned profligacy.
Valentinus was for a time the most popular of the
Gnostic teachers, and became, through his numerous
disciples, the founder of the largest number of subordi-
1 Irenseus, i. 6. 2, 3.

lect. xn. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 197
nate schools. Secundus, Ptolemseus, Marcus, Colarbasus,
Heracleon, Theodotus, and Alexander were distinguished
as leaders of Valentinian schools; x and Bardesanes, whom
we have already noticed as one of the Syrian Gnostics,
was for a time a disciple of Valentinus, though he after
wards left him and wrote against some of his opinions.2
The most celebrated of the Valentinians were Ptolemseus,
Marcus, and Heracleon. Ptolemseus, as we have before
noticed, was the Gnostic whose writings principaUy gave
occasion to the refutation by St. Irenseus. There is stUl
extant, preserved by Epiphanius,3 a letter of his addressed
to a lady named Flora, whom he desired to bring over to
his belief. In this letter he discusses the question of the
origin of the world and of the Law of Moses, and combats
the opinions of those who attributed them to the Supreme
God, as weU as the opposite extreme of those who main
tained that they proceeded from an evU being. Ptolemseus
maintains an intermediate position, asserting that the law
is partly of Divine, partly of human origin ; some of its
precepts resting merely on the personal authority of
Moses or of the elders who were associated with him (a
conclusion which reminds us of what we have heard of
late concerning ' the dark patches of human passion and
error which form a partial crust upon' Holy Scrip
ture),4 while others are of a higher inspiration. The
Divine portion however of the law he ascribes, according
to the general theory of the Gnostic school, not to the
Supreme God, but to an intermediate being, the Creator
of the world, whose goodness faUs far short of absolute
perfection. In this way Ptolemseus accounts for the im
perfections which he professes to find even in the Divine
1 Matter, II. p. 101. 4 Wilson in Essays and Beviews,
2 Eusebius, .ff.jE.iv. 30. p. 177.
* Hcer. xxxiii. 3-7.

198 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM: lect. xii.
portion of Scripture, while at the same time, by denying
that the Supreme God is the Maker of the world, he
ingeniously evades any argument that may be drawn from
the analogy of revelation to the constitution and course of
nature. Marcus, another disciple of Valentinus, and the
founder of the subordinate sect of Marcosians, seems to
have been the conjuror and wonder-worker of the school,
bearing somewhat the same relation to the irvevfiaTiKol or
spiritual men of the Valentinians' doctrine that the modern
* spiritualist,' the necromancer who juggles with rapping
spirits and dancing tables, bears to the contemplative
mystic. Marcus figures in the writings of Irenseus a.s a
clever charlatan, deluding weak minds, especially women,
by his tricks of magic, and employing the influence thus
gained for profligate purposes.1 He taught a system of
theosophy agreeing in the main with that of Valentinus,.
but with a difference in illustration and imagery. His
favourite vehicle of illustration (or obscuration) was the
alphabet with the numerical powers of its several letters,
and his speculations in this respect bear considerable
affinity to those of the Jewish Kabbala, which, as a
native of Palestine, he may possibly have known.2 His
methods of finding mystical meanings in each letter
of which a word is composed, and again in the letters
composing the name of that letter (e.g. the five letters
in the word Delta), and so on, are given in detail by
Irenseus.3 His foUowers are accused of forging apo
cryphal Scriptures in support • of their doctrines, and an
anecdote cited by Irenseus from an apocryphal Gospel
employed by them is stUl found in the extant work called
the Arabic Gospel of the Infancy, which, though itself of
1 Irenseus, i. 13. II. p. 107 ; Neander, Church Hist. II.
2 See Harvey's Irenceus I. p. 159. p. 104.
For the probable Palestinian origin of 3 Irenseus, i. 14 seq.
Marcus, see Matter, Hist, du Gnost.

lect. xii. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 199
later origin, may have been partly taken from this source.1
Heracleon,2 another disciple of Valentinus, has acquired
a reputation as the earliest-known commentator on a
canonical Gospel.3 He wrote an exposition of the Gospel
of St. John, portions of which he endeavoured, by means
of allegorical interpretations, to wrest to the support of
Gnostic theories. Fragments of this commentary are
cited in the work of Origen on the same Gospel.4 Yet
though wild and fanciful when carried away by his Gnostic
theosophy (as may be seen in his exposition of the dis
course of our Lord with the woman of Samaria, which he
regards as a figurative representation of the relation of
the rrvsvfiaTiKol to the Valentinian \%a>Trjp), Heracleon
seems in other places to have exercised a sound judgment,
and to have produced an exposition more simple and
natural than that of his censor, Origen.5 His philo
sophical theory is said to have been nearly the same as
that of his master Valentinus.6
The fragments of this commentary of Heracleon, and
the epistle of Ptolemseus to Flora, are the most considerable
literary remains of the Valentinian school which have
come down to modern times. In addition to these there
are extant a considerable extract from a work by an
anonymous member of the sect, cited by Epiphanius,7
1 Cf. Tischendorf, Evang. Apoc. fragmentsof Heracleon are collected in
Proleg. § viii. the appendix to Massuet's Irenceus
2 Hippolytus (vi. 35) mentions (p. 1291, seq. Migne).
Heracleon (with Ptolemseus) as belong- s Neander, Ch. Hist. II. pp. 95,
ing to the Italian school of the Valen- 97.
tinians. Matter (II. p. 113), without " Pseudo-Tertullian, De Pressor.
naming any authority, speaks of him c. 49 ' Extitit prseterea Heracleon
as teaching at Alexandria. alter hstreticus, qui cum Valentino
3 Ueberweg, Gesch. der Phil. II. paria sentit'
p. 35. ' Hcer. xxxi. 5, 6. That this frag-
4 He also appears to have written ment is not, as Blondel supposed, the
a commentary on St. Luke, if we may work of Valentinus himself, but of an
judge from the citation of Clem. Alex. anonymous disciple, see' Massuet,
Strom.iv. 9, p. 595 (Potter). All the Diss.Prcev. i. § 10.

200 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM. lect. xii.
and a few fragments of the writings of Valentinus him
self, preserved by Clement of Alexandria and Origen ; to
which must now be added the citations from a work,
possibly of Valentinus himself, made by Hippolytus.1 It
was at one time supposed that there was still in existence
an entire work of Valentinus in a Coptic translation.
Tertullian, in his treatise against the Valentinians (c. 2),
speaks of the Valentinian Sophia in a manner which has
led some critics to imagine that Valentinus wrote a work
with this title ; and a Coptic MS in the British Museum
entitled HiaTis \%o<\>ia was at one time supposed to be the
work in question.2 Against this supposition however it
may be urged that there is no satisfactory evidence that
Valentinus ever wrote such a work, the interpretation of
Tertullian being very questionable;3 and secondly, that
the aforesaid MS, which has recently been pubhshed
with a Latin translation, contains internal evidence to
show that it does not belong to the Valentinian school.
A recent examination of this work by Kostlin seems to
establish conclusively that the doctrine which it teaches
is widely different from that of Valentinus;4 and it is at
least more probable that it belongs to a late modification
of the Ophite heresy, and was written not earlier than the
middle of the third century.6
The system of Valentinus, like that of Basilides, is in
principle pantheistic, which is indeed the tendency and
1 Clem. Alex. Strom, ii. 8, 20, p. made by Woide. Cf. Matter, Hist.
448, 488 ; iii. 7, 13, p. 538, 603 ; vi. 6, p. du Gnosticisme II. p. 39. The work
767; Pseudo-Origen, Dicd.de BectaFide was published by Petermann, with
sect, iv (I. p. 840, De la Bue). These a Latin translation by Schwartze.
fragments are collected in the Appen- Berlin, 1850, 1853.
dix to Massuet's edition of Irenseus. a Cf. Massuet, Diss. Preev. in Iren.
The extracts in Hippolytus, vi. 29-37, i. § 9.
are supposed by Bunsen {Hippol. I. 4 See Kostlin, Das Gnostische
p. 65) to be from the ySopfo'aof Valen- System des Buches hIcttis 'Socpia, in
tinus. Theol. Jahrb. Tub. 1854, p. 185.
2 This conjecture was originally s Kostlin, pp. 189, 194.

lect. xii. VALENTINUS AND THE VALENTINIANS. 201
the danger of every system of philosophy which aspires to
solve the mystery of the origin of derived existence from
one absolute principle. To this pantheistic conception
both the Platonism and the Judaism of the author's
Alexandrian studies are made subordinate, as well as
some minor detaUs which may possibly have been directly
taken from other sources. Thus the doctrine of emana
tions, though common to the Persian and the Indian
philosophy, appears in Valentinus in a form which, though
Indian in its pantheistic principle and method, yet
more resembles the dualistic Persian scheme in some of
its subordinate particulars. The Jewish Kabbala, in which
this portion of the Persian philosophy was adapted to a
monotheistic, or rather to a pantheistic assumption, offers
in this respect the nearest resemblance to Valentinianism ;
and, were we quite certain of its chronological priority,
we should have no hesitation in naming this as the
channel through which the Persian Amshaspands and
Izeds became the source of the Valentinian JEons.1 As
it is, we cannot help regarding the resemblance between
the two systems as one of the data for forming an opinion
on this controverted chronological question ; and the use
made of the Hebrew language by some of the disciples of
Valentinus, if not by the master himself,2 seems to point
1 Massuet {Diss. Prcev. in Iren. this time, and was partly known to
i.§ 21) denies on chronological grounds some of the Gnostics, than that
the influence of the Jewish Kabbala Gnostic doctrines were copied by Jews
on the Valentinian system ; but he in the ninth or thirteenth century.
perhaps goes too far, when he denies 2 On the employment of Hebrew
that there is any trace in the early terms by the Marcosians, as well as on
Fathers of the Kabbalistic triflingwith some points of affinity between the
the letters of the alphabet. The Kabbala and the Valentinian Mons,
theories of Marcus recorded by Ire- see above, Lecture III, p. 41 seq. On
nseus, i.e. 14-17, though not expressly the Aramaic names of the iEons in
referred to the Kabbalists, are Kab- Epiphanius, which perhaps were not
balistic in character ; and it is on the due to Valentinus himself, see a note
whole perhaps more probable that a in Lecture XI, p. 176.
secret Kabbalistic teaching existed at

202 EGYPTIAN GNOSTICISM. lect. xii.
to the existence of Kabbalistic doctrines in a traditional
form, if not in written documents, through which the
Palestinian or Pantheistic form of Jewish theosophy may
have combined with the Alexandrian or Platonic form in
the production of the Valentinian hybrid.

lect. xiii. ASIATIC GNOSTICISM— MARCION. 203

LECTURE XIII.
ASIATIC GNOSTICISM — MARCIOIT.
The third great geographical division of Gnosticism, that
of Asia Minor, so classified from the country of its most
distinguished representative, Marcion of Pontus, differs
in many important points from the other systems ; yet, as
regards its historical appearance, it is introduced to us
in the first instance, apparently as a mere offshoot from
the Gnosis of Syria. We are told that the predecessor of
Marcion was one Cerdon, a Syrian,1 who came to Rome
during the pontificate of Hyginus (a.d. 139-142), and
taught that the God who was proclaimed by the Law and
the Prophets was not the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ,
for that the one was known and the other unknown, and
that the one was just and the other good. To him, it is
added, succeeded Marcion of Pontus, who expanded his
doctrine.2 Vet, notwithstanding this coincidence in doctrine as
weU as in the exaggerated asceticism of his practical
teaching, we should form a very imperfect notion of
Marcion and his system if we considered him merely as a
disciple of the Syrian Gnosis represented by Saturninus.
Though the theology of Marcion ultimately coincided in
some respects with that of the earlier Gnostics, he ap
proached the question from the opposite side, and with a
1 For the Syrian origin of Cerdon, see Epiphan. Hcer. xii. 1.
2 Irenseus, i. 27.

204 ASIATIC GNOSTICISM: lect. xiii.
widely different character and training of mind. The
earlier Gnostics were for the most part philosophers who
approached Christianity from the side of heathen specu
lation, and endeavoured, by means of fusion and perverted
interpretation, to form an eclectic system out of these
separate elements. Marcion on the other hand was
originally a Christian, contemplating aU other religious
teaching from the Christian stand-point as understood by
himself, and refusing aU alliance with or toleration of
every mode of thought which was not in accordance with
this pattern. The earlier Gnostics were, or attempted
to be, positive thinkers, attaining by their own power of
spiritual intuition to a knowledge of Diviue things, and
having thereby a gauge and criterion to which aU other
religious teaching, that of the Gospel included, must be
adapted. Marcion assumed the position of a negative
thinker, rejecting without compromise aU that would not
be reconciled to his supposed Christian standard, but
making no attempt to discover a higher phUosophical
truth under the apparently conflicting representations.
Their method was mystical and ontological ; his was
rationalistic and critical. They professed to teach a
special wisdom, accessible only to a chosen few ; he pro
fessed to teach a plain Christianity, within the reach of
aU Christian men ; and though his criticisms ultimately
carried him to the threshold of the Gnostic shrine, he did
not attempt to penetrate into its inner mysteries.
Marcion was a native of Sinope in Pontus, and is said
to have been the son of the bishop of that Church and to
have been expeUed from the Christian community by his
own father.1 The moral offence assigned as the cause of
1 Epiphan. Hcer. xlii. 1. He seems ff. E. v. 13) 5 vairrts. Massuet {Diss.
to have at one time been a sailor. in Iren. i. § 135) thinks that this may
Tertullian, Adv. Marc. i. 18,.calls him be merely a play on the name of his
' nauclerus ; ' Bhodon (in Euseb. country, Pontus.

lect. xin. MARCION. 205
this expulsion is alien to the character of the man and of
his teaching, and rests upon very doubtful authority; l and
it is not improbable that the excommunication may have
really been due to his errors of doctrine, and not to any
profligacy of conduct. From Sinope he betook himself
to Rome, where he seems to have become acquainted with
Cerdon and to have adopted some of his Syrian theories ;
but he must have done so chiefly because he forced them
to adapt themselves to a system which he had already
elaborated on different grounds. An anecdote, in itself
highly probable, narrated by Epiphanius 2 seems to show
that he came to Rome with his own theory already formed,
and probably hoping to find a more favourable reception
for it in the Gentile capital than it had met with in the
more judaizing churches of Asia. It is said that when
the presbyters of the Roman church refused to receive
him into communion, he asked them what was the mean
ing of our Lord's injunction against putting new wine
into old bottles — evidently aUuding to the antagonism
which he supposed to exist between the Old Testament
and the New.3 Finding that they did not adopt this
view and persevered in refusing to admit him to com
munion, he determined to found a separate church of his
own, and joined himself for that purpose with the Gnostic
Cerdon. The character of Marcion's own teaching may be
1 Pseudo-Tertull. De Prcescr. c. 51 that Marcion was for a time admitted
' propter stuprum cujusdam virginis into communion, and gave » sum of
ab ecclesise communicatione abjectus : ' money to the Church, which was after-
cf. Epiphan. Hcer. xlii. 1. But the real wards rejected when he was excom-
Tertullian says nothing of this municated. This account may be
charge ; on the contrary, he contrasts reconciled with that of Epiphanius, if
the offence of Apelles with the conti- we suppose it to refer to his first
nence of Marcion ; De. Prcescr. c. 30. arrival at Borne, before the news of
2 Hcer. xlii. 2. his excommunication at Sinope was
3 Tertullian's account {Adv. Marc. known.
iv. 4 ; De Prcescr. c. 30) seems to imply

\
206 ASIATIC GNOSTICISM: lect. xiii.
described as a combination of rationalism proper with
what is now commonly known as the ' higher criticism.'
The first element was manifested in his rejection of the
entire Old Testament, as well as all the evidences of
natural religion derived from the constitution of the
world, because in both alike he discovered phenomena
which he considered to be different from what ought to
be expected from a Being of perfect wisdom and goodness.
The second was manifested in his rejection of a large
portion of the New Testament, as a corruption of what
he assumed to be the pure doctrines of Christianity.
Among the Christian Scriptures, Marcion accepted only
ten of the Epistles of St. Paul,1 whom he regarded as the
only preacher of the true revelation of Christ, together
with a pretended original Gospel, which he asserted to be
that used by St. Paul himself (so he interpreted the
expression ' according to my Gospel ' 2) and which was in
reality a mutilated copy of the Gospel according to St.
Luke.3 The other books of the New Testament he dis
carded, as the works of judaizing teachers who corrupted
the primitive truth.4 Marcion's gospel seems to have
contained very few additions to the canonical text of St.
Luke, but on the other hand very considerable portions
of that text were omitted in his recension as not com
patible with his theory of the Person of Christ and the
character of Christianity. All that relates to the birth and
1 These were arranged by Mar- t. v. sect. 4 ; Pseudo-Orig. Dial, de
cion in the following order: Galatians, Becta Fide, sect. 1 (p. 807, De la
1, 2 Corinthians, Eomans, 1, 2 Hue).
Thessalonians, Ephesians, Colossians, " Cf. Neander, Church Hist. II.
Philemon, Philippians. Even these p. 149.
were received in a mutilated and 4 Cf. Tertullian, . Ada. Marc.
corrupted form. The Pastoral Epis- iv. 2, 3. This part of Marcion's
ties ware rejected. See Epiphan. teaching was revived in the eigh-
Heer. xlii. 9. teenth century by Morgan, the ' Moral
2 Bom. ii. 16, xvi. 25 (2 Tim. Philosopher,' and again'in the present
ii. 8). Cf. Origen. in Evang. Ioann. century by the Tubingen critics.

lect. xiii. MARCION. 207
infancy of our Lord, together with the genealogy, was
omitted.1 AU appeals to the writers of the Old Testament
as bearing witness to Christ, and passages that did not tally
with the ascetic teaching of the critic, such as the con
trast between our Lord's way of life and that of John the
Baptist, and the mention of those who shall sit down (dva-
KXiOrjo-ovTai) in the kingdom of God,2 were remorselessly
excluded, as corruptions detected by the critical insight
of the reformer. Other passages were retained in an
amended form. The words, ' It is easier for heaven and
earth to pass than one tittle of the law to fail ' (Luke xvi.
17), became 'It is easier for heaven and earth and for
the law and the prophets to fail, than one tittle of the
words of the Lord.' ' When ye shall see Abraham and
Isaac and Jacob and all the prophets in the kingdom of
God' (Luke xiii. 28), was transformed into, ' When ye
shall see the righteous in the kingdom of God.'3 The
perverse criticism of the Tubingen school, whose mode of
dealing with Holy Scriptures bears no smaU resemblance
to Marcion's own, has endeavoured of late years to defend
the paradox, in part suggested by Semler and others, that
Marcion's recension was the original, the canonical text
the interpolated Gospel;4 though there is not a scrap of
1 Cf. Irenseus, i. 27. 2. Marcion's De la Hue) ; Theodoret, ff. F. i. 24 ;
Gospel seems to have commenced Pseudo-Origen, Dial. pp. 823, 869. See
with the words 'Ey IVei rrevreKaiSeKdrcp Thilo, Codex Apocr. N. T. p. 403. For
t^s rryepovias Tifiepiov Kaicrapos some details of Marcion's alterations in
[Pseudo-Orig. Dial, de Eecta Fide, St. Luke and St. Paul's Epistles, see
p. 823 (DelaBue), adds fiyepoveiovros Lardner, Hist, of Heretics c. x. §§ 35-
Tlovrlov niAorou ttjs 'IotiSaias] b 53.
&ebs KarrjXBev els KarrepvaobpTr6\iVTr)s 2 Luke vii. 21-35, xiii. 29.
raA.iA.aias Kal ^v SiSdffKenv iv tois s Cf. Bleek, Einleitung in das
erdfipacri, compiled from Luke iii. l,iv. N. T. pp. 124, 125.
31, the early part of c. iv, except a 4 Semler imagined that St. Luke's
few verses transposed, being omitted and Marcion's Gospel were both later
on account of the references to the recensions of an original text. He
0. T. Cf. Tertullian, Adv. Marc. iv. 7 ; was followed by Schmidt, who sug-
Epiphan. Hcer. xlii. 1 1 ; Iren. i. 27, iii. gested that Marcion's was the original
10 ; Origen, in Ioann. xx. (IV. p. 165 gospel. Eitschl {Das Evang. Mar-

208 ASIATIC GNOSTICISM: lect. xin.
historical evidence to show that the mutilated recension
was ever heard of before Marcion's time, and though there
is positive evidence to show that Marcion must have
possessed and made use of passages of St. Luke's original
Gospel which were omitted in his mutilated edition.1
The circumstance that Marcion approached the ques
tion from a critical, not from a historical point of view,
and chiefly from a persuasion of the contrariety between
the revelations of the Old and New Testament, will serve
to account for some of the peculiarities of his system as
compared with those of the other Gnostics. The meta
physical element is kept entirely in the background, and
large portions of it disappear altogether.
Marcion's theory recognises no emanations of iEons as
connecting links between the Supreme God and the world,
for from his point of view the Supreme God was not even
indirectly the Author of the world. There is no attempt
at a description of the spiritual world, no hypothesis to
depict the development of absolute into relative existence;
for the object of Marcion was simply to avail himself of
the surface of the Gnostic theories for the solution of a
critical difficulty : he had no taste for plunging into the
depths of ontological speculation. Matter is indeed
admitted into his system as an eternal self-existent prin
ciple,2 but no consequences are deduced from this assump
tion with reference to the constitution of the world : for
the mind of the Author was almost wholly occupied with
dons u. das Kanon. Evang. des Lucas) quently retracted, and Baur modified
and Baur {Kanon. Evang. p. 397- his view. Cf. Bleek, I. c. p. 129.
427) maintain that Marcion's gospel ' For a full examination of the
was interpolated to form the received question, see Bleek, Einleitung in das
text of St. Luke. Schwegler {Das N. T. pp. 129-138
nachapost. Zeitalter I. p. 260-284) 2 Tertull. Adv. Marc. i. 15 'Et
maintains the negative portion of the materia enim Deus, secundum formam
same view, viz. that Marcion did not divinitatis, innata scilicet et infecta et
mutilate St. Luke. Bitschl subse- seterna.'

lect. xni. MARCION. 209
the supposed contrasts between the two Testaments and
their respective authors ; he paid little or no attention to
theories. of cosmogony. And hence, though in reality he
recognised three original principles, Matter, the Demi
urge, and the Supreme God, he makes no positive use of
the first, and his system is frequently described as if it
were a pure dualism recognising the two last only.1
Marcion's heretical opinions seem to have begun in a
minute and captious criticism of the Old Testament,
which he insisted on interpreting everywhere in the most
literjl_jnanner, and consequently imagined to contain
numerous self-contradictions and unworthy representations
of God. He wrote a work entitled , AvtiOsctsis, professing
to point out contradictions between the Old Testament
and the New-, as weU as to show that parts even of the
latter were interpolated and corrupt.2 The foUowing may
be given as specimens of his mode of dealing with the
Jewish Scriptures. The God whom these Scriptures reveal,
he says, cannot have been a God of wisdom and goodness
and power ; for after having created man in his own image
he permitted him to fall, being either ignorant that he
would fall, or unwilling or unable to prevent him from
falling.3 He is represented as calling to Adam in the
garden, ' Adam, where art thou ? ' showing that he was
ignorant where Adam was.4 He commanded the Israelites
at the exodus to spoU the Egyptians.5" He forbade the
1 Thus one of the earliest antago- they, in Herzog, vol. IX. p. 98.
nists, Ehodon (in Euseb. ff. E. v. 13) 2 Tertull. Adv. Mare. i. 19
speaks ofMarcionas holding two prin- 'Antitheses Marcionis, id est, con-
ciples, as does the Pseudo-Tertullian, trarise oppositiones, quse conantur
De Prcescr. c. 51. Hippolytus, vii. 31, discordiam Evangelii cum lege corn-
attributes two principles to Marcion, mittere.' Ibid. iv. 4 ' Evangelium
but in x. 19, he enumerates three. Lucse per Antitheses suas arguit ut
Later expositors add a fourth, an evil interpolatumaprotectoribusJudaismi.'
being or Satan ; Theodoret, Hcer. Fab. 3 Tert. Adv. Marc. ii. 5.
i. 24. This last was probably a later 4 Bid. ii. 25.
modification of the theory ; see Dil- s Ibid. ii. 20.

210 ASIATIC GNOSTICISM: lect. xiii.
making of graven images, and yet commanded Moses to
raise up the brazen serpent in the wUderness, and cherubim
to be placed over the mercy seat.1 He chooses Saul to be
king over Israel, and is afterwards said to have repented of
his choice.2 He threatens to destroy the children of Israel,
and is turned away from his purpose by the intercession of
Moses.3 On these and other accounts, Marcion censures
the Old Testament representation of God, as being that
of an imperfect being ; but instead of adopting the hypo
thesis of the modern rationalists, and denying the fidelity
of the representation and consequently the inspiration of
the book, he finds an apparent solution of his doubts in
the Gnostic hypothesis of a distinction between the
Supreme God and the Demiurge. The Old Testament, he
argued, represents God as imperfect, because the God of
the Old Testament, the Creator of the world, the Author
of the elder revelation, is in truth, not the Supreme God,
but an imperfect being. He did not however, with the
majority of the Gnostics, regard the Demiurge as a derived
and dependent being, whose imperfection is due to his
remoteness from the highest cause ; nor yet, according to
the Persian doctrine, did he assume an eternal principle
of pure malignity. His second principle is independent
of, and co-eternal with, the first ; opposed to it however,
not as evil to good, but as imperfection to perfection, or,
as Marcion expressed it, as a just to a good being.
The choice of the term just, which Marcion seems to
have borrowed from Cerdon, seems at first sight a strange
one to express the character of so imperfect a being as
Marcion professed to see in the God of Israel. But in
truth Marcion's interpretation of Justice was very similar
to that in which Aristotle speaks of it as improperly used
1 Tertull. Adv. Marc. ii. 22. ' Ibid. ii. 24.
3 Ibid. ii. 26.

lect. xni. MARCION. 211
in opposition to equity.1 He conceived of it as the severe,
rigid enforcement of every particular of a law which in
itself possessed aU the infirmities of the legislator by
whom it was enacted. His conception of the law of Moses
was as if its whole spirit and purpose was summed up in
the single precept, ' an eye for an eye and a tooth for a
tooth.'2 He exaggerated and distorted the teaching of
his professed master, St. Paul, concerning the law as
weak through the flesh,3 and as causing offence to abound,4
and as giving the knowledge of sin ; 5 but omitted alto
gether the other side of the picture, which represents the
law as holy and just and good,6 as being our school
master to bring us to Christ,7 as causing offence to abound
only that grace might much more abound ; 8 and on the
other hand, in the spirit of some of the Deists of Bishop
Butler's day, to whom his method of criticism bears no
small resemblance, he regarded the character of the true
God as one of pure benevolence,9 overlooking, or rather
purposely, as a part of his system, setting aside, all those
aspects of nature as well as of revelation, which represent
Him as a Moral Governor.
Though it is a slight digression from our main topic,
it may not be unprofitable to turn aside for a moment to
notice the manner in which TertuUian meets the cavUs of
Marcion against the Old Testament. Some he simply
dismisses as misrepresentations of the fact ; the brazen
serpent, for instance, and the cherubim were not erected
to be worshipped, and therefore were not opposed to the
second commandment. Other features of the Divine
government he vindicates by showing them to be per-
1 Eth. Sic. v. 14. 7 Gal. iii. 24.
2 Tertull. Adv. Marc. ii. 18. 8 Bom. v. 20.
3 Bom. viii. 3. 9 Butler, Analogy, part i. c. 2.
4 Bom. v. 20. Cf. Tertullian, Adv. Marc. i. 6 ;
5 Bom. iii. 20. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 251.

6 Bom, vii. 12.

p 2

212 ASIATIC GNOSTICISM: lect. xni.
fectly compatible with the goodness of their Author, even
as judged by his antagonist's own standard. The faU of
Adam was not caused by God's appointment, but by man's
abuse of his free will ; and the goodness of God is shown
in His having given to man this exceUent gift of freedom,
which exalts him above all the rest of the animal creation,
and was necessary in fact, to constitute his likeness to
his Maker.1 Even those institutions of the law which
Marcion produces as proofs of the harshness and severity
of God will, on examination, be found to tend to the benefit
of man. The ' lex talionis ' was a law adapted to the
Jewish people, and instituted for the purpose of repressing
violence and injustice. The prohibition of certain kinds
of food was designed to inculcate self-restraint, and thereby
to preserve men from the evUs of excess. The sacrifices
and other burdensome observances of the ceremonial law,
independently of their typical and prophetical meaning,
answered the immediate purpose of preventing the Jews
from being seduced into idolatry by the splendid rites of
their heathen neighbours.2 The gold and silver of Egypt
he regards as a payment justly due to the Israelites for
their many years of labour and service in that country.3
But beyond these, there is another consideration to
which TertuUian appeals, and one which is too often kept
out of sight in dealing with similar difficulties — man's
ignorance of God, and the necessity of speaking of
divine things in a manner adapted to human capacities.
Tou have,' he says, ' a God, certain and undoubted, as
may be seen even from this, that you see Him to be one
whom you know not, save in so far as He is pleased to
reveal Himself.' . . . 'Isaiah exclaims, " Who hath directed
the Spirit of the Lord, or being His counsellor hath
1 Tertull. Adv. Marc. ii. 5, 6. 463. Cf. Tertull. Adv. Marc. ii. 18.
2 Bp. Kaye Tertullian, pp. 462, » Tertull. Adv. Marc. ii. 20.

lect. xiii. MARCION. 21 3
taught Him? With whom took He counsel, and who
instructed Him, and taught Him in the path of judgment,
and taught Him knowledge, and showed to Him the way
of understanding?" (Isaiah xl. 13, 14). And St. Paul
agrees with him, saying, " 0 the depth of the riches both
of the wisdom and knowledge of God ! how unsearchable
are His judgments, and His ways past finding out " (Rom.
xi. 33) — ways of understanding and knowledge which no
one has shown Him, except, it may be, these critics of
Deity who say, God ought not to do this and ought to do
that, as if any one can know the things of God but the
Sphit of God (1 Cor. ii. 11). . . . God is then most great
when He seems to man to be little ; and then most good
when He seems to man to be not good.' l In a later
passage, in answer to the objection against attributing to
God human feelings and passions, he says, ' We have
learnt our God from the prophets and from Christ, not
from Epicurus and the philosophers. We who believe
that God dwelt on the earth, and humbled Himself to
adopt a human nature for man's salvation, are far from
believing that to have a care for anything is unworthy of
God. . . . Fools, to prejudge of Divine things by human ;
as if, because the passions of man belong to his corrupt
condition, they must be assumed to be of the same cha
racter in God. Distinguish between the two substances,
and interpret differently as the difference of substance
requires, though you use terms which seem to be the
same. . . . This must be regarded as the image of God
in man, that he has the same affections and senses as God,
but not such as God has ; for their conditions and ends
differ as God differs from man. Our very gentleness,
patience, mercy, and goodness, the source of all, are not
perfect in us as they are in God, who is alone perfect. . .
1 Tertull. Adv. Marc. ii. 2.

214 ASIATIC GNOSTICISM: lect. xin.
He has our affections, but after His own manner, as it
becomes Him to have them ; and through Him man has
the same affections, but in his own manner also.' l
As Marcion attempted to separate the God of the Old
Testament from the God of the New, so he likewise at
tempted to distinguish between two Redeemers, separating
the Messiah of the prophets from the true Christ.2 The
Jewish Messiah, he said, stiU harping on his literal in
terpretation, is foretold as a warrior who shall destroy the
enemies of Israel, and bring back his people to their own
land, and finally give them rest in Abraham's bosom ; 3
Christ did none of these things. He suffered on the cross,
whereas the law declares every one accursed that hangeth
on a tree.4 He was sent by the good God for the deliver
ance of the whole human race, whereas the Messiah of the
Jews is destined by the Creator to restore the dispersed
Israelites only.5 On account of these supposed discrep
ances Marcion maintained that the Hebrew prophecies
were still unfulfilled, and pointed to a second Christ, the
son of the Demiurge, who was hereafter to appear as the
temporal and spiritual deliverer of the Jewish people.
With regard to the Christ of the New Testament, the
doctrine of Marcion was Docetic in the extreme, beyond
that of any previous Gnostic teacher. Matter was the
instrument of the Demiurge, which he employed in the
formation of the world ; and such was the hostility which
he supposed between his two deities, that Christ, the
representative of the Supreme God, could have nothing to
do with a material body, or with any part of that human
nature which the Demiurge had made. Other Gnostics,
who denied the reality of Christ's humanity, had allowed
1 Tertull. Adv. Marc. ii. 16. 4 Rid. iii. 18.
2 Ibid. iv. 6. s Oid. iii. 21.
8 Bid. iii. 12, 24.

lect. xm. MARCION. 215
to Him at least a human soul and a seeming birth into
the world.1 Marcion denied both ; his Christ appears
suddenly on the world, sent down from that higher region
which is the dwelling of the Supreme God,2 with the ap
pearance, but none of the reality of mature humanity,
not even in appearance born of any human mother (so he
interpreted the words, ' Who is my mother ?,' Matt. -ii.
48),3 nor passing through any stages of infancy and growth.
His gospel is said to have commenced with the words,
' In the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Csesar, God
came down to Capernaum, a city of Galilee, and taught
on the sabbath days ' — a verse, with the interpolation of
the word God, compounded of Luke iii. 1, and iv. 31, the
intermediate portions of the Gospel being omitted or
transposed.4 A seeming death his Christ was permitted
to suffer, for death is a diminution of the kingdom of the
Demiurge ; but of birth, which increases that kingdom,
not even the appearance was to be tolerated.5 The
seeming death of Christ Marcion represented as being
caused by the malice of the Demiurge, who beheld the
power of a new and unknown God manifested on earth,6
despising his law and drawing away his subjects, and
therefore roused the anger of the Jews against Christ, to
persecute and put him to death.7 Vet the contest is con
tinued in another world. Christ descends into hell to
proclaim the kingdom of the true God to the spirits of
1 Cf. the psychical Christ and the Marcionem.'
birth is Sid oui\r)vos of Valentinus. 3 Tertullian, De Came Christi
2 On Marcion's higher world, cf. c. 7.
Justin M. in Apol. i. c. 27 &\\ov Se * Tertull. Adv. Marc. iv. 7. See
riva, &is ovra pel£ova, rd peiQova irapd above, p. 207.
tovtov bpo\oye"iv rrerroiriKevai : Tertull. 5 Cf. Dilthey in Herzog IX.
Adv. Marc. i. 15 ' Esse et illi condi- p. 33. A similar view seems to have
tionem suam et suum mundum.' On been previously held by Saturninus :
the suddenness of Christ's coming cf. Irenseus, i. 24. 1 ' Salvatorem
into the world, cf. Tertull. Adv. innatum demonstravit.'
Marc. iv. 11, ' Subito Christus, ' Tertull. Adv. Marc, i v. 20.
subito et Ioannes ; sic sunt omnia apud

216 ASIATIC GNOSTICISM: lect. xih.
those who were disobedient to the law of the Demiurge
and condemned by him as transgressors. Cain, Esau,
Korah, Dathan and Abiram, the men of Sodom, the
Egyptians, all who in the Old Testament appear as the
enemies of the God of Israel, join themselves to Christ in
Hades, and are received into his kingdom, while Abel
and Enoch, and Noah, and the patriarchs and prophets of
the chosen people, remained in the service of their own
God, and were left in Hades.1
But whUe Marcion thus emphatically denied any real
assumption by Christ of human nature, he seems on the
other hand to have left His relation to the Supreme God
vague and undetermined.2 There is no hint in his teach
ing of any theory of emanation from the Supreme God,
which forms an essential feature in the other Gnostic
systems, both Docetic and Ebionite. He speaks of God
as having revealed Himself in human form,3 as the Demi
urge or his angels appeared in seemingly human bodies to
the patriarchs ; 4 but in what manner he distinguished
between the persons of the Eather and the Son, or whether
indeed he made any distinction at aU, cannot be certainly
decided from our present sources of information. It is not
improbable however, as Neander conjectures, that he in
tended to represent, as his language seems to imply, that
the Supreme God himself appeared, without any Mediator,
in the kingdom of the Demiurge on earth,6 and thus that
he virtually, if not explicitly, adopted the Patripassian
doctrine, which was distinctly a very short time after-
1 Irena=us, i. 27 ; Theodoret, Hcer. subjects. Cf. Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis
Fab. i. 24 ; Epiphan. Hcer. xlii. 4. The p. 273 ; Dilthey in Herzog IX.
Armenian Bishop Esnig adds a strange p. 34.
story of a second descent of Christ into 2 Cf. Dilthey in Herzog, p. 33.
hell, where he confronts the Demiurge, 3 Irenseus, i. 29.
and charges him with the murder of 4 Tertull. Adv. Marc. iii. 9.
himself, and thus justifies himself for 5 Church History II. p. 143.
carrying away his enemy's nominal

lect. xm. MARCION. ' 217
wards taught by Praxeas and Noetus.1 Though TertuUian
did not prominently dweU upon this point in his work
against Marcion, as he did in his controversy with his
contemporary and personal antagonist Praxeas, yet there
are not wanting incidental expressions to show that this
doctrine, or something very nearly approaching to it, was
the interpretation which he put upon Marcion's language.2
It was a natural consequence of Marcion's views concern
ing the Demiurge and his kingdom that he should deny
the resurrection of the body.3 It was also natural that,
on the same grounds, he should inculcate the duty of the
most rigid asceticism during this life. In the same spirit
in which he had denied the birth of Christ, he condemned
marriage as increasing the kingdom of the Demiurge. No
married person was permitted to receive the baptism by
which proselytes were admitted into his sect, and which
he regarded as a renunciation of the Demiurge and his
works.4 This baptism he permitted to be repeated a
second and a third time in the case of those who fell into
sin after its first administration.5 He also prohibited the
use of animal food, except fish, which he regarded as a
more holy food than flesh,6 and enjoined a rigid fast on
the sabbath day as a mark of hostility to Judaism.7 In
1 Marcion came to Borne after the [Tuus Deus] ' et descendit et prsedi-
death of Hyginus (Epiphan. Hcer. cavit, et passus resurrexit.'
xlii. 1). He flourished under Anicetus 3 Irenseus i. 27. 3 'Salutem
(Irenseus, iii. 4). It is probable, autem solum animarum esse futuram
though Tertullian asserts the contrary, earum quse ejus doctrinam didicissent ;
that he died before the pontificate of corpus autem, videlicet quoniam a
Eleutherus, a.d. 176. Cf. Massuet, terra sit sumptum, impossibile esse
Diss. Preev. in Iren. i. § 137. Praxeas participare salutem.'
came to Borne in the pontificate of 4 Tertull. Adv. Marc. i. 29 ' Non
Victor (a.d. 192-201) or perhaps of tingitnr apud ilium caro, nisi virgo,
Eleutherus (a.d. 176-192). Cf. nisi vidua, nisi cselebs, nisi divortio
Neander, Antignosticus p. 510 (Bohn). baptisma mercata.'
Tertullian's birth may probably be s Epiphan. Hcer. xlii. 3.
placed a.d. 160. s Tertull. Adv. Marc. i. 14.
2 Adv. Marc. ii. 28 'Tuus [Deus] . ' Epiphan. Hcer. xlii. 3.
semetipsumvoluitiuterfici.' Cf. i. 11.

218 ASIATIC GNOSTICISM: lect. xiii.
these practices we see the consistent disciple of the Syrian
Gnosticism, which had descended to Marcion through
Cerdon from Saturninus.
The principal speculative distinction between the
system of Marcion and that of his Syrian predecessors,
besides that which we have noticed already, the absence
of any theory of emanations in connection with the
doctrine of creation or redemption, consisted in the non-
recognition of any principle of pure evil. He assumed
only three principles : the Supreme God, the Demiurge,
and the eternal matter, the two latter being imperfect,
but not essentially evil.1 Some of the later Marcionites
seem to have added an evil spirit as a fourth principle,
but this, must be regarded as an innovation on the teach
ing of the master, who does not appear to have recognised
any other evil being than the Demiurge, whose economy,
originally of a mixed character, combining good and evil
together, might in certain relations assume the character
of positive evil, namely, when placed in direct antagonism
to the redeeming work of the higher God. This feature
of Marcion's system may be traced to the character of his
mind, averse from abstract speculation, and dealing with
philosophical hypothesis to no further extent than was
actuaUy required by the phenomena to be explained. The
actual appearance of the world presented phenomena of a
mixed character, partly good and partly evil, and an author
of a similar nature seemed to him sufficient to explain
these without the need of analysing this assumption into
any simpler and purer elements.
Marcion is the least Gnostic of all the Gnostics.
Though not in point of time the latest holder of Gnostic
1 Theodoret, Hcer. Fab. i. 24. Cf. to the two recognised by Cerdon, the
Dilthey in Herzog, IX. 28. Epipha- Supreme God and the Demiurge.
nius, Hcer. xlii. 3, mentions the Devil 2 Cf. Baur, Die Chr.
as a third principle added by Marcion p. 281.

lect. xm. MARCION. 219
doctrines, he is the latest original thinker of this class,
and his teaching represents the point of transition at
which Christian -speculation passes over from philosophy
to pure theology. Cosmological and ontological problems,
attempts to connect Christianity with the objects and
method of heathen speculation, had, for a time at least,
worn themselves out. The traces of them in Marcion
himself are feeble and incidental, and in the next phase
of religious thought they pass out of sight to make way
for speculation more directly arising out of the Christian
revelation, as manifested in the Monarchian controversy.

220 JUDAIZING REACTION: lect. xrv.

LECTURE XIV.
JUDAIZING REACTION — THE CLEMENTINES — THE
ELKESAITES.
If we compare the doctrines of the earliest Gnostic proper
(omitting Simon and Menander, whose teaching is anti-
Christian rather than heretical) whose name is known to
us, with those of the latest master of any Gnostic school
of reputation, we shall see that the Christian element in
Gnosticism had in the course of rather more than half a
century come round to a point almost opposite to its
original position. Cerinthus, the precursor of Ebionism,
regarded Christianity as the completion of Judaism, and
maintained the continued obligation of the Jewish law.
Marcion regarded Christianity as irreconcilably antagon
istic to Judaism, and manifested his hostility to the
Jewish law in every possible way both of teaching and
practice. Cerinthus regarded Jesus as a man born after
the manner of other men ; Marcion, in the other extreme,
regarded Him as having descended suddenly from heaven,
and refused to ascribe to Him even the appearance of a
birth from any human parent. Cerinthus considered the
Divine mission of Jesus as having commenced at His
baptism ; Marcion omitted aU mention of the baptism in
his mutilated Gospel. Cerinthus separated the person of
Christ from that of Jesus, regarding them as two whoUy
distinct beings, the one purely spiritual, the other purely
human ; Marcion not only rejected the humanity of our

lect. xiv. THE CLEMENTINES, THE ELKESAITES. 221
Lord altogether, but seems hardly, if at aU, to have re
cognised any distinction between the Divine Person of the
Father and that of the Son. It was natural that the
extravagant hostUity of Marcion to the Jewish religion
should call forth a reaction equaUy extravagant in the
opposite direction ; and accordingly, the next step which
we are called upon to notice in the transmutation of
Gnosticism is a return (with some important variations in
detaU however) to the judaizing standpoint of Cerinthus
and the Ebionites. The work in which this reaction is
represented is the so-called Clementine HomUies, a pro
duction, it is hardly necessary to observe, not of the
Apostolic Father, Clement of Rome, whose name it bears,
but of a later writer making use of his name. It can
hardly be called a forgery, for it may be doubted whether
the author had any intention of passing it off as a genuine
production of Clement. It was necessary to the plot of
his romance to carry the scene back to Apostolic times,
to bring on the field St. Peter, the Apostle of the Circum
cision, and his earliest antagonist, Simon Magus, the pre
cursor and representative of the anti- Jewish Gnosticism ;
and Clement, who, according to one tradition preserved
by TertuUian,1 was ordained Bishop of Rome by St. Peter
himself, was so far a person whom it was natural to select
as the companion of the Apostle in his journeys and the
reporter of his acts and teaching ; though at the same
time there is some incongruity in choosing a man who
is generaUy identified with one of the fellow-labourers of
St. Paul, to be the vehicle of a judaizing reaction against
the teaching which Marcion professed to derive from St.
Paul's own writings.2
1 De Prcescr. c. 32. So the Clem. mentioned in Phil. iv. 3, he is more
Horn. Epist. Clem. c. 2. likely to have been the companion of
2 If Clement is the same who is St. Paul than of St. Peter.

222 JUDAIZING REACTION: lect. xrv.
The coUection called The Clementines, to adopt the name
now commonly given to the whole series of cognate works,1
comprises three separate writings of similar character, and
emanating from one school, namely; (1) The Homilies,
professing to be an account written by Clement, at the
desire of St. Peter, to St. James the Bishop of Jerusalem,
narrating his introduction to and travels with the Apostle,
together with the disputations between St. Peter and his
companions on the one side, and Simon Magus and his
disciples on the other. (2) The "Recognitions ('Avayvaxrsis) ,
so called from the discovery by Clement of his parents and
brothers, which forms an interesting episode in aU these
works, though giving its title to one only. (3) The Epitome,
an abbreviated recension of the HomUies,2 with some
slight additions from other sources. The Recognitions are
now extant only in a Latin translation by Rufinus ; the
two other works have come down to us in the original
Greek, the concluding portion of the Homilies, which were
for a long time imperfect, having been recently recovered
from a MS in the Vatican Library. The contents of
all the works are cognate to each other, and in parts'
substantially identical, but the Gnostic element predo
minates in the Homilies,3 which were probably (though
this point has been much disputed) the earliest of the
three writings in their present form.4 For our present
purpose it wUl be sufficient to confine our attention to
this work, the date of which may probably be placed about
1 On the proper use of this title, p. 754.
see Uhlhorn in Herzog, vol. II. 4 For an account of this dispute,
P- 744. see Uhlhorn, I. c. p. 750 seq. Of recent
2 By Dressel, who published it at -writers, Schliemann, Schwegler, and
GSttingen in 1853. The new portion Uhlhorn (as well as Dorner, Person
embraces the latter part of Horn, xix of Christ I. p. 446) give the priority
from the middle of § 14, and the to the Homilies ; Hilgenfeld, Kostlin,
whole of Horn. xx. and Eitschl, to the Recognitions.
3 Cf. Uhlhorn in Herzog, II.

lect. xiv. THE CLEMENTINES, THE ELKESAITES. 223
A.D. 160 or a little later, though some portions of it may
be a very few years earlier.1 To the Homilies is prefixed
a brief introduction containing (1) a supposed letter
from St. Peter to St. James the Bishop of Jerusalem, re
commending to him the record of his own teaching which
he is about to send, and desiring that it may be preserved
as a secret doctrine, to be communicated only to those
who should be found worthy to receive it — a caution
which of itself betrays the apprehension of the writer that
his system is different from that received by the Catholic
Church.2 (2) A supposed speech of St. James to his
assembled presbytery, containing the measures which he
proposes for the safe custody and transmission of the
secret doctrine. (3) A letter purporting to be written
by Clement to St. James, giving an account of his own
appointment by St. Peter just before his martyrdom, as
his successor in the episcopate of Rome, with the directions
given to him, and to the presbyters, deacons, catechists,
and people, by the Apostle for their conduct in then
several offices; and finaUy introducing the narrative
which he had drawn up by St. Peter's command, to be
transmitted to St. James. Then foUow the Homilies
themselves, twenty in number, the contents of which may
be briefly summed up as follows. Clement, a Roman
citizen, anxious for a knowledge of truth, and having
vainly sought for it in the schools of philosophy, at last
hears of Jesus and His teaching and miracles in Judea,
and determines to visit that country to inquire into what
he had heard. Having sailed to Alexandria, and being
detained there by adverse winds, he becomes acquainted
with St. Barnabas, whom he follows to Csesarea, and is
1 Cf. Uhlhorn in Herzog, II. earlier than a.d. 150.
p. 756. The earliest part of the 2 Cf. Dorner, Person of Christ
work {Horn, xvi-xix) combats Mar- I. p. 212.
cion, and therefore can hardly be

224 JUDAIZING REACTION: zect. xrv.
introduced by him to St. Peter, who first instructs him in
the nature of the true Prophet as the expounder of Divine
truth, and then invites him to be present at a disputation
to be held on the following day between himself and
Simon the magician. On the next day Clement becomes
acquainted with some of the companions of St. Peter,
amongst others with two brothers, named Nicetas and
Aquila, who had formerly been disciples of Simon Magus,
but had now left him and foUowed St. Peter. He is now
further instructed in the character and office of the true
Prophet, who alone is the teacher of the truth, and whose
teaching must be implicitly followed. He is also told
that God is both good and just, and that the justice may
be reconciled with the apparent inequalities of man's
fortunes in this life if we believe that there is a future
state in which aU men wiU be rewarded or punished
according to their deeds. He is further told that Simon
the Samaritan denies the justice of God (an evident
aUusion to the doctrine of Marcion), and this circum
stance gives occasion to introduce the doctrine of av&yiai,
or pairs of opposites, which run through the constitution
of all things. Justice must exist, for injustice exists, and
the existence of the one implies that of the other ; and if
justice exists anywhere, it must be in God, the source of
all things. God, who is one, has made all things in pairs,
a better and a worse, represented as male and female, e.g.
heaven and earth, day and night, sun and moon, life and
death. In other parts of creation the masculine or better
element is first and the feminine second ; in man alone
the order is reversed, and the inferior takes precedence of
the superior. Thus this life, which is temporal, precedes
the next life, which is eternal, and among the generations
of men the worse comes before the better, Cain before
Abel, Ishmael before Isaac, Esau before Jacob, Aaron

lect. xrv. THE CLEMENTINES, THE ELKESAITES. 225
before Moses, and now Simon Magus before Peter, who
is come to undo his work. After this Clement is recom
mended to Aquila and Nicetas, who narrate to him the
previous history of Simon Magus, following for the most
part the usual traditions concerning the impostor, with
some additional particulars.
The dispute being then postponed for another day,
Peter proceeds to inform Clement of the subject of the
intended controversy. The Scripture, he says, contains
falsehood mingled with truth ; the introduction of false
hood having been permitted by God in order to try men's
faith. Simon, he continues (here there is an evident
allusion to Marcion), means to adduce these false passages
which give unworthy representations of God, that he may
lead men away from the faith. Such, for example, are
those places in Scripture which speak of God as showing
his power with others, as being ignorant, as repenting, as
being jealous, as hardening men's hearts, as pleased with
sacrifices, as dweUing in a tabernacle, and the like. Such
also are those which speak evU of just men, as, for
instance, the disobedience of Adam, the drunkenness of
Noah, the polygamy of Jacob, the homicide of Moses.
All these will be more fuUy explained hereafter. On the
third day the disputation between Peter and Simon
commences, and lasts for three days. Before its com
mencement Peter gives some further information to his
companions concerning the opinions of Simon, still with
evident aUusion to the teaching of Marcion. He charges
him with maintaining that the Creator of the world is
not the Supreme God, but that there is another superior
and unknown God ; and he then proceeds to dwell on the
unity of God as the foundation of all true religion, and
on the dignity of Adam, the first true prophet, and on the
spirit of false prophecy, represented by Eve, which teaches
Q

226 JUDAIZING REACTION: lect. xiv,
a plurality of Gods.1 After this the disputation com
mences. Peter maintains the existence of one God, who
created the world and all that it contains for the benefit
of man. Simon on the contrary maintains Marcion's
doctrine of two Gods, and enlarges on the imperfections
of the God revealed in the Old Testament, te which Peter
replies by means of his previous distinction between the
true and the false Scriptures.2 At the end of the third
day Simon withdraws and escapes by night to Tyre, while
Peter remains at Csesarea to confirm the Church in that
city, appointing Zacchseus (the pubhcan of St. Luke's
Gospel) as its Bishop. '
In the meanwhile he sends Clement with Aquila and
Nicetas to Tyre to inquire into the proceedings of Simon.3
After their arrival at Tyre they find that Simon, after
exhibiting many sorceries, has departed to Sidon, leaving
however behind him three of his followers, Appion or
Apion, a grammarian of Alexandria (meant for Apion the
antagonist of Josephus, whose hatred to the Jews makes
him a fit companion for Simon, the representative of Mar
cion), Annubion, an astrologer, and Athenodorus of Athens,
an Epicurean philosopher.4 Clement holds a disputation
with Apion concerning the fables of the heathen mytho
logy, Clement condemning their immoral character, and
Apion defending them as allegorical representations of
natural phenomena.5 This dispute occupies the time tiU
the arrival of Peter at Tyre. After this Peter, with his
companions, follows Simon from place to place, counter
acting the effect of his sorceries and instructing the
people.6 At Tripolis he stays three months, and delivers
several discourses to the people, giving them among other
1 Horn. iii. 1-29. i Horn. iv. 6.
2 Horn. iii. 30-57. s Horn. iv. 11— vi. 25.
3 Horn. iii. 58-73, • Horn. vi. 26— vii, 12.

lect. xrv. THE CLEMENTINES, THE ELKESAITES. 227
things some very curious information on the subject of
demonology and witchcraft.1 At this place Clement is
baptized, and then departs with Peter for Antioch, in
search of Simon. In the course of this journey he relates
to Peter his own history and discovers his mother, who
had fled from Rome in his infancy. Afterwards, at
Laodicea, he recognises his two elder brothers in
Nicetas and Aquila, and finally recovers his father, who
had also left him at a later age.2 These several recogni
tions are the circumstances which give the title to the
second Clementine work, in which they are also contained.
The journey to Antioch is interrupted by the arrival of
Simon at Laodicea, where a second disputation takes
place between him and Peter, and is carried on for four
days.3 This disputation, which is probably the original
groundwork of the book,4 turns in the first place, like that
in the third homily, which is probably a later revision, on
the question of the unity of God and the representations
of Him in the Old Testament. Simon endeavours to prove
that the Scripture acknowledges a plurality of Gods ;
while Peter, disposing of apparently adverse testimonies
by his former distinction between the true and the false
portions of Scripture, maintains the perfect unity of God,
and denies that the name can be given to any other being.
In this discussion it should be remarked that Peter is
made to deny that Christ Himself ever asserted His own
Divinity,5 and to declare that the Son, as being begotten,
must be of a different nature from the unbegotten God.6
Subsequently Simon is represented as urging the Mar-
cionite distinction between two Gods, the one good, the
other merely just,7 whUe Peter maintains that the Supreme
1 Horn, viii-xi. 5 Horn. xvi. 15.
2 Horn, xii-xiv. e Horn. xvi. 16.
3 Horn, xvi-xix. 7 Horn. xvii. 4, 5.
" Uhlhorn in Herzog II, p. 755. Q 2

228 JUDAIZING REACTION: lect. xiv.
God, in whose image man was made, has himself a form
and members like those of man, though not made of flesh;
he also expounds the relation of the Divine Being to space,
emanating from Him as from a centre in six directions,
up and down, right and left, backwards and forwards,
which he calls the mystery of the Hebdomad, figured by
the six days of creation with the rest of God on the
seventh ; and finaUy he maintains the superiority of his
own knowledge as having seen and conversed with Christ,
over those who pretended to know Divine things by
dreams and visions.1 The controversy concludes with
two discussions, neither of them leading to a.ny very
definite conclusions, on the supremacy of God and on the
origin of evil.2 After the departure of Simon, Peter again
discourses with his own disciples on the free will of man,
on the nature of evil, and on the Devil as the prince of
this world ; in which discourse he advances the strange
doctrine that the DevU is a being appointed by God for
the punishment of wicked men ; that he himself, though
of evil nature, does no evU, but accomplishes God's will ;
and that his final condemnation is not a punishment but
a translation to the kingdom of darkness, which is con
genial to his nature.3 Then follows a strange story, how
Simon, hearing that he was to be arrested by order of the
emperor, bewitched Faustus the father of Clement, and
changed his face into a likeness of himself, hoping that
Faustus might be arrested in his stead. Peter however
turns Simon's device against himself by sending Faustus
to Antioch, and bidding him in the character of Simon
1 Horn. xvii. 6-19. This passage and revelations (2 Cor. xii. 1) is
has probably reference to the Doce- contrasted with St. Peter's intercourse
tism of Marcion, which reduced with Him during his earthly life. Cf.
Christ to a mere vision ; but there is Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 384.
also a covert attack on Marcion's as- 2 Horn, xviii, xix.
sumed authority, St. Paul, whose 3 Horn. xx. 1-9.
knowledge of Christ through visions

lect. xrv. THE CLEMENTINES, THE ELKESAITES. 229
retract all the calumnies which he had uttered against
Peter, and thus prepare the people for a favourable
reception of the Apostle and his companions. After ten
days a message arrives from Faustus, announcing that his
task is performed, and the work concludes with the depar
ture of Peter for Antioch.1
From the constant antagonism to Simon Magus and
the praises of Peter which appear in the work, it might
at first sight be supposed to be a protest of an orthodox
Christian against Gnosticism in the person of its first
representative. In truth however it is only the protest
of one Gnostic school against another — the Ebionite
against the Marcionite. The Gnostic tendency of the
work, though not prominently put forward, appears in it
almost from the commencement. The purpose of God's
dealings with men is declared to be to instruct them in
the truth of things as they are ; 2 and it is for this purpose
that revelations have been given through the instrumen
tality of the true prophets. The true prophet knows aU
things, past, present, and to come, and even the thoughts
of aU men ; he is without sin and the only authorised
guide to truth.3 This knowledge he has by the innate
and perpetual dweUing in him of the Divine Spirit ;4
indeed the true prophet is the Spirit himself, who from
the beginning has passed through the ages of the world
in various forms, labouring in this world and destined to
eternal rest in the world to come.5 Eight different per
sons are named in whom the Spirit has successively
manifested himself, namely, Adam, Enoch, Noah, Abra
ham, Isaac, Jacob, Moses (who are caUed the sure piUars
of the world6), and finaUy Jesus.7 The doctrine taught by
1 Horn. xx. 11-23. 5 Horn. iii. 20.
2 Horn. ii. 15 (cf. ii. 5). See 6 Horn, xviii. 14.
Uhlhorn in Herzog II. p. 746. ''Horn. xvii. 4, xviii. 13. Cf.
3 Horn. ii. 6, 10, iii. 11. Schliemann, Die Clementinen p. 194.
4 Horn. iii. 12.

230 JUDAIZING REACTION: lect. xiv.
aU these is one and the same ; indeed the teachers them
selves are but reappearances of one and the same teacher,
Adam the first son of God, manifested in various forms
at subsequent times, as the revelation given by him became
corrupt and needed renovation.1 Thus Christianity and
Judaism are one and the same religion in all respects ;
only that this identity must be understood of the true
Judaism as revealed by the true prophet, not of the cor
rupted form which appears in the false passages of Scrip
ture proceeding from evil inspiration.2 The true Judaism
consists in acknowledgment of one God and obedience to
His commands; the commands however being appa
rently limited to the moral law only. Sacrifices are
especiaUy condemned ; 3 circumcision is passed over with
out notice;4 andthe ordinances urgently enjoined as those
of true Judaism are the Christian sacrament of baptism,
together with abstinence from meats offered to idols and
from things strangled.5 Abstinence from aU animal food
is highly recommended, though not absolutely commanded.6
But the most striking feature in this Clementine identifi
cation of Christianity with Judaism is the distinct denial
of the Divinity of our Lord (a denial which the author
regards as indispensable to monotheism 7), and the addi
tion of His name to the catalogue of Jewish prophets as
the successor of Adam and Moses.8 Whether the author,

1 Horn. iii. 20. Cf. Baur, Die Chr. the representative of the true Ju-
Gnosis pp. 343, 362 ; Schliemann, daism of the author ; but his position
Die Clementinen p. 195. does not therefore represent the
2 Horn. xi. 16. iv. 13. Cf. Baur, rite as binding on Christians.
Die Chr. Gnosis p. 365. 5 Horn. vii. 8. Cf. Schliemann,
3 Horn. iii. 45, 56, ix. 7, 14. Cf. pp. 223-225.
Schliemann, p. 222. 6 Horn. iii. 45, viii. 15. Cf.
4 Cf. Schliemann, p. 225. The Schliemann, p. 223.
mention of Peter in the Siapaprvpta as ' Horn. xvi. 15.
alpoipevos iprrepWopos is hardly an 8 Horn, xviii. 14. Cf. Schliemann,
exception to this statement. Peter is p. 194 ; Uhlhorn in Herzog II.
the Apostle of the circumcision, and p. 746, 747.

lect. xrv. THE CLEMENTINES, THE ELKESAITES. 231
like Cerinthus and the Ebionites, denied the supernatural
birth of our Saviour, is a matter of dispute ; the only
passages which bear upon the question being capable of
interpretation in two ways ; J but the direct antagonism to
Marcion which is everywhere manifest in the work makes
it at least probable that, as Marcion went to the extreme
of denying to the Saviour all human parentage, his oppo
nent, in the opposite extreme, did not distinguish His birth
from that of other men.2
Hostility to Marcionism is indeed the leading feature
of the work. It is Marcion who for the most part is
represented under the character of Simon Magus, though
there is also here and there a covert attack upon St. Paul,
whose Epistles were the only Apostolic writings which
Marcion accepted as authoritative.3 And yet, though the
doctrines of Marcion, and in a secondary relation other
Gnostic systems, are attacked in this work, the teaching
of the work itself exhibits Gnosticism in another phase.
Not merely in the negative feature of the Cerinthian and
Ebionite humanitarianism does this appear, but also in
the positive tenets of the system ; in the representation
of religion as a philosophy teaching the true nature of
things ; in the acknowledgment of Christ merely as a
teacher of this knowledge ; in the speculations on the
nature and origin of matter and of evil, which, though

1 The two passages which bear mony of Hippolytus, ix. 14, who says
on this question are iii. 17, and iii. 20. that Elehesai, whose teaching much
For the different interpretations, see resembles that of the Clementines,
Schliemann, p. 200. taught that Christ was born like other
2 This interpretation, which is re- men, but had appeared often in differ-
jected by Schliemann, by Neander ent bodies. This is in fact the
{Ch. Hist. I. -p. 493, Bohn), by Baur Hindoo doctrine of Avatars, which
in his later view {Die Chr. Gnosis allows a natural origin for the
p. 760, and by Dorner {Person of human medium of the incarnation.
Christ I. p. 441), but supported by s See Horn. xvii. 6-19, and- Baur,
Credner (in Schliemann, p. 201) is Die Chr. Gnosis p. 384.
perhaps now confirmed by the testi:

232 JUDAIZING REACTION: lect. xiv.
holding a subordinate place, still appear as part of the
religious system ; ' in the law of antagonism between good
and evil, which was established from the beginning in the
constitution of things, and which appears, though in an
inverted order in man, notwithstanding his free will ; 2 in
the denial of Adam's transgression, and the consequent
contemplation of the first sin, not as a voluntary act of
rebellion against God, but as the consequence of the same
law by which evU exists in the universe ; 3 in the mystical
character assigned to Adam as the ideal man, and to
Adam and Eve as the ideal representatives of two opposite
systems of prophecy, the masculine and feminine principles,
to which truth and error are respectively referred.4 In all
these points we may discern the method and the spirit of
the elder Gnostic systems, though pursued with enfeebled
vigour and less exclusive interest. In this respect both
in Marcion and in the antagonistic Clementine doctrine
the Gnostic spirit may be regarded as in its decline, and
as bearing symptoms of transition to another phase of
religious speculation. The Christian faith was gradually
emancipating itself from its uncongenial connection with
the problems of heathen philosophy, and the inquiries
pursued in connection with it were assuming a more
purely theological character. The doctrine of the Person
of Christ, and of His personal relation to the Father, was
being disentangled from speculations of ontology and
cosmogony, and becoming the principal and central point
of religious thought. And as the diluted Gnosticism of
Marcion gives evidence in this respect of a transition to
the Patripassian theories of Praxeas and Noetus, so the
1 Horn. xix. 12, 13, xx. 2. Cf. 4 Horn. iii. 22 seq. Cf. Schliemann,
Schliemann, pp. 154, 521. p. 177. This theory resembles the
2 Horn. ii. 15, 16. Cf. Baur, Die Pythagorean averroixia, in which
Chr. Gnosis p. 398. male and female are placed as opposite
3 Horn. ii. 16, 52, iii. 21. principles of good and evil.

lect. xiv. THE CLEMENTINES, THE ELKESAITES. 233
dUuted Gnosticism of the Clementines gives evidence of a
simUar transition to the opposite form of Monarchianism,
the Humanitarian heresy of Theodotus and Artemon.
As regards the external history of the pseudo-Clemen
tine writings, the mention (which here occurs for the
first time in ecclesiastical literature)1 of St. Peter as
having been Bishop of Rome, and the prominence given
to Clement as the Apostle's supposed successor, seem to
point out the author, at least of that portion of the
work, as a member of the Roman Church, which even
then was beginning to assert its supremacy, though in a
modified form and with a subordination to the mother
church of Jerusalem, whose Bishop, St. James, appears
as the superior of St. Peter, and is addressed as ' Lord
and Bishop of the Holy Church,' and ' Bishop of Bishops.' 2
But though the origin of the book is probably Roman,3
the doctrines which it contains must be assigned to an
Eastern origin, and the conflicting theories on this ques
tion may perhaps be reconciled with each other, if we
suppose that at Rome, which at this time was the great
centre to which various religious speculations, orthodox
and heterodox, naturally converged, some philosophicaUy
educated Christian, distracted by the various doctrines
around him, and especiaUy by the spread of Marcionism,
had adopted the idea of seeking for a primitive Christi
anity in the Jewish birthplace of the faith, and had fancied
1 Cf. Gieseler, E. ff. I. pp. 208, is maintained by Baur, Schliemann,
264 (Eng. Tr.). Hilgenfeld, and Eitschl, as well as by
2 The letter of St. Peter com- Gieseler, E. H. I. p. 206. Uhlhorn (in
mences neVpos 'laKib&cp Top Kvpiep Kal Herzog, II. p. 755) questions this, and
imcrK6rrtp rrjs dylas iKKKricrlas. The assigns the work to Eastern Syria.
letter of Clement commences KA-jjfwjs Gieseler's view that the author is
'laKd>0ce rep Kvpiep Kal imo-KSrrav Eoman, the doctrine Eastern, meets
<hcio-K6iTcp. Cf. Schliemann, pp. 86, Uhlhorn's objections, while recog-
213 ; Gieseler, E. ff. I. p. 207 nising what is weighty in his argu-
(Eng. Tr.). ments.
3 The Eoman origin of the book

234 JUDAIZING REACTION: lect. xiv.
himself to have discovered it among the speculations of
judaizing heresy.1 The sect to whose doctrines the
Clementine writings bear most affinity, is that mentioned
by authors of the next century,2 under the name of Elke
saites, who are said to have been so called from one
Elxai or Elchesai, their founder, who is probably a later
personification of a Hebrew appellative signifying con
cealed power f According to the statement of Epiphanius,
this sect had its origin in the region bordering on
the Dead Sea, and its disciples were originally called
Ossenes (probably only a local pronunciation of Essenes),
but were afterwards, in the reign of Trajan, joined by
Elxai, who pretended to be a prophet and compiled
a book for which he claimed Divine inspiration.4 Of this
Elxai, Epiphanius adds, c He was by birth a Jew and
held Jewish doctrines, yet did not live according to the
law. ... He taught men to swear by salt, and water, and
earth, and bread, and heaven, and sether, and wind.
Sometimes he speaks of seven other witnesses, namely,
1 Cf. Gieseler, E. ff. I. p. 206. his concealed power, may have given
'* The earliest writer who men- rise to the names of the two supposed
tions them is Hippolytus, ix. 13, fol- brothers Elxai and Iexeus. Other
lowed by Origen in Euseb. ff. E. less probable derivations are nien-
vi. 30. A fuller account is given by tionecl by Gieseler, I. o.
Epiphanius, Hcer. xix, xxx. 3, 17, 4 Hippolytus (ix. 13) says that
18, liii; in the last place under the this book was brought to Eome by one
name Sampscei, which he interpret Aleibiades of Apamea in Syria, -who
r)\iaKoi (tJ>DB>) . Cf. Gieseler, E. ff. described it as a work inspired by an
I. p. 100, 101, for these and th anSel ("whose dimensions are given
with exact measurements), and

3 *D3 ^*0 Svvapis KeKa\vpp4v7j , brought from the Serse of Parthia by
„ . , T : „ "' „ , , Elchesai, who gave it to Sobiai. The
Epiphan. Hcer. xix. 2, who however , .. -i.iij.ij.
does not himself accept the derivation. ^ ^ 1S Probably derived from
Gieseler, E. ff. I. p. 100, aptly com- »*> mmnn9' the book temS ^
pares this with the Sivapis aoapKos of seCTet under an oath- Cf- Eitschl
Clem. Horn. xvii. 16, and supposes that Altkath. Kirche $. 208. Origen (in
the titles of two books called »D3 ^T, Euseb- H- E- ™- 30) also mentions the
j ._- .i i 4.. \ J : r kook, whicl1- he says, they regarded
and tp| n;, the latter treating of as having fallen from heaven.
the concealed Deity, and the former of

lect. xiv. THE CLEMENTINES, THE ELKESAITES. 235
heaven, and water, and spirits, and holy angels of
prayer, and oil, and salt, and earth. He is an enemy to
virginity, condemns continenoy, and compels men to
marry.'1 A little later he adds, 'He anathematizes
sacrifices and offerings, and denies that they were ap
pointed by God, or offered under the law or by the fathers.
. . . He condemns the eating of flesh as practised by the
Jews, and the altar, and fire, as offensive to God, but
water he approves as acceptable.' 2 Epiphanius then
adds that Elxai also joined himself to the Ebionites, and
that he was adopted as a teacher by four sects, the Ebio
nites, two divisions of the Nazarenes, and the Ossenes.3
In a subsequent chapter Epiphanius tells us that the
Ebionites, who at first held Jesus to be the son of Joseph,
afterwards diverged into various opinions, and that, as he
supposes, it was after Elxai had joined them that they
adopted fanciful opinions concerning Christ, some main
taining that He was the same as Adam, the first man.4
Though there is some chronological difficulty in these
statements as they are here given,5 we may at least infer
from them with historical probability that the Ebionites
and the Elkesaites were cognate sects derived from the
influence of a spurious Christianity on the Jewish Essenes ;
the latter, though professing Judaism, being less strict
observers of the letter of the Jewish law than the former.
On the authority of Origen we are further told that the
1 Epiphan. Hcer. xix. 1. Cf. Hip- roipevov.
polytus, ix. 15. 5 If Elxai, as both Hippolytus
2 Epiphan. xix. 3. (ix. 13) and Epiphanius {Hcer. xix. 1)
3 Ibid. xix. 5. say, belongs to the reign of Trajan, he
4 Oid. xxx. 3. Cf. Hippol. ix. 14 can hardly have joined the sect of the
tov Xpiarbv Se \eyei HvBpuirov koiv&s Ebionites, which (though some of their
irderi yeyovevai • tovtov Si ov vvv npeSnws doctrines had been previously asserted
e« napBivov yeyevvr/erBai, aAAa Kal by Cerinthus and Carpocrates) do not
rtpirepov Kal alBis voKKdKis yewnBevra appear under this name till after the
Kal yevvt&pevov rtecpr)vivai Kal epvecrBai, founding of JElia by Hadrian.
oAA.oVo-oi'Ta 7eve'0-eis Kal perevcriepa-

236 JUDAIZING REACTION: lect. xtv.
Elkesaites rejected portions of the Scriptures, and the
whole of the teaching of St. Paul ; • and Epiphanius in
like manner says of the Ebionites of his day (after their
teaching had been modified by that of the Elkesaites)
that they repudiated St. Paul,2 and that among the
prophets of the Old Testament they accepted Abraham,
Isaac, Jacob, Moses, and Aaron, and Joshua, but repu
diated all who came afterwards, as David and Solomon,
Isaiah, Jeremiah, Daniel, and Ezekiel, as weU as Elijah
and Elisha, asserting that they were not prophets of the
truth, but only of intelligence.3 Hippolytus further says
that the Elkesaites used frequent baptisms, employing
them not only for the purification of such of their
followers as had committed deadly sins, but also as a cure
for bodily diseases.4 Epiphanius professses to give an
account of the Ebionites and Elkesaites (whom he caUs
Sampsseans)5 as they existed in his own day, some two
centuries later than the probable origin of the Clemen
tines. But whUe the changes which may have taken place
during that interval wiU probably account for a portion
at least of the variations in his description, the points
of resemblance which remain, between the doctrines and
practices of these heretics and those advocated in the
Clementines, can hardly be accounted for without sup
posing a common origin. The hiva/xis KS/caXvfifusvrj, which
Epiphanius gives as the interpretation of the name Elxai,
reminds us of the invisible hiivapus duapKos ascribed by

1 Euseb. ff. E. vi. 38 dBereiriva 5 Epiph. Hcer. liii. 1 'Sap^aioi
drrb redo-t\s ypaeprjs . . . rbv air6oTOXov rives . . . t&v 8jj Kal 'EhKeeraieov
riKeov aBereT. Ka\ovpevevv a'tpeerls tis. Epiphanius in-
2 Hcer. xxx. 16. terprets this name by r)\iaKot (Hebr.
3 Ibid. xxx. 18. By irpoipTJTai 2>DE>, 'the sun') probably because
ovveo-ecs Kal oSk feqfcfe seems to be th'ey" turned, when praying, to the
meant prophets only _ by human rising sun. Cf. Gieseler, £^ ff^. I.
sagacity, not by divine inspiration. j™
4 Hippol. ix. 15, 16.

lect. xrv. THE CLEMENTINES, THE ELKESAITES. 237
the Clementines to God and angels,1 and warrants the
suspicion that the name, originally applied to the book
which claimed a divine origin, and which was even said
to have fallen from heaven, was subsequently understood
as designating a supposed founder of the sect. The
Jewish origin of this supposed Elxai and his departure
from the strict letter of the law, answer to the distinction
drawn in the Clementines between true and false Judaism,
the latter including most, if not all, of the ceremonial
observances.2 The mention of salt among the things held
sacred by Elxai recalls the passage in the Clementines
where St. Peter is said to have administered the Eucharist
with bread and salt.3 The compelling men to marry is
but an exaggeration of the advice which St. Peter is re
presented as giving to the Roman Church.4 The rejec
tion of sacrifices is a common feature in both doctrines :
St. Peter in the Clementines, like Elxai in Epiphanius,
expressly denying their divine appointment.5 Abstinence
from flesh is recommended if not commanded by both,6
whUe the condemnation of fire and approbation of water
corresponds in a remarkable manner to the words which
the author of the Clementines puts into the mouth of St.
Peter : ' Fly to the water, for this alone can quench the
fury of the fire.' 7 Finally the two remarkable parallels,
the identification of Christ with Adam, and the rejection
of the later prophets, with the especial honour paid to the
early patriarchs,8 are sufficient to give extreme probability
to the conjecture that in the Clementine writings we

1 Horn. xvii. 16. 7 Horn. xi. 26. By the fire is
2 Cf. Gieseler, Eccl. Hist. I. p. 100. meant the power of the demons
3 Horn. xiv. 1. {Horn. ix. 11, 19). Cf. Schliemann,
4 Epist. Clem. c. 7. P- 229.
6 Hom.iii. 45, 56. 8 Horn. iii. 20, xvii. 9, 10, xviii.
8 Horn. viii. 15. Cf. Schliemann, 14, iii. 22-24, 38. Cf. Schliemann
. 223. P- 193.

238 JUDAIZING REACTION. lect. xiv.
possess a work chiefly exhibiting the early teaching of the
Elkesaite sect.
The work which we have been examining in this
lecture is the last important monument of Gnostic teach
ing. From this time Gnosticism, while it continued for
a season to transmit the doctrines of its early speculators,
cannot be regarded as originating any new development.
The literary interest after this period is transferred to the
Christian antagonists of Gnosticism, of whom it is my
intention to attempt a brief notice before concluding this
course of lectures.

lect. xv. IRENJEUS, TERTULLIAN. 239

LECTURE XV.
CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, IKENjEUS,
TERTULLIAN.
The teaching of Marcion and the judaizing reaction of
his opponent, the author of the Clementines, bring us to
the beginning of the latter half of the second century.
After this date no Gnostic teacher of any eminence arose,
and Gnosticism may be considered as having entered on
the period of its decline, though some of its sects con
tinued to linger on tUl the sixth century. The chief
literary interest of the latter part of the second and the
beginning of the third century turns upon the writings of
those Fathers of the Christian Church who came forward
as the antagonists of Gnosticism. The principal of these
are Irenseus, Clement of Alexandria, and Tertullian, to
whom must now be added Hippolytus, Bishop of Portus,
the greater part of whose work on the ' Refutation of all
Heresies,'1 having been long lost, was recovered and
published in the year 1851 under the title, generally
acknowledged to be incorrect, of the ' Philosophumena
of Origen.' 2
The earliest of these Fathers, Irenseus Bishop of Lyons,
is the author of a work usually quoted as the ' Five Books
1 See books iv-x. Book i had p. 872.
been previously known and printed 2 Origenis Philosophumena, sive
among Origen's works, though ac- Omnium Hceresium Eefutatio ; e Co
knowledged by the best critics not to dice Parisino nunc primum edidit
be his. See De la Bue's Origen, I. Emmanuel Miller. Oxon. 1851.

240 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM: lect. xv.
against Heresies,' but of which the proper title is, ' Five
Books of the Refutation and Overthrow of Knowledge
falsely so called ' ('EXsyxov *a' dvaTpoTrf/s Trjs tysvhwvvfiov
yvdooscos /3i/3\la wsvts).1 Of this work the greater part of
the original text is lost, but the whole survives in a
barbarous Latin translation, probably executed not more
than ten or fifteen years after the original. The work
itself may with good reason be placed somewhere between
a.d. 182 and 188,2 and the translation, having been used
by Tertullian, can hardly have been composed later than
the end of the same century.3
Of the five books of which the work of Irenseus is
composed, the first is mainly devoted to a historical
account of various Gnostic heresies, chiefly of the Ptole-
msean branch of the Valentinians, with whose system the
author had become acquainted both by a study of the
writings in which it was contained and by personal inter
course with some members of the sect.4 An account of
the doctrines of these heretics is given in the first nine
chapters of the work. After this, by way of contrast to
the heretical teaching, there foUows a declaration of the
faith of the Catholic Church throughout the world, which
s remarkable, both as the earliest distinct statement of
ihat faith formally drawn up in a series of propositions,5
jand also for its complete conformity in substance, and
nearly in language, with the creeds afterwards formally
adopted by the Church, especially with the Eastern type,
1 Eusebius, ff. E. v. 7. (Cf. of Eoman bishops given iii. 3. Cf.
Harvey's Irenceus I. p. clxiii ; Mas- Harvey, I. p. clviii.
suet, Diss. ii. § 46). This title is also 3 Tertullian uses it in his treatise
acknowledged by Irenseus himself in against the Valentinians, written
the Preface to bk. ii. probably early in the third century.
2 It was composed after Theodo- On this, see Massuet, Diss. ii. § 53.
tion's translation of the 0. T. a.d. 181, 4 Irenseus, i. 1. 2.
which is mentioned by Irenseus,iii. 21. 5 Cf. Heurtley, Harmonia Symbo-
and before the death of Pope Eleu- lica p. 5 seq.
therus, a.d. 189, who closes the list

lect. xv. IRENJLUS, TERTULLIAN. 241
as represented by the Nicene Creed.1 ' The Church,' he
says, ' throughout the world, spread out as she is to the
ends of the earth, carefully preserves the faith that she
received from the Apostles and from their disciples, be
lieving in one God, the Father Almighty, who made
heaven and earth, the seas and all that in them is ; and
in one Christ Jesus, the Son of God, who was incarnate
for our salvation ; and in the Holy Ghost, who by the
prophets proclaimed the dispensations and the advents of
our dear Lord Christ Jesus, and His birth of a Virgin,
and His suffering, and His resurrection from the dead,
and His ascension in the flesh into heaven, and His
coming from heaven in the glory of the Father to sum up
all things, and to raise up aU flesh of the whole human
race ; that to Christ Jesus, our Lord and God and
Saviour and King, according to the good pleasure of the
invisible Father, every knee should bow, of things in
heaven and things on earth and things under the earth
and that every tongue should confess Him, and that He
should have1 righteous judgment upon aU.'2 'The Church,'
he continues, ' scattered as she is over the whole world,
having received this message and this faith, dUigently
guards it, as though she inhabited but one house ; and
her faith is conformable to these doctrines, as though she
had but one soul and one heart ; and she preaches these
things harmoniously, and teaches and hands them on, as
though she had but one mouth. For, dissimilar as the
languages of the world may be, still the power of the
tradition is one and the same; and neither have the
churches established in Germany believed otherwise or
transmitted any other doctrine, nor those of Spain, nor
1 Heurtley, Harmonia Symbolica History and Theology of the Three
p. 6. Creeds vol. I. pp. 43, 44.
2 Irenseus, i. 10. 1. See Harvey, K

242 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, lect. xv.
those among the Celts, nor in the East, nor in Egypt, nor
in Libya, nor those established in the middle of the world.
But as the sun, the creature of God, is one and the same
in all the world, such also is the preaching of the truth in
its universal phase, enlightening all men who wish to
approach the knowledge of the truth. He that among
the Bishops of the Church, is mightiest in the word speaks
no other doctrine than this, for none is above his Master;
neither shall he that is weak in the word be found to
minish aught of the tradition ; for, the faith being one and
the same, he that hath much to say concerning it hath
nothing over, and he that hath little hath no lack.' J After
this emphatic declaration of the unity of the Catholic
faith, Irenseus proceeds to contrast it with the -diversity
of opinions put forth by various teachers of heresy, even
within the school of Valentinus ; 2 the contrast being sub
sequently heightened by a further account of the different
opinions of the earlier Gnostic sects from Simon Magus
downwards.3 This list includes Simon Magus and Me
nander (c. xxiii), Saturninus and BasUides (c. xxiv),
Carpocrates (c. xxv), Cerinthus, the Ebionites and the
Nicolaitans (c. xxvi), Cerdon and Marcion (c. xxvii),
Tatian and the Encratites (c. xxviii), and finally various
branches of the Ophites (cc. xxix-xxxi).4 This part of the
work is chiefly historical, and the materials which it sup
plies have been made use of in the preceding lectures.
The second book of Irenseus is chiefly devoted to a
philosophical refutation of the tenets, of the Valentinians
(other- Gnostics being incidentally noticed), interspersed
with criticisms on then false interpretations of Scripture.
1 Irenams, i. 10. 2. .Cf. Harvey, identified by Theodoret, ff. F. i. 13,
I. c. p. 45. with the Naassenes, of whom a fuller
2 cc. 11-21. account is given by Hippolytus, v.
3 cc. 23-31. 6-11.
4 The Barbelists of c. xxix are

lect. xv. IRENJEUS, TERTULLIAN. 243
The phUosophical arguments are mainly directed to the
foUowing points : 1. To maintain the unity of God, and
the absurdity of the Gnostic separation between the
Supreme God and the Creator of the world (cc. i-vi).
2. To overthrow the Platonic hypothesis of a corre
spondence between the intelligible and the visible world,
on which so many of the Valentinian theories rested (cc.
vii, viii). 3. To point out the absurdities and inconsis
tencies in the details of the Valentinian theory, and in the
arguments by which it is supported (cc. xii-xix). After this
follows a refutation of the false interpretation of Scripture
which these Gnostics adduced in support of their theories
(cc. xx-xxni) ; a criticism of the mystical signification
attached, particularly by the Marcosians, to numbers,
letters, and syUables (cc. xxiv-xxvi) ; and some judicious
remarks on the plain, natural, and universally intelligible j
mode of interpreting Scripture, as distinguished from the \
secret and fanciful meanings which the Gnostics adopted,
and which any man can invent according to his own imagi- !
nation (c. xxvii) . Then follow some wise remarks on the
limitatioiLjofL man's Jknowledge, on the duty of leaving
many mysteries unsolved, the knowledge of which belongs
to God alone, and of believing in revealed truths con
cerning Divine things, though we cannot comprehend the
manner in which they are as they are revealed to be (c.
xxviii). Then follows a refutation of some of the remain
ing details of the Gnostic doctrines, as regards the future
destiny of the soul and the body (c. xxix), and their own
claims to a superior spiritual nature (c. xxx). To this
succeeds an application of the preceding argument to
other sects besides the Valentinians (c. xxxi) ; a denun
ciation of the licentious doctrines and practices of some of
these heretics (c. xxxii) ; a refutation of the theory of
transmigration, and a vindication of the consciousness of
K 2

244 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, lect. xv.
the soul in its separate state after death (cc. xxxiii,
xxxiv) ; and finally, a refutation of those who maintained
that the prophets were inspired by different gods (c.
xxxv). The third book is chiefly occupied with a refutation
from Scripture of the heretical opinions of the Gnostics ;
first, concerning the unity of God ; and secondly, concern
ing the person of Christ. After asserting the superior
authority of the Apostles, as inspired by the Holy Ghost,
over these pretended teachers of a higher knowledge (c. i),
Irenseus proceeds to show that the Gnostic tradition was
not known to the Church in the West or in the East,
neither to the Roman Church which was founded by St.
Peter and St. Paul, whose Bishops he enumerates down
to his own time, nor to the Asiatic Churches, as repre
sented by his own teacher Polycarp, the disciple of St.
John. These agree in one primitive faith, while, on the
contrary, the doctrines of these several sects were never
heard of before the time of the heresiarchs whose names
they bear (cc. ii-iv) . He then proceeds to show that the
Scriptures, both of the Old and the New Testament, agree
in teaching that there is but one God, the Father of our
Lord Jesus Christ, and the Maker of all things, and do
not give the name of God or Lord to any other' (cc. v-xii) ;
in the course of which argument he takes occasion to
assert the canonicity and the inspiration of the four re
ceived Gospels, and of these alone, to the exclusion of the
false Gospels used by the heretics, and points out the
characteristics of each as typified by the four living crea
tures of the Apocalypse (c. xi). He then proceeds to
refute those who attempted to establish an antagonism
between the teaching of St. Paul and that of the other
Apostles, whether on the side of the Marcionites who
accepted St. Paul alone, or of the Ebionites who rejected

lect. xv. IRENCEUS, TERTULLIAN. 245
him ; and he cites St. Paul's own testimony that one and
the same God wrought in Peter to the Apostleship of the
Circumcision, and in himself toward the Gentiles ' (cc.
xiii-xv). Proceeding then to the Gnostic heresies con
cerning the distinction of the iEon Christ from the man
Jesus, he shows that the Apostolic writings unanimously
acknowledge but one Christ Jesus, and that the Being
who descended upon our Lord at His baptism was not the
iEon Christ, but the Holy Ghost (cc. xvi-xviii). He
then proves, on the same authority, the pre-existence and
the real incarnation and suffering of Christ, and that He
is very God, the eternal Son of the Father, and very Man,
born of the Virgin Mary for our salvation (cc. xix-xxii).
In the course of this argument he vindicates the prophecy
of Isaiah (vii. 14) from the misinterpretation of the
Ebionites and the later Jews, and shows that the Sep-
tuagint translation, r) irapQsvos, is the true rendering, and
not 17 vsdvis, which is substituted in the later versions of
Aquila and Theodotion (c. xxi). He then refutes the
arguments of Tatian against the salvation of Adam (e.
xxiii), and concludes with a recapitulation of his previous
positions, and a re-assertion of the unity and providence
of God (cc. xxiv, xxv).
The early part of the fourth book is employed chiefly in
showing, from the testimony of our Lord Himself, that He
acknowledged but one God and Father, and that this God
and Father is the same who was proclaimed of old by
Moses and the prophets, speaking the words of Christ.
With this argument is united a refutation of the Gnostic
perversions of our Lord's words to support their own
theories (ce. i-vii). Irenseus then refutes the false teaching
of Marcion, who endeavoured to exclude Abraham and his
posterity from salvation through Christ, and shows that
1 Gal. ii. 8.

246 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, lect. xv.
there is one Author and one End of both the Covenants, and
that the Old Testament Scriptures foretold Christ, thus
showing that they were inspired by one and the same God
from whom Christ came (cc. viii-xi). He then shows that
Christ confirmed the moral precepts of the law while con
demning the traditions of the elders which were contrary
to the law, and that those ceremonial and typical obser
vances which are no longer in force were necessary for the
discipline and correction of the Jewish people until Christ
should dome (cc. xii-xvi). He then goes on to main
tain that oblations stiU continue in the Church, though
the name of them is changed; that the prophecy of
Malachi (i. 10, 11) that the Jewish sacrifices should
cease, and yet that a pure offering should be offered in
every place to the Lord, is fulfilled in the Eucharist, in
which the Church offers to God the first-fruits of His
creatures, not as needed by God, but as giving thanks to
God and as sanctifying the creatures (cc. xvii, xviii).
From this argument the author returns to the question of
the unity of that God, of whose spiritual things these
earthly things are the type; who, though invisible and
unspeakable as regards His nature and magnitude (qualis
et quantus est), is manifested, as regards His love, through
His works, and is revealed through Christ His Word (cc.
xix, xx). The author then goes on to say that Abraham's
faith was identical with ours, and that Christ came for
the sake of the patriarchs of old as well as of the men of
later times; that the patriarchs and prophets foretold
Christ, and thus prepared the way for the preaching of
the Apostles ; and that the true exposition of the Scrip
tures is that given by the Church (cc. xxi-xxvi). The
book concludes with a vindication of the Old Testament
Scriptures against the cavU which had been raised against
them by the Gnostics, chiefly by the school of Marcion,

lect. xv. IRENA1US, TERTULLIAN. 247
as regards the sins of the patriarchs, which, he says
(citing the teaching of a presbyter who had been in
structed by the disciples of the Apostles1), were recorded
for our warning and instruction ; as regards the judgment
of God against sinners, on which point the Old Testament
is not contrary to the New ; and as regards the hardening
of Pharaoh's heart and the spoiling of the Egyptians,
which he defends by arguments similar to those after
wards advanced by Tertullian in his treatise against Mar
cion (cc. xxvii-xxx).
The fifth book is chiefly devoted to a refutation of the
Gnostic opinions concerning the Resurrection of the Body.
In opposition to the Valentinians on the one side, and to
the Ebionites on the other, he maintains the true Humanity
and the true Divinity of Christ, and shows how both are
necessary to the truth of our Lord Himself, and to the
redemption of mankind. In opposition to those who
deny that the flesh is capable of salvation, he appeals to
our redemption by the blood of Christ and to our par
taking of His body and blood in the Eucharist, by which
our bodies are nourished and preserved to everlasting life
(cc. i, ii). He asserts that God, who was able to create
man's body, is equally able to raise it from the dead ; and
that the body, which was worthy of God's care in the one
case, is not less so in the other ; His strength, as St. Paul
said of his own infirmity,2 being made perfect in weakness
(c. iii). He urges that the heretics themselves who deny
that God raises up the body may be refuted on their own
principles, for they make God either less powerful or less
gracious than their own pretended) Demiurge, who made
the body (c. iv). He appeals to the power of God over--
1 Who this presbyter was, can the predecessor of Irenseus in the see
only be conjectured ; Polycarp, Pa- of Lyons, is intended.
pias, Clement, Justin, have been sug- 2 2 Cor. xii. 9.
gested. Harvey thinks that Pothinus,

248 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM- i^ct. xv.
coming the infirmity cf the flesh, as shown in the longevity
of the patriarchs before the Flood, in the translation of
Enoch and Elijah, and in the preservation of Jonah in the
belly of the whale, and of Ananias, Azarias, and Misael in
the fiery furnace (c. v) . He shows that to the perfection
of man the body is needed as well as the soul andthe
spirit, and cites the prayer of St. Paul for the Thessa-
lonians,1 that their whole spirit and soul and body might
be preserved blameless unto the coming of our Lord Jesus
Christ, and his declaration to the Corinthians 2 that their
bodies are the temple of the Holy Ghost and the members
of Christ (c. vi) . He urges the resurrection of Christ with
His body, the language of St. Paul on the resurrection of
the body,3 and the spiritual gifts vouchsafed to man while
in the body ; and refutes the heretical perversion of St.
Paul's words,4 ' Flesh and blood cannot inherit the king
dom of God,' by showing that it refers to carnal-minded
men, not to the body as incapable of resurrection, and that
the works of the flesh are contrasted by the Apostle with
the works of the Spirit (cc. vii-xii). He then appeals to
the miracles of our Lord in raising up the daughter of
Jairus, the widow's son, and Lazarus,- as a type of our
resurrection hereafter in the same bodies, and cites various
passages in proof of the same truth from the Epistles of
St. Paul (c. xiii). He then proceeds to show that the
flesh and blood of Christ were of the same nature with
those of other men, and cites St. Paul in proof of this ;
and thus shows again that it is impossible with any con
sistency to adopt the Gnostic interpretation of their
favourite text, ' Flesh and blood cannot inherit the kins'-
dom of God ' (c. xiv). He then proceeds to show how the
1 1 Thess. v. 23. 3 1 Cor. xv.
2 1 Cor. iii. 16, vi. 15. 4 1 Cor. xv. 50.

lect. xv. IRENJEUS, TERTULLIAN. 249
same truth is indicated in the Old Testament, and thence
again argues for the identity of the God of the Old Testa
ment with the God of the New, and for the efficacy of the
redemption effected by Christ's birth from a woman, as
co-extensive with the evil sustained by Adam's faU through
a woman (cc. xv-xix). He then repeats the argument in
the third book, contrasting the novelty and variety of the
heretical theories with the primitive character and unity
of the teaching of the Church, and exhorts to obedience
to the teaching of the Church, and to Christ, the Head of
all things in heaven and in earth,1 the promised Seed of
the woman, who bruised the head of the serpent by over
coming the temptations addressed to His human nature,
and thus again showed the unity of God in the Law and
in the Gospel (cc. xx-xxii). Irenseus then proceeds to
speak of the works of the Devil as a liar from the begin
ning, in hostility to Christ, and of the future coming of
Antichrist in the power of the Devil, as foretold by the
prophet Daniel, by St. Paul, and by St. John in the
Apocalypse (cc. xxiii-xxvi). He then proceeds to speak
of the future coming of Christ to judge the world, and to
separate the sheep from the goats, and of the eternity of
reward on one side and of punishment on the other, and
of the great apostacy which shaU precede Christ's coming
(cc. xxvii, xxviii). This gives occasion to speak of the
number of the name of Antichrist, and the various
attempts which had been made or might be made to
explain it ; on which he judiciously remarks that some of
these explanations are plausible, but that, had it been in
tended that the prediction should be understood at the
present time, it would have been explained by the Apostle
himself who beheld the vision, not very long ago, but as
late as towards the end of the reign of Domitian (cc. xxix,
1 Ephes. i. 10.

250 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, lect. xv.
xxx). The author then returns to the original question
of the resurrection of the body, and adduces the fact of
Christ's burial and resurrection as an argument against the
Gnostic assumption of an immediate ascent to the Pleroma
of the soul separated from the body (c. xxxi). He then
says that it is just that those who. have suffered in the
body should also be recompensed in the body (c. xxxii),
and then proceeds to describe the future kingdom of Christ
as it is foretold in Scripture. He argues in behalf of a
literal miUennial reign of Christ on earth with His risen
saints, and quotes, among genuine texts of Scripture, a
strange apocryphal saying attributed to our Lord on the
testimony of Papias. After the millennium will come the
general resurrection and the judgment, and the new
heaven and earth where men shall dwell with God
(cc. xxxiii-xxxvi) . With this description the work
ends. As the writings of Irenseus are directed principaUy
against the Valentinian branch of the Gnostics, so those
of TertuUian are directed chiefly, though not exclusively,
against the school of Marcion. It is scarcely possible
to imagine a greater contrast of character than between
the gentle and modest though zealous Irenseus,1 and the
rough, fiery, one-sided TertuUian; and this difference
appears in their respective modes of dealing with their
subject, except where, as in Tertullian's treatise against
the Valentinians, he does little more than copy his
predecessor. Three works of TertuUian may be selected
as his ' principal contributions to the controversy against
Gnosticism — the ' Prsescriptio adversus_Hsereticos,' the
tract against the Valentinians, and the five books against
Marcion.2 Of these the two last are generally allowed to
1 b piv ElprivaTos cpepdvvpis tis eipr\vorcoi6s, Euseb. ff. E. v. 24.
Zv tj! irpoerrryopla abrcp re rep rpiircp 2 Three minor works may be

lect. xv. IRENjEUS, TERTULLIAN. 251
have been written after their author became a Montanist; '
the first is of doubtful date, but may with considerable
probability be assigned to a period before his secession
from the Church.2
The ' Prsescriptio adversus Hsereticos ' is accepted as a
genuine work of Tertullian down to the middle of the
forty-fifth chapter ; the latter part of the work, which is
chiefly historical, is a subsequent addition by another
hand.3 The term Prcescriptio is used in its legal sense of
an exception or demurrer ; and the title is characteristic of
the temper of the man. TertuUian proposes to put the
heretics eo nomine out of court, as teaching a new doctrine \
contrary to the traditions of the Church, and therefore
not entitled to a hearing. He says that we must not '
be surprised that heresies' are permitted to exist for
the trial of men's faith, but that our duty is to avoid them
as we would some deadly sickness; that they are foretold, 1
and at the same time condemned beforehand in Scripture;
that they are the offspring of a perverse wiU and idle
curiosity, doctrines of demons, borrowed from heathen
phUosophy, with which Christians ought to have nothing
to do (cc. i-vii). He meets the objection that men are
bidden to seek and they shall find,4 by the reply that this
precept is addressed to those who are not yet Christians,
but that those who have received the faith must not seek
any other ; that they who are always seeking wUl never find
anything to believe ; that the Church has a rule of faith
added, treating of special points resurrection of the body. Por au
taught by some of the Gnostics. The account of them, see Bp. Kaye, Ter-
Scorpiace, written to enforce the duty tuUian r>r>. 141, 251, 256.
of martyrdom in preference to idola- ' See Bp. Kaye, TertuUian pp. 52,
try; the treatise De Came Christi, 55.
written against those who denied the 2 See Neander, Antignosticus p.
reality of Christ's body; and the 425 seq. (Eng. Tr.).
De Besurrectione Carnis, which con- ' Ibid. p. 426.
tains arguments similar to those of 4 Matt. vii. 7.
Irenseus against those who denied the

252 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, lect. xv.
to be accepted without further seeking (cc. viii-xiv). This
rule of faith he exhibits in the form of a creed, in sub
stance agreeing with that professed by Irenseus, but in
language more nearly approaching to the Roman type,
which received its ultimate form in the Apostles' Creed '
(c. xiii) . After these preliminary remarks Tertullian pro
ceeds to lay down his main proposition, namely, that
heretics should not be admitted by orthodox believers to
any disputation concerning the Scriptures, which they
interpret differently from the Church. This prcescriptio
he maintains on the foUowing grounds : — 1. Because per
verse disputings, especially with heretics, are forbidden
by St. Paul2 (c. xvi). 2. Because the heretics reject or
corrupt Scripture, and therefore no advantage can be
gained by disputing with them (cc. xvii, xviii). 3. Be
cause the faith was committed by Christ to the Apostles
and their successors, and no other teachers should be
sought than those who were instructed in aU truth by
Christ and the Holy Ghost, and who taught no secret
doctrine beyond that which has been handed down by
the Church (cc. xix-xxvi). 4. Because the truth of
the teaching of the Church is proved by its unity
and antiquity, and the error of heresies by their
diversity and novelty (cc. xxvii-xxxi). 5. Because, if
there be any older heresies going back to the Apostolic
age, they have no succession of bishops to preserve their
continuity as a Church (c. xxxii). 6. Because the earliest
heresies were condemned by the Apostles themselves
(cc. xxxiii, xxxiv). He then shows that none of the
above prcescriptio applies to the Catholic Church (cc.
xxxv, xxxvi), and further urges against the heretics that,
1 Cf . Heurtley, Harmonica Symbo- Virg. Velandis, c. 1 .
Ilea p. 14. Another citation of a 2 He refers to 1 Tim. vi. 4, and
creed more nearly approaching to the Titus iii. 10.
exact form is given by Tertullian, De

lect. xv. IRENAiUS, TERTULLIAN. 253
not being Christians, they have no share in the Christian
Scriptures ; that they have perverted and mutilated the
Scriptures ; that their teaching is from the Devil, intro
ducing profane imitations of Christian rites ; that in their
religious services they observe no distinction of orders
and degrees, and show no reverence to their own rulers ;
and finally, that they are guilty of magical practices
(cc. xxxvii-xliii). Lastly, he denounces future judgment
against the heretics and those who unite with them
(c. xliv). It will be observed that Tertullian, like Irenseus, \
appeals to the unity and primitive character of the
Church's teaching as handed down from the Apostles
through their successors the Bishops, and contrasts it with
thevariety and novelty of the Gnostic theories. Yet,
though appealing to the same authority, the two Fathers
do so in a different spirit, according to the diversity of
their own characters. Irenseus, while insisting on the
Church's rule of faith, expresses the conviction that this
rule may be obtained by the sound independent exposition
of Holy Writ, as 'well as by tradition.1 To him it was
something certain in itself, and the two sources of know
ledge proceeded independently, side by side. Tertullian
went further. He made the traditions of the Church a
standard of Scripture exposition, and denied the com
petence of heretics to expound the Scriptures at all, so far
as they did not agree with the Apostolic Church. He
occupies, as Neander has shown, a middle position
between Irenseus and that later development of which
Vincentius Lirinensis is the type.2 It should be observed
however, that in thus appealing to Catholic tradition
rather than to Scripture for the defence of the faith
1 Cf. Irenseus, ii. 27. 1, 2 ; 28. 1. 2 See Neander, Antignostkus
See Beaven's Irenceus, p. 138. p. 44,1.

254 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, lect. xv.
against heretics, Tertullian gives no countenance to any
assertion of the authority of a tradition differing from or
even opposed to Scripture. The question turns on the
origin of the rule of faith, not on the nature of its con
tents. It may be perfectly true, as Tertullian intimates,
that the rule of faith was not originaUy deduced from
Scripture ; nay, it is certain that there must have been an
oral teaching employed by the Apostles and their disciples
before the canonical books were written, and still more
before they were known and received in all the churches ;
and such teaching might be handed down by the Church
independently of Scripture, though agreeing with it. The
controversy of modern times on the respective authority
of Scripture and tradition turns on the question, not
whether there existed an independent and pure tradition
in Tertullian's day, but whether that tradition has been
preserved uncorrupted down to the present time. It
should be observed also that though Tertullian thus ap
peals to the tradition of the Church in dealing with
opponents who, like Marcion, corrupted or rejected the
canonical Scriptures, he constantly .himself appeals to the
Scriptures in his controversies with those who, like
Praxeas, agreed with the Church in accepting them.1 The
treatise against the Valentinians is chiefly taken from the
first book of Irenseus,2 and is valuable as proving the early
existence of the Latin translation of that work which was
manifestly used by Tertullian.3 The five books against
Marcion are the longest and most important of Tertullian's
anti-Gnostic writings. I have already called your atten
tion to some portions of this work in the lecture on the
heresy against which it is directed, and a short survey of
' See Bp. Kaye, Tertullian 3 Massuet, Diss. Preev. in Iren.
pp. 282, 283. ii. § 53.
2 aid. p. 482.

lect. xv. IREN ASUS, TERTULLIAN. 255
its general plan and contents wiU be sufficient to complete
the former incidental notices.1 The first book is devoted
to a refutation, on general grounds, of Marcion's distinc
tion between the Supreme God and the Creator of the
world. This distinction Tertullian, like the author of the
' Clementines,' regards as in fact an assertion of the exist
ence of two Gods, and the greater part of this book is
employed in showing the absurdity of such an assertion.
The definition of God, he urges, involves the idea of
Supreme Power, Eternal Duration, and Self-existence.
The unity of the Deity is the necessary consequence from
this definition, since the supposition of two Supreme
Beings involves a contradiction in terms (cc. iii, iv). Two
Deities in every respect equal are in fact only one Deity ;
nor, if you introduce two, can any satisfactory reason be
assigned why yon may not, with Valentinus, introduce
thirty (c. v). On the other hand, if one of the Deities
is inferior to the other, the superior alone is God; the
other is not properly entitled to the name at all (cc. vi,
vii). Continuing this latter supposition, TertuUian
further argues that it is absurd to suppose that during
the whole time between the Creation and the coming of
Christ, the superior Deity should have remained un
known, while the inferior received the worship of man
kind and manifested his power and godhead in the
works of creation (cc. ix-xii). In answer to the objec
tion that the world is too imperfect to be the work of the
Supreme Being, he replies that Christ Himself has allowed
the things of this world to be employed in His own
sacraments, that the Marcionites themselves are compelled
to use them for sustenance and enjoyment, and that
1 Cf. Kaye's Tertullian, p. 452 teaching, see Neander, Antignosticus
seq., from which the following analysis p. 488 seq. (Eng. Tr.) ; Baur, Die Chr.
is chiefly abridged. Eor other expo- Gnosis p. 471 seq.
sitions of this part of Tertullian's

256 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, lect. xv.
during the whole time that has elapsed since the coming
of Christ, the work of this supposed hostUe power has
been permitted still to exist, and has not been superseded
by a new creation (cc. xiii-xv). Against the supposition
that Christ came to deliver men from the power of the
Demiurge, and to reveal anew God, he urges the long time'
during which the supposed deliverance was delayed, and
that this very revelation, supposed to be made by Christ,
continued itself to be unknown till it was discovered by
Marcion (cc. xvi-xix). He then proceeds to examine
Marcion's argument for the antagonism between the Law
and the Gospel derived from the teaching of St. Paul,
and urges that St. Paul's teaching reaUy proves the very
opposite conclusion to that which Marcion would draw
from it. The whole necessity of St. Paul's argument
arises from the fact that the Law and the Gospel proceed
from the same Author, and the Apostle has to show why
observances which God enjoined at one time were not
equally required at another (cc. xx, xxi). He then ap
peals, as in the prcescriptio, to the authority of the Church
(c. xxii), and finally contends that Marcion's theory does
not even prove what it is intended to establish — the
benevolence of the Supreme God, for that on Marcion's
own showing He permitted all the evils which have taken
place under the rule of the Demiurge, if He did not
directly produce them ; He saves the soul only, not the
body ; His goodness is not such as to abhor and punish
evil, and therefore it is not able to check sinners in their
evil courses ; and does away with the necessity of baptism
for the remission of sins (cc. xxii-xxviii). This leads
some concluding remarks on the Marcionite practice of
refusing baptism to married persons, which he censures
as incompatible with the doctrine of the goodness of God
(c. xxix).

lect. xv. 1RENJEUS, TERTULLIAN. 257
In his second book Tertullian proceeds to show that
the appearances of evil in the world are not inconsistent
with the perfect goodness of its Author. He dweUs on
man's ignorance and inability to judge of the Divine
dispensations (c. i). He appeals to the proofs of the Divine
goodness exhibited in the material world, in the creation
of man, and in the law given to Adam ; the superiority of
man to the other animals being shown by the very fact
that a law was given to him which he was capable of
obeying or disobeying (cc. iii, iv). He maintains that
the freedom of man's will was part of his likeness to his
Maker, and that if he abused that freedom and feU, his
faU does not detract from the goodness of God (cc. v-
x). Having thus shown that God is not the author of
evU, TertuUian proceeds to maintain that the punishment
of sin is not inconsistent with the goodness of God, but
belongs to His justice which is part of His goodness, and
that' God may fitly be moved with anger against sin and
compassion towards suffering, though these passions are
not in Him such as they are in man (cc. xi-xvii). Ter
tuUian then proceeds to answer the objections of Marcion
against particular portions of the Old Testament, such as
the Lex Talionis, the sacrifices and ceremonies of the
Mosaic Law, the spoiling of the Egyptians, the apparent
violation of the Sabbath, the lifting up of the brazen
serpent, the repentance ascribed to God, &c. (cc. xviii-
xxix). The third book is directed to the refutation of
Marcion's opinion that Christ was not sent by the Creator
of the world, but by the Supreme God to counteract the
work of the Creator. He says that Marcion's supposed
Supreme God gave no intimation of the Christ He was
hereafter to send, and that the miracles which Christ
performed would not have sufficed to prove His Divine

258 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, lect. xv.
mission without the corroborative evidence of prophecy.
He concludes therefore, that Christ must have been sent
by the Creator of the world who predicted His coming
through the prophets of the Old Testament (cc. ii, iii).
After some cautions on the interpretation of prophecy,
he then proceeds to show that both the Jews and the
Marcionites erred through not distinguishing between the
two advents of Christ — the one in humiliation, the other
in glory ; and dwells at some length on the absurdities of
the Marcionite doctrine that the body of Christ was a
mere phantom (cc. v-xi). The remainder of the book
consists principaUy of references to various passages in
the Old Testament which prove that Jesus was the Messiah
foretold by the prophets (cc. xii-xxiv).1
The fourth book is designed as a refutation of
Marcion's 'Antitheses,' a work which professed, by
exhibiting supposed points of opposition between the Old
and New Testaments, to show that they could not have
proceeded from the same author. Tertullian allows the
different character and purpose of the two dispensations,
but maintains that this very difference was foretold by the
prophets, and is therefore an argument for, not against,
the unity of authorship (c. i). He then protests against
Marcion's mode of comparing the Law and the Gospel by
means of a garbled revision of St. Luke's Gospel alone,
and by exalting the authority of St. Paul in opposition to
the other Apostles. He maintains that all the Apostles
and all the Evangelists must be alike received, and that
St. Paul's teaching is not opposed to that of the other

1 Much of this portion of the book beginning of the ninth chapter, and
is repeated almost in the same words that the remainder was afterwards
in the tract Adversus Judceos, whence supplied by a later hand from the
TXenncler {Antignosticus r>. 530) conjee- treatise against Marcion. Cf. Bp.
tureg that that tract as originally Kaye, Tertullian p. xix.
written went no further than the

lect. xv. IRENAEUS, TERTULLIAN. 259
Apostles (cc. ii-v). He then enters on an examination of
the special passages in the Gospels, and shows from them
that the things said and done by Christ correspond with
those foretold of the Messiah by the Hebrew prophets,
answering also the various charges of contradiction
between the two Testaments which had been aUeged by
Marcion (cc. vi-xliii).
In the fifth book Tertullian pursues, with reference to St.
Paul's Epistles, the same argument which in the previous
book he had applied to the Gospels. Marcion professed an
exceptional respect for St. Paul, as the only preacher of
true Christianity ; and the object of TertuUian is to prove
that the writings of this Apostle, far from being at
variance, are in perfect unison with the teaching of the Old
Testament (c. i). He proceeds to examine in succession
the ten Epistles whose authority was acknowledged by Mar
cion : first, the Galatians (cc. ii-iv) ; then the two Epistles
to the Corinthians (cc. v-xii) ; then that to the Romans,
which he states to have been grievously mutUated by the
Marcionites (cc. xiii, xiv) ; then the two to the Thessa-
lonians (cc. xv, xvi) ; then the Ephesians, Colossians, and
Philippians (cc. xvii-xx) ; and ends with a remark on the
Epistle to PhUemon, which he says had alone, on account
of its brevity, escaped corruption at the hands of Marcion.
The Epistles to Timothy and Titus are omitted because
Marcion refused to acknowledge them, affecting, as Ter
tullian says, to falsify the number of the Epistles, as well
as their contents (c. xxi).
Of the two theologians whose writings we have
hitherto examined, Irenseus represents for the most part
the calmness and moderation of the judge ; Tertullian, the
vehemence and to some extent the one-sidedness of the
advocate. Both, though occasionally dealing with philo
sophical arguments, are, in the general tone of their
s 2

260 CHRISTIAN OPPONENTS OF GNOSTICISM, lect. xv.
minds, theologians rather than philosophers, and, while
zealous in defending the revealed truth, hardly appreciate
the philosophical positions occupied by their adversaries
who corrupted it. In our next lecture we shall endeavour
to show how this point of view was taken up and contro
verted by the writer who is especially the Christian
phUosopher of this period, Clement of Alexandria.

lect. xvi. CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA, HIPPOLYTUS. 261

LECTURE XVI.
CLEMENT OP ALEXANDRIA — HIPPOLYTUS.
Alexandria, the great centre of intellectual and practical
activity under the Roman empire, the confluence where
the thought of Egypt, Asia, Palestine, and Greece came
together, possessed a Christian catechetical school for the
instruction of converts in the faith, which is said to have
existed from the time of St. Mark.1 About the middle of
the second century it assumed a different character, and
from a school for catechumens became a seminary for
training the clergy and for completing the instruction of
the most highly educated converts.2 The mastership was
held by a succession of eminent men, among whom the
first that can be named with certainty was Pantsenus, a
convert from the Stoic philosophy.3 Pantsenus was suc
ceeded by his disciple Clement, usuaUy called, from the
place of his residence, Clement of Alexandria, though he
was probably a native of Athens.4 Clement was originaUy
a heathen, and it is uncertain at what period of his life he
was converted to Christianity ; 5 but from the compara
tively favourable estimate which, in common with his
1 Hieron. De Viris Elustr. 36. speaks of him as converted to Christi-
Cf. Robertson, History of the Christian anity at a mature age, though he
Church vol. I. p. 87. supposes his conversion to be earlier
2 Bobertson, I. c. than his intercourse with Pantsenus.
3 Euseb. ff. E. v. 10. The latter supposition is doubted by
4 Epiphan. Hcer. xxxii. 6. Cf. Davidson, Art. ' Clement,' in Smith's
Bp. Kaye, Clem. Alex. p. 8. Diet, of Biography.
3 Neander {Ch. Hist. II. p. 453)

262 CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA, lect. xvi.
predecessor Justin Martyr,1 he forms of the Greek phUo
sophy, differing in this respect from the majority of the
Christians of his day, it is probable that, like Justin, he
had studied phUosophy, and learned to estimate its value,
before his acquaintance with the higher truths of Christi-
f anity.2 WhUe Irenseus looks upon phUosophy chiefly as
\ the source of the errors of Gnosticism, whUe TertuUian
{regards it as a corruption proceeding from Satan and
altogether devoid of truth,3 Clement sees in it a gift of
God, imperfect indeed and corrupted by human devices,
but designed by God for the training of the GentUe world,
as an education preparing the Gentiles for the coming of
Christ, as the law was to the Jews.4
The three principal extant works of Clement — the
' Cohortatio ad Grsecos,' the ' Psedagogus,' and the ' Stro-
mateis ' or ' Miscellanies ' — may be regarded as forming a
connected series, since his starting point is the idea that
the Divine Teacher of mankind, the Logos, first conducts
the rude heathen sunk in sin and idolatry to the faith ;
then still further reforms their lives by moral precepts ;
and finally elevates those who have undergone this moral
purification to that profounder knowledge of Divine things
which he calls Gnosis. Thus the Logos appears first as ex
horting sinners to repentance, and converting the heathen
to the faith (TrpoTpewTtKos) ; then as forming the hfe and
conduct of the converted by his discipline (-n-aiSaycoyos) ;
and, finaUy, as a teacher of the true knowledge to those
who are purified.5 The work with which we are princi-
1 In his Apologies, not in the (pro- andrian tradition handed down from
bably spurious) Cohortatio. Cf. Nean- Aristobulus, which maintained thatthe
der, Ch. Hist. II. p. 418. Greek philosophy was in great part
2 Cf. Euseb. Prcep. Evang. ii. 2 ; stolen from the Jewish Scripture,
Neander, Ch. Hist. II. 454. though he allows that some parts may
3 Neander, Ch. Hist. II. p. 236. have been directly given by God : see
4 Strom, i. 5, p. 331 ; vi. 8, p. 771. Strom, i. 17, p. 366. Cf. Kaye, p. 122.
Cf. Bp. Kaye, Clem. Alex. pp. 116, 191. s Strom, iv. 1, 2.
Clement however followed the Alex-

lect. xvi. HIPPOLYTUS. 263
paUy concerned is the 4%TpwfiaTsis, a title which perhaps
may be fairly rendered 'Miscellanies,' the word o-Tpm-
funsiis in its literal signification meaning a patchwork
quUt of various colours. The title is not inappropriate to
the character of the work, which is, as he himself describes
it,1 a misceUaneous collection passing from one subject
to another, to suit the tastes of discursive readers ; the
„ main design however being to bring together a chaotic
assemblage of truth and error out of the Greek philo
sophers andthe systems of the Gnostic sects, in connection
and contrast with portions of the true Gnosis. Availing
himself of the distinction, to which I have adverted in a
former lecture as recognised in the writings of St. Paul,
between the knowledge with which the foUowers of Christ
are enriched by Him,2 and the knowledge falsely so caUed 3
which the Christian teacher is bidden to avoid, Clement
endeavours to wrest from his adversaries the title on which
they prided themselves, and to turn whatever attractions
it possessed to the service of the Church by claiming the
title of Gnostic as properly belonging to the perfect
Christian, and sketching a portrait of the true Gnostic as
contrasted with the false. What he has actually pro
duced however is ' not so much a portraiture of the perfect
Christian as a representation of different portions of the
Gnostic character thrown upon the canvas without order
or connection.' 4 His design seems to have been to form an
ideal sketch of Christian excellence in its highest conceiv
able perfection; to describe the model Christian as he
ought to be, after the manner of the perfectly good man
of Aristotle's Ethics or the imaginary wise man of the
Stoic phUosophy, Christian graces and Divine illumination
being substituted for the sovereign reason of the heathen
1 Cf. Neander, I. c. p. 455,. 3 1 Tim. vi. 20.
2 j Cor. i. 5. ' Bp. Kaye, Clem, Alex. p. 260.

264 CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA, lect. xvi.
philosophers. Like Aristotle, Clement placed the highest
state of the Gnostic soul in contemplation.1 Like the
Stoics, he regarded the perfection of the human character
as consisting in apathy or exemption from passion.2 To
both he added a Christian consummation, the contempla
tion being an intercourse with God to be completely
realised in a future life ; the apathy being a perfect sub
jection to the law of God, extinguishing all struggle
between the flesh and the spirit. Clement's anxiety to
place Christianity in such a light as might conciliate the
favour of the learned heathen caused him to assimUate
the model of Christian as much as possible to that of
phUosophical perfection;3 and like the heathen philo
sophies he has constructed an imaginary man framed on
an d priori hypothesis, rather than a type actuaUy realis
able in human nature. The antagonism of Clement to
the false Gnosticism — that is to say, to the Gnosticism
commonly so called — principaUy relates to two points in
their teaching. 1. Then denial of the free will of man,
and consequent perversion of the moral relation of man to
God. 2. Their condemnation of the material creation,
and consequent hostility to marriage as a means whereby
material existence is multiplied.4
I have before observed that the Gnostic philosophy in
general entirely lost sight of the proper conception of sin
as a voluntary transgression by man of the law of God,
and merged it in the general notion of evU inherent in
the constitution of the universe, to be traced, not to the
fall of man, but to the creation of the world and the
original nature of things. Moral evil in human actions
1 Strom, vii. 10, p. 865 (Potter). 883, 886. Cf. Kaye, p. 251.
Cf. ii. 17, p. 469 ; v. 14, p. 732. See 3 Kaye, p. 261.
Bp. Kaye, Clem. Alex. p. 254. 4 Baur, Dit Christ. Gnosis,
2 Strom, ii. p. 484 ; iv. p. 581 ; p. 489.
vi. 9, 14, p. 775, 776, 797 ; vii. 14, p.

lect. xvi. HIPPOLYTUS. 265
being thus identified with natural evil in the system of
the world, it was perfectly consistent to regard the cha
racters of men, and consequently their moral relations
to God, as determined by the cosmical conditions under
which each man came into existence, not as in any way
connected with his own choice or free will. The Gnostics,
at least the better portion of them, recognised indeed the
distinction between good and evil men ; nay, they prided
themselves especially on the superiority of the Gnostic or
spiritual man over the inferior degrees of men, psychical
or material ; but the pre-eminence was wholly a natural
gift, bestowed upon some men and denied to others by
inevitable necessity, without any choice on their part.1
Against this doctrine of natural necessity, as held by
Basilides and Valentinus, Clement asserts in the strongest
terms the responsibUity and free will of man. ' The
followers of Basilides,' he says, ' suppose that faith is a
natural gift assigned to the elect, which discovers know
ledge without demonstration by inteUectual apprehension.
The disciples of Valentinus, on the other hand, ascribe
faith to us simple persons ; but for themselves, who, by
the superior excellence of their formation, are naturally
destined to be saved, they claim knowledge, which they
say is yet more removed from faith than is the spiritual
from the psychical. The followers of Basilides moreover
maintain that faith and election together are appropriated
to each person according to his grade,2 and that, in conse
quence of the supermundane election, the mundane faith
of every nature is determined, and that correspondent to
the hope of each3 is also his gift of faith. Faith then
is no longer a voluntary right action, if it is a natural
1 See above, Lecture XII on the Die Chr. Gnosis p. 489.
Valentinians. 3 KaT&K\r)\ov ttj iKreiSi, i.e. ap-
2 Kafl' eVao-Tot- Sidorripu, ' nach parently according to the destiny or
jeder Stufe der Geisterwelt,' Baur, expectation allotted to each person.

266 CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA, lect. xvi.
privilege ; nor can he who does not believe be rightly
punished for that which is not his own fault ; as also he
who believes is not the cause of his own belief. Nay, the
whole peculiarity and distinctive character of belief and
unbelief, if we consider rightly, wiU not be amenable to
praise or blame, being predetermined by a natural neces
sity ordained by Almighty power ; and in us, if we are
mere lifeless machines, puUed by our desires as with
strings, volition or compulsion and the impulse which
precedes these are mere superfluities.' 'I cannot,' he
continues, ' conceive a living being whose active prin
ciple is moved necessarily by an external cause. How,
upon this supposition, can he who believes not repent and
receive remission of sins? Baptism is thus no longer
reasonable, nor the blessed seal (of confirmation1), nor the
Son, nor the Father ; but their God becomes nothing more
than a natural distribution of things, not having that
which is the basis of salvation, voluntary faith.'2 In a
later passage he combats the doctrine of natural destina
tion to immortality, together with the Valentinian dis
tinction between the Supreme God and the Demiurge, the
one being the author of the spiritual, the other of the
psychical portion of mankind ; and shows how this theory
limits the saving work of Christ and perverts the true
nature of the redemption.3 And again in another passage
he maintains that if men arrive at the knowledge of God
by nature, as Basilides maintains, faith is not a reasonable
assent of a free soul, but a beauty conferred by immediate
creation ; and that for such persons, being, as Valentinus
says, saved by nature, the commandments are superfluous,
and even the redemption by 'Christ not needed.4 In
1 obSi paKapia ereppayis. This term 2 Strom, ii. 3, p. 433 seq.
sometimes means baptism, sometimes 3 Ibid. iv. 13, p. 603.
confirmation. Here the context seems 4 aid. v, 1, p. 645.
to indicate the latter.

lect. xvi. HIPPOLYTUS. 267
another place Clement maintains that the merit of the
martyr depends upon the fact that he suffers voluntarily,
for the sake of the faith, torments which he might have
avoided by apostasy ; and combats a strange theory of
Basilides, that these sufferings are incurred on account of
sins committed in a former life — a theory which Clement
censures as subversive of the justice of God, and dis
honouring to the faith of the martyr.1 In another place
he combats the pantheistic tendency of the Gnostic theory,
and points out its monstrous consequences in those re
markable words, ' God has no natural relation to us, as
the founders of the heresies assert, whether He formed us
out of nothing or out of matter, since the former has no
existence, and the latter is in every respect different from
God ; unless some one should venture to assert that we
are part of God, and of the same essence with Him ; and
I understand not how he who knows God can bear to hear
such an assertion, when he contemplates our life and the
evils in which we are involved. Were this the case God
would in part sin, if the parts of the whole go to complete
the whole ; but if they do not go towards its completion,
they are not parts. But God, being by His nature rich in
pity, in His goodness watches over , us, who are neither
part of Him nor His children by nature. . . . The riches
of God's mercy are manifested in this : that He caUs to
the adoption of sons those who belong not to Him in
essence or nature, but simply in being the work of His
wUL'2 On the second feature of the Gnostic heresies to which
Clement opposes himself, their contempt and dislike of
the material creation, and especially of the human body,
he expresses himself in general terms in a beautiful
1 Strom, iv. 12, p. 599. Bp. Kaye, Clem. Alex. p. 142. Cf.
2 aid. ii. 16, p. 467, translated by Baur, Die Chr. Gnosis p. 492.

268 CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA, lect. xvi.
passage towards the end of the fourth book. 'Those,'
he says, 'who censure the creation and speak evil of the
body, speak without. reason, for they do not consider that
the structure of man is erect, and fitted for the contem
plation of heaven, and that the organs of sensation contri
bute to the acquisition of knowledge, and that the members
are formed for that which is good, not for pleasure. Hence
the body becomes the habitation of the soul, which is most
precious to God, and is thought worthy of the Holy Spirit
by the sanctification of the soul and body, being perfected
by the perfection of the Saviour.' . . . . ' We admit,' he
continues, ' that the soul is the better part of man, the
body the worse ; but neither is the soul good by nature,
nor the body bad by nature, nor is that which is not good
necessarily bad ; there are things between the two, and
of these some preferred, some rejected.1 As man was
to be placed among sensible objects, he was necessarUy
composed of different, but not opposite parts, a soul and a
body. . . . Basilides speaks of the election as strangers to
the world, being naturaUy above the world. But this is
not so, for all things are of one God ; and no one can by
nature be a stranger to the world, there being but one
essence and one God; but the elect live as strangers,
knowing that aU things are to be possessed, and then laid
aside. They use the three good things of which the
Peripatetics speak ;2 but they use the body as men who
are taking a long journey use the inns on the road —
minding the things of the world as of the place in which
they sojourn, but leaving their habitations and possessions
and the use of them without regret; readily following
Him who withdraws them from life, never looking behind,
1 ko! irporrypeva Kal diconporiypeva. rejecta dicere licebit.'
Cf. Cicero, De Fin. iii. 4. 15, 'proeg- 2 i. e. goods of the' soul, goods of
menis et apoproegmenis . . . quam- the body, and goods external* Cf.
quam hsec quidem prseposita recte et Aristotle, Eth. Nic. i. 8.

lect. xvi. HIPPOLYTUS. 269
giving thanks for the time of their sojourning, but bless
ing their departure, and longing for their mansion in
heaven. . . . The heretical notion that the soul is sent
down from heaven into these lower regions is erroneous.
God ameliorates all things ; and the soul, choosing the
best course of life from God and righteousness, receives
heaven in exchange for earth.' '
The Gnostic hostility to matter and the material body
assumed in some of these schools, though not in all, a
practical direction in relation to marriage ; and to this
question Clement gives a special examination, often
giving, in the latter part of the second book, his own
views on the subject of marriage, which, he says, is
ordained by God and counselled in Scripture, though not
to be entered into rashly^ nor by every one, but with due
regard to time and person and age and circumstances ;
and after mentioning the opinions of some of the ancient
philosophers on this subject, Clement proceeds in the
third book to examine the views of the different schools
of Gnosticism. The Valentinians, he says, approve of
marriage; the followers of Basilides, though preferring
celibacy, aUow marriage in certain cases, while some of
this sect have perverted the teaching of their founders to
licentious conclusions ; the disciples of Carpocrates and
Epiphanes profess communism after the manner of brutes,
and practise open and shameless licentiousness ; the
followers of Marcion condemn marriage out of hostUity
to the Creator and unwillingness to add to His kingdom.2
Clement then proceeds to divide the heretics into two
classes — those who taught the indifference of human
actions, and those who inculcate an overstrained con
tinence through impiety and enmity, to the Creator,
1 Strom, ii. 26, p. 638. See Bp. Die Chr. Gnosis p. 493 seq.
Kaye, Clem. Alex. p. 172. Cf. Baur, s aid. iii. 1-3, p. 508 seq.

270 CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA, lect. xvi.
and argues at considerable length against both, on
grounds drawn partly from natural reason and partly
from Scripture. ' We are at liberty,' he says, ' to marry
or to abstain from marriage ; a life of celibacy is not of
itself better than a married life. They who, in order to
avoid the distraction of a married life, have remained
single, have frequently become misanthropic, and have
failed in charity ; while others, who have married, have
given themselves up to pleasure, and have become like
unto beasts.' ' His concluding advice on the subject is
in the same moderate tone. ' They,' he says, ' who incul
cate continence out of enmity to the Creator, act im
piously, when they might choose celibacy agreeably to
the second rule of piety ; giving thanks for the grace
imparted to them, but not abhorring the creature or
despising those who marry, for the world is the work of a
Creator, as well as celibacy itself; but let both (the married
and single) give thanks forthe state in which they are placed,
if they know for what purpose they are placed in it.' 2
Clement's direct refutation of particular portions of
the Gnostic teaching, as exhibited in the above extracts,
is mainly directed to moral and practical questions. The
general principles of the Gnostic theories he does not
attack directly, but refutes them indirectly by his counter-
sketch of the true Gnostic, or perfect Christian. The
true Gnostic is he 'who unites in himself all Christian
perfections, inteUectual and practical, who combines
knowledge, faith, and love, and therefore is one in his
judgment, truly spiritual, formed into a perfect man, after
the image of the Lord by the Artificer Himself, worthy to
be called brother by the Lord, at once a friend and son of
God.' 3 He is distinguished from the common believer in
1 Strom, iii. 9, p. 541. Cf. Kaye, p. 156.
p. 153. 3 Ibid. iii. 10, p. 542. Cf. Kaye,
2 aid. iii. 18, p. 560. Cf. Kaye, p. 242.

lect. xvi. HIPPOLYTUS. 271
that he acts from love, not from fear of punishment or
hope of reward.1 He has faith in common with all
believers, but his faith is made perfect by knowledge.
His knowledge however, on the other hand, is founded
upon faith ; he must proceed from faith and grow up in
faith, in order that through the grace of God he may
receive knowledge concerning Him as far as it is possible.2
' Faith is a compendious knowledge of things which are of
urgent necessity ; knowledge, a firm and valid demonstra
tion of things received through faith, built upon faith
through the instruction of the Lord, and conducting us on
to an infaUible apprehension. The first saving change is
from heathenism to faith ; the second from faith to know
ledge, which, being perfected in love, renders that which
knows the friend of that which is known.3 The believer
merely tastes the Scriptures; the Gnostic, proceeding
further, is an accurate judge (yv&fuov) of the truth, as in
matters of ordinary life the artificer is superior to the
common man, and can express something better than the
common notions.' *
Yet, however highly Clement may rate the knowledge
which he attributes to his true Gnostic, several features
; ; are worthy of notice by which it is distinguished from that
knowledge claimed for themselves by the Gnostic heretics.
First, it is not a special gift of nature, but a habit pain
fully acquired by preparation and discipline. Secondly,
it is not a mere apprehension of speculative theories, but
a practical principle, embracing action and love. Thirdly,
it is founded on faith ; the matter and substance of its
doctrine is that which is revealed through Christ; its
pre-eminence consists in the manner and certainty of its
1 Strom, iv. 18, 22, pp. 614, 625. 3 Ibid. vii. 10, p. 865. Cf. Kaye,
Cf. Kaye, p. 244. pp. 245-6.
2 Ibid. vii. 10, p. 864. Cf. Kaye, 4 Ibid. vii. 16, p. 891. Cf. Kaye,
p. 245. P- 246-

272 CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA, lect. xvi.
apprehension, not in any new and distinct teaching.
Fourthly, it is a knowledge imparted as far as is possible,1
possessed in this life according to man's capacity to
receive it ; and the limits of that capacity Clement has
pointed out in several remarkable passages. In one
place he says, ' The Divine nature cannot be described as
it really is. The prophets have spoken to us, fettered as
we are by the flesh, according to our ability to receive
their saying, the Lord accommodating Himself to human
weakness for our salvation.' 2 In another he says, ' It is •
manifest that no one during the time of this life can have
a clear apprehension of God. The pure in heart shaU see
God when they shaU have arrived at the last perfection.' 3
In another, describing the purification of the true Gnostic
by the elevation of the soul above the objects of sense, he
says, c If, then, rejecting whatever belongs to bodies and
to things called incorporeal, we cast ourselves into the
greatness of Christ, and go forward with holiness into
immensity, we shall approach to the notion of the
Almighty, knowing not what He is, but what He is not.' 4
And in a fourth passage he expressly declares, ' The first
principle of all things cannot be named ; and if we give it
a name not properly (ov mpieos), caUing it either One, or
the Good, or Intellect, or the Very Existent, or Father, or
God, or Maker, or Lord, we speak not as declaring its
name, but by reason of our deficiency we employ good
names, in order that the reason may be able to rest upon
"these, not wandering around others. For these names are
not severaUy indicative of God, but aU coUectively exhibit
the power of the Almighty ; for the names of things are
given to them either from the properties belonging to
1 Strom, vii. 10, p. 864, xfy'ri too p. 141.
0eou rriv irepl avrov KopieraerBai, as oliv 3 Ibid. v. 1, p. 647.
Te icrnv, yv&aiv. Cf. Kaye, p. 245. 4 Ibid. v. 11, p. 689. Cf. Kaye,
2 Bid. ii. 16, p. 467. Cf. Kaye, p. 184.

lect. xvi. HIPPOLYTUS. 273
them, or from their relation to each other ; but none of
these can be received concerning God.'1
It may be interesting to compare these admissions of
the phUosophical Clement with the cognate language of
the other Catholic opponent of the Gnosticism of the
period. Irenseus says of the Gnostic attempts to explain
the origin of the universe, and to solve problems which
the Scriptures' have left unexplained, ' If we cannot dis
cover explanations of aU those things which are sought
for in the Scriptures, let us not therefore seek after any
other God besides Him who is truly God ; for this is the
greatest impiety. We ought to leave such things to God
who made us, being fuUy assured that the Scriptures are
perfect, being spoken by the Word of God and His Spirit ;
but we in proportion as we are inferior to, and the latest
creation of the Word of God and His Spirit, in that pro
portion are destitute of the knowledge of His mysteries.
And there is no cause to wonder if we are thus circum
stanced with regard to spiritual and heavenly things, and
those which require to be made known by revelation,
since even of those things that are before our feet (I
mean the things in this created world, which are handled
and seen by us and are present to us) there are many
which have escaped our knowledge ; and these, too, we
commit to God.' 2 . . . ' If any one,' he continues, ' should
ask, " What was God doing before He made the world ? "
we reply that the answer to this question rests with God.
That this world was made perfect by God, and had a
beginning in time, the Scriptures tell us ; but no Scrip
ture reveals what God was doing before this. The answer
therefore rests with God, and it is not [fitting] that we
should wish to discover foolish and rash and blasphemous
1 Strom, v. 12. Cf. Uberweg, 2 Irenseus, ii. 28. 2.
Gesch. der Philosophie, II. p. 61. T

274 CLEMENT OF ALEXANDRIA. lect. xvi.
inventions, and, by imagining that we have discovered the
origin of matter, to set aside God Himself who made aU
things.' ¦ A little later he applies the same rule to curious
inquiries concerning the mysteries of the Divine nature :
' If any one should say to us, " How was the Son begotten
of the Father?" we reply that that production, or gene
ration, or nomination, or revelation, or by whatever name
we may call that unspeakable generation, no one knows,
not Valentinus, nor Marcion, nor Saturninus, nor Basi
lides, nor Angels, nor Archangels, nor Principalities, nor
Powers, but only the Father who begat, and the Son who
is begotten.' 2 And in more general terms he concludes :
* Although the spirit of the Saviour that is in Him
searcheth all things, even the deep things of God, yet, as
to us, there are diversities of gifts, diversities of ministra
tions, and diversities of operations, and we on the earth,
as Paul says, know in part and prophesy in part. . . .
But when we seek things which are above us, and which
we are not able to attain, [it is absurd] that we should
aspire to such a height of presumption as to lay open
God and things which are not yet discovered, as if by one
man's talk about emanations we had found out God, the
Maker of all things.' 3 I have quoted in a previous lecture
the strong language in which Tertullian, in his work
against Marcion, dwells on the unsearchableness of God
and the ignorance of man ; and the consensus of the three
writers is the more remarkable when we consider the dif
ference in their natural dispositions and in their modes of
conducting their respective controversies. These writers
represent the first direct collision between a metaphysical
philosophy of the Absolute with its inevitable tendency

1 Irenseus, ii. 28. 3. [decet sup- ' Irenseus, ii. 28. 7.
plied from Grabe's conjecture]. supplied from Massuet's conjecture].
2 aid. § 6.

lect. xvi. HIPPOLYTUS. 275
to Pantheism, and the Christian revelation with its firm
hold on the behef in a personal God ; and the method
which these Fathers inaugurated has been pursued by
their ablest successors in the Catholic Church in subsequent
generations. The fourth Christian writer against heresies to whom
I have referred, Hippolytus, pursues a different method
from the other three. The value of his work is chiefly
historical, in which respect it contains much new and
interesting information. But he does not attempt a
philosophical or theological refutation of the various
heresies which he notices. His principal object is to show
that their doctrines are borrowed from heathen sources ;
and he seems to think that the refutation of these doc
trines is sufficiently accomplished when he has traced
them back to this unchristian origin, and shown that
theories which the heretics put forth as of Divine inspiration
are reaUy stolen from the inventions of heathen men.1
His theological controversy with the heretics is limited to
an exposition, by way of contrast, of the true doctrine
concerning God the Creator of aU things; concerning the
Logos by whom the world was made, and who became
man ; and concerning the free wiU and future destiny of
men. The last portion is not completed in the work as it
has come down to us, which ends abruptly in the middle
of a sentence. 1 Hippolytus, Ref. Hcer. ix. 31.

T 2

INDEX.

ABE
ABEL, evil spirit of the Cainites,
p. 101
Abraham, said to have written Book
of Creation, 38
Abrasax or Abraxas, 153
Absolute Existence, problem of, 11, 16
Achamoth, 169, 184 &ff.
Adam identified with Christ, 237
Adam Kadmon of the Zohar, 37; in
theory of Simon Magus, 87
Adamites, 122
-Sons, 178 ; how used in N.T. 61
& ff- i ^7 Valentinus and Simon
Magus, 62 ; in Valentinian theory,
168, 171 ; same as Boots of Simon
Magus, 86 ; same as Diathesis of
Ptolemseus, 173
Ahriman, Zoroastrian evil spirit, 26
Akiba, Babbi, traditional author of
Book of Creation, 38
Alcibiades of Apamea, 234
Alexander the Valentinian, 197
Alexander and Hymenseus in N. T., 57
Alexandria, school of, 261
Amshaspands, the six, of the Zoroas
trian system, 26
Anaxagoras, 4, 21 ; borrowed from by
Basilides, 149
Angels of Valentinus, 181
Announcement, the Great, of Simon
Magus, 88 &ff.
Annubion, 226
Antichrist, Irenseus on the name of,
249
Antitactse, 123
Antithesis of Marcion, 209 & ff._
Apocalypse, see John, Eevelation of
Saint

BAS
Appion, 226
Archelaus, bp. of Caschar, 159
Archon, first of Basilides, 152, 155 ;
second do. 154, 155
Aristotle on the ' Existence of Evil,'
22 ; use of word ' wisdom,' 1
Asceticism of Saturninus, 134
Athenodorus, 226
Aquila, 225, 226, 227
Augustine and Valentinianism, 183

BALAAM and the Nicolaitans, 73
Baptism, for the dead, 116; a
Gnostic initiatory rite, 41 ; Marcion's
rite, 217
Barbelists, 242
Barcabbas, 164
Barcoph, 164
Bardesanes, 139, 197 ; his teaching,
139, 140 ; his hymns, 141
Baruch, Gnostic book of, 1 02
Basilides, 144; dateof,-145; teaching
of, destroys free-will, 14; relation
to the Kabbala, 42 ; seed of ¦ the
world, 148 ; threefold sonship, 150 ;
account of Creation, 151 ; Ogdoad
and first Archon, 152 ; Hebdomad,
152, 154; theory of Bedemption,
154; second Archon, 154, 155;
illumination of the universe, 156 ;
accepts history of the Gospels, 157 ;
not Docetic, ib. ; not dualistic, ib. ;
his theory externally allegorical,
159 ; internally pantheistic, ib. ;
emanations, 160 ; relation to Plato,
161 ; relation to the Pythagoreans,

278

INDEX.

BAU
162; Caulacau, ib. ; no idea of Pro
vidence or free-will, 165; source of
his teaching, 146 ; first principle,
a non-existent deity, ib. ; a non
existent world, 148; borrows from
St. John, 150
Baur, classification of Gnostic sects by,
46 ; quotes Irenseus unfairly against
St. John, 177
Beghards, or Brethren of the Free
Spirit, 122
Bisexual principle of Simon Magus,
89 ; of the Naassenes, 97
Buddhist doctrine of Annihilation, 30
Bunsen, view of Simon Magus, 83, 91
Burton, estimate of Simon Magus, 9 1

CAIN and the Cainites, 100, 101
Caius, presbyter of Bome, gives
an account of Cerinthus, 114
Carpocrates, 117 & ff. I on Person of
Christ, 117 ; licentiousness of his
teaching, 120; relation to Cerin
thus, 119; his son Epiphanes, 121
Carpocratians adopt title Gnostic, 7,
117; their teaching on the Eesur-
rection, 59 ; their treatment of the
Gospel, 121
Caulacau, 163
Celbes, 102
Cerdon, 203
Cerinthus, 112 & ff. ; his relation to
St. John, 14, 74, 75; to St. Paul,
53; to Philo, 75, 114; to Carpo
crates, 119; his teaching, 74; re
futed by Gospel of St. John, 116 ;
germs of his teaching opposed in
Ep. to Col. 53 ; his Christology,
115; said to have forged the Apoca
lypse, 114; the precursor of the
Nazarenes and Ebionites, 123
Christ, Person and work of, recog
nised by Gnosticism, 5 ; errors in
relation to Person of, 110
Christian elememt in Gnosticism,
220
Christology of Cerinthus, 115; of
Clem. Horn. 237 ; of Sethites, 102
Cipher, supposed derivation of, 37
Clement of Alexandria, his date, 8 ;
contrasts true and false Gnosticism,
8, 9 ; his charges against Basilides
and Valentinus, 14, 160; his tra-
ditjon about Ep. to the Hebrews,
61 ; places Apocalypse before Gos
pel of St. John, 71 ; identifies Ni-

DUA
colas the Deacon as founder of the
Nicolaitans, 72 ; his account of
Epiphanes and his book ' On Jus
tice,' 121; the Antitactse, 123;
Tatian, 137, &c. ; Basilides, 145,
&c. ; preserves fragments of writ
ings of Valentinus, 200 ; his posi
tion, 261 ; a philosopher, 262 ; his
writings, 262 & ff.
Clement of Borne, said to have been
ordained by St. Peter, 221 ; his
letter to St. James in the Clem. Horn.
223
Clementine Homilies, 221 ; their ex
ternal history, 233 ; their Christo
logy, 237
Colarbasus, 197
Colossians, Ep. to, alludes to Gnosti
cism, 53
Conception, see Ennoia
Confirmation, 266
Constitutions, Apostolical, 93
Corinth., Epp. to, contain first allu
sions to Gnosticism in N.T., 48
Creed of Tertullian, 252

DARKNESS, Persian evil principle,
87
Decad of Valentinus, 174, 175
Democritus, 21
Demiurge, lower in Gnostic systems
than in Philo, 19 ; of Ophites, 99;
of Valentinus, 186, 190; of Mar
cion, 209, 210, 214 &ff.
'Depth' of Valentinus, 169, 173
Devil of Valentinus, 190
Diathesis, iEons so called by Ptole
mseus, 173
Dionysius, Bp. of Alexandria, his
account of Cerinthus, 114
Docetism, 58, 111; germs of, derived
from India, 32 ; in teaching of Si
mon Magus, 85 ; in teaching of
Marcion, 214 ; the earliest form of
Gnosticism, 127; referred to in Ep.
to Ephes. 55 ; in Ep. to Heb. 60 ;
opposed by St. John, 76
Dodecad of Valentinus, 175, 176
Dogma and Christianity, 78
Dorner, estimate of Simon Magus, 91
Dositheus and Simon Magus, 85
Draco, the constellation, 99
Dualism, characteristic of the Syrian
Gnosis, 142

INDEX.

27a

EBI
EBION the heretic, a myth, 124
Ebionism,58, 111
Ebionites, 123, 124, 236 ; precursors
of, at Corinth, 50
Ebionite Gospel, 126
Egyptian Gnosis, 144
Eleatics, 3, 21
Elkesaites, 236
Elxai or Elchesai, 234
Empedocles, 5, 21
Encratites, 136, 142
Ennoia of Simon Magus, 82; of
Ophites, 98
En Soph in the Zohar, 36
Ephesians, Epistle to, alludes to
Gnosticism, 51 & ff. ; on the In
carnation, 55
'Ephesian Letters,' 51 &/.
Ephraim, St., his hymn's superseded
by those of Bardesanes, 142
EpipTianes, son of Carpocrates, 121.
Epiphanius, account of the Ophites,
98-100 ; his date of the Apocalypse,
71 ; account of Cerinthus, 112 &jf. ;
baptism for the dead, 116; Satur
ninus, 132 & ff. ; Bardesanes, 138
& ff. ; the Encratites, 142 ; Basil
ides, 144 Sa ff. ; Valentinus and the
Valentinians, 166 & ff. ; Marcion,
204, 216 & ff. ; Elxai, 234 & ff. ;
Ebionites and Elkesaites, 234 & ff.
Esau, a hero, 100
Essenes, 65, 234
Euphrates, one of the founders of the
Peratse, 102
Eusebius, account of Polycarp and
Marcion, 14; date of Apocalypse,
71; of Carpocrates, 118; the
Cainites, 120 ; Jewish Bishops of
Jerusalem, 125 ; Saturninus and
Basilides, 129 & ff.; Bardesanes,
138 &#!, 197; account of Irenseus,
239 &/.
Evil, Origin of, 11, 18 ; no longer sin,
12; in Greek philosophy, 20, 24;-
in Eastern philosophies, 24

FALL, the, in the Ophite theories,
99
Paustus, story of, in Clem. Horn. 228.
Pire, the primary principle of Simon
Magus, 86 &/.
Eire-worship, the meaning of, 87
Plora, letter of Ptolemseus to, 197
Franck, on the Kabbala and Gnosti
cism, 42

HEL
Free-will destroyed by Gnosticism, 12,
&e.

n ENTILE Bishops of Jerusalem,
IT 126
Gieseler, classification of Gnostic
sects, 45
Glaucias, teacher of Basilides, 146
Gnosis, meaning of term in Plato, 1 ;
in LXX, and N. T. 6, 7 ; in Clem.
Alex. 262 ; first used in a depre
ciatory sense, 49; Syrian, 142;
Egyptian 144
Gnostes, use of, in LXX, 6
Gnostic, first used, 7, 105, 117; esti
mate of Christianity, 9 ; taught a,
twofold religion, 10 ; acknowledge
Christ as a Bedeemer, 18 ; list of,
given by Irenseus, 242 ; classification
of sects by Mosheim, 44 ; Gieseler,
45 ; Neander, ib. ; Baur, 46 ; Mat
ter, ib.
Gnosticism, distinctive title of Chris
tian heretics, 3 ; characteristics of
in time of St. Paul, 8, 53 ; of Clem.
Alex. 8, 265, 267, 269; regarded
as Antichristian by St. John, 13 ;
and early Fathers, 13; two schools
of, 20 ; sources of, 31, 32 ; its rela
tion to Materialism, 14 ; alluded to
in N. T., 6, 48 & ff. '.; prophecies
of in N. T. 64; earliest form of,
Docetic, 127
God, Personality of, destroyed by
Gnostics, 12
God of the Jews, his position in the
Gnostic theories, 19
Gospels, effect of the Synoptic, 127 &/.
Greek philosophy, idea of evil, 3 ; of
Bedemption, 20

HAM, Sethite account of, 101
Harmonius, 141
Heathen Mythologies and the Ophites,
104
Hebdomad of Basilides, 152, 154
Hebrews, Gospel of, 126
Hebrews, Epistle to, date and author,
59 & ff ; to whom addressed, 61 ;
allusions to Gnosticism, 60
Hegel, 147, 165; similarity to the
Kabbala, 35 ; to the Ophite theo
ries 107
Helena, see Simon Magus

280

INDEX.

HEE
Heracleon, 197 ; first commentator on
the Gospel of St. John, 199
Heraclitus, 3 ; and Simon Magus, 87
Hippolytus, account of title Gnostic,
7 ; -iEons first used by Valentinus,
62 ; Nicolas and , the Nicolaitans,
72 ; Ophites, 73, 95 & ff. ; Gospel
of St. John, 74 ; Simon Magus, 83 ;
the ' Great Announcement,' 85 &
ff. ; analogy between Simon and
Heraclitus, 87 ; Peratse, 99 ; the
Ophite Jesus, 110; Cerinthus, 110
8c ff. ; Ebionites, 123; Saturninus,
129 ; Basilides, 146 & ff; Valen
tinus, 170 & ff. ; Elchesai, 231 ;
the book of Elchesai, 234 ; his date,
235 ; his own writings, 275
Horus of Valentinus, 169, 180
Hydroparastatae, 137
Hyginus, Bishop of Borne, 203
Hymenseus, 51, 57, 111

TALDABOTH, 98
X Incarnation, the, and Gnosticism,
55, 58
Indian Eeligion, 29 ; Emanation
theory of origin of evil, 24 ; rela
tion to Gnosticism, 29
Innatum, meaning of, 132
Intellect, male principle of Simon
Magus, 88
Ionian, philosophy, 3, 20
Irenseus, account of St. John and Ce
rinthus, 13 ; description of Simon
Magus and his teaching, 40; says
Simon used Hebrew words at Bap
tism, 42 ; date of Apocalypse, 71 ;
Nicolas and the Nicolaitans, 72 ;
Gospel of St. John, 74 ; account
of Simon Magus, &2&ff.; Ophites,
97 & ff. ; Cerinthus, 110 & ff.;
title Gnostic, 118 ; Carpocrates, 118
& ff. ; Carpocratians and Gospel,
122 ; Ebionites, 123 ; Ebionite
Gospel of St. Matthew, 126 ; Satur
ninus, 129; says, Basilides is Do
cetic, 157 ; Valentinus, 166 & ff.;
Marcion, 203 & ff. ; his own wri
tings, 239 & ff. ; list of Gnostics,
242; the 'Presbyter' of, 247

JAMES, St., speech of in Clem.
Horn. 223
Jerome, date of Apocalypse, 71 ; his
date of Basilides, 145

MAN
Jerusalem, Bishops of, 126
Jesus of the Valentinians, 181
John, St. and Cerinthus, 14, 75 ; the
Eevelation, 71, &ff., 96, 105 &/.;
date, 71 ; said to have been forged
by Cerinthus, 114 ; Gospel, 74 &
ff. ; opposed to Gnosticism, 74 ; re
futes Cerinthus, 116; borrowed
from by Basilides, 150; by Valen
tinus, 177 ; earliest commentary
on, 199; Epistles opposed to Doce
tism, 76
Judas Iscariot in Cainite theory, 101 ;
Gospel of, 101
Jude, St., Epistle of, date, 61 & jf.;
relation to 2nd Epistle of St. Peter,
69
' Just ' and ' Justice ' in Marcion,
meaning of, 210
Justin the Gnostic, 102
Justin Martyr, his account of Simon
Magus, 82 Scff.

"T7ABBALA, meaning of the word,
-LY. 33 ; the Jewish metaphysics, 33 ;
similarity to Spinoza and Hegel, 35;
its teaching, 35 & ff. ; date and
author, 38 and/. ; relation to Gnos
ticism, ib. ; to Persian philosophy,
39 ; to Simon Magus, 40, 87 ; to
Basilides and Valentinus, 42 ; to
Ophite theory, 97 ; possibly alluded
to by St. Paul, 56, 57
Korah, a Cainite hero, 100

LAEDNEB doubts existence of
Cainites, 100
' Laws of Countries,' Book of the, 141
Leucippus, 21
Light, the Persian good principle, 87
Logos, a designation of Christ, 75 ;
in Philo, 17; Simon Magus identi
fies with himself, 81 &/.; Ophites
identify with serpent, 99 ; in Valen
tinian theory, 171, 181
Luke, St., Gospel of, mutilated by
Marcion, 206 &/.

MAN, personality of, destroyed by
Gnosticism, 12 ; spiritual in
Kabbala, 37; in Ophite theories, 97;
ideal of Valentinus, 172 & ff;
three classes of, in Valentinian
theory, 191 ; creation of, ib.

INDEX.

281

MAR
Marcion, 203 & ff. ; and Polycarp, 14 ;
prohibits marriage, 65 ; refuted by
Bardesanes, 139; higher criticism,
206, &c. ; his canon, ib. ; Antithesis,
209; Demiurge, 209, &c. ; two
Bedeemers, 214; Docetic, ib. ; Pa-
tripassian, 216; his Baptism, 217;
meaning of his phrase 'just,' 210;
how treated by Tertullian, 211
Marcosians, 198 ; initiatory rites, 41 ;
refuted by Irenseus, 242
Marcus, 197, 198
Materialism and Gnosticism, 14
Matter's classification of Gnostic sects,
46
Matthew, St., Ebionite Gospel of,
126
Matthias, St., Basilides' account of
secret teaching given to, 146
Menander, 90, 93 & /. ; professes to
be a Christ, 130 ; common points
with Saturninus, 129 ; parent of
Syrian and Egyptian Gnosticism,
ib.
Menandrians soon extinct, 94
Monogenes of Valentinus. See Nous.
Mosaic account of Creation and Fall,
resemblance of Persian Cosmogony
to, 27
Moses de Leon, reputed by some to
be the author of Zohar, 39
Mosheim, classification of Gnostic
sects, 44 ; estimate of Simon Magus,
91

NAASSENES, 96 &/. ; assume title
Gnostic, 105 ; quote St. Paul,
ib.
Nazarenes, 124
Neander on Gnosticism, 10 ; on rela
tion of God to the Demiurge, 135 ;
classification of Gnostic sects, 45 ;
estimate of Simon Magus, 91
Neoplatonism of Plotinus, 147; of
Proclus, ib.
New Testament, first allusions to
Gnosticism, 48.
Nicetas, 225 &#.
Nicolaitans, germ of heresy dis
cerned by St. Paul, 66 ; referred
to by St. John, 72 ; by St. Jude, 70 -
Nicolas, 72
Noah, the Sethite spiritual man, 101
Noetus, 217
Non-existent principle and world of
Basilides, 146 &ff., 161

PET
Nous of Valentinus, 170, 175, 177,
181

OGDOAD of Basilides, 152; of Va
lentinus, 170
Old Testament, Marcion's treatment
of, 209 & J.
Ophites, 95 & ff. ; date 104 & ff.; of
Jewish origin, 103; first assume
title Gnostic, 7; alluded to in
Apocalypse, 73; their Trinity, 98;
Ennoia, ib. ; idea of Bedemption,.
103; relation of their system to
pantheism, 107
Origen on the commentary of Hera-
clion, 199
Ormuzd, the good spirit of Zoroaster,
26
Ossenes, 234

PANT^NUS, 261
Pantheism and Ophite theory,
107
Paradise of Ophites, 99
Parchor, 164
Parsism and Ophite theory, 104
Passions, human, in theory of Basi
lides, 158
Patripassianism of Marcion, 216
Paul, St., use of Gnosis, 6 & /. ;
combats Gnosticism, 8, 9, 54 ; en
counter with Simon Magus, 92 ;
quoted by Naassenes, 105; by Va
lentinians, 182; attacked by Clem.
Horn. 228 ; his Epp. in the Canon
of Marcion, 206
Pella, Church at, 125
Peratse, 96, 102
Peripatetics, 4
Persian religion, dualistic, 24 ; cos
mogony resembles Mosaic narrative,
27 ; contrast to Indian, 29 ; influ
ence on the Kabbala, 39 ; on Simon
Magus, 87 ; on Syrian Gnosticism,
133 ; its sacred books destroyed by
Alexander, 28
Person of Christ, errors in relation to,
110
Personality of God and man destroyed
by Gnosticism, 12
Peter, St., use of Gnosis, 6 ; alludes
to the Gnostic usage of St. Paul's
Epp. 59 ; prophecies of Gnosticism,
66 & ff. ; relation of 2nd Ep. to Ep.
of St. Jude, 69 ; meeting with

282

INDEX.

PHI
Simon Magus, 92, 95 ; Ep. to James
in Clem. Horn. 223 ; said by Clem.
Horn, to have administered the
Eucharist with bread and salt, 237
Philetus, 51, 57, 111
Philo, embodies germs of Gnosticism,
2; Logos and Divine powers, 17,
18; interpretation of Old Testa
ment, 16
Philosophy, Greek. See Greek
Pistis Sophia, 200
Plato, use of Gnosis, 1; problem of
the Absolute, 16; of the origin of
evil, 21 ; relation to Philo, 16, &c. ;
to Basilides, 161
Pleroma, 178, 179; meaning of, inN.
T., 51, 55
Plotinus, 147
Polycarp and Marcion, 14; anecdote
about Cerinthus, 112
Power, one of the titles claimed by
Simon Magus, 80
'Powers,' Divine, of Philo, 17
Prsescriptio, meaning of, in Tertullian,
251
Praxeas, 217
Prodicus, 122
Prunikos of Ophites, 98 ; meaning of,
106
Ptolemseus, 177; letter to Flora, 197
Pythagoreans, 21

"DEDEEMEB, Gnostic, higher than
XI Creator, 19
Redemption, distinctive feature of
Gnostic philosophy, 3, 5 ; Gnostic
idea of, 18 ; in Ophite theory, 103 ;
in theory of Basilides, 154; of
Valentinus, 179
Resurrection, the, and Gnosticism, 50,
58 & J.
Eevelation. See St. John.
Romans, Ep. to, possibly refers to
Gnosticism, 51
Borne, Bp. of, subordinate to Bp. of
Jerusalem in Clem. Horn. 233
' Eoots ' of Simon Magus, 86, 178

SALT, held sacred by Elxai, 237 ;
used for Eucharist by St. Peter
in Clem. Horn., ib.
Samaritan estimate of Simon and
Helena, 91
Sampsaeans, 236
Satan, depths of, 73

STE
Saturninus, summary of doctrine given
by Irenseus, 131 ; his Cosmogony,
130 ; his Christology, 131 ; relation
to Menander, 129; borrows from
Persian philosophy, 133 ; asceticism,
134 ; prohibits marriage, 65, 134
Schelling, 147
Secundus, 197
Seed of the World in Basilides' sys
tem, 148
Sephir Yetzirah, 35 ; date and au
thor, 38 &/.
Sephiroth in the Zohar, 36, 37
Serpent, veneration of, 96 ; various
doctrines of, 99 & /. ; the Brazen,
99
Seth, Christ of the Sethites, 102
Sethites, 96, 101
Shelley, 4
Sichem, see Sychar
Silence, primary power of Simon Ma
gus, 86, 88; of Valentinus, 170,
173
Simon ben Jochai, traditional author
of Zohar, 38
Simon Magus, 91 & ff. ; and Dositheus,
85 ; relation to the Kabbala, 40,
87 ; to Heraclitus, 87 ; a Samari
tan, 79 & ff. ; sources of his teach
ing, 80 & ff., 84 ; a false Christ,
81, 82, 90; Ennoia, 82; Roots, 86,
87 ; ' Great Announcement,' 85, 88 ;
primary principle, Fire or Silence,
86, 88 ; male and female principles,
88 ; bisexual power, 89 ; regarded
as God by Samaritans, 91 ; Docetic,
85 ; his Cosmogony, 54 ; account of
him by Irenseus and Just. Mart.
82 & ff. ; his doctrine explained by
Bunsen, 83; different estimates of,
91 ; accounts of his death, 92 & /. ;
perhaps alluded to in N.T. 66 ; ac
count of him in Clem. Horn. 225 ;
uniting with St. Peter, 95 ; his po
sition among Gnostic heretics, 95 ;
supposed statue to, 91 &/.
Simonians and the Besurrection, 59
Sophia Achamoth, 169, 180, 184 &Jf! ;
among Ophites, 98 ; Prunikos, 106 ;
among Sethites, 101
Spinoza and the Kabbala, 35
Stoics, the, 4, 23
Sychar, possibly city where Philip
preached, 79
Syrian Gnosis, dualistic, 142

INDEX.

283

TAT
TATIAN, 136
Tertullian, his heretic Ebion, 125;
makes Basilides Docetic, 157 : his
accounts of Valentinus, 166, &c. ;
of Marcion, 203, &c. ; use of tra
dition, 253 ; contrast with Irenseus,
250, 260 ; his use of ' Prsescriptio,'
251 ; his writings, 251 & /.
Tetrads of Valentinus, 171
Theodotus, 197
Theodotion's translation of O.T., 240
Therapeutse, 31 & /".
Thought, female principle of Simon
Magus, 89
Timothy, Epp. to, allude to Gnosticism,
56, 64, 66 ; their date, 56
Titus, Ep. to, combats Gnosticism, 57

TTNSPEAKABLE, the, of Valen-
U tinus, 170

VALENTINUS, 166; relation to
the Kabbala, 42, 201 ; iEons,
62, 86, 178; Pleroma, 178; two

. ZOE
Christs, 181 ; borrows from St.
John, 177 ; and St. Paul, 181 ; Og
doad, 170 ; Orders of JEons, 171 ;
Tetrads, ib. ; ideal man, 173; De
cad, 174 & /. ; Dodecad, 176 ; idea
of Redemption, 179, 184 & ff. ;
three classes of men, 191 ; Christo
logy, 192 & ff.; philosophy, 194
& ff. ; his theory pantheistic, 201 ;
refuted by Irenseus, 167, 242; re
lation to Augustine, 183; charged
by Clem. Alex, with destroying
free-will, 14

'TTTTSDOM'ofGod, 168

ZACCILEUS said to be Bp. of
Csesarea by Clem. Horn. 227
Zohar, 35, 36 ; author and date, 38,
39
Zoroaster, date, 25 ; his system, 26 ;
influenced by Judaism, 28

INDEX

PASSAGES IN THE OLD TESTAMENT AND LXX.

Genesis page
1. 3 . . . . 137, 148
1.26  131
Numbers
XXV. 1, 2 . . . .72
XXXI. 16 ... 72
1 Samuel
XXVIII. 3, 9 (LXX.) . . 6
2 Kings,
XXI. 6 (LXX.) ... 6
Job
XXVHI. . . . .168
Psalms
CXVIIL (CXIX.) 66 (LXX.) 6
XXIH. (XXIV.) 1 (LXX.) . 179
Proverbs
VIH  168
VIII. 12 (LXX.) . . 6
LX. 1 . . . . 184, 169
XXX. 3 (Vat. XXIV. 26), (LXX.) 6

Ecclesiastes

1.1-10 .
H. 26 (LXX.) .
XXIV. 1-18 .

PAGE 168 6
168

Isaiah

VH. 14
XI. 2 (LXX.) .
XXVHI. 10 .
XL. 13, 14

. 245 6
. 163
212

XII. 3

I. 10, 11

Daniel

Malachi

35

246

Wisdom (LXX.)

11.13

6

VII. 17 . .

6

VII. 22-30

168

VIII. 1-9 .

. 168

IX. 9-11

168

X. 10 .

6

XIV. 22 . . .

6

Eccxesiasticus (LXX.)
XXXVI. 17 . . . 88, 178

INDEX

PASSAGES IN THE NEW TESTAMENT

ALLUDED TO OE EXPLAINED.

St. Matthkw

Acts — continued.

¦ * <-

PAGE

*

PAGE

VH. 7- . . .

251

XV. 2 • . • . • . •

. • 112

XII. 48

. 215

XVI. 6 . ...

. 105

XVIH. 23
105
St. Luke
XLX. 19
XXI. 28 .
. 51
112
1.77. . .
6
XXIV. 5
. 124
III. 1 .
207, 215
IV. 31
207, 215
VII. 21-35 .
. 207
EoMANS
XIII. 28 .
207
II. 16
206
XIH. 29
. 207
III. 20 .
121, 211
XVI. 17 . . .
207
V. 14 ...
155
.
V. 20 .
. 211
St. John
VI. 4 ...
59
vn: 12 - . • .
. 211
I. 3 .
. 74
VIII. 3 . . .
211
I. 9 .
148
VIII. 19, 22 .
. 155
I. 14 .
. 74
VIII. 33 .
155
IV. 5
79
XI. 33- . • .
. 213
IV. 25 .
. 81
XI. 36
181
VII. 48, 49
124
XVI. 17-19 .
. 51
XIV. 6 .
. 178
XVI. 25 .
206
XIX. 26 . . .
102
XIX. 35
. 77
XX. 31 .
116
1 Corinthians
XXI. 1&#.
. 110
I. 2 ...
. 51
I. 5 
6, 263
Acts
II. 6 ...
. 51
11.11 .' .' .
213
VIII. 5, 9, 10 .
. 79, 80
II. 14, 15
10
VIII. 10
. 41
III. 16
48
INDEX.

287

1 Corinthians—

VI. 15 .
VIII. 1 .
VIII. 2
XII. 8 .
Xin. 8, 10
XV. XV. 22 .
XV. 29 .
XV. 50

PAGE
. 248
7, 49, 72
. 49 6
. 50
50, 248
. 137 117
. 248

IV. 6
X. 5
XI. 6
XII. 9

2 Corinthians

1.4 .
n. 2
n. 8 .
ni. 24

I. 10.
1.21 1.23.II. 2
IU. 19
IV. 13
IV. 14
VI. 21

ni. 18
IV. 3

I. 16, 17
I. 18, 19
II. 6-9
II. 8

Galatians

Ephesians

Philippians

COLOSSIANS

6 6
50
247

62
112
246 211

181, 249
. 156 52
. 6151
. 52 52
. 53

6
221

54 55

54

Colossians — continued.

II. 9  55, 181
II. 12  59
II. 18 . • ¦ • 54
II. 20-23 .... 55

III. 3-5
IV. 7 .

1 Thessalonians

IV. 9
V. 23

PAGE 5553

9
248

1 Timothy

1.4 .
1.17 .
I. 19, 20
IV. 1 .
IV. 1-3
VI. 4 .
VI. 20

II. 16-18
II. 18
III. 1 .
HI. 1-7

2 Timothy

56
. 178 57
. 70 64
. 252
7, 56, 263

. 57 59
. 70
65, 66

Titus

I. 14
III. 9
III. 10

Hebrews

I. 1, 2
1.2
II. 14, 16, 17
XI. 3 .

5757
252

60
. 62
60, 61

2 St. Peter

1.5,6 II. 1 .
n. i, 2
n. io, 12
n. 13, is
II. 15 .
II. 18, 19
III. 2 .
III. 3
III. 16 .
HI. 18

67 676771 67 7069 59 6

288

INDEX.

1 St. John

I. 1-3
II. 22
IV. 1-3
IV. 2
IV. 3
IV. 15
V. 6

2 St. John

page
. 76
14, 77, 78
. 76
112
. 7877
. 77

77

4 .
11 .
17, 18

St. Jude

Revelation

71 70

U. 6  72,73
II. 14  71
II. 14, 15 . . . . 72
II. 15  72
II. 24 73. 96, 105
XII. 9  106

LONDON : PRINTED BT
SPOTTISWOODB AND CO., NEW-STREET SQUARE
AND PARLIAMENT STREET

Albemarle Street,
July, 1874.

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF
FORTHCOMING WORKS.

The Last Journals of David Livingstone.
Including his "Wanderings and Discoveries in Eastern Africa,
from 1865 to within a Few Days of his Death.
"With a Map prepared on the spot by the Author, and Illustrations. 8vo.

The Speaker's Commentary on the Bible.
Bt BISHOPS and CLERGY of the ANGLICAN CHURCH.
"EDITED BY F. C. COOK, M.A., CANON OF EXETER.
VOL. V.— THE FOUR GREAT PROPHETS.
Isaiah W. Kay, D.D., Kector of Great Leighs.
Jeremiah K. Payne Smith, D.D., Dean of Canterbury.
Ezekiel G. Currey, D.D., Master of tlie Charterhouse.
Daxiel H. J. Rose, B.D., late Hector of Houghton Conquest.
Medium 8vo.

Memoir of Sir Roderick I. Murchison.
Based upon his Journals and Letters.
With Notices of his Scientific Contemporaries, and a Sketch of the Eise and
Progress, for Half a Century, of Paleozoic Geology in Britain.
BY ARCHIBALD GEIKIE, LL.D., F.R.S.,
Murchison-Profeseor of Geology and Mineralogy in the University of Edinburgh, and
Director of the Geological Survey of bcotland.
"With Portraits, &c. 2 vols. 8vo.

MR, MURRAY'S LIST OF FORTHCOMING WORKS.

Troy and its Remains.
RESEARCHES AND DISCOVERIES— THE RESULT OF EXCAVATIONS IN"
THE TROJAN PLAIN.
BY HENRY SCHLIEMANN, LL.D.
Translated from the German with the Author's Sanction.
Illustrated from Photographs, with Maps ; Views, Objects Composing tee Treasure
of Priam; Plans, &c. 8vo.

The Ecclesiastical and
Secular Architecture of Scotland
THE ABBEYS, CHURCHES, CASTLES, AND MANSIONS.
BY THOMAS ARNOLD, ARCHITECT, M.R.I.B.A.
With numerous Illustrations, Plans, Views, &c. Medium 8vo.
Uniform with ' ' Fergusson's History of Architecture. "

The Sonnet ;
ITS STRUCTURE AND PLACE IN POETRY:
With Original Translations from Petrarch.
BY CHARLES TOMLINSON, F.R.S.
Post 8vo.

A History of Ancient Egypt.
DERIVED PROM MONUMENTS AND INSCRIPTIONS.
BY PROFESSOR BRUGSCH, OF GOTTINGEN.
An entirely New Edition, in great part rewritten.
TRANSLATED BY H. DANBY SEYMOUR, ESQ.
Svo.

The Nicene and Apostles' Creeds.
THEIR LITERARY HISTORY; TOGETHER WITH SOME ACCOUNT OF THE
GROWTH AND RECEPTION OF THE SERMON ON THE FAITH,
COMMONLY CALLED " THE CREED OF ST. ATHANASIUS.
BY C. A. SWAINSON, D.D.,
Canon of Chichester and Norrisian Professor of Divinity at Cambridge.
Svo.

MR, MURRAY'S LIST OF FORTHCOMING WORKS.

Handbook of Painting. — The Italian
Schools.
BASED ON THE HANDBOOK OF KUGLER.
Originally edited by the late Sir CHARLES L. EASTLAKE, R.A.
Fourth Edition. Revised and Remodelled from the mosi recent Researches,
BY LADY EASTLAKE.
With numerous Illustrations. 2 vols. Crown 8vo.

The Book of Marco Polo, the Venetian.
CONCERNING THE KINGDOMS AND MARVELS OF THE EAST.
A new English Version. Illustrated by the Light of Oriental Writers and Modern Travels.
BY COLONEL HENRY YULE, OB.
Late Royal Engineers (Bengal).
Second Edition, revised. "With Maps and Illustrations. 2 vols. Medium 8vo.

Lectures on
The Early History of Institutions.
A SUPPLEMENT TO THE TREATISE ON ANCIENT LAW.
BY SIR H. SUMNER MAINE.
8vo.
The Descent of Man, and on Selection in
Relation to Sex.
BY CHARLES DARWIN, M.A., F.R.S.
A new and Revised Edition. With Illustrations. One Volume. Crown 8vo.

Outlines of
Austin's Lectures on Jurisprudence.
COMPILED FOR THE USE OF STUDENTS;
BY ROBERT CAMPBELL,
of Lincoln's Inn, Barrister-at-Law,
Post Svo.

4 MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF FORTHCOMING WORKS.
An Historical Atlas of Ancient Geography,
Biblical and Classical.
Compiled under the superintendence of
DR. WM. SMITH AND MR. GEORGE GROVE.
The Fifth and Concluding Part containing
Britannia. India.

Germania, Riijetia, Noeicum.
Thracia, Mjesia, Illyria, Pannonia,
Dacia.
Italy, Historical Maps, — Sardinia,
and Corsica.
Arabia.

Environs of Jerusalem.
Plans of Nineveh, Babylon, Alexandria,
Byzantium, eke.
Plan of Antient Rome.
Environs of Rome.

And a Memoir of the Sources and Authorities for the Mats.
Folio.

THE POETICAL WORKS OF
Richard Monckton Milnes (Lord
Houghton).
2 vols. Fcap. 8vo.

The Gnostic Heresies of the First and
Second Centuries.
A Series of Lectures delivered before the University of Oxford.
BY THE LATE H. L. MANSEL, D.D.,
Sometime Professor of Ecclesiastical History at Oxford, and Dean of St. Paul's.
PRECEDED BY A BRIEF SKETCH OF HIS LIFE, WORK, AND CHARACTER.
8vo.

The Poetical Works of Alexander Pope.
VOLUME III.
Containing THE SATIRES, &c &c
EDITED BY REV. WHITWELL ELWIN.
8vo.

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF FORTHCOMING WORKS.

Hume's History of England to the
Revolution of 1688.
A NEW LIBPiARY EDITION. Annotated and Revised. 7 vols. 8vo.

Lives of the Engineers.
BY SAMUEL SMILES.
A new and Revised Edition. With Steel Portraits and numerous Illustrations.
6 vols. Crown Svo.

A Concise Dictionary of the English
Language.
FOR PliACTICAL REFERENCE METHODICALLY ARRANGED, AND BASED
UPON THE BEST PHILOLOGIC AUTHORITIES.
One Volume. Medium 8vo.
V Ai-so, *- STUDENT'S AND SCHOOL-ROOM ENGLISH DICTIONARY.
12mo.

Modern Geography for Schools.
EDITED BY WM. SMITH, D.C.L.
12mo.

Hortensius ;
AN HISTORICAL ESSAY ON THE OFFICE AND DUTIES OF AN ADVOCATE.
BY WILLIAM FORSYTH, Q.C., LL.D., M.P..
Late Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge.
Second Edition, Revised. With Illustrations. 8vo.

A Popular Dictionary of Inventions,
Origins, and Discoveries.

Svo.

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF FORTHCOMING WORKS.
Principles of Greek Etymology.
BY PROFESSOR GEORGE CURTIUS, OF LEIPZIG.
Translated from the German
BY A. S. WILKINS, M.A., AND E. B. ENGLAND, B.A.,
Trofcssors at Owens College, Manchester.
8vo.

Sketches and Studies ; Historical and
Descriptive.
BY RICHARD J. KING, B.A.,
Author of " Handbooks to the Cathedrals of England and Wales."
8vo.

A Dictionary of British History.
One Volume, Medium 8vo.

-o-

Boswell's Life of Johnson.
EDITED BY THE RIGHT HON. J. W. CROKER.
With Notes by Lord Stowell, Sir Walter Scott, Sir James Mackintosh,
Disraeli, Markland, Lockhart, &c.
A new and revised Library Edition.
BY ALEXANDER NAPIER, M.A.,
Editor of " Isaac Barrow's Works."
With Portraits. 4 vols. 8vo.

Maetzner's English Grammar.
A methodical, analytical, and historical treatise on the orthography,
PROSODY, INFLECTIONS, AND SYNTAX OF THE ENGLISH TONGUE.
TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN
BY CLAIR J. GRECE, LL. B.,
Member of the Philological Society.
3 vols. 8vo.

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF FORTHCOMING WORKS. 7
Practical Metallurgy ;
BY JOHN PERCY, M.D., F.R.S.,
Lecturer on Metallurgy at the Government School of Mines.
New and enlarged Edition.
VOL. L, Part 1.— INTRODUCTION— FUEL, WOOD, PEAT, COAL, CHARCOAL,
COKE, REFRACTORY MATERIALS, FIRECLAYS, &c.
VOL. I., Part 2.— COPPER, ZINC, BRASS.
With Illustrations. 8vo.

England and Russia in the East.
A SERIES OF PAPERS ON THE POLITICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL
CONDITION OF CENTRAL ASIA.
BY MAJOR-GEN. SIR HENRY RAWLINSON, K.C.B., F.R.S.,
Member of the Council of India.
With Map. 8vo.

Murray's European Handbook.
DE FOR TRAVELLERS TO THE C
PORTANT PLACES ON THE CO!
With Map. One Volume. Post 8vo.

A CONDENSED GUIDE FOR TRAVELLERS TO THE CHIEF ROUTES AND
A ^^^^poRTANT PLACES ON THE CONTINENT.

Dictionary of Christian Antiquities.
Comprising the History, Institutions, Archjeolooy, Geography, and Biography
of the Christian Church, from the Time of the Apostles
to the Age of Charlemagne.
By Various Writers.
EDITED BY DR. WM. SMITH, AND REV. S. CHEETHAM.
Medium Svo.
Uniform with " Dr. Wm. Smith's Dictionary of the Bible."

A Mediseval Latin Dictionary.
Based on the Work of DUCANGE.
Translated into English and Edited, with m»y Additions and Corrections,
BY E A. DAYMAN, B.D.,
Prebendary of Sarum, formerly Fellow and Tutor of Exeter College, Oxford.
Small 4to.
* * A Specimen Sheet may he obtained from any Bookseller.

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF FORTHCOMING WORKS.
History of the Christian Church.
FROM THE APOSTOLIC AGE TO THE REFORMATION, 1517.
BY JAMES C. ROBERTSON,
Canon of Canterbury.
New Edition. Vol. IV. To be completed in 8 Vols. Post Svo.

Dictionary of Christian Biography and
Doctrines.
FROM THE TIMES OF THE APOSTLES TO THE- AGE OF CHARLEMAGNE.
EDITED BY WILLIAM SMITH, D.C.L., LL.D.
Medium 8vo.

Student's Manual of Ecclesiastical History.
BY PHILIP SMITH, B.A.,
Author of "The Student's Old and New Testament Histories."
Post 8vo.

EDUCATIONAL WORKS.

The French Principia, Part II.
A READING BOOK, WITH NOTES, AND A DICTIONARY ON THE
PLAN OF "SMITH'S PRINCIPIA LATINA."
12mo.

The French Principia, Part III.
AN INTRODUCTION TO FRENCH PROSE COMPOSITION,
Containing a Systematic Course of Exercises on the Syntax, with the
Principal Rules of Syntax.
12mo.

The German Principia, Part I.
Uniform with the " French Principia " and " Principia Latina." 12mo.

Albemarle Street,
July, 1874.

MR. MURRAY'S
LIST OF NEW WORKS.

The Origin and History of the First or
Grenadier Regiment of Foot Guards.
;From Original Documents in the State Paper Office, Rolls' Records, War Office, Horse
Guards, Contemporary Histories, and Regimental Records.
By LIEUT.-GEN. SIR FREDERICK W. HAMILTON, K.C.B.,
Late Grenadier Guards.
With Illustrations. 3 vols. Svo. 63s.
" The industry of the author, in what has been an assiduous task for many years, has been
extraordinary ; and his diligent examination of our own archives, and even those of foreign
countries, has enabled him to put together a narrative rich in most curious details, and
singularly complete and, for the most part, accurate. Occasionally, too, he shows powers
beyond those of the most studious compiler ; and some of Ms estimates of military events give
proof of no ordinary reading and insight. On the whole, if this book does not conform to a
high ideal in all particulars, it is not the less an admirable specimen of facts collected with
exemplary care and of thorough, earnest, and fruitful research." — The Times.

School Architecture.
BEING PRACTICAL INFORMATION on the PLANNING, DESIGNING.
BUILDING, AND FURNISHING OF SCHOOLHOUSES.
Bt E. R. ROBSON,
Fellow of the Eoyal Institute of British Architects, and Architect to the School Board ror London.
With 300 Illustrations. Medium 8vo. 3U ed.

10 MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW WORKS.
Reminiscences of Forty Years' Service in
India,
Including Disasters and Captivities in Cabul, Affghanistan, and the Punjaub.
Also a Narrative of Mutinies in Rajputana.
By LIEUT.-GEN. SIR GEORGE LAWRENCE, K.C.S.I., C.B.
edited
By W. EDWARDS, H.M.B.C.S. (Retired.)
Author of " Personal Adventures in the Indian Rebellion " and "Eeminiscenccs of a Bengal Civilian."
Crown Svo. 10s. Sd.

The National Memorial to
the Prince Consort at Kensington.
Illustrated by 24 Engravings in Line, Mezzotint, Colours, and Wood, of the Monu
ment, its Architecture, Decorations; Sculptured Groups, Statues, Mosaics, Metal- work,
&c, designed and executed by the most eminent British artists. With Descriptive Text.
By DOYNE C. BELL.
Folio. £12 12s., or Special Copies £18 18s.

Essays

Contributed to the "Quarterly Review."
Br the late SAMUEL WILBERFORCE, D.D,
Bishop of Winchester.

Contents.
The Naturalist in Sussex and on the Spey.
Darwin's Origin of Species.
Essays and Reviews.
The Hawaiian Islands.
Aids to Faith.
The Church of England and her Bishops.
Dr. Newman's Apologia.

Clerical Subscription.
The Gallican Church.
Royal Authorship.
The Church and her Curates.
Keble's Biography.
Archbishops of the Reformation.
East African Slave Trade.

2 vols. 8vo. 21s.

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW WORKS. 11

Romano Lavo-Lil ;

WORD-BOOK OF THE ROMANY, OR ENGLISH GYPSY LANGUAGE ;
"With many pieces in Gypsy illustrative of the way of speaking and thinking of the
English Gypsies ; also Specimens of their Poetry, and an Account of certain
Gypsyries, or places inhabited by them, &c.
By GEORGE BORROW,
Author of " The Gypsies of Spain," " The Bible in Spain," &e.
Post 8vo. 10s. 6d.

Lectures on the Geography of Greece.
By H. F. TOZER, M.A., F.R.G.S.,
Exeter Coll., Oxford ; Author of " Eesearches in the Highlands of Turkey."
Post 8vo. 9s.

New Japan; the Land of the Rising Sun.
Its Annals during the past Twenty Years ; recording the Remarkable
Progress of the Japanese in Western Civilization.
By SAMUEL MOSSMAN,
Author of " China ; its History, Inhabitants, Sic."
Map. 8vo. 15s.

The Literary Remains of the late
Emanuel Deutsch.

WITH A BRIEF MEMOIR.

The Talmud.
Islam.Egypt, Ancient and Modern.
Hermes Trismegistus.
Judeo-Arabic Metaphysics.
Renan's " Les Ap6tres. '
The Oecumenical Council.
Apostolice Sedis.

Contents :
Roman Passion Drama.
Semitic Paleography, Culture, and
Languages.
Samaritan Pentateuch.
The Targums.
Book of Jasher.
Arabic Poetry.
8vo. 12s.

12 MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW WORKS.
Proverbs; or. Words of Human Wisdom.
Collected and Arranged by E. S.
With a Preface by CANON LIDDON, D.D.,
Fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d.

The Bengal Famine.

HOW IT HAS BEEN MET, AND HOW TO PREVENT FUTURE FAMINES
IN INDIA.
By SIR BARTLE FRERE, G.C.S.I., K.C.B., D.C.L.,
Member of the Indian Council.
With Maps. Crown Svo. 5s.

The Administration of Justice under Military
and Martial Law,
AS APPLICABLE TO THE ARMY, NAVY, MARINE, AND
AUXILIARY FORCES.
By CHARLES M. CLODE,
Of the Inner Temple, Barrister-at-Law, and Solicitor to the " War Department."
Second Eilition, 8vo, 12s.

Gothic Architecture of Italy— Chiefly in
Brick and Marble.
By GEORGE EDMUND STREET, R.A.
Including Notices of Aquileia, Udine, Vicenza, Ferrara, Bologna,
Modena, and Vercelli.
Second Edition, enlarged. With 130 Illustrations.
Royal 8vo. 26s.
Uniform with Street's " Gothic Architecture of Spain."

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW WORKS. 13

A Brief Memoir of
The Princess Charlotte of Wales.
WITH SELECTIONS FROM HER CORRESPONDENCE AND OTHER
UNPUBLISHED PAPERS.
By THE LADY ROSE WEIGALL.
New Edition. An Original Portrait by Stewart. Post Svo. Ss. 6d.

Lives of the Chief Justices of England.
From the Norman Conquest to the Death of Lord Tenterden.
By LORD CAMPBELL, LL.D.
Third and Popular Edition. 4 vols. Crown 8vo. Cs. each.

Memoir of Wm. Ellis, Missionary
IN THE SOUTH SEAS AND IN MADAGASCAR.
By HIS SON.
Portrait. Svo. 10s. 6d.

History of the Modern Styles of Architecture.
By JAMES FERGUSSON, D.C.L., F.R.S.,
Fellow of the Royal Institute of British Architects.
Second Edition. With. 330 Illustrations. Medium 8vo. 31s. Gd.

Eastern Africa,
AS A FIELD FOR MISSIONARY LABOUR.
By THE RIGHT HON. SIR BARTLE FRERE, G.C.S.L, K.C.B., D.C.L.

Member of the Indian Council.
Map. Crown Svo. 5s.

14 MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW WORKS.
Results of Christian Missions in India.
By SIR BARTLE FRERE, G.C.S.L, K.C.B., D.C.L.,
Member of the Council of India.
Third Edition. Post 8vo. 2s. 6d.

Perils of the Polar Seas.
STORIES OF ARCTIC ADVENTURE TOLD BY A MOTHER TO HER
CHILDREN.
By MRS. CHISHOLM,
Author of " Rana ; or, Stories of a Frog,'' ko.
20 Illustrations. Small 8vo. 6s.

Signs and Wonders in the Land of Ham.
A Description of the Ten Plagues of Egypt, with Ancient
and Modern Parallels and Illustrations.
By Rev. THOMAS S. MILLINGTON,
Vicar of "Woodhouse Eaves, Loughborough.
Woodcuts. Post 8 to. 7s. 6d.

A Small Country House.
A BRIEF PRACTICAL DISCOUESE ON THE PLANNING OF A RESIDENCE
TO COST FROM £2000 TO £5000.
With Supplementary Estimates to £7000.
By ROBERT KERR, ARCHITECT,
Author of " The English Gentleman's House."
12mo. 35.

The Naturalist in Nicaragua.
A NARRATIVE OF A RESIDENCE AT THE GOLD MINES OF CHONTALES;
AND OF JOURNEYS IN THE SAVANNAHS AND FORESTS ;
With Observations on Animals and Plants.
By THOMAS BELT, F.G.S.
With Illustrations. Post 8vo. 12s.

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW WORKS. 1&
PEEK'S PRIZE ESSAYS ON
The Maintenance of the Church of England
as an Established Church.
By Rey. CHARLES HOLE, B.A.— Rev. R. W. DIXON, M.A.— and
Rev. JULIUS LLOYD, M.A.
8vo. 10s. &d.

Life and Death of John of Bar neve Id,
Advocate of Holland.
INCLUDING THE HISTORY OF THE PRIMARY CAUSES AND
MOVEMENTS OF "THE THIRTY YEARS' WAR."
By JOHN LOTHROP MOTLEY, D.C.L.,
Author of the " Rise of the Dutch Bepublic," &c.
With Illustrations. 2 vols. 28s.

History of the Royal Artillery.
COMPILED FROM THE ORIGINAL RECORDS.
By MAJOR FRANCIS DUNCAN, R.A.,
Superintendent of the Regimental Records.
Second Edition. With Portraits. 2 vols. 8vo. 30s.
' A few Copies of Vol. II. to complete sets may be had separately.

Letters, Lectures, and Reviews.
Including the PHRONTISTERION, or OXFORD in the 19th CENTURY.
By H. L. MANSEL, D.D.,
Late Dean of St. Paul's, and Author of " The Limits of Religious Thought Examined."
Edited by HENRY AV. CHANDLER, M.A.,
Pembroke College, Oxford.
Svo. 12s.

The Mosel.
A SERIES OF TWENTY ETCHINGS, WITH DESCRIPTIVE LETTERPRESS.
By ERNEST GEORGE, Architect.
Small folio. 42.".

3 6 MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW WORKS.

EDUCATIONAL WORKS.

A Child's First Latin Book.
INCLUDING A FULL PRAXIS OF NOUNS, ADJECTIVES,
AND PRONOUNS.
By THEOPHILUS D. HALL, M.A.,
16mo. Is. 6d.

The French Principia. Part I.
A FIRST FRENCH COURSE, CONTAINING GRAMMAR, DELECTUS,
EXERCISE BOOK AND VOCABULARIES.
On the same plan as Dr. Wm. Smith's Principia Latina.
12ino, 3s. 6d

A Primary History of Britain, for Elementary
Schools.
Edited by WM. SMITH, D.C.L.
12mo. 2s. 6d.
" This book is an honest attempt to exhibit the leading fucts and events of our history, free
from political and sectarian bias, and will, it is hoped, be found suitable for schools in which
¦children of various denominations ai-e taught." — Preface.

A School Manual of English Grammar.
WITH COPIOUS EXERCISES.
By WM. SMITH, D.C.L., and T. D. HALL, M.A.
Post Svo, 3s. 6d.
This work includes Etymology, Syntax, Prosody, and Analysis, illustrated from the best
English Authors. It has been prepared with a special view to the Oxford and Cambridge Local
Examinations, and contains a copious series of Questions and Exercises.

A Primary English Grammar for Elementary
Schools.

WITH EXERCISES AND QUESTIONS.
By T. D. HALL, M.A.
16mo. Is.

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW WORKS. 17

The Geological Evidences of the Antiquity
of Man.
INCLUDING AN OUTLINE OF GLACIAL POST-TERTIARY GEOLOOY,
AND REMARKS ON THE ORIGIN OF SPECIES,
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO MAN'S FIRST APPEARANCE ON THE EARTH.
By SIR CHARLES LYELL, F.R.S.
Fourth Edition. Illustrations. 8vo. 14s.

The -Student's Elements of Geology.
By SIR CHARLES LYELL, F.R.S.
New Edition. With a Table of British Fossils and 600 Illustrations.
Post Svo. 9s.

Horse-Shoeing ;
AS IT IS, AND AS IT SHOULD BE.
By WILLIAM DOUGLAS,
Late of 10th Hussars.
With. Coloured Plates and Woodcuts. Tost 8vo. 7s. 6d.

Notes of Thought.
By the late CHARLES BUXTON, M.P.
Preceded by a Biographical Sketch. By REV. LLEWELYN DAVIES, M.A..
Portrait. Crown Svo. 10s. 6d.

Personal Recollections, from Early Life
Old Age.
By MARY SOMERVILLE.
WITH SELECTIONS FROM HER CORRESPONDENCE.
Edited ey her Daughter.
Fourth Thousand. Portrait. Crown 8vo. 12s.

3 MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW WORKS.
History of the Christian Church.
From the Apostolic Times to the Reformation, 1517.
By J. CRAIGIE ROBERTSON, M.A.,
Canon of Canterbury, Professor of Ecclesiastical History, King's Coll., London.
New Edition. Vols. I. to III. (To be completed in 8 vols.) Post 8vo. 6s. each.

The Naturalist on the River Amazons.
WITH SKETCHES OF BRAZILIAN LIFE, DURING ELEVEN YEARS
OF TRAVEL.
By H. W. BATES, F.R.G.S.
Third Edition, with Illustrations. Post 8vo. 7s. 6d.

Monographs Personal and Social.
By LORD HOUGHTON.
Second Edition. Portraits. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d.

The Land of Moab.
TRAVELS AND DISCOVERIES ON THE EAST SIDE OF THE DEAD SEA
AND THE JORDAN.
By H. B. TRISTRAM, M.A., LL.D, F.R.S.,
Canon of Durham, and Author of " The Land of Israel," " Natural History of the Bible."
Second Thousand. With Map and Plates. Post Svo. 15s.

The History of Ancient Pottery.
EGYPTIAN, ASSYRIAN, GREEK, ETRUSCAN, AND ROMAN.
By SAMUEL BIRCH, LL.D., F.S.A.
Second Edition. With coloured Plates and 200 Woodcuts.
— Medium 8vo. 42s.
Uniform with " Marryat's Modern Pottery.''

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW WORKS.

19

Dr. Wm. Smith's Ancient Atlas,
BIBLICAL AND CLASSICAL.
TARTS I. to IV.

Contents :

The Holy Land (Northern Division).
Historical Maps of the Holy Land.
Greek and Phoenician Colonies.
Gallia.
Italia Superior.
Italia Inferior.
Greece after the Doric Migration.
Greece at the time of the Persian Wars.
Jerusalem, (Ancient and Modern).
Shores of the Mediterranean. St. Paul's
Travels. To illustrate Keio Testament.
Peloponnesus. With Plan of Sparta.
Shores and Islands of the iEgean Sea.
Greece at the time of the Pelopoimesian
War.
Greece at the time of the Achseau League.
Empires of the Babylonians, Lydians, Medes
and Persians.
Empire of Alexander the Great.
The World as known to the Ancients.
Hispania.

Northern Greece — Hellas, Epirus, Thes-
salia, Macedonia.
Central Greece — Attica, Bceotia, Locris,
Phocis, Doris, Malis. Plans of Athens.
Historical Maps of Asia Minor.
The Holy Land (Southern Division).
Map of Asia. To illustrate the Old Testa
ment and Classical Autlwrs.
Sinai. Asia Minor.
Northern Africa — Carthage, &c.
Geographical Systems of the Ancients.
Kingdoms of the Successors of Alexander
the Great. Part I.
Kingdoms of the Successors of Alexander
the Great. Part II.
The Roman Empire, in its greatest extent.
The Roman Empire, after its division into
the Eastern and Western Empires.
Egypt.

Folio. 21s. each.
Part V. will complete the Work.

The Harvest of the Sea.
A HISTORY OF BRITISH FOOD FISHES, INCLUDING SKETCHES
OF FISHERIES AND FISHER FOLK.

By JAMES G. BERTRAM.
Third Edition. With 50 Illustrations. Post Svo.

9s.

Records of the Rocks;
A SERIES OF NOTES ON
THE GEOLOGY, NATURAL HISTORY, AND ANTIQUITIES OF NORTH
AND' SOUTH WALES, DEVON, AND CORNWALL.
By REV/W. S. SYMONDS, F.G.S.
With numerous Illustrations. Crown Svo. 12s.

MR. MURRAY'S LIST OF NEW TfORKS.
The Personal Life of George Grote.
HISTORIAN OF GREECE.
Compiled from Family Documents, Private Memoranda, and Original
Letters to and from Various Friends.
By MRS. GROTE.
Second Edition. Portrait. 8vo. 12s.

The Minor Works of George Grote.
WITH CRITICAL REMARKS ON HIS INTELLECTUAL CHARACTER,
WRITINGS, AND SPEECHES.
By ALEXANDER BAIN, LL.D.
"With Portrait. Svo. 14s.

The Expression of the Emotions in Man
and Animals.
By CHARLES DARWIN, F.R.S.
Eighth Thousand. With Illustrations. Crown 8vo. 12s.
Ce livre est, sinon le plus remarquable des grands travaux de M. Darwin, celui qui aura ccr-
tainement le plus de lectcurs, car, abstraction faite du point de depart qui est ce que Fhomnie,
comme toutes les autres especes, est descendu d'une forme preexistante, le sujet dont il traite
ne soulere aucune question irritante et est accessible a peu pies a tout le monde. — Le
Memorial Diplomatique.

The Moon:
CONSIDERED AS A PLANET, A WORLD, AND A SATELLITE.
By JAMES NASMYTH, C.E., and JAMES CARPENTER, F.R.A.S.,
Late of the Royal Observatory, Greenwich.
The 24 Illustrations, of Lunar Objects. Phenomena, and Scenery, have been produced from
Drawings made with the aid of powerful Telescopes.
Numerous Woodcuts. 4to. 30s.

BKADBURY, AONEW, & CO., riUNTEEB, WU1TEPP.IAR3.

3 9002 02225 0295